GM Golden Rice in the Philippines Stopped: The Deception of Development and the Politics of Progress

by Colin Todhunter, Asia-Pacific Research
April 29, 2024

On 19 April 2024, the Philippines Supreme Court issued a cease-and-desist order on the commercial propagation of genetically modified (GM) Golden Rice and GM eggplant in the country.

The Stop Golden Rice Network says that the court decision is a victory for farmers and consumers everywhere as the decision goes beyond Golden Rice and insecticidal eggplant and covers “any application for contained use, field testing, direct use as food or feed or processing, commercial propagation, and importation of GMOs.”

The court recognised that government agencies and other proponents of GM Golden Rice and GM eggplant “failed to submit proof of safety and compliance with all legal requirements.” The order remains indefinite until GMO proponents can fulfil all the mandated steps and provide concrete evidence that these GMOs are indeed safe.

A network of farmers, consumers and civil society organisations, Stop Golden Rice emphasises the need to address hunger and malnutrition through securing small farmers’ control over resources such as seed, appropriate technologies, water and land.

The campaign group says:

“We believe that GM crops are primarily pushed by global monopoly capitalists in food and agriculture… there is already irrevocable evidence of the failure of GM crops and how it has contributed to further indebtedness, crop failures, hunger and loss of biodiversity.”

It states that the court’s decision shows that ordinary people can prevail in the face of corporate power.

The Story of Golden Rice

Vitamin A deficiency is a problem in many poor countries in the Global South and leaves millions at high risk of infection, diseases and other maladies, such as blindness.

The agritech industry has long argued that Golden Rice is a practical way to provide poor farmers in remote areas with a subsistence crop capable of adding much-needed vitamin A to local diets. Lobbyists say that Golden Rice, developed with funding from the Rockefeller Foundation, could help save the lives of around 670,000 children who die each year from Vitamin A deficiency and another 350,000 who go blind.

Such claims, however, are based more on spin than reality, and, over the years, the interests behind Golden Rice have wasted no time in attacking anyone who questioned it.

As Britain’s Environment Secretary in 2013, the now disgraced Owen Paterson claimed that opponents of GM were “casting a dark shadow over attempts to feed the world”. He called for the rapid roll-out of vitamin A-enhanced rice to help prevent the cause of up to a third of the world’s child deaths. He claimed:

“It’s just disgusting that little children are allowed to go blind and die because of a hang-up by a small number of people about this technology. I feel really strongly about it. I think what they do is absolutely wicked.”

On Twitter, The Observer’s Nick Cohen chimed in with his support by tweeting:

“There is no greater example of ignorant Western privilege causing needless misery than the campaign against genetically modified golden rice.”

The rhetoric took the well-worn cynically devised PR line that anti-GM activists and environmentalists are little more than privileged, affluent people residing in rich countries and are denying the poor the supposed benefits of GM crops.

Despite these smears and emotional blackmail, in a 2016 article in the journal Agriculture & Human Values Glenn Stone and Dominic Glover found little evidence that activists were to blame for Golden Rice’s unfulfilled promises.

Researchers still had problems developing beta carotene-enriched strains that yield as well as non-GM strains already being grown by farmers. It was questionable whether the beta carotene in Golden Rice could even be converted to vitamin A in the bodies of badly undernourished children. There had also been little research on how well the beta carotene in Golden Rice would hold up when stored for long periods between harvest seasons or when cooked using traditional methods common in remote rural locations.

In the meantime, Glenn Stone noted that that, as the development of Golden Rice crept along, the Philippines had managed to slash the incidence of Vitamin A deficiency by non-GM methods.

So, whose interests were really being served in the push for Golden Rice?

In 2011, Marcia Ishii-Eiteman, a senior scientist with a background in insect ecology and pest management, answered this question:

“An elite, so-called Humanitarian Board where Syngenta sits – along with the inventors of Golden Rice, Rockefeller Foundation, USAID and public relations and marketing experts, among a handful of others. Not a single farmer, indigenous person or even an ecologist or sociologist to assess the huge political, social and ecological implications of this massive experiment. And the leader of IRRI’s Golden Rice project is none other than Gerald Barry, previously Director of Research at Monsanto.”

Sarojeni V Rengam, executive director of Pesticide Action Network Asia and the Pacific, called on the donors and scientists involved to wake up and do the right thing:

“Golden Rice is really a ‘Trojan horse’; a public relations stunt pulled by the agribusiness corporations to garner acceptance of genetically engineered (GE) crops and food… money and efforts would be better spent on restoring natural and agricultural biodiversity rather than destroying it by promoting monoculture plantations and GE food crops.”

To tackle disease, malnutrition and poverty, you have to first understand the underlying causes – or indeed want to understand them.

Renowned academic Walden Bello notes that the complex of policies that pushed the Philippines into an economic quagmire over the past few decades is due to ‘structural adjustment’ that included the restructuring of agriculture and export-oriented production.

And that restructuring of the agrarian economy is something touched on by Claire Robinson of GMWatch who notes that leafy green vegetables used to be grown in backyards as well as in rice (paddy) fields on the banks between the flooded ditches in which the rice grew.

Ditches also contained fish, which ate pests. People thus had access to rice, green leafy veg and fish – a balanced diet that gave them a healthy mix of nutrients, including plenty of beta-carotene.

But indigenous crops and farming systems have been replaced by monocultures dependent on chemical inputs. Green leafy veg were killed off with pesticides, artificial fertilisers were introduced, and the fish could not live in the resulting chemically contaminated water. Moreover, decreased access to land meant that many people no longer had backyards containing leafy green veg.

Blindness in developing countries could have been eradicated years ago if only the money, research and publicity put into Golden Rice over the last 20 years had gone into proven ways of addressing Vitamin A deficiency. However, instead of pursuing genuine solutions, what we have seen is pro-GM spin in an attempt to close down debate.

Technology and Development

If the discussion so far tells us anything, it is that technology is not neutral. It is developed and promoted by people who want to cement their control over a sector and stand to financially gain from its rollout.

All too often, politicians, corporations and the media equate new technology with ‘progress’. And those who question it, as we see with GMOs, are called Luddites or anti-science in order to prevent proper debate over the social, economic and ethical concerns of rolling out a given technology.

Take the Green Revolution, for instance. There was nothing progressive, inevitable or neutral about its seed, chemical and related infrastructure technology.

Despite it being rolled out under the banner of ‘progress’, it underperformed, was exploitative and has had devastating social, ecological and environmental impacts (see the writings of Prof. Glenn Stone, Vandana Shiva and Bhaskar Save). It served US geopolitical, financial and agribusiness interests and prioritised urban-industrial expansion at the expense of rural communities and a more diverse, healthy and nutrient-sufficient agriculture.

But the Green Revolution became integral to the ‘development’ agenda.

In a recent article on the Winter Oak website, Paul Cudenec says that ‘development’:

“… is the destruction of nature, now seen as a mere resource to be used for development or as an empty undeveloped space in which development could, should and, ultimately, must take place. It is the destruction of natural human communities, whose self-sufficiency gets in the way of the advance of development, and of authentic human culture and traditional values, which are incompatible with the dogma and domination of development.”

Cudenec argues that those behind ‘development’ have been destroying everything of real value in our natural world and our human societies in the pursuit of personal wealth and power. Moreover, they have concealed this crime behind all the positive-sounding rhetoric associated with development on every level.

Nowhere is this more apparent than in India.

The World Bank, the World Trade Organization, global agribusiness and financial capital are working to corporatise India’s agriculture sector. This ‘structural adjustment’ policy and process involves displacing the current food production system with contract farming and an industrial model of agriculture and food retail that serves the above interests.

The plan is to displace the peasantry, create a land market and amalgamate landholdings to form larger farms that are more suited to international land investors and export-oriented industrial farming.

The demand is that India sacrifice its farmers and its own food security for the benefit of a handful of billionaires. This is all passed off as ‘development’.

It involves the state facilitating the enrichment of a wealthy elite and privileging a certain model of social and economic development based on urban sprawl, centralised power and dependency on global finance, corporations, markets and supply chains. All legitimised under the banners of innovation, technological progress and ‘development’.

There are other pathways that humanity can take. Anthropologist Felix Padel and researcher Malvika Gupta offer some insights (based on their work with India’s Adivasi communities) into what the solutions or alternatives to ‘development’ might look like:

“Democracy as consensus politics rather than the Western model of liberal democracy that perpetuates division and corruption behind the scenes; exchange labour rather than the ruthless, anti-life logic of ‘the market’; law as reconciliation rather than judgements that depend on exorbitant legal fees and divide people into winners and losers… and learning as something to be shared, not competed over.”

However, we see more ‘development’ being proposed: more rural population displacement and human dislocation, more mining, port and other big infrastructure developments and the further entrenchment of corporate interests and their projects.

While many have a different vision for the future, self-interest and consumerism underpinned by economic neoliberal dogma continue to seduce the masses into accepting the prevailing ‘development’ agenda.

Corporate industrial agriculture is integral to that agenda. A model that took hold half a century ago in the Western nations and which has resulted in nutrient-deficient food, narrower diets, the massive use of agrochemicals, food contaminated by hormones, steroids, antibiotics and a wide range of chemical additives, the eradication of many smallholder farmers, spiralling rates of ill health, degraded soil and contaminated and depleted water supplies.

That’s ‘progress’? Well, agribusiness interests aside, perhaps so for the many private health clinics that have sprung up in India in recent years.

The introduction of GMOs represents a further entrenchment of the prevailing ‘development’ agenda.

The decision by the Philippines Supreme Court called out government agencies and those behind the Golden Rice agenda for key failures. This is important for India, whose Supreme Court is about to decide on whether to sanction the commercial cultivation of GM mustard. It would be India’s first GM food crop (of which there are many more in the pipeline).

Will India’s Supreme Court come down on the side of reason and stop GM mustard on the basis of there being no need for GMOs in Indian agriculture and the well-documented fraud and regulatory delinquency that has surrounded this issue for many years?

That remains to be seen.

Many of the issues presented above are discussed in the author’s free e-book Food, Dispossession and Dependency. Resisting the New World Order.

Renowned author Colin Todhunter specialises in development, food and agriculture. He is a Research Associate of the Centre for Research on Globalization (CRG).

Connect with Colin Todhunter

Cover image credit: consolesafari

Catherine Austin Fitts With Greg Hunter: Insane vs Sane, Demonic vs Divine

by Greg Hunter, USA Watchdog
April 27, 2024

Catherine Austin Fitts (CAF), Publisher of The Solari Report, financial expert and former Assistant Secretary of Housing (Bush 41 Admin.), has long said, “The federal government is being run as a criminal enterprise. . . .not just a little criminal, but a lot criminal.” Now, CAF contends what is going on in America is much more than greedy criminals. CAF says, “This has turned into warfare against “We the People” on a spiritual level.”

CAF goes on to point out, “There is so much effort in persuading people to think there is nothing you can do, and it’s hopeless. Let me tell you something . . . the central bankers are telling you what they are going to do, and this is not far away in the future. You have all these merchant codes where you cannot use your credit card to buy a gun or the bank throws you out. That’s the control grid getting built.”

What can you do to fight for freedom? CAF says, “Bring transparency, and the second thing is to use cash. If we can all use cash, build cash back up and keep checks going, if you have cash and checks, they cannot go to an all-digital financial system. Find out who is leading the way in your state, and see what you can do to support them. Above anything, you can pray because this is a spiritual war. The devil wants you to believe it’s hopeless and there is nothing you can do. . . . It’s not true. The sane cannot go along with the insane. The divine cannot go along with the demonic. You have to say NO! I am seeing this all over the country. I am seeing Treasurers and State Attorney Generals, and they are all pushing back because they realize this is insane. You cannot go along with this.”

CAF says not only do the Deep State globalists want control of the financial system, but they also want control of your food. CAF says, “You see at this level when you are trying to protect freedom, they cannot get financial control unless they can control the food supply. People can always start their own currencies as long as they can grow food. If you look at the push for financial control and central bank digital currency, it is the same push. They are pushing to control the food supply.”

CAF thinks Washington is so broken, corrupt and criminal that whoever wins the Presidential Election it will not make much of a difference. CAF points out, “Look at how quickly Speaker Mike Johnson caved. Speaker Johnson caved for Ukraine and war all over the world, but he won’t protect our borders. Mike Johnson, Christian, conservative and not a dime to protect our borders. . . Washington is a criminal enterprise, and there is no electing someone big enough to change this. This is not Trump vs Biden. This is the pro-centralization team in Washington. We have to pull power back from Washington.”

There is much more in the 56-minute interview.

Connect with Greg Hunter

Connect with Catherine Austin Fitts

Cover image credit: geralt

GMO Bio-Imperialism

by Dr. Vandana Shiva, Navdanya International
April 26, 2024

Over the past few decades, GMO crops have been imposed in countries around the world, touted as a solution to food insecurity and malnutrition crises. However, hunger, disease and malnutrition have increased, while biodiversity has declined and toxins have spread. GMO imperialism has destroyed the lives and livelihoods of small farmers and biodiversity in the centers of origin. These centers of biodiversity origin are the cradles of the world’s food supply and protection against disease, climate challenges, natural disasters or other obstacles to food production.

In Mexico, which is the center of origin of corn, there has been a long struggle by society and organized communities against GMO imperialism which threatens the subsistence and culture of local peoples. It is following this mobilization that the Mexican society obtained a ban on planting genetically modified corn through a collective lawsuit brought against the companies Bayer-Monsanto, Syngenta and Corteva Agriscience. This ban is still in effect.

Recently, the Mexican government issued an executive order phasing out the use of glyphosate and banning the use of genetically modified corn in tortillas, a staple food. Faced with this decision, the US government, on the basis of the United States-Mexico-Canada Free Trade Agreement (USMCA), activated the dispute resolution mechanism with the aim of canceling the order and forcing the introduction of GMOs into the country.

The Mexican government as well as the non-governmental organizations from Mexico presented their Technical Opinions before this Panel, based on detailed scientific evidence, including new found evidence by Mexico’s scientific advisory board CONAHCYT, rooted in scientifically rigorous evidence from academic institutions. This evidence pointed out and warned about the multiple risks that make it pertinent and urgent to stop the presence of genetically manipulated maize in the food of the Mexican population, and as raw material for other industries.

From 12 to 16 March 2024, Navdanya International, together with Latin American partners and the Mexican Government, organized a series of events in Mexico City to build a common strategy against the imposition of new and old GMOs. The mobilization in Mexico City counted on the presence of representatives of Latin American movements such as Argentina, Colombia, Bolivia, Costa Rica and others, in collaboration with Mexican civil society organizations, the Ministry of Agriculture and Rural Development, the Ministry of Environment and Natural Resources and the Ministry of Culture. It was at the Ministry of Culture that the Garden of Milpa, the biodiverse traditional farming system of Mexico, was blessed at the Museum of Corn.

The case of Mexico represents the attempt of a people to protect their biodiverse cultures, their thousand-year-old food heritage, the health of their population and ecosystems. It is the case of a people who demand respect for their sovereignty and represents a beacon of hope for the places where this imposition continues. People have the right to have sovereignty over their health, and that starts with food sovereignty.

However, the GMO agenda has always been about patents and profits, not food and health. Food sovereignty is a high-level concept, because it implies the sovereignty of beings to manage and organize themselves and protect their right to health. This is why the goal of industrial agriculture has always been to push farmers off the land. It is inherent in the very definition of industrial agriculture. The sovereignty of people, farmers and nature has been violated by the imposition of agrotoxins, GMOs and ultra-processed foods, destroying diversity and ancient food cultures and threatening land, water and biodiversity.

Agribusiness and biotechnology giants are trying to circumvent existing biosafety regulations, such as the Cartagena and Nagoya Protocols of the Convention on Biological Diversity, by subtly making changes to GMO regulations, in order to promote GMOs under new acronyms, such as NBT (New Breeding Techniques), NGT (New Genomic Techniques) or TEA (Techniques of Assisted Evolution). These new GMOs have been silently inserted into the agricultural legislation in force in various countries, with the aim of maintaining patent monopolies in the hands of the chemical and biotechnology giants.

Today, our seed sovereignty is threatened by intellectual property rights and new GMO technologies that have transformed seeds from a common good into a commodity under the control and monopoly of multinational agri-food companies. Impositions continue to take place, violating the sovereignty and rights of people and nature, in furtherance of the corporate agenda. While multinationals get rich by stealing our biodiversity. Faced with this, building relationships, based on common struggle and the vision of an ecological future, contributes to creating international networks of resistance and solidarity. Together, as global citizens, we must unite to oppose the bullying of GMOs and defend our seeds.

Citizens are rising up against the unscientific, anti-democratic and anti-ecological imposition of GMOs by multinationals and the US government. The first generation of GMOs failed. But multinationals continue to impose genetically modified organisms, or new GMOs, in centers of diversity. They continue to shift the narrative towards framing nature and biodiversity as commodities to be commercialized and monopolized. In the wake of Mexico’s battle against the United States, it is necessary to support and strengthen international solidarity against the corporate imposition of industrial food systems.

Connect with Dr. Vandana Shiva

Cover image credit: Nguyen_Khac

From Bird Flu to Climate Snakes

by Breeauna Sagdal, Brownstone Institute
April 25, 2024

Seasoned veterinarians and livestock producers alike have been scratching their heads trying to understand the media’s response to the avian flu. Headlines across every major news outlet warn of humans becoming infected with the “deadly” bird flu after one reported case of pink-eye in a human.

The entire narrative is predicated upon a long-disputed claim that Covid-19 was the result of a zoonotic jump—the famed Wuhan bat wet-market theory.

While the source of Covid is hotly contested within the scientific community, the policy vehicle at the center of this dialectic began years prior to Sars-CoV-2 and is quite resolute in force and effect.

In 2016, the Gates Foundation donated to the World Health Organization to create the OneHealth Initiative. Since 2020, the CDC has adopted and implemented the OneHealth Initiative to build a “collaborative, multisectoral, and transdisciplinary approach—working at the local, regional, national, and global levels—with the goal of achieving optimal health outcomes recognizing the interconnection between people, animals, plants, and their shared environment.”

In the aftermath of Covid-19, the OneHealth Initiative began taking shape, due largely in part to millions of tax dollars appropriated through ARP (American Rescue Plan) funding.

Through its APHIS (Animal and Plant Health Investigation System) the USDA (United States Department of Agriculture) was given $300 million in 2021 to begin implementing “a risk-based, comprehensive, integrated disease monitoring and surveillance system domestically…to build additional capacity for zoonotic disease surveillance and prevention,” globally.

“The One Health concept recognizes that the health of people, animals, and the environment are all linked,” said USDA Under Secretary for Marketing and Regulatory Programs Jenny Lester Moffitt.

According to the USDA’s press release, the Biden-Harris administration’s OneHealth approach will also help to ensure “new markets and streams of income for farmers and producers using climate smart food and forestry practices,” by “making historic investments in infrastructure and clean energy capabilities in rural America.”

In other words, the federal government is using regulatory enforcement to intervene in the marketplace, in addition to subsidizing corporations with tax dollars to direct a planned economic outcome—ending meat consumption.

Climate-Smart Commodities – Planning the Economy through Subsidized Intervention

Under the recently announced Climate-Smart Commodities program, the USDA has appropriated $3.1 billion in tax subsidies to one hundred and forty-one new private Climate-Smart projects, ranging from carbon sequestration to Climate-Smart meat and forestry practices.

Private investors such as Amazon founder Jeff Bezos – who just committed $1 billion to the development of lab cultured meat-like molds, and meat grown in petri dishes, to

Ballpark, formerly known for its hot dogs but is now harvesting python meat, is rushing to cash in on this new industry, and the OneHealth/USDA certification program.

Culling The Herd – Regulatory Intervention in the Marketplace

Meanwhile, the last vestiges of America’s food freedom and decentralized food sources are quietly being targeted by the full force of the federal government.

The once voluntary APHIS System is poised to become the mandatory APHIS-15, which among many other changes, “the system will be renamed Animal Health, Disease, and Pest Surveillance and Management System, USDA/APHIS-15. This system is used by APHIS to collect, manage, and evaluate animal health data for disease and pest control and surveillance programs.”

Among those “many changes” that APHIS-15 is undergoing, one should be of particular interest to the public—the removal of all references to the voluntary* Bovine Johne’s Disease Control Program.

“Updating the authority for maintenance of the system to remove reference to the Bovine Johne’s Disease Control Program.”

In addition to removing references to the once-voluntary herd culling program, the USDA is also implementing mandatory RFID ear tags in cattle and bison.

According to the USDA/APHIS-15, expanded authority places disease tracing in their jurisdiction and the radio frequency ear tags are necessary for the “rapid and accurate recordkeeping for this volume of animals and movement,” which they say “is not achievable without electronic systems.”

The notice clearly spells out that RFID tags “may be read without restraint as the animal goes past an electronic reader.”

“Once the reader scans the tag, the electronically collected tag number can be rapidly and accurately transmitted from the reader to a connected electronic database.”

However, industry leaders and lawmakers alike have said the database will be used to track vaccination history and movement, and that this data may be used to impact the market rate of cattle and bison at the time of processing.

Centralized Control of Processing/Production via Public-Private Partnership Agreements

In addition to the vast new authority of the USDA funded through the OneHealth Initiative, and the ARP, the EPA has also created its own unique set of regulatory burdens upon the entire meat industry.

On March 25, 2024, the EPA finalized a new set of Clean Water Act rule changes to limit nitrogen and phosphorus “pollutants” in downstream water treatment facilities from processing facilities. While the EPA’s interpretation of authority and jurisdiction over wastewater is concerning long-term, the broader context of consolidated processing under four multinational meat-packing companies is of much greater concern for the immediate future.

With few exceptions, in the United States it is illegal to sell meat without a USDA certification. Currently, the only way to access USDA certification is through a USDA-certified processing facility.

According to the EPA, the new rules will impact up to 845 processing facilities nationwide, unless facilities drastically limit the amount of meat they process each year.

With processing capabilities being the number one barrier to market for livestock producers, and billions of dollars in grants being awarded to Climate-Smart food substitutes, the amount of government intervention into the marketplace becomes very clear.

The Rise of Authoritarianism and Economic Fascism – Control the Supply

The United States, once a consumer-demand free market society, is currently witnessing the use of government force, and intervention tactics to steer and manipulate the marketplace. Similar to 1930’s Italy, this is being achieved by the state within the state, through the use of selectionism, protectionism, and economic planning between public-private partnership agreements.

The long-term and unavoidable problem with economic fascism is that it leads to authoritarian and centralized control, from which escape is impossible.

As each industry becomes centralized and consolidated under the few, consumer choice simultaneously disappears. As choice disappears, so does the ability of the individual to meet their specific and unique needs.

Eventually, the individual no longer serves a role outside of its usefulness to the state—the final exhale before the last python squeeze.

Connect with Brownstone Institute

Cover image credit: susan-lu4esm

What Happened to Bitcoin?

by Jeffrey A. Tucker, Brownstone Institute
April 14, 2024

Those who involved themselves in Bitcoin markets after 2017 encountered a different operation and ideal than those who came before. Today, no one much cares about what came before, speaking of 2010-2016. They are only watching the upward price momentum and are thrilled for the increase in the asset valuation of their portfolio.

Gone is the talk of separating money and state, of a market-based means of exchange, of genuine revolution that would extend from money to the whole of politics the world over. And gone is the talk of changing the operation of money as a means of changing the prospects for freedom itself. The enthusiasts around Bitcoin have different goals in mind.

And during this entire period, the exact time when this digital asset might have protected multitudes of users and businesses from rapacious inflation growing out of the worst and most globalized experience of corporatist statism in modern history, made possible due to the money monopoly of central banks that funded the operation, the original asset that carries the symbol BTC was systematically diverted from its original purpose.

The ideal was nicely articulated by F.A. Hayek in 1974. Much of his career as an economist was spent arguing for sound monetary policies. At every important turning point, he faced the same problem: governments and the institutions they serve did not want sound money. They wanted to manipulate the currency system to benefit elites, not the public. Finally, he refined his argument. He concluded that the only real answer was a complete divorce of money and power.

“Nothing can be more welcome than depriving government of its power over money and so stopping the apparently irresistible trend towards an accelerating increase of the share of the national income it is able to claim,” he wrote in 1976 (two years after his Nobel Prize). “If allowed to continue, this trend would in a few years bring us to a state in which governments would claim 100 per cent of all resources—and would in consequence become literally ‘totalitarian’.”

“It may turn out that cutting off government from the tap which supplies it with additional money for its use may prove as important in order to stop the inherent tendency of unlimited government to grow indefinitely, which is becoming as menacing a danger to the future of civilisation as the badness of the money it has supplied.”

The problem in achieving this ideal was technical and institutional. So long as state money worked, there was no real drive to change it. Certainly the push would never come from the ruling classes who benefit from the present system, which is precisely where every old argument for the gold standard faltered. How to get around this problem?

In 2009, a pseudonymous developer or group released a white paper, written in language for computer scientists and not economists, for a peer-to-peer system of digital cash. For most economists at the time, its functioning was opaque and not quite believable. The proof came in the functioning itself which unfolded over the course of 2010. To summarize, it deployed a distributed ledger, double-key cryptography, and a protocol of fixed quantity to release a new form of money that operationally tied together money itself and a settlement system in one.

In other words, Bitcoin achieved the ideal about which Hayek could only dream. The key to making it all possible was the distributed ledger itself, which relied on the internet to globalize the nodes of operation, bringing a new form of accountability we had never seen in operation before. The notion of melding together the means of payment plus the mechanisms of settlement on this scale was something that had previously not been possible. And yet there it was, earning its way into the market with ever increasing valuations made possible by the distributed ledger.

So, yes, I became an early enthusiast, writing hundreds of articles, even publishing a book in 2015 called Bit By Bit: How P2P Is Freeing the World. I could not have known it at the time, but those were in fact the last days of the ideal and just before the protocol came to be controlled by a consolidated group of developers who jettisoned entirely the idea of peer-to-peer cash to turn it into a high-earning digital security, not a competitor with state-based money but rather an asset designed not to use but hold with third-party intermediaries controlling access.

We saw all this unfold in real time and many of us were aghast. All that is left to us is to tell the story, which has not been done in a complete form until now. Roger Ver’s new book Hijacking Bitcoin does the job. It is a book for the ages simply because it lays out all the facts of the case and lets readers come to their own conclusion. I was honored to write the foreword, which follows.

The story you will read here is of tragedy, the chronicle of an emancipationist monetary technology subverted to other ends. It’s a painful read, to be sure, and the first time this story has been told with this much detail and sophistication. We had the chance to free the world. That chance was missed, likely hijacked and subverted.

Those of us who watched Bitcoin from the earliest days saw with fascination how it gained traction and seemed to offer a viable alternative path for the future of money. At long last, after thousands of years of government corruption of money, we finally had a technology that was untouchable, sound, stable, democratic, incorruptible, and a fulfillment of the vision of the great champions of freedom from all history. At last, money could be liberated from state control and thus achieve economic rather than political goals—prosperity for everyone versus war, inflation, and state expansion.

That was the vision in any case. Alas, it did not happen. Bitcoin adoption is lower today than it was five years ago. It is not on a trajectory of final victory but on a different path to gradually increase in price for its earlier adopters. In short, the technology was betrayed by small changes that hardly anyone understood at the time.

I certainly did not. I had been playing with Bitcoin for a few years and was mainly astounded at the speed of settlement, the low cost of transactions, and the ability for anyone without a bank to send or receive it without financial mediation. That’s a miracle about which I wrote rhapsodically at the time. I held a CryptoCurrency Conference in Atlanta, Georgia, in October 2013 that focused on the intellectual and technical side of things. It was among the first national conferences on the topic, but even at this event, I noticed two sides coalescing: those who believed in monetary competition and those whose sole commitment was to one protocol.

My first clue that something had gone wrong came two years later, when for the first time I saw that the network had been seriously clogged. Transaction fees soared, settlement slowed to a crawl, and vast numbers of on-ramps and off-ramps were closing due to high compliance costs. I did not understand. I reached out to a number of experts who explained to me about a quiet civil war that had developed within the crypto world. The so-called “maximalists” had turned against widespread adoption. They liked the high fees. They did not mind the slow settlements. And many were involving themselves in the dwindling number of crypto exchanges that were still in operation thanks to a government crackdown.

At the same time, new technologies were becoming available that vastly improved the efficiency and availability of exchange in fiat dollars. They included Venmo, Zelle, CashApp, FB payments, and many others besides, in addition to smartphone attachments and iPads that enabled any merchant of any size to process credit cards. These technologies were completely different from Bitcoin because they were permission-based and mediated by financial companies. But to users, they seemed great and their presence in the marketplace crowded out the use case of Bitcoin at the very time that my beloved technology had become an unrecognizable version of itself.

The forking of Bitcoin into Bitcoin Cash occurred two years later, in 2017, and it was accompanied by great cries and screams as if something horrible was happening. In fact, all that was happening was a mere restoration of the original vision of the founder Satoshi Nakamoto. He believed with the monetary historians of the past that the key to turning any commodity into widespread money was adoption and use. It’s impossible to even imagine conditions under which any commodity could take on the form of money without a viable and marketable use case. Bitcoin Cash was an attempt to restore that.

The time to ramp up adoption of this new technology was 2013-2016, but that moment was squeezed in two directions: the deliberate throttling of the ability of the technology to scale and the push of new payment systems to crowd out the use case. As this book demonstrates, by late 2013, Bitcoin had already been targeted for capture. By the time Bitcoin Cash came to the rescue, the network had changed its entire focus from use to holding what we have and building second-layer technologies to deal with the scaling issues. Here we are in 2024 with an industry struggling to find its way within a niche while the dreams of a “to-the-moon” price are fading into memory.

This is the book that had to be written. It is a story of a missed opportunity to change the world, a tragic tale of subversion and betrayal. But it is also a hopeful story of efforts we can make to ensure that the hijacking of Bitcoin is not the final chapter. There is still the chance for this great innovation to liberate the world but the path from here to there turns out to be more circuitous than any of us ever imagined.

Roger Ver does not blow his own trumpet in this book, but he truly is a hero of this saga, not only deeply knowledgeable of the technologies but also a man who has clung to an emancipatory vision of Bitcoin from the earliest days through the present. I share his commitment to the idea of peer-to-peer currency for the masses, alongside a competitive marketplace for free-enterprise monies. This is a hugely important documentary history, and the polemic alone will challenge anyone who believes himself to be on the other side. Regardless, this book had to exist, however painful. It’s a gift to the world.

Does this story seem familiar? Indeed it does. We’ve seen this trajectory in sector after sector. Institutions born and built by ideals are later converted by various forces of power, access, and nefarious intent into something else entirely. We’ve seen this happen to digital tech in particular and the Internet generally, not to mention medicine, public health, science, liberalism, and so much else. The story of Bitcoin follows the same trajectory, a seemingly immaculate conception turned toward a different purpose, and serving again as a reminder that on this side of heaven, there will never be an institution or idea immune to compromise and corruption.

Jeffrey Tucker is Founder, Author, and President at Brownstone Institute. He is also Senior Economics Columnist for Epoch Times, author of 10 books, including Life After Lockdown, and many thousands of articles in the scholarly and popular press. He speaks widely on topics of economics, technology, social philosophy, and culture.

Connect with Brownstone Institute

Cover image credit: wir_sind_klein

Bio-imperialism vs. Bio-diversity

by Navdanya International
April 15, 2024

Global Context: Seeds and GMOs

Seeds are emblematic of the connections between our lives, our food, our health and our freedom. They are the first link in the food chain. They embody our heritage and enfold the future evolution of life. The cultivation of seeds and their free exchange among farmers is the core foundation of our biodiversity and our food security. To have control over seeds is to have control over our lives, our food and our freedom.

Bio-imperialism severely threatens this freedom today through intellectual property rights. Old and new GMO technologies that have transformed seeds from a commons shared by farmers, to a commodity under the control and monopoly of agribusiness corporations. This imperialism seeks to appropriate the world’s seeds, destroying the lives and livelihoods of peasant communities, as well as biodiversity, but more seriously, in territories recognized as centers of origin. These centers of origin of biodiversity are the cradles of the world’s food supply, and the protection against plague, climate challenges, natural disasters or other hindrances to food production.

Also read: Resisting GMO Imperialism – Events in Mexico – March 2024

Over the last few decades, GMO crops have been imposed in countries all over the world, advertised as a solution to food insecurity and the malnutrition crisis. However, hunger, disease and malnutrition have increased, while biodiversity has declined and toxins have spread. Corporations have forced the introduction of genetically manipulated seeds to impose Food Imperialism through various tools such as regulatory frameworks for intellectual property of seeds, such as UPOV 91, and other legal mechanisms like Trade Dispute Settlement Panels. GMO imperialism has destroyed the lives and livelihoods of small farmers and biodiversity around the world and especially in these centers of origin.

Most recently, agribusiness and biotech giants are attempting to bypass existing biosafety regulations, such as the Convention on Biological Diversity’s Cartagena and Nagoya Protocols by quietly making changes to GMO regulation around the world, in order to promote these new GMOs under new acronyms, such as NBTs (New Breeding Techniques), NGTs (New Genomic Techniques), or TEAs (Techniques of Assisted Evolution). These new GMOs have been silently dovetailing into different countries’ existing agricultural legislation, with the aim still being patent monopolies in the hands of the big chemical and biotechnology giants.

This deregulation would allow gene edited crops to:

Be commercialized with no environmental or consumption safety testing
Require no labeling
Have little to no traceability
Be free from public disclosure of gene edited organisms
Mass deregulation
Be patented without disclosure

These new GMOs are leaving farmers, and citizens completely in the dark as to what is in their food and are an attempt to subvert sovereign governments, the United Nations Convention on Biological Diversity and biosafety laws, with their imposition. The biotech industry has claimed that their gene edited products, including seed, plants, microorganism, and animals, are to be considered the same as their conventional counterparts. This deregulation of old and new GMOs absolves the biotech industry from any responsibility and is a continued attack on food sovereignty.

Agribusiness companies have not solved any issue for humanity on the pretext of false narratives around GMOs solving problems of food supplies. The true basis of the world’s food supply is free seeds, the heritage of humanity that contain the answers to pests, climate challenges and other threats to the world’s production of healthy and sufficient food, not GMOs and Bio-Imperialism. GMOs cannot be forced upon communities, violating norms of democracy and freedom.

All over the world, citizens are rising against the unscientific, undemocratic, anti-ecological imposition of GMOs by corporations. The first generation of GMOs has failed, but corporations continue to impose gene-edited organisms, or new GMOs, in centers of diversity. They continue to shift their narrative towards framing nature and biodiversity as commodities for commercialization and patent monopolies.

Imposition of GM corn in Mexico has global ramifications

In Mexico, which is the center of origin of maize, just as in other centers of biodiversity, there has been a long struggle by society and organized communities against GMO imperialism threatening the subsistence and culture of its peoples. To date, Mexican society has achieved a ban on the planting of GM maize in Mexico through a class action lawsuit filed against the companies like Bayer-Monsanto, Syngenta and Cortiva Agriscience. This ban is still in force, which since 2013 has prevented the planting of genetically manipulated maize in Mexican territories.

Mexican NGOs have bravely continued to resist genetically modified maize to strengthen access to healthy, sustainable and culturally appropriate food for all people; to defend the food sovereignty of peasant and indigenous communities, responsible for developing the 59 breeds and thousands of varieties of maize existing in Mexico, which are also part of the milpa, a holistic, sustainable and biodiverse system that involves other staple foods such as beans, chili peppers, squash, quelites and amaranth.

Recently, the Mexican government issued an executive order that proposes the gradual prohibition of the use of glyphosate and the use of GM maize in food products, such as tortillas, a staple food for Mexicans. GMOs compromise access to healthy, sustainable, culturally appropriate foods free of genetically modified organisms. Faced with this decision, the U.S. government, based on the U.S.-Mexico-Canada Free Trade Agreement (USMCA), and under the duress, of agribusiness lobby, installed a dispute settlement panel to reject the Mexican government’s decision to restrict the use of genetically manipulated (modified) maize in human food and the importation of glyphosate, citing lack of scientific evidence of their harm. This Dispute Settlement Panel neglects the risks to human health, the environment and biodiversity associated with genetically manipulated maize. In addition, it jeopardizes the food sovereignty of the entire Mexican population, since maize is an indispensable food.

In response to this omission, on March 15th, non-governmental organizations from Mexico presented their Technical Opinions before the Panel, arguments based on reliable scientific evidence, including new found evidence by Mexico’s scientific advisory board CONAHCYT, rooted in scientifically rigorous evidence from academic institutions. This evidence points out and warns about the multiple risks that make it pertinent and urgent to stop the presence of genetically manipulated maize in the food of the Mexican population, and as raw material for other industries.

In stark contrast, the US refused to do new experiments and engage in real science and continued to stick to pseudo-science funded by the same agribusinesses that produce this GM corn and make the unscientific claim that it is safe to consume this GM corn.

The case of Mexico is a people’s attempt to guard their biodiverse cultures, inheritance, food, health and fields. It is a case of a people demanding their sovereignty be respected. It is a statement to the world and to agribusiness that they cannot continue to impose their system that violates and destroys sovereignty at all these levels, and has wave after wave destroyed health, the land and biodiversity.

On March 5, 2024 Mexico published its formal response to the dispute where its submission presented evidence supporting the implementation of precautionary measures aimed at safeguarding consumers from potential health risks associated with imported GM corn from the U.S. and residues of glyphosate. They noted that the scientific data regarding the safety of GMOs presented by the U.S. was outdated, with a significant portion originating from industry-sponsored studies lacking peer-reviewed support. They pointed out that the regulatory process in the U.S. lacks sufficient stringency to guarantee the safety of products for consumption by Mexicans. Furthermore, the Mexican submission highlighted that Genetically modified (GM) corn, designed to eliminate insect pests, has strong potential to pose negative effects on non-target animals with research that has demonstrated that mammals can experience harm to their digestive systems due to a GM trait that targets the guts of pests, leading to unintended consequences.

While the US claimed that Mexico’s ban is “unscientific”, IATP Senior Advisor Timothy A. Wise highlighted that Mexico’s response “refutes that claim, presenting hundreds of academic studies that show cause for concern about human health and the threat to native corn diversity.”

Significantly, The US claim that Mexico’s ban is unscientific is completely unjustified as the US never signed onto the Convention on Biological Diversity and the Cartagena Protocol on Biosafety. It has no biosafety regulatory organism to judge the safety of these GM foods. It is based instead on “substantial equivalence” which is not enough to be considered as a safety assessment in itself. This principle doesn’t prioritize consumer protection from health risks nor does it provide consumers with comprehensive information regarding the actual level of risks and hazards associated with “novel foods” (in this case GMO foods) compared to traditional ones.

In its formal submission to the trade dispute panel, Canada aligned itself with the arguments presented by the US government, claiming the safety of genetically modified (GM) corn for consumption in Mexico. However, CBAN’s (Canadian Biotechnology Action Network)’s response refuted this stance by asserting that scientific evidence supported Mexico’s precautionary measures, particularly due to the extensive use of minimally processed corn in the daily diet of the majority of Mexicans.

Lucy Sharratt of the Canadian Biotechnology Action Network (CBAN), stated that, “Mexico is a sovereign nation with the right to determine the future of its food supply and its needs to take action to protect native corn from GM contamination.”

Globally, Mexico’s case is important due to the current context of the world. Due to the industrial food system, we are seeing the rise of chronic diseases rooted in metabolic disorders, increasing ecological disasters, lack of water and declining biodiversity. Mexico defending its cultural and food heritage is equivalent to a country taking a stand, backed by scientific evidence and government support, against the continuation of these multiple crises.

Furthermore, the significance of this case is that an unfavorable resolution for Mexico in this Panel, would limit Mexican people’s right to decide which seeds to plant and which types of maize to feed themselves with. This directly jeopardizes the traditional Mexican cuisine which is central to the cultural identity of the communities that practice and transmit it from generation to generation and has been recognised as Intangible Cultural Heritage of Humanity by UNESCO.

This in turn also has the potential to devastatingly affect all other centers of biodiversity and interconnected food cultures around the world who will continue to face such attacks on their sovereignty.

Mexico holds the legacy of being one of the first constitutions globally to incorporate enforceable social rights, encompassing health and a clean environment (Article 4). Thus, a right to health is a legally enforceable provision under its national constitution. This along with achieving universal health coverage (UHC) for its 100 million citizens makes Mexico a country that continues to stand up for biodiversity, for health, for the environment.

Convergence: Interconnected strength, interconnected resistance

In the face of this local and global Bio-imperialism, Navdanya International joined together with the campaign Sin Maiz No Hay País, and Via Orgánica, along with the Ministry of the Environment and Natural Resources (SEMARNAT), the Ministry of Agriculture and Rural Development (SADER) and the Ministry of Culture, along with other Latin American movements to organize events from March 12th to 16th in Mexico City to carve a common strategy against the further imposition of new and old GMOs around the world, sharing experiences, struggles and solidarity in defense of Biodiversity, Food and Seed Freedom, through strengthening the support and solidarity, in cultivating and connecting different organizations, movements and people.

These meetings and convergences helped create a gathering place for solidarity by bringing together representatives from movements from all over Latin America and beyond to demonstrate that this struggle goes beyond individual borders. All over the world the impostions continue to take place, directly violating the sovereignty and rights of people and nature, in favor of corporate agenda.

José Bernardo Magdaleno Velazco (Nino), President of the Peasant Union, Totikes, Chiapas emphasized that “we are not alone in this fight”. Together with activists and organizations such as the Campaña Nacional Sin Maíz No Hay País, Semillas de Vida, Vía Organica, Regeneration International, Bloque Verde, Probioma, Naturaleza De Derechos, and Semillas de Identidad- Colombia, Navdanya International joined the demand for governments around the world to stop genetically manipulated seeds, which threaten the survival of food and agricultural systems based on biological and cultural diversity.

These events carved a convergence of movements, to stand in defense of our biocultural diversity and food heritage across the world, in resistance to old GMOs and new GMOs.

It is in this coming together of different movements and voices united in their goal of food and seed sovereignty that these events in Mexico led to the emergence of an interconnected strength and resistance. Where the nurturing of solidarity and a reminder of a common resistance despite varied contexts, echoed and re-iterated that together, we are all more than the sum of the parts. Building relationships and connections, across organizations, across movements and beyond countries is necessary for effectively resisting this GMO imperialism. This interconnected strength is what we have to tap into, to continue our struggle in defense of life, diversity and freedom.

Significance: Food sovereignty as a driving force for political sovereignty

The current socio-political context of Mexico’s demand of autonomy based on being a center of diversity and cultural heritage is unique because food sovereignty is the driving force behind the political sovereignty of the people. This reiterates that every kind of autonomy is rooted in food and seed.

At the event held on March 12, 2024 at Mexican Ministry of Agriculture and Rural Development (SADER), Mexico City called “In Defense of Food Sovereignty”, Dr. Vandana Shiva, President of Navdanya International in her keynote lecture on food sovereignty, mentioned that it was so important to celebrate cultures where cultural diversity and biodiversity are not seen as separate. She added that “Food sovereignty is a high level concept, because it implies the sovereignty of beings to manage and organize themselves toward health.” The cultivation of biodiversity has to imply sovereignty at all levels. Sovereignty is needed at all levels for organisms to be able to freely develop and evolve, self organize toward health.

Leydy Pech, evocatively added in the same event that “In Maya, we have no word for GMO, we call them instead seeds that have no heart, seeds with no life.” Furthermore, she asked a significant question, potent for everyone around the world: “Our seeds, our knowledge is our inheritance, with this destruction what will we inherit in the future?”

As also highlighted by Jesús Ramírez Cuevas, general coordinator of social communication and spokesperson for the Government of the Mexican Republic, “Mexican sovereignty starts with food sovereignty.” It is food sovereignty and the sovereignty of all interconnected beings to self-organize and grow with health that holds the power of resistance politically, economically and socially.

GMO imperialism is an attack on this sovereignty of all interconnected beings at all levels of self organization. It is an attack on life itself.

As Leydy Pech echoed: “You cannot call what goes against life, development”. Dr. María Elena Álvarez-Buylla Roces, general director of the National Council of humanities, sciences and technologies (CONAHCYT) said that “On a global level the deregulation and imposition of GMOs and toxic food systems is a denial of sovereignty and right to health on multiple levels.” She added that Mexico’s success in asserting its own sovereignty on seeds and food policies would be a beacon for other countries to be able to assert their food sovereignty and seed freedom in turn.

Biodiversity at all levels

A Seminar on Biodiversity Protection titled “Protection and Conservation of Biodiversity in Centers of Origin” was held on March 15, 2024 at the Mexican Ministry of Environment and Natural Resources (SEMARNAT) Headquarters, Mexico City. This seminar analyzed and discussed strategies to conserve and protect natural resources in countries that are centers of origin and genetic diversity of species, through a dialogues, work round tables, and discussions for common strategy with key actors of the Mexican government, representatives from Latin America, Asia, the United States, and others in the protection and conservation of biodiversity in Latin America and other regions.

Maestro Iván Rico López, Subsecretary of Environmental Planning and Policy, SEMARNAT highlighted that “Megadiverse countries, the centers of origin of crop varieties, have greater responsibility in protecting the world’s biodiversity. We have learned that our plant genetic heritage is our cultural heritage. Natural and Social aspects go hand in hand, as those who have preserved the genetic diversity are the indigenous peoples.”

Columba López, Director of the Commission for Natural Resources and Rural Development, CORENADR, emphasized the key to this biodiversity being in the hands of the farmers. It is the farmers who are the custodians of these biodiverse foods, cultures, seeds, knowledges. She said that “We work on native seeds in our Seed Houses. We cultivate and replicate seeds through agroecological practices in the field. We develop seeds that adapt in the mountains or near the water, that are climate resilient and we do it through farmers’ participatory breeding.”

Biodiversity at all levels produces health, diversity in our farms, our seed, our foods, our cultures etc. having a biodiverse field in line with local ecosystem and cultural heritage, gives us a diversity of foods, and a diversity of food cultures. This is how we create health first in our fields all the way to our plates and our guts.

Dr. Vandana Shiva, of Navdanya International highlighted that, “Indigenous peoples and communities know that seeds continuously evolve. By turning biodiversity into technology they (corporations) deny the creativity of biodiversity, they go against how nature works. Diversity is a living necessity.” She further reiterated that, “The colonizing mentality considers living beings as disposable and nature as raw material to be extracted. Mexico is recovering the dignity of natural resources, which are the basis of our health and well-being & the health of the planet.”

Similarly, at the event held on March 16, 2024 held at Cencalli, Museo de maíz y centro de la cultura alimentaria, Los Pinos, Ciudad de México, in the presence of the Alejandra Frausto Guerrero, from the Ministry of Culture, Victor Sanchez reaffirmed the need to resist the food imperialism that destroys our cultures by defending our biodiversity and strengthening seed freedom. Navdanya International co-organized this event with Campaña Nacional Sin Maíz No Hay País, Via Organica and Regeneration International. Andre Leu, Director of Regeneration International, discussed the latest evidence of negative health effects caused by exposure to glyphosate: “There’s scientific evidence about the correlations between the introduction of glyphosate and transgenic crops and the increase in diseases such as cancer, obesity, kidney failure and autism.”

Mercedes López Martínez from Vía Orgánica, Mexico, discussed the great importance of protecting small farmers and indigenous communities as the backbone of a thriving food culture. Miguel Ángel Crespo of Probioma, Bolivia shared how, “The fight to protect biodiversity and genetic resources is also political, legal and scientific.”

It is this interconnection of diversity at all levels, including diversity of organizations and movements reflecting the interconnection and sovereignty of organisms that is needed to resist GMO imperialism from the ground up.

The U.S. Is Running Parallel Governments. All U.S. Citizens Have Dual Citizenship & Are “Volunteered” as Property. How to Unvolunteer: “U.S. National / State Citizen Comprehensive Guide (Non Citizen National)”

Truth Comes to Light editor’s commentary:

In my personal search for clarity about the confusing (deliberately) and complicated legal maze of control over those of us who were born into or naturalized into United States citizenship, I recently came upon the website “National Status – Repatriating Freedom Seekers”.

Going through their various resources and taking their course has made many things clear and has provided me with specific steps to take, as well as coherent instructions and documentation.

I’m sharing it here for those who have been doing a similar search through the volumes of videos, books, websites and documents out there, only to find themselves overwhelmed with bits and pieces of the puzzle that don’t quite fit together.

From the National Status Introduction page:

“When you were born on American soil, you were born a National. However through legal presumption you are assumed to be a US citizen, which is completely and personally subject to the Federal Government.

“This control is feudal in nature. As a US citizen you are property of the federal government. As property your labor is collateralized, bonded, and traded.

“However, the nature of your servitude is voluntary. It has to be, because our 13th amendment forbids involuntary servitude. It’s voluntary however only because you didn’t know that you had another choice.

“Our goal is to make you aware of this choice and, if you so choose, volunteer out.”

From the National Status Forums page:

“This website was created by an independent group of nationals who have repatriated themselves from the servitude of U.S. Citizenship. It serves as a resource and a platform for anyone interested in beginning their journey to true freedom as a national. Please share with other freedom seekers.

“DISCLAIMER: The information shared on this website is free and for educational purposes only. We do not sell anything or offer any tax, political or legal advice. Use at your own discretion.”

Through the National Status website, I was led to the video that is shared below. A transcript has been prepared for your study and reference.

As always, information shared at Truth Comes to Light is done in the spirit of conversation. This is not legal advice, nor is it any other type of advice or call to action. All of these decisions are serious in nature and require study, dedicated consideration, and personal choice.

Thank you to National Status for offering all of these materials at no cost to the public. Compiling this information and presenting in a way that we all can understand requires a great amount of time, talent, and work (not to mention their personal years of research, study, trial and error), in addition to financial costs of maintaining a website. They have created a great resource for us all.

~ Kathleen

U.S. National / State Citizen Comprehensive Guide (Non Citizen National)

by U.S. National Guide

Original video is found at USA National Guide YouTube channel. Find mirrored copies at BitChute, Odysee, & Brighteon.

Message from video creator as found below the original YouTube video.

This video is a comprehensive, beginner’s guide to U.S. Nationality, State Citizenship, and how U.S. Citizens are property. Below are timestamps to sections of the video, as well as all the links referenced.

CORRECTIONS: Civil Rights are mistakenly called constitutional rights as they are given by the constitution (14th amendment), but are totally opposite of God-given Rights that are Constitutionally PROTECTED.

The affidavit should say the city and state in which you’re domiciled, not Los Angeles California.

A W-4v can be sent instead of a W-4, but some employers won’t accept it. Fill out numbers 1-3 on the W-4v normally (put the SSN). Leave 5 and 6 blank unless applicable. Check 7.

If you need to fill out a W-4, do not fill it out as I described in the video. Instead, as described in the form’s instructions on how to file as exempt, write “Exempt” under 4c, and other only fill out steps 1a, 1b, and 5. Always put your zip code and SSN in brackets.
When filling out a W-4 or W-4v add “Done in Good Faith” at the end of your signature.

For state taxes there are equivalent forms called “Employee’s Withholding Allowance Certificate” for each state.

When rescinding a ticket you can also include “REFUSED” and “CEASE AND DESIST.”

Roger Sayles Radio Ranch:
http://thematrixdocs.com/

National USA Telegram Channel:
https://t.me/usnational

Certificates of Non Citizen Nationality:
https://travel.state.gov/content/travel/en/legal/travel-legal-considerations/us-citizenship/Certificates-Non-Citizen-Nationality.html

American Samoan Citizenship Case:
https://www.axios.com/2021/06/16/american-samoa-birthright-citizenship-ruling

Legal Word Games: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tu1CcGbDQhw&t=0s

Voter Registration Cancellations:
https://www.eac.gov/voters/voter-registration-cancellations

Internal Revenue Code:
https://www.law.cornell.edu/cfr/text/26/1.1-1

Possible Sales Tax Exemption:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=p9dDo5a6sSQ&t=0s

Templates (copy the file rather than requesting to edit):
https://drive.google.com/drive/folders/1a1qJyiSKbIDdXuOo8fGUwHm5aG4rKGP3

Private License Plates:
Premade (Cars and Motorcycles) – https://shop.freedomfromgovernment.org/
Custom (Cars) – https://www.buildasign.com/license-plates
Custom (All Kinds of Vehicles) –
www.asmartblonde.com/categories/design-your-own-custom-license-plate-tag-or-sign.html

James C Lovett:
https://www.youtube.com/c/JamesCLovett

Social Security Status Correction:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=euQpwyRzyyc

Timestamps:
00:00 – Intro
02:09 – History
05:19 – 13th Amendment
06:13 – 14th Amendment
08:11 – Court Rulings
11:10 – Rights
14:10 – Change in Government
17:02 – U.S. Citizens are Property
20:03 – Immigration and Nationality Act
23:11 – How You Agreed
26:55 – Privileges Nationals Don’t Have
27:17 – Taxes, Codes, and Mandates
31:40 – UCC 1-308
33:26 – How To
48:09 – Passport
50:43 – Police and Driving
54:15 – Optional Steps
55:15 – Outro

Connect with USA National Guide

Please link to the original YouTube version to check for any updates, to share your comments with the author/creator of the video, and to read the comments of other viewers.

Transcript prepared by Truth Comes to Light:

I’m sure you’ve wondered how the government is able to chip away at our Constitutional rights. Despite all the checks and balances our founding fathers put in. Since early 2020, that question has been asked more than ever before.

That question can only be answered with another question. Did you know that all U.S. citizens have dual citizenship?

Today, using verifiable factual information as well as decades of experience and research, you are going to discover how United States citizens unknowingly volunteered to be the property of the United States government.

More importantly, you are going to learn how to stop volunteering.

Welcome to a comprehensive guide to becoming a state citizen, commonly known as a U.S. national and mistakenly known as a non-citizen national.

Before we can begin, this is for educational purposes only. Nothing in this video is a call to action. I am not telling or suggesting anyone does anything, nor am I responsible for anyone else’s actions. I am not discussing the topic of sovereign citizens or private citizens as I stray clear from misinformation and disinformation.

Credit must be given to Roger Sayles, the host of Radio Ranch, as most of this information is from his teachings. Roger has been so gracious as to share this with the world and to spend two hours every weekday answering people’s questions on his radio show. You can find information on how to listen or call into his radio show in the description. [http://thematrixdocs.com/]

Anyone who has any questions or comments on what I’ve discussed, feel free to leave a comment below [see original YouTube video to leave your comment] and if it goes beyond the scope of this video, be sure to ask Roger on his show. Also, the U.S. National Telegram group is linked down below as well.[https://t.me/usnational]

When the united states of America was founded, it was the only country in recorded human history, possibly other than the Roman Republic, that recognized and protected God-given, inalienable rights to freedom. The fatal flaw was the acceptance of slavery.

You will see shortly how the Civil War, which we are told ended slavery, was used to enslave all Americans. But first we must discuss what it was like to be a free American before the war.

As most know, the Constitution for the United States of America secured citizens of the states inalienable rights given by the Creator. All government and legal action had to abide by the rules set out in the Constitution and still does, including Common Law, which the founding fathers adopted from England. Common Law means that when a supreme or appellate court makes a ruling on how to interpret a law, that decision is applied across the state or country depending on the jurisdiction of that court.

Jurisdiction is another concept that is important to understand. Jurisdiction is defined as the power to make decisions. For example, the United States Supreme Court only has that power to make decisions for citizens and residents of the United States. They cannot decide what happens to a Brazilian citizen residing in Brazil.

Most who have read and understand the system of government set up by the Constitution are amazed by how just and free it is. So how is it possible that it has corrupted into the system you see today? Is this system unconstitutional?

Fortunately, it is constitutional, and that’s why the courts have allowed it to continue to play out. I say fortunately because that shows the system still works. They must abide by its rules, and that must mean that there is a way out. So let’s find out how.

In some interpretations, the Civil War was not a war over slavery like many have been led to believe. It was a war over states rights.

I’m sure some of you instantly had alarm bells ringing when I made that statement. Due to media propaganda perpetrated by the federal government (one could look into Operation Mockingbird) many immediately associate that interpretation with racism and slavery, as if the northerners were altruistic, loving people that were fed up with the racist Democrats in the south. They then spread the lie that the parties switched, to explain why the Republicans are now the racist ones.

The harsh reality is the Civil War had much less to do with slavery than we’re led to believe. Many politicians from both sides were and still are racist, and they’ve worked together to enslave all Americans regardless of skin color.

After the Civil War, the 13th and the 14th Amendments were instituted. The 13th Amendment to the Constitution abolished slavery by stating,

“Neither slavery nor involuntary servitude, except as a punishment for crime whereof the party shall have been duly convicted, shall exist within the United States or any place subject to their jurisdiction.”

The word ‘their’ being plural as the jurisdiction is of the several states.

Obviously voluntary servitude is omitted. A free person would have every right to serve whatever or whomever they please. That also means that you would have to be able to stop volunteering for it to remain constitutional.

Before we discover how to stop volunteering to be the slaves of the United States government, let’s see how we were tricked into doing so in the first place.

The 14th Amendment allowed all people born in the United States to become citizens by stating,

“All persons born or naturalized in the United States and subject to the jurisdiction thereof, are citizens of the United States and of the State wherein they reside.”

There are three important things to notice in that statement.

First, this amendment is referring to a single jurisdiction, as it’s referring to the level of a singular federal government. This is distinctly different from the reference to several jurisdictions in the 13th Amendment. The importance of this will become clear shortly.

Second, it says AND subject to the jurisdiction thereof, not ARE subject to the jurisdiction thereof — meaning people can be born here or naturalized without being subject to the United States federal government’s jurisdiction.

How that can be lies in the rest of the sentence where it says,

“…citizens of the United States AND of the State wherein they reside.”

What happened here is the creation of a new class of citizenship. Before the 14th Amendment, a citizen of one of the several states was automatically a citizen of the united states of America. There was no such thing as a citizen of the United States federal government. People born in Washington, D.C. were not citizens. Again, the only status was a state citizen.

To understand this dual citizenship, let’s read some court rulings.

If at any point you’d like to ponder or read these rulings for yourself, feel free to pause, they will all be on screen.

The ruling on Tashiro v. Jordan [201 Cal. 236 (1927)] states,

“That there is a citizenship of the United States and a citizenship of a state,…”

The ruling on Kitchens v. Steele [112 F. Supp. 383] states,

” citizen of the United States, is a citizen of the federal government…”

The ruling on Gardina v. Board of Registrars of Jefferson County [160 Ala. 155; 48 So. 788 (1909)] states,

“There are then, under our republican form of government, two classes of citizens, one of the United States and one of the state.”

The ruling on U.S. v. Anthony [24 Fed. 829 (1873)] states,

“The term resident and citizen of the United States is distinguished from a Citizen of one of the several states, in that the former is a special class of citizen created by Congress.”

Remember that term resident. It’ll be important later. I will use the term U.S. Citizen, Federal Citizen and 14th Amendment Citizen interchangeably, as you can now see that they are one and the same.

It is evident then that there is a federal and a state citizenship. So can someone be one without being the other?

These next court rulings will make that clear.

The ruling on McDonel v. The State [90 Ind. 320 (1883)] says,

“…he was not a citizen of the United States, he was a citizen and a voter of the State,…”

“One may be a citizen of a State and yet not a citizen of the United States.”

The same U.S. v. Anthony case [24 Fed. Cas. 829, 830] from earlier, also stated in the ruling,

“…an individual can be a Citizen of one of the several states without being a citizen of the United States.”

Crosse v. The Bd. of Supervisors [221 A.2d 431 (1966) ruled that,

“Both before and after the Fourteenth Amendment to the federal Constitution, it has not been necessary for a person to be a citizen of the United States in order to be a citizen of his state.”

I can hear you thinking, ‘Okay, okay, I believe you. What does it matter though? Do I want to be solely a state citizen and not a citizen of the federal government? What’s the difference?’

To answer those questions, we must read some far more interesting court rulings. This is where it gets juicy.

The ruling on Belmont v. Town of Gulfport [122 S0. 10] stated,

“Taxpayers are not State Citizens.”

U.S. v. Slater [545 Fed. Supp. 179, 182 (1982)] decided in its ruling,

“Unless the defendant can prove he is not a citizen of the United States, the IRS has the right to inquire and determine a tax liability.”

Before I get into why a state citizen doesn’t have to pay taxes, you must understand the difference in the rights of a federal and state citizen.

In the Supreme Court ruling on Jones v. Temmer [89 F.Supp 1226], it was decided,

“The privileges and immunities clause of the 14th Amendment protects very few rights because it neither incorporates the Bill of Rights nor protects all rights of individual citizens. Instead, this provision protects only those rights peculiar to being a citizen of the federal government. It does not protect those rights which relate to state citizenship.”

You heard that right. The Bill of Rights is not protected for U.S. citizens, for 14th Amendment federal citizens.

Want more proof?

In the case of Hague v. CIO [307 US 496, 520], it was decided,

“…the first eight amendments have uniformly been held not to be protected from state action by the privileges and immunities clause of the 14th Amendment.”

In the ruling on the case of Twining v. New Jersey [211 US 78, 98-99], it was decided,

“The right to trial by jury and civil cases, guaranteed by the 7th Amendment… and the right to bear arms guaranteed by the 2nd Amendment… have been distinctly held not to be privileges and immunities of citizens of the United States guaranteed by the 14th Amendment… and in effect the same decision was made in respect of the guarantee against prosecution except by indictment of a grand jury contained in the 5th Amendment… and in respect of the right to be confronted with witnesses contained in the 6th Amendment… it was held that the indictment, made indispensable by the 5th Amendment and trial by jury guaranteed by the 6th Amendment, were not privileges and immunities of citizens of the United States, as those words were used in the 14th Amendment. We conclude, therefore, that the exemption from compulsory self-incrimination is not a privilege or immunity of National [Federal] citizenship guaranteed by this clause of the 14th Amendment.”

That is absolutely shocking. What rights do U.S. Citizens have then?

Well, the Supreme Court ruling on U.S. v. Valentine [288 F. Supp 957] will tell us. It states,

“The only absolute and unqualified right of a United States citizen is to residence within the territorial boundaries of the United States.”

That’s it. That is the one right of a United States citizen. All else is a privilege that can be taken away at any time.

It’s starting to make sense how they’re able to do all that we are seeing happen in the world, how they can punish us for victimless crimes and tax us on everything we own.

What has happened here is that we’ve switched from the jurisdiction of constitutional law to the jurisdiction of commercial law, the law of merchants.

Shortly after the passing of the 14th Amendment, the United States incorporated. When you hear United States, that is the corporation. When you hear united states of America, that is the original country.

Notice that the words united and states are not capitalized because they are describing the states rather than referring to a specific entity because the jurisdiction was of multiple states.

More capitalization is often a sign of corporate jurisdiction as that is a single entity. It’s a proper noun.

They also created this change on a state level. All the state governments, like California state, for example, were incorporated and this time they began with an uppercase S for State of, like in State of California, as opposed to California state, where the state was lowercase.

I bet you didn’t know that the State of California is not based in Sacramento, like California state was. The State of California is based in Washington, DC, along with all other 49 ‘state of’ governments.

The original governments are still there. They are just overlaid by this corporation.

All the original government positions still exist. They are just empty.

After creating these changes, the United States gave the former slaves US citizenship, which guaranteed them civil rights rather than constitutional rights.

As you’ve seen, there is only one absolute right US Citizens have access to. The rest are privileges. All civil rights are, are privileges. They slowly made every new child a federal citizen through their birth certificates until every state citizen was also a federal citizen.

You just saw with the names of the states and country that the capital letters are often a sign of the corporate entity.

Ever wondered why names are in all capital letters on a birth certificate or a driver’s license or a social security number?

So why would the government want to make everyone a United States Citizen as well? Let’s read the last two court cases for the answer.

In the ruling on Wheeling Steel Corp. v. Fox [298 U.S. 193, 80 L.Ed. 1143, 56 S.Ct. 773], it was stated,

“Therefore, the U.S. citizens residing in one of the states of the union, are classified as property and franchises of the federal government as an individual entity.”

In the ruling on Hendrick v. Maryland [S.C. Reporter’s Rd. 610-625. (1914)], it was decided,

“A ‘US Citizen’ upon leaving the District of Columbia becomes involved in ‘interstate commerce,’ as a ‘resident’ does not have the common law right to travel, of a Citizen of one of the several states.”

You heard that right, U.S. Citizens are property and if they’re outside of DC, that property is an interstate commerce.

Of course, it’s all about power and money. They can do just about whatever they want to U.S. Citizens other than infringe on their sole right to residing here.

You’ve probably heard the statement, property can’t own property. That’s why they can tax U.S. Citizens on all their income and property. They don’t really own it. Taxes are like their rent and interest.

That sure gives them a lot of money, as does all the debt they’ve built up.

I’m sure you’ve wondered who the government is $30 trillion in debt to. Some of you know it’s the Federal Reserve Bank, which truly isn’t a government agency.

What sort of bank gives out loans without collateral? Well, it turns out, U.S. Citizens, since they are property, are the collateral.

That is why our birth certificates look like warehouse receipts. That is why our birth certificates and our driver’s licenses and our social security cards all have bonds against them.

If a state citizen is having a child, it is highly recommended to not sign their birth certificate and establish their nationality in other ways. But I’m getting way ahead of myself.

How could someone who is already a U.S. Citizen get out of this? Can people reclaim the rights and stop paying taxes?

I said it’s constitutional, so people must be able to just stop volunteering, right? Well that’s right.

But to understand how you can get out, how anyone could get out, you must understand the three statuses that exist in this country and be wary of enormous mistakes some people have made.

They’ve done their best to make this as tricky and confusing as possible and to take that further, they had to add in a third status and change the name of the original one.

With the Immigration and Nationality Act, or INA, what used to be called a state citizen or a citizen of the united states of America was covered up by the term U.S. National. I will use these three terms interchangeably, State Citizen, Citizen of the United States of America and U.S. National.

You’ve seen now that one can be a state citizen or U.S. National without being a U.S. Citizen, or one can be both a U.S. National and a U.S. Citizen. This and the third status was further described in the INA as referenced on the Department of State website in this article titled “Certificates of Non-Citizen Nationality”, the link to which is in the description below.

[https://travel.state.gov/content/travel/en/legal/travel-legal-considerations/us-citizenship/Certificates-Non-Citizen-Nationality.html]

The third [? second] paragraph states,

“As defined by the INA, all U.S. citizens are U.S. nationals but only a relatively small number of persons acquire U.S. nationality without becoming U.S. citizens.”

This further confirms that one can be a U.S. national, which was previously referred to as a state citizen, without being a U.S. Citizen. The third status is a non-citizen national, which this article explains. Such a person is not a citizen of one of the united states of America or of the United States Federal Corporation, yet is still considered a national. Currently, the only such people are the people of American Samoa and Swains Island. By not giving these people birthright citizenship, the government was able to claim that U.S. nationality only exists to preserve these indigenous cultures.

We all know how much the government cares about indigenous cultures here in America. This is so important to them that when the U.S. District Court for the District of Utah ruled in 2020 that American Samoans should be given U.S. citizenship by birthright, both the United States Federal Government and the American Samoan government contested the ruling within 24 hours. You can check the description for an article on where that case went.

[https://www.axios.com/2021/06/16/american-samoa-birthright-citizenship-ruling]

Using this third status to hide the original citizenship not only worked, as people believed that a national is an American Samoan, it also caused some problems for people attempting to become U.S. nationals. Some people mistakenly revoked both of their citizenships and chose to become a non-citizen national. By doing so, they lost their chance to reclaim their constitutional rights and had to either leave the country, go to American Samoa or apply for nationalization.

These are likely the horror stories you may have heard about becoming national. The words we use are very important. I advise avoiding making the mistake of giving up all citizenship.

Now that that’s clear, I can discuss the ways people have continued to affirm the false presumption that was assigned to them at birth that they are U.S. Citizens.

The main way they’ve done this is by asking specific questions anytime U.S. Citizens have gone to court, wanted a driver’s license, started a bank account, etc.

The first of which is: Are you a U.S. Citizen? Which we now know means are you a former slave claiming civil rights or a state citizen giving up their constitutional rights to claim civil rights? Phrased like that, I’m sure just about everyone would answer no.

When asked where they are a citizen of, a U.S. national would say, ‘of the united states of America’, as they still are a citizen of the united states of America. They are just no longer a citizen of the United States incorporated.

The second question often asked is: Are you a resident? This is another word game. Most normally would think, resident is a geographical term, that it’s about where you reside. In this context though, it has a different meaning.

A resident was a term created to give the federal government jurisdiction over the former slaves in order to protect them from their state by having them just be residents in that state. So now we see that the question means are you residing in one of the several states and seeking the federal government’s protection from that state? Phrased like that, again, almost no one would answer yes to that question.

So when asked where they are a resident of, a U.S. national would avoid using the term ‘resident’ altogether, or ‘reside’ altogether, and say something along the lines of, ‘I’m currently living in this state or on this state’ really.

Another trick they use is asking you if you are ‘that person’ or ‘a person’. [Are you that/a/the person…?] This is mostly used in court cases.

Obviously you are a person and you will get in a lot of trouble if you say you are not because you are. But in this case, this is a legal term referring to United States property.

A U.S. national would say, I am not THAT person. The words we use are very important. You must know their word games to stop playing their game. The common definition to words are very different to those they use, which are found in Black’s Law Dictionary.

If you are choosing to get a copy of Black’s Law Dictionary, I highly recommend one of the first four versions, as a lot of the definitions have been altered in later versions.

By setting this system up like this, they have convinced people to agree to giving up their rights and becoming property by choosing U.S. Citizenship over their state citizenship.

To learn more of their word games, feel free to watch the video I’ve linked in the description.

[Black’s Law Dictionary why you need to learn their legalise in order to play the game! by James C. Lovett – https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tu1CcGbDQhw]

The other primary way they legitimize the false presumption is through voting.

State citizens that are not also federal citizens do not have access to the privilege of running or voting in federal elections. Voting in federal elections is agreeing to the federal corporate jurisdiction. Below is a link to cancel voter registration.

[https://www.eac.gov/voters/voter-registration-cancellations]

I’ve heard nationals can become an elector rather than a voter, though I know nothing about this. If you’d like more information on that, Roger, the host of Radio Ranch, or someone on his show might know something about that.

Anyway, this topic brings up the question. Are there any other privileges that U.S. Citizens have that U.S. Nationals don’t? Other than voting, the primary privileges are financial incentives given out by the federal government, which are truly trivial compared to how much U.S. Citizens pay in taxes.

And that leads us perfectly to everyone’s favorite part. State citizens are not subject to the jurisdictional statements of codes or mandates, such as the United States Code or State Penal Codes. That does mean that nationals don’t need to register or get permits for their firearms. This is because the Penal Codes refer to ‘persons’, and we know now that nationals are not those persons.

As for the United States Code, the titles claim jurisdiction over U.S. citizens and residents.

Everyone’s favorite code, Title 26, Internal Revenue Code, has a little extra terminology in there. Let’s read it together to understand what taxes U.S. nationals are liable to pay. A link to this page is in the description.

[https://www.law.cornell.edu/cfr/text/26/1.1-1]

Title 26 states,

“Section 1 of the Code imposes an income tax on the income of every individual who is a citizen or resident of the United States and, to the extent provided by section 871(b) or 877(b), on the income of a nonresident alien individual.”

As you can see, non-resident, alien individuals are only liable to two sections of the income tax, which happen to be two incredibly irrelevant taxes that the average person will never pay.

But would a U.S. national be considered a non-resident alien? They certainly aren’t citizens or residents of the United States, so that covers the non-resident part. But what makes them alien? Well, if an alien is a citizen of a different country and nationals are citizens of the united states of America, which we now know to be a different country than the United States, then it seems U.S. nationals are non-resident aliens as far as the income tax is concerned. Therefore, the average state citizen is not liable to pay income tax.

So that clears up a huge portion of taxes, yet property, sales and corporate taxes remain. U.S. Citizens can be taxed on their property because they don’t truly own it, as property can’t own property.

Nationals have the ability to raise the patent to their land, which gives them the highest jurisdiction over it, making them exempt from taxes and from the need to follow building codes and to get permits. That is quite an in-depth subject, so I’ll leave it to the expert, Ron Gibson. Feel free to research his work, lectures and interviews if you’re interested. Though be careful in researching this, as there is a large amount of false information attempting to defame him and his work. Anyway, let’s move on to sales tax.

Some may be aware that companies are liable to pay sales tax, not individuals. The companies choose to add it on to the price at the point of sale in order to make their products look cheaper while browsing. Therefore, one usually can’t get out of sales tax, but anyone, regardless of if they’re a national, can request that the company pays the tax without adding it onto the price. They may not always do this, but it’s worth a try with larger purchases like a vehicle.

Finally, there are corporate taxes. Since corporations are part of the corporate system the U.S. has built on, they must pay taxes. Luckily, I’m sure there are ways that a state citizen business owner could raise their salary to the point that the business has no income to pay taxes on, and then they could use that money to reinvest into the business.

There is also the option of creating a private membership organization, also known as an unincorporated business. If you’re interested in that topic, further research into corporate taxes or unincorporated organizations is recommended.

So some may be wondering, if a national is no longer subject to that commercial law, how can they assign commercial contracts without giving up their rights? Is stating that you’re not a U.S. Citizen enough? They won’t even know what that is.

So there happens to be a part of the Uniform Commercial Code that will help us out here. This code can be used by both federal and state citizens.

UCC, meaning Uniform Commercial Code, 1-308 is a section of the Uniform Commercial Code that allows people to sign documents with the words ‘without prejudice’ in their signature to reserve their rights. It’s like saying, ‘My common law supersedes your commercial law’.

Some people choose to add ‘UCC 1-308’ or just ‘1-308’ to their signatures, usually if there isn’t much space, or sometimes they add it after words ‘without prejudice’ to be safe. The code also provides the option to sign the words ‘under duress’ or ‘U.D.’, meaning you’re being forced into signing. That one is best used in all dealings with law enforcement or any government employees or agencies, but we’ll get into that later.

It’s recommended to allow the signature to bleed into the statement in case anyone attempts to white it out.

Finally, what you’ve all been waiting for.

Now that we understand why a person would choose to do so and what the repercussions would be, it is time to learn how someone can rebut the false presumption of federal citizenship and regain access to constitutional rights.

Let’s quickly return to the page about non-citizen nationality from the Department of State’s website to see how.

[https://travel.state.gov/content/travel/en/legal/travel-legal-considerations/us-citizenship/Certificates-Non-Citizen-Nationality.html]

At the bottom of the page it is stated,

“Any person who becomes a citizen of the United States solely by virtue of the provisions in Section 301 [applying to those born in or residing in the Northern Mariana Islands] may within six months after the effective date of that Section or within six months after reaching the age of 18 years, whichever date is later, become a national but not a citizen of the United States by making a declaration under oath before any court established by the Constitution or laws of the United States or any other court of record in the Commonwealth in the form as follows “I _____ being duly sworn, hereby declare my intention to be a national but not a citizen of the United States.”

Now that’s crowded in a lot of unnecessary and misleading information, so I’ll simplify it for you. Any U.S. citizen can, with one sentence declaration put into their records, declare themselves a national but not a citizen of the United States.

That sentence can be altered or added to but must be changed carefully. Once again, if the terms ‘revoke my citizenship’ or anything similar is used, that could be misinterpreted as both citizenship statuses and that person would be left as a non-citizen national.

So now that we’ve seen how easy it is to get out, it’s become very clear why they’ve gone to such links to hide this and set up so many traps and word games on the way.

Let’s go through the process step by step.

This is being shared for educational purposes only. I am not encouraging anyone to do this. Your servitude is your choice. A collection of all the sample documents used will be linked in the description.

[download from this group of file: https://drive.google.com/drive/folders/1a1qJyiSKbIDdXuOo8fGUwHm5aG4rKGP3]

The first step is signing an affidavit in front of a notary. The notary confirms a person’s identity. Most people choose to have about five originals notarized as they will send out three of them and keep two for themselves, usually in separate locations in case one is destroyed, just to be safe.

Let’s go over a sample affidavit. Only that sentence referenced above is required but most choose to add more to make it entirely clear to the other organizations they’ll send this to which might not know that much about this topic.

This document is titled “Citizenship Evidence Affidavit”.

It states,

“I, [you’d put your full name here], being of sound mind and lawful age, do solemnly declare:

“1) The 1st clause of the 14th Amendment states: “All persons born or naturalized in the United States, and subject to the jurisdiction thereof, are citizens of the United States and the state wherein they reside.”.

“2) The 1st clause of the 14th Amendment does not say: “All persons born or naturalized in the United States, ‘are’ subject to the jurisdiction thereof….”

“3) The 1st clause of the 14th Amendment contains two requirements for United States citizenship: (a) that a person be born or naturalized in the United States and (b) that a person be subject to the jurisdiction of the United States.

“4) I am not restricted by the 14th Amendment, because I receive no protection from it and I have no reciprocal obligation to a 14th Amendment allegiance or sovereignty. Thus I owe no obedience to anyone under the 14th Amendment. United States v. Wong Kim Ark, 169 U.S. 649 (1898). Thus, I am not “subject to the jurisdiction thereof….”

The first three statements set up the argument and then that fourth one that we read has a case in it that is referenced that backs up the statement in the fourth section. Let’s continue.

“5) The Department of State document, “Certificates of Non-Citizen Nationality,” located at https://travel.state.gov/content/travel/en/legal/travel-legal-considerations/us-citizenship/Certificates-Non-Citizen-Nationality.html says — in part — in the 3rd paragraph: “Section 101(a)(21) of the INA defines the term ‘national’ as ‘a person owing permanent allegiance to a state.’ Section 101(a)(22) of the INA provides that the term ‘national of the United States’ includes all U.S. citizens as well as persons who, though not citizens of the United States, owe permanent allegiance to the United States (non-citizen nationals).” “

“6) I, hereby, declare that I am a national but not a citizen of the United States.”

So number five proves the existence of the national status. And then that status is declared in number six. Let’s continue.

“7) This Affidavit is submitted to legally and lawfully rebut the fraudulent legal presumption, that I am a “citizen of the United States” under the scope and purview of the 14th Amendment’s Federal citizenship and that such Federal citizenship grants me “civil rights”.

“8) I am “non resident” to the “residency” of the 14th Amendment and “alien” to the “citizenship” thereof; therefore I am not subject to the jurisdictional statements of the United States Code.

“9) As the tax imposed in 26 U.S.C. 1, pursuant to 26 C.F.R. 1.1-1 is on “citizens” and “residents” as contemplated in the 14th Amendment, it is not applicable to me, as I am neither a “citizen” nor a “resident”.

a. Notwithstanding the fact that I may have, previously, filed U.S. Individual Income Tax Returns, such filings were done by mistake as I was unaware that these filings were mandated only for citizens and residents of the United States as contemplated by the 14th Amendment.

“10) Furthermore, I am not a “resident” of any state under the 14th Amendment and hereby publicly disavow any contract, form, agreement, application, certificate, license, permit, or other document that I or any other person may have signed expressly or by acquiescence that would grant me any privileges and thereby ascribe to me rights and duties under a substantive system of law other than the Constitutional Contract of 1787 for the united states of America and of the constitutions for the several states of the Union, exclusive of the 14th Amendment.

“11) I reiterate that I have made the above determinations and made this declaration under no duress, coercion, promise of reward or gain, or undue influence and of my own free will, with no mental reservation and with no intent to evade any legal duty under the laws of the United States or any of the several states.

“12) At any time, I reserve the right to amend and correct wherever necessary or to rescind and revoke this document.

This line allows fixing the affidavit or even changing the status back if one misses being the property of the United States. It was Benjamin Franklin who said, those who would give up essential liberty to purchase a little temporary safety deserve neither liberty nor safety. Let’s continue.

“13) I invite any individual who has reason to believe that I am in error in my facts and conclusions above to file an affidavit stating the contrary facts and conclusions, signed under penalty of perjury before a person authorized by law to administer and witness an oath.”

This line is important to understand. To disagree with the affidavit, they must also sign an affidavit under penalty of perjury. Since everything in it is factually true, they will never do that unless they want to go to court. Finally it states,

“I declare under penalty of perjury, under the laws of the United States of America, that the foregoing is true and correct.”

Once the notary instructs to do so, one would then sign this document, print their name at the bottom and add the date. It is not necessary to sign this one without prejudice as it is not a contract with another party but can be done anyway just in case.

On the back, there is a California jurat for the notary to fill out. How each state handles jurats and notarized documents may differ so that could require more research for other states.

It is important to print it double-sided to assure the proof of notarization stays with the document.

Once that is complete, one would mail out an original copy of the affidavit, one of their original five, to the Department of State or to the Secretary of State themself, to put them on notice of the new status.

The Department of State handles citizenship, as they are the one who hands out passports. Putting them on notice is most important as they have the highest government jurisdiction over citizenship. Most mail this out with a certified return receipt. This will require them to mail back signed proof they have received the letter.

In the package would also be a cover letter, not stapled on.

Sending the affidavit with just a cover letter is considered sending it cold or naked. They cannot respond to a naked affidavit with anything other than their own affidavit, which we discussed why they won’t do. Therefore, this is the ideal start, so it’s already on file and all future notices or applications must be accepted because the status has already been changed.

Getting nothing in response but a return receipt is a sign that everything was done right, as they have nothing left to say. Here is a sample cover letter.

The highlighted parts are to be edited for each individual. An important part to point out is the statement,

“Notice to the principal is notice to the agent. Notice to the agent is notice to the principal.”

This essentially means that notifying the head of the department is notice to all of the employees and notifying an employee is notice to the head of the department.

Another important thing to point out is at the bottom where it says to add a national passport number or social security number. This is optional but will make the process much faster and will be important if you have a very common name so they can identify you. The passport number can be from an expired passport and I would imagine the passport number would be ideal for every agency other than the IRS who would likely prefer social security numbers.

The IRS is put on notice in a very similar way. Once the tracking number confirms the department of state has received the notice, one can proceed to noticing the IRS and other agencies.

The cover letter and package would be addressed to the IRS commissioner and cc’d to the Department of Treasury and franchise tax board of a state. Some states allow other states to handle collecting federal taxes, so research is required.

It is recommended to send the commissioner one of the original five affidavits and to give the Department of Treasury and franchise tax board a photocopy which would be double sided as well.

Here is a sample of the cover letter.

Notice that it says,

“Legal lawful notice. Not to be construed as a filing.”

This part is very important which is why it is highlighted. It is not meant to be edited like the other highlighted portions.

The IRS can charge $5,000 for a frivolous filing fee. By clarifying that this is a notice and not a filing, they are prevented from doing that.

Along with those three letters, there are a slew of other agencies people choose to put on notice with copies of their affidavit. Remember, these copies must be photocopied front and back to include the jurat.

The main agencies people choose are the local agencies. The cover letter would be addressed to the state’s attorney general and some examples of who would be cc’d are the district attorney, the county sheriff, the state highway patrol commissioner, state highway patrol chief of the local division and local police departments.

Some are recommending noticing the county medical examiner-coroner as they may have higher jurisdiction than the sheriff in some areas. It is even becoming common to put the county health director as there have been attempts to give them higher jurisdiction than the sheriff as well.

Here is an example list of who people can choose to cc if they lived in Los Angeles County for example. Some cities have their own police department separate from the LAPD so you’ll see them listed there as well.

Finally, if a national pays payroll taxes, they tend to put their employer on notice as well with an affidavit copy. If they require filling a W-4 form, it’s signed “without prejudice” with your signature.

[TCTL editor’s note: For W-4 instructions, see video creator’s correction and clarification found below the original YouTube video and also found above, directly under the video. Guidance on this is also found with the course and reference materials at nationalstatus.info.]

The word “EXEMPT” in all capital letters is written in the box asking for income and N/A (meaning not applicable) in the boxes such as those asking for your social security number, dependents and marital status.

Around two weeks after the Department of State has received the affidavit, most nationals choose to get a form of identification that reflects their status. This is done through the passport.

They either apply for a passport or renew their passport by mail if eligible. In both cases, an original affidavit, one of the original five copies, is put between the pages of the application. Since the Department of State has the affidavit on file already, they cannot reject the application for the inclusion of the affidavit because the affidavit is already on record and therefore it is true in regards to your citizenship.

Some people cannot renew and must apply for a new one. In this case, some say to avoid using the birth certificate as proof of identity because it’s proof of the identity as a corporate entity, though the affidavit may be enough to counteract that. If required, then you have to go in person and apply for a new passport. Nationals are sure to say they would like a passport that reflects their status and they say nothing else. Just leave it at that.

It is important to also get a passport card. This works as an ID as well as for travel by land or sea in much of North America. A passport book can be obtained as well in that same application for those that like to be able to travel internationally.

The book and card will look identical to anyone else’s. The only difference is what shows up on the computer when it is scanned.

I cannot confirm this next claim as it is anecdotal, but it’s still interesting to hear. One national said that when their passport was scanned at the airport, they were sent in line and a minute later the person ran over to get them, apologizing that they’d been sent to the normal line. They were then sent to the express line for free. It’s speculated they may be classified as a diplomatic courier in that system. They technically are foreign citizens as they are foreign to the United States corporation, so there is a chance this is true. Either way, it is much more common to use this to make a difference in a much more important situation.

The primary purpose of the passport card is to be the new identification card. For example, if a police officer is to pull a national over, the national would hand them the card and ask them to scan it as a passport card. Nine out of ten times, the police officer will let them go.

A government software developer claims that this is because their file will say, “do not arrest” or “do not detain” in big red letters. That again is anecdotal, but the reason isn’t too important as the result has been verified repeatedly by nationals all over the country. Occasionally, the officer will still write a ticket, which would, of course, be signed with “under duress” or “UD 1-308” with your signature.

When this gets to the district attorney’s office, they open up the national’s file, see the national is out of their jurisdiction and throw the ticket away.

One could also send them back the ticket within three days, just to be safe, as any contract can be cancelled within 72 hours. At the top, the word “rescind” would be written, followed by the date and a signature.

Some nationals choose to keep their driver’s license, just in case, as a person does technically need one to drive a registered vehicle. In some states, they will only give licenses to US citizens. In California, though, likely because of how many illegal immigrants live here, people have noticed that when pressing that they are not a US citizen on the computer at the DMV, the question “Are you a resident?” disappears. They then sign it “UD 1-308” and have no problems.

Many choose to return their driver’s license and their license plates to the DMV, asking for their accounts to be closed and cancelled and the data removed. The DMV can be very combative, so it’s often recommended to provide as little information as possible. One could simply say that they and their property will be leaving the jurisdiction of their state’s DMV. Those people that do this choose to buy private plates for their car. Some examples are on screen and links to private plate sellers are in the description below. [see links below video found at YouTube (original) or mirrored copies at Odysee or Rumble.]

Keep in mind, this can only be done by someone who owns their car and is not financing or leasing it. It is important to have the bill of sale as proof of ownership. People often choose to keep their insurance if they already have it. Otherwise, there are insurance companies that will ensure non-registered vehicles. Someone recommended Dairyland Insurance, but I personally cannot speak for them.

There is another word game here that can be confusing, so be sure to ask Roger Sayles if you feel lost. [Roger Sayles website: https://sovereigntoserf.com/]

Technically, people are required to have a license to drive a motor vehicle. Nationals, though, have the right to travel in a private conveyance. That right to travel has been established by many court cases and was even referenced in the final court case we read together on citizens being involved in interstate commerce.

It is important the national states that they are traveling in their private conveyance in response to being told they need a license or license plates to drive a motor vehicle.

The last few steps we are going to speak about here are entirely optional, but beginning to become very popular in this community.

Some nationals choose to file a Freedom of Information Act for a copy of their Department of State administrative file to ensure their affidavit is in it. It is common to wait four to six months.

Some nationals choose to authenticate their birth certificate to take it out of the federal jurisdiction. Personally, I only see that as necessary for when one has to prove their identity with the birth certificate.

Finally, a national can continue to pay into and collect Social Security. Yet many choose to cancel their Social Security number and operate using trusts or alternative numbers the IRS provides.

For more information on the birth certificates and Social Security numbers, look through James C. Lovett’s YouTube channel linked in the description below.

[James C. Lovett’s channel: https://www.youtube.com/@thebadwolf]

That was a comprehensive guide to state citizenship, U.S. nationality, and how U.S. citizens are property. Thank you for listening. I appreciate any feedback.

Feel free to share this with anyone and everyone. You can use this as you please as long as you link back to the original video so people can receive the complete information. Be sure to check the description for all the resources referenced. May we all be free.

[Leave all feedback and comments below the original YouTube video. ]

Cover image credit: TungArt7

A Bridge in Baltimore: A Speculative Analysis

A Bridge in Baltimore, Part Two: A Speculative Analysis

by Joseph P. Farrell, Giza Death Star
April 3, 2024

On Monday last I attempted to gather together some significant and representative articles about the collapse of the Francis Scott Key Bridge in Baltimore harbor after one of its load-bearing pylons was struck by the container ship Dali as it was attempting to leave the harbor. I indicated then that I would offer, in Part Two of the blog, a speculative analysis of what I think might have happened, and, by implication, who might have been behind the incident.

I say “incident” because I do not, as of this writing, believe for a moment that this was a simple and sad accident as the goobernment and the F.I.B. (Federal Investigation Bureau) would have us believe. The government and its spokesmen are inveterate liars, and judging by the articles so many of you gathered and sent and which composed our article “round-up” in Part One, there are many out there who had the same initial reaction to the F.I.B.’s announcement as I: we simply don’t believe the “it-wasn’t-terrorism” narridigm.

But such events require more than just skepticism of government “obfuscations” in order to argue for the incident having been deliberately planned.

In Monday’s blog, I briefly mentioned that in order to understand the event, one might have to seek to situate it in a much wider context than even current geopolitical events such as the Moscow terrorist attacks. I did not, however, specify what that wider context might be, other than to include in the “round-up” of articles an article noting that global positioning systems in the Baltic region of Europe appeared to have been subject to massive jamming and spoofing over a 63 hour period, interfering with aircraft and ship positions during that period. Most assessments agree that this is the result of Russian electronic warfare measures, and on that score, I would concur.

But it is the capability itself that I wished to highlight by including that article, because that capability alludes to three other episodes in recent years that have also exercised my attention, and long-time regular readers here might recognize what they are: the USS Donald Cook Incident, the USS Fitzgerald Incident, and the USS John McCain Incident. In each of these incidents, a US Navy warship was involved. In the last two incidents, merchant ships collided with the warships under circumstances that I regard as peculiar and unusual, and while time and space do not permit me to review all those details here, the explanations of the Navy and the press at the time of the latter two incidents explained them as accidents and the result of poor decisions and training on the part of the officers and crews of the warships, in addition to the poor training on the part of the merchant vessels’ crews that collided with them. Aiding in these explanations are the fact that they occurred in some of the busiest shipping lanes in the world: the Malacca straits near Singapore (in the case of the McCain) and the busy waterways near Tokyo and Yokohama, Japan (in the case of the Fitzgerald). At the time of both incidents, I argued the behavior of the merchant ships that actually did the colliding with the US navy warships was suggestive of those ship’s steerage having been technologically (and perhaps remotely) accessed and controlled, and that the collisions may have been deliberate. At the time, some friends who had spent time in the Navy assured me that my speculations were nonsense, and that the accidents were, indeed, accidents. However, I remained then, and remain now, unpersuaded, and continue to believe that my speculations in this regard may be viable explanations. The relevance of those speculations to the Francis Scott Key Bridge Incident will be immediately apparent to the reader. We’ll return to that point in a moment.

What convinced me that such speculations were a possibility were the two USS Donald Cook Incidents. The first Incident, if the reader does not recall, occurred while the Aegis-class frigate was in the Black Sea in the tense weeks’ and months’ aftermath of the Maiden coup. An “obsolescent” Russian Sukhoi-22 fighter jet approached the ship on a very low altitude attack trajectory, and then apparently engaged some sort of electronic warfare technology that completely shut down the Donald Cook’s sophisticated electronics, leaving the vessel essentially a helpless bit of floating metal in the Black Sea.

Message received: the Donald Cook managed to restore enough of its electronics to limp to the Romanian port of Constanza (for “rest of the crew” as we were told at the time). A few months later, in the Baltic, the Incident was repeated, again with the Donald Cook and, once again, a Russian Sukhoi-22 fighter jet which approached at very low altitude on a mock attack run, and again, interfered with the warship’s electronics. Apparently the “crew rest” in Constanza, Romania had not fixed the problem. Message not received. (And sorry, no, I am not buying the idea that the US navy deliberately provoked the incidents to learn about Russian electronic capabilities, and that the US Navy is perfectly capable of countering them.)

This technological ability implies the possibility that a ship’s systems might be remotely accessed, interfered with, and possibly even commandeered to the extent that a crew no longer has control of the ship. And this in turn implies the possibility that such an event may have occurred with the Dali’s collision with the pylon of the Francis Scott Key Bridge in Baltimore. That something was happening on the Dali‘s bridge and engine rooms is apparent from the video that, by now, we have all seen: the ship makes its way down the channel, loses power, regains it, loses it again, regains it, smoke begins to pour out of a funnel toward the stern, the ship then appears to turn out of the main channel and to starboard and thus toward the southern pylon of the bridge, power goes out and on again, the ship hits the pylon, and the bridge collapses, taking the lives of some pot hole repair crews with it. Notably, as all of this is occurring, road traffic on the bridge continues until it suddenly stops in time for the bridge to be vacant of road traffic just before the collision. This is also a crucial point, for it means that there was communication between the ship and the shore, and that authorities were alerted to a problem on the ship, and to stop traffic from entering the bridge. This in turn means that the crew knew there was a problem, and that a collision was possible. This implies, in its turn, that the crew recognized either that they had lost control of the ship or were about to.

So what do we have? We have (1) power losses, (2) smoke indicating that the ship’s big diesel engines might be being restarted, or some other possibility, (3) a probable notification of shore personnel that controlled access to the bridge by someone in the ship’s crew, or possibly by the harbor pilot, to shut the bridge down, and finally(4) a starboard turn of the ship directly toward the southern pylon. We must not assume that the communication from the ship to the shore to alert the bridge controllers to shut down traffic occurred on the ship’s communications systems. If there was interference with the ship’s electronics (suggested by the power outages), other systems – cell phones, radios, &c – in the possession of the crew might not have been effected and hence might have been used. You’ll note that, in the articles gathered thus far, we have heard little to nothing about the composition of the crew other than that the ship’s master was, suggestively, Ukrainian. We do not know who the harbor pilot(s) was or were, and we know nothing about the crew nor what they might have observed on the ship as all this was transpiring. I find this point to be extremely suspicious, for it might indicate that the crew has been sequestered and deliberately kept from public view in order to insure “they are able to read their lines correctly.” I suggest that these peculiar facts align with the idea of a commandeering of at least some of the ship’s systems by technology, and a crew seeking to regain control of the ship (hence the power outages and warning of shore personnel). Technology is indicated for a very different reason, namely, the requirements of Lloyd’s of London and other major insurers that such ships have redundant systems for steerage and so on. For a ship to collide with a bridge pylon after a perfectly executed starboard turn might indicate not only the failure of redundant systems to work to avoid collision; it might also mean that the steerage was operating, but the warnings from the ship to shore to shut the bridge down might further indicate that the crew lost control of it.

This type of argumentation makes the other indications of a well-planned and executed infrastructure attack even more compelling: (1) the fact that, by collapsing the bridge, US military sealift capability is affected by stranding two sealift ships in the Baltimore harbor, (2) the possible collapse of the bridge onto a major underwater energy pipeline, (3) the closure of the harbor itself, (4) the symbolic nature of collapsing a bridge named for the composer of the lyrics to the USA’s national anthem, and finally, and not least (5) the timing of the attack for a time when the least possible collateral loss of life would occur. Imagine if the attack had occurred at 5PM, or 7AM, at the height of the evening or morning rush hours, and you get the idea: the loss of life would have been much much higher. If one argues, as I am, that the Incident was a deliberate attack and not an “accident”, then this factor of timing indicates the type of player or agency involved: one (1) capable of planning and executing such an event, (2) in possession of the technology to do it (if indeed a technology was involved), and (3) someone deliberately trying to inflict serious damage while minimizing loss of life.

In this respect the speculations of Tom Luongo, whose article I included in Monday’s blog, are well worth pondering. Was it Russia? Are we looking at a potential retaliation by that country for the Moscow terrorist attack? Possibly. Certainly the attempt to minimize collateral loss of life might indicate this. The one key factor that would argue against this being a Russian operation is the timing: there would not appear to be enough time between the Moscow attacks and the Francis Scott Key Bridge Incident to organize such a complex operation, and to position the personnel and (if I am correct) the technology to do it. On the other hand, arguing in favor of a Russian operation is the simple fact that only Russia has demonstrated a technological electronic capability that might include the ability to commandeer a ship’s control systems. (Here, I must make mention of those UFO incidents over Malmstrom Air Force Base, and in Wyoming, where UFOs allegedly remotely and electronically interfered with the electronics of a flight of Minutemen ICBMs, changing their targeting data entirely remotely. As has been noted by Richard Hastings in his book UFOs and Nukes, the Air Force contracted with Boeing to find out what had happened, and Boeing was able to reproduce the incident remotely, implying both that such technology is not ipso facto “extraterrestrial”, and that remote electronic commandeering of such systems is possible). So if it was Russian, what about the timing? We must not rule out the possibility that if this is a Russian response or “horizontal escalation” for the West’s activities in the Ukraine since 2014, that this might be a response to older incidents than the Moscow terrorist attacks, such as the West’s attacks on the Kerch Strait bridge. Viewing it in this fashion removes the problem posed by the timing of it as a retaliation for the Moscow Terror attacks. It might be retaliation for some other, older attack on Russia.

Might this be someone else’s attack? Luongo makes an intriguing case that it may have been, up to and including the sclerotic powers of Europe like the U.K. or France, whose “leaders” like Boris Johnson or President Macron have given ample public testimony to their desire to see the Ukrainian war linger on and on, with the US’s continuing financial support, a support which has obviously wavered in recent months. Could it even be a third party, a non-state actor, intent on sewing enough chaos and confusion – and ill-will – into Russo-American relations? Again, possibly.

In the final analysis, a reasonable case can be made for all these possibilities, but in my opinion, not enough information is yet known to indicate which of these possibilities might be the most likely.

But one thing seems to emerge clearly from the collapsed wreckage, the bent and twisted girders, of the namesake bridge of the author of the USA’s national anthem lyrics: this was no accident. If you believe the F.I.B., then I have a bridge in Baltimore to sell you. So let’s call it what it is: it isn’t the Francis Scott Key Bridge Incident. It’s the Francis Scott Key Bridge Attack. So why the fib of the F.I.B.? Think geopolitics… and insurance… and independent insurance investigators …

See you on the flip side…

Connect with Joseph P. Farrell

Cover image credit: Adm. Linda L. Fagan, commandant of the Coast Guard, Vice Adm. Peter W. Gautier, deputy commandant for operations, Governor Wes Moore, governor of Maryland, and Mayor Brandon Scott, mayor of Baltimore, transit by Coast Guard boat to assess the Francis Scott Key Bridge collapse in Baltimore, Maryland, March 29, 2024. The Key Bridge was struck by the Singapore-flagged cargo ship Dali early morning on March 26, 2024. (U. S. Coast Guard photo by Petty Officer 1st Class Brandon Giles)

The Fury of Europe’s Farmers Shocks EU Technocrats

by Fraser Myers, Spiked
sourced from Technocracy News & Trends
April 1, 2024

The continent-wide fury of EU farmers is blazing a trail straight to the heart of Technocracy, namely, the green agenda, net zero, and the war on energy and food. The late Rosa Koire warned Europe between 2010-2015 about “the blueprint, the comprehensive plan of action for the 21st century to inventory and control all land, all water, all plants, all minerals, all animals, all construction, all means of production, all energy, all law enforcement, all health care, all food, all education, all information, and all human beings in the world.”

The farmers got it and are now fighting for their lives and livelihoods. Technocrats spin out these suicidal policies using their oracle of pseudoscience as their god. However, it is no god but rather base scientism, which C.S. Lewis laid bare in his Abolition of Man (1943).

These are those whose intent is to destroy the earth (Rev. 11:18). Will we stop them before it is too late?

~ Technocracy News Editor

Europe’s farmers are rising up – and the elites are terrified. In France, farmers recently staged a four-day ‘siege of Paris’, blocking major roads around the French capital. In January, thousands of tractors descended on Berlin in Germany, lining the streets leading up to the Brandenburg Gate. In Brussels, farmers have gathered from all over Europe to demonstrate against the EU and pelt the European Parliament with eggs. In the Netherlands, tractors have caused the longest traffic jam in the nation’s history, as part of a years-long battle between farmers and the government. This farmers’ revolt is now truly Europe-wide. From Portugal to Poland, from Ireland to Italy, almost every EU country has been rocked by protests. So what is driving this populist uprising? What do the farmers want?

Farmers in each country have their own specific grievances, of course. But there is a common root to their anger. What connects them is the European Union’s green agenda, which has been imposed on agriculture from on-high. It has made farmers’ lives a misery, sacrificing their livelihoods at the altar of climate alarmism. Bureaucrats who have no idea how farmers work and live, have essentially been condemning farms – many of them run by families for generations – to oblivion, all at the stroke of the regulator’s pen. And farmers are simply not putting up with it anymore.

The first stirrings of revolt began in 2019, in the Netherlands, with the so-called nitrogen crisis. The Dutch Supreme Court ruled that the government was failing to cut nitrogen pollution to EU-approved levels. In response, the Dutch government promised ‘drastic measures’ to cut nitrogen emissions. In all but name, it declared war on its nation’s farmers. Suddenly, the government had turned against one of its most important and impressive sectors. You see, the Netherlands, despite its small size, is the second-largest exporter of food in the entire world, thanks to the world-beating efficiency of its farms. And nitrogen is intrinsic to this efficiency. Fertilisers are rich in nitrogen, and farmers need fertilisers to maximise their crop yields. Nitrogen is also an inevitable byproduct of animal farming. Livestock release ammonia, a compound of nitrogen and hydrogen, through their excrement. The Netherlands has over four million cows, 13million pigs and 104million chickens. Which is a lot of manure and a lot of nitrogen. Any crackdown on nitrogen emissions was always going to hit farmers hard. Even so, the Dutch government’s proposals went even further than anyone could have imagined. It said it would buy out thousands of the most polluting farms and simply shut them down. Other farms would have to cull a proportion of their animals. This would mean slaughtering around half of all the livestock in the Netherlands. In all, this represented an unthinkable act of national economic self-harm.

Thus, the farmers’ revolt was born. Huge protests erupted in 2019. After a brief hiatus during the Covid pandemic, they came roaring back in 2021 and 2022. Dutch farmers blocked roads, railways and canal bridges with tractors and hay bales. They defied government bans to bring tractors into the Hague. Tens of thousands took part in the demonstrations. But the Dutch government did not back down. It kept proposing new targets, new measures and new restrictions on nitrogen. In 2022, the government’s own figures revealed that around 30 per cent of farms would have to close to meet their targets. And last year, it drew up a list of the 3,000 farms that it wants to forcibly close within the next few years.

All of this has been done with the approval and encouragement of the EU. And there is worse to come in the Netherlands and beyond. The absurd nitrogen rules that are threatening Dutch farms come from an EU environmental directive that dates back to the 1990s. But the EU’s eco-mania has intensified massively since then. Farmers now have to contend with the drive to Net Zero, too. According to Laurence Tubiana, chief executive of the European Climate Foundation and the architect of the Paris Climate accords, Net Zero will require ‘the biggest overhaul of farming since the Second World War’. And yet, once again, farmers haven’t been consulted on this. Targets have simply been drawn up by the technocrats and rubber stamped by national governments, without any consideration for their impact on farmers and their ability to produce food.

Under the EU’s so-called Green Deal, every EU member state has to reach Net Zero carbon emissions by 2050. And the EU’s emissions rules for agriculture are especially, insanely, stringent. The punishing green policies don’t stop there, either. The Farm to Fork strategy, announced in 2020, calls for 10 per cent of farmland to be set aside for non-agricultural use. It says that at least a quarter of EU farms should become organic. It says fertiliser use must fall by 20 per cent. Pesticide use must be cut by 50 per cent. And all of this should be done by 2030. Each of these demands would be enough to put thousands of farms out of business on their own. When combined, they pose an existential threat to European agriculture. And if the EU’s laws weren’t bad enough, member states are actually gold plating these regulations. The EU had already demanded the impossible of farmers. Now national elites in Berlin, Paris and The Hague want to go even further.

This is why farmers are out on the streets across the continent. It’s why they’re taking matters into their own hands. It’s why they feel they have no choice but to block roads with their tractors, bring life to a standstill and dowse public buildings with manure. They are determined to remind the powers-that-be just how essential they are to the functioning of modern life.

At first, the elites tried to dismiss the protests. They resorted to their usual playbook. They called the farmers fascists, far right and pawns of online disinformation. But this propaganda campaign has flopped. Not only have these smears failed to demoralise the farmers, they have also failed to turn the public against the protests. In country after country, European peoples are backing their farmers, even as the protests disrupt daily life.

In the Netherlands, where our story began, a farmers’ party briefly managed to storm electoral politics, too. The Farmer-Citizen Movement – or BBB – was set up in 2019 amid the nitrogen-crisis demonstrations. Less than four years later, the BBB swept the board in the Dutch provincial elections. It won the popular vote in all 12 provinces – the first time any party had achieved this in Dutch history. While the farmers’ protests managed to bring tens of thousands on to the streets, the farmers’ party managed to mobilise almost 1.5million voters.

The fury of the farmers has now become impossible to ignore. The usually tin-eared elites across Europe have been forced to listen and respond. In Germany, farmers have got their government to delay planned cuts in subsidies for agricultural fuel. And they have managed to keep their tax breaks on tractors and farm vehicles, which were also under threat. In France, farmers have extracted millions of euros in additional grants. And they’ve put paid to government plans to hike fuel taxes. In Ireland, a deranged government proposal to cull 200,000 cows has quietly been shelved. Even at the EU level, farmers have already chalked up some significant victories. Remember that plan to halve the use of pesticides by 2030? It’s now been torn up.

But the protests aren’t going to stop anytime soon. How could they? These concessions, though welcome, do not go nearly far enough. The green agenda is diametrically opposed to the interests of agriculture. So long as European politicians are committed to Net Zero, then the farmers will always be in their sights. What’s more, the farmers’ cause will continue to resonate with ordinary people, who are also served poorly by their environmentalist leaders, whose policies are pushing up prices and obliterating food and energy security. The farmers are merely the canaries in the coalmine. They were just the first group of people to be pushed to breaking point – and to get organised in response.

The farmers offer a cautionary tale to Europe’s rulers. The green elites assumed that farmers would take their bitter medicine. They had no idea just how devastating their regulations would be to farmers’ way of life. They failed to see the human beings behind the emissions figures on their spreadsheets. And the broader push for Net Zero could soon generate much more resistance, from a much broader section of society. After all, under the current plans, our energy bills are set to soar, as we replace reliable fossil fuels with unreliable renewables. Our trusty gas boilers could soon be ripped out, replaced with expensive and inefficient heat pumps. Older, cheaper vehicles are being banned or taxed off the road in the push towards electric cars. Yet again, the establishment seems to think it can change our way of life and shred our living standards without a peep of discontent. This is bound to provoke an almighty backlash. And the farmers have shown us the way.

Long may the farmers’ revolt continue. And here’s hoping it inspires many more people to take a stand.

Connect with Spiked

Connect with Technocracy News & Trends

Cover image credit: European Commission (Christophe Licoppe)
Demonstration of farmers in the European Quarter in Brussels, Feb 1, 2024
Creative Commons

The Psychological Battle for Truth — and the Power of the Farmers’ Uprising

by Julian Rose
sourced from Activist Post
April 1, 2024

The ‘deep state’ has no power over you. None. It can only try and make you believe it does.

And in this it is very clever, using sophisticated psychological techniques that give the impression of holding the dominant position and exercising the dominant power.

But this is a chimera; and immediately one sees it as such one manifests the authoritative position and the deep state is in check; it can only operate defensively.

This it does by putting up ever greater barriers to freedom of expression, movement and choice.

It knows it’s on the losing side, so has to pull all the tricks in the trade to make itself appear to be in control. It’s a psychological battlefield.

Edward Bernays, the founder of modern advertising, has had much to do with weaponising the powers of perception and deception. He found that you can get people to believe and do almost anything once you learn how to exploit their psyche with carefully chosen imagery and words.

Once you tap into people’s widespread subconscious attraction to the trappings of seductive consumables.

The deep state’s corporate/banker led ‘seeming’ global dominance draws on Bernays’s cunning, using advanced insights concerning how to influence the functions of different areas of the human brain.

The objective is to come up with a blanket like web of virtual signposting pointing to the direction life must go in in order to overcome some purposefully manufactured crisis. A crisis that is claimed will otherwise cook, starve or destroy people and the planet.

People in a state of funk take all this to be real, of course, and plod on with their tunnel vision acceptance of the pathological diktats of the status quo.

The deep state cabal has a mental hold over their perception of what is and is not true, and rolls out the moderators, fact checkers and ‘sudden silencers’ to counteract anything that emerges as an emissary of truth. Many of us have had firsthand experience of this executioner formula.

Nevertheless, ‘we the purposeful people’ are winning through. There is simply too much informative material on the loose for the thought/surveillance police to cover, in spite of their algorithmic interventions.

Their tactic is therefore to try to gain the upper hand by pushing harder on the ‘disaster agenda.’ This is exemplified by the global dissemination of the dystopian agenda laid out in Klaus Schwab’s Fourth Industrial Revolution.

The most ubiquitous cooked-up disaster is, of course, ‘man-made global warming’ – with its stated solution to be the Transhuman. All steps in between are sold as vital to advancing the speed and efficiency of the ‘human to inhuman’ transformation process.

The digitalisation of life is central to the architects of control argument that humanity is incapable of managing itself and that, without their intervention, the outcome will be the complete breakdown of planetary life.

Only a race of soulless computer assisted ‘super beings’ can save the day, say the likes of Yuval Noah Harari, Elon Musk and Klaus Schwab.

Consider how this agenda plays on the psychology of those who have yet to find in themselves the self-assurance to discard that which has no practical sense of purpose and no foundation in basic common sense.

The architects of control count on the majority remaining unresistant to the rolling out of their high-tech hegemonic master plan. So much so that they can freely announce that by following it “You will own nothing and you will be happy.”

In the psychological battle for truth, the perpetrators of the lie have access to a vast storehouse of mind-bending persuasion techniques to make their agenda seem the only choice.

They recognise that when a high percentage of individuals believe themselves to be unable to operate without a mobile phone – they will be sufficiently unfocussed and distracted so as to be unable to rebel against a fateful acceptance of slavery to the big brother of convenience.

Easily manipulated victims of digital mass hypnosis.

Here lies the rub: if the upwardly mobile urban ‘educated’ segment of society sees no problem conducting their lives within a credit card bubble of hypermarket convenience shopping, digital EMF communication systems, computer fed entertainment packages and a well-paid job in a global or trans national corporation – where is the resistance going to come from?

If this genre of people is already too far gone to register an internal kick when faced by a high-level plan to ‘happily’ have all their material assets taken away from them – then who or what is going to raise the alarm?

It looks to me as though only a small percentage of mankind can read the script being outlined for their future behind bars. Only a few can grasp the psychology of the insentient psychopath and his soulless urge to possess and control, at any price.

But once one moves outside the world of Godless urban shopping obsessed nine to fivers and ‘well-educated’ university trained job hunters, a potential to get real starts to emerge.

Amongst those working people who regularly get their hands dirty, who till the fields; build shelters; repair cars; mend pipes; fix electrics and dig drains, the virtual reality digital cybernetic future of the Fourth Industrial Revolution – and Green New Deal – looks like pure fantasy. The ravings of the unhinged.

They don’t need to mentally struggle in order to try to grasp the twisted logic being broadcast by the global media mafia. They simply know in their gut that it’s so much ‘bull’.

It is those who form the foundation of pyramid who hold society together. Who glue together the basic infrastructure which supports our daily lives. And it is from here that an increasing percentage reject the psychology of mental indoctrination and the promotion of a digitalised virtual future.

The ‘Throw out Green Deal’ remarkable, unified farmer uprisings happening in all parts of Europe and beyond are testimony to this. They are rising up against the imposition of phony ‘Net Zero by 2045’ rules that demand an end to farmers working the land and an end to the livestock that keep that land fertile.

These farmers are out in their tens of thousands. In Poland they are mounting month long tractor blockades of cities, supermarkets and border crossings. Coals miners, faced by being shut out by large scale ‘stop global warming’ redundancies, are joining the uprising.

Farmers say they will not cease their disruptions until their demands are met by government and by the EU.

This is the refreshingly undiluted language of genuine defiance.

It has the authorities rattled. Green Deal is, after all, the very backbone of the agenda to enslave us all to a Brave New World of synthetic everything – from food to nature to people.

The general public are in sympathy with the farmers’ actions. Approximately 80% of European citizens are on their side according to opinion surveys.

Getting a solid core of consumers to rise up and participate in this bottom-up movement for the survival of real food and real farming will be vital to maintaining the momentum.

Coming from an unlikely place, a solid earthed uprising is gathering pace. The farmers’ demands are essentially for economic fairness, respect and recognition of the vital roll they play in the food security of the nation.

Under ‘Green Deal’ none of these demands are taken seriously. The WEF solution is not to support the agricultural community but to destroy it!

In the 2024 battle for truth, everyone should behave as resolutely as the farmers. The need is to be uncompromising in one’s face to face dealings with political liars and hypocrites.

We are the trustees of Planet Earth. In order to maintain its balance and equilibrium – we have no choice other than to enter into a pactless fight against all opposing forces.

Those who have land, can grow food and draw water from the well, are the last independent individuals on the planet. They are not about to capitulate to a bunch of psychos in Brussels, London, Warsaw, Washington or Paris – and nor are we.

Everyone’s life is dependent upon having access to nourishing food. Therefore, everyone’s life is dependent upon the survival and future prosperity of the farmer.

Support them now in their hour of need. Their need is also your need.

They have no future – and nor do we – without a lifesaving revolution that re-establishes the priorities for what is actually important in life. Think deeply about this and then act on it without delay.

And if you’re left in doubt – ask farmers who actually controls the food chain. Who is really in the driving seat when it comes to feeding the world?

Rise up, all good people. Take your destiny in both hands. Vigorously join together in forging a great victory for humanity over inhumanity.

Allowing oneself to slide into a state of abject slavery is a doctrine of the graveyard.

All those retaining some life-giving red blood corpuscles know that the road to truth accepts no compromise and can never be subverted by the orchestrated opium of mass indoctrination.

Julian Rose is an organic farmer, writer, broadcaster and international activist.

Connect with Julian Rose

Cover image credit: European Commission (Christophe Licoppe)
Tractors parked and road traffic at a standstill in the European Quarter in Brussels, February 1, 2024 — creative commons

Decoding the “Legal” Word Spells That Trap Us Into a Lifetime of Slavery Within an Upside Down World: Brandon Joe Williams & Luke Storey on Escaping the Tax Slave Matrix

Decoding the “Legal” Word Spells That Trap Us Into a Lifetime of Slavery Within an Upside Down World: Brandon Joe Williams & Luke Storey on Escaping the “Free Range” Tax Slave Matrix

Truth Comes to Light editor’s note:

As we approach one more “tax day” in the U.S., we are seeing interviews everywhere of people who don’t pay taxes or who offer paid memberships to groups that show a way out of taxation. Yet anyone who has looked into our enslavement as United States of America citizens knows the issue is much deeper than taxation.

Many of us older folks have spent decades looking into the bizarre entrapment of people who came to America from all over the world seeking freedom. Having studied and learned from so many — from Jordan Maxwell to Anna von Reitz and David E. Robinson — I found myself at a dead end with the “state national” options wherein one clarifies national status by exchanging current allegiance to the clearly run-amok U.S. government corporation/empire for an allegiance to one of the 50 states in “the union”.

I am truly grateful to all of these researchers as each learned from the other, added additional insight, wrote books, offered workshops, spent untold time and effort helping others, etc. The work of each is priceless. However, while this path clearly revealed clues and offered pieces to the puzzle, it still left us in a state of “obedience” to a group of people we know little about. Personally, I am not seeking new (not even if they are less controlling) masters. My allegiance is to core values that are tied with “do no harm” values of common law and the general understanding of care for others and our world. These are the core values of most spiritual teachings as well. These values can never be owned, controlled or defined by any individual or group.

The work of Brandon Joe Williams has helped me personally to see how our ancestors unknowingly contracted into their own enslavement. Thus Brandon calls his course “Contract Killer”. Brandon turned the light on in the room for me by clarifying the legalese around so many words including “nation”, “state”, “strawman”, etc.

I recently completed Brandon’s (free) course but have found myself learning more from (as well as enjoying) his more-recent conversations with assorted podcasters. His Contract Killer course is a few years old now and his presentations gain strength and clarity as he simultaneously explores, studies and teaches.

I’ve listened to many of these conversations as I sought to understand more for myself and my family — and to share here at Truth Comes to Light. This particular interview (shared below) with Luke Storey is excellent. Luke is studying Brandon’s material and is able to add to the conversation with insights and great questions. The conversation moves forward with intention to share this information as clearly as possible with Luke’s audience.

Brandon’s onestupidfuck.com Contract Killer Course presentations contain a lot of what he considers sexual humor, so these newer presentations, outside of his course, will appeal to those who are looking for something to share with their children (or with others who find the sexual humor to be more of an interference pattern than engaging). Nonetheless, Brandon gained a huge online audience with his approach to teaching this material. He spent (and continues to spend) countless hours in organizing and presenting this information at no charge. He always acknowledges and gives credit to those he learned from along the way. Certainly this work is not all his own, but he has taken this universal conversation a huge step forward in documenting and clarifying this massive, clever “word spell”.

Many of the documents he refers to can be found at the resources page at his website. For my own study, I converted his State National Theory page to PDF so that I could print it out for study. His description of his own nation is found here. Quite a few additional resources are found via dropbox links here.

From personal experience, I can say there is no easy way through this material as we all need to do this work for ourselves. In a sense we are standing on new ground which we need to learn to navigate and we must gain strength as we understand the terrain. Having said that, I will continue to share as much as I can over time to clarify the knowledge needed and steps to take in setting ourselves free from unintentional contracts with parasites.

To this day, many come to America, following the “path to freedom” that is part of America’s legend, only to find themselves trapped in one more nightmare of control. The vision of America is still here for us to recreate but we can only do so if we are aware of the tactics of those who seek to dominate others.

Blind obedience as herd animals is not the path to freedom. Finding a new leader to follow can never be the answer. It all starts with individuals gaining awareness of how we are manipulated, seeing the games played by “the masters” as they move us from one cattle chute to another, and, perhaps, by understanding how to beat them at their own game as we step away from the game altogether.

~ Kathleen

Video available at Luke Storey Rumble, Bitchute & YouTube channels.

Common Law School: Escape the Tax Slave Matrix w/ Brandon Joe Williams | 528 | Luke Storey

by Luke Storey with Brandon Joe Williams
March 19, 2024

Are you ready to have your minds blown and your views on law, personal responsibility, and societal norms completely redefined?

I’m super excited to introduce today’s guest, the revolutionary thinker Brandon Joe Williams. This guy is redefining the rules of how we operate in the world, literally. As a lawyer and the brain behind The Amnesty Coalition, Brandon’s like a soldier of God, leveraging education and forgiveness to break chains we didn’t even know we had.

In today’s epic chat, we stomp through the murky waters of our societal system, revealing how it might be holding us back without even realizing it. Brandon’s got this unique ability to take complex legal jargon and make it understandable, showing us how to legally step out of the Free-Range Tax Slave Matrix and into a life of real freedom.

We’re not just talking theory here; Brandon brings the heat with practical, real-world strategies.
Whether you’re a regular Joe, a police officer, a judge, or even a politician, there’s something in this conversation for you. It’s all about breaking down barriers to freedom and elevating our collective consciousness. It’s not just about financial freedom or finding loopholes; it’s a full-on journey to the heart of what true freedom means in a world that often feels like it’s designed to do the exact opposite.

So buckle up, folks, and prepare for a wild ride into the depths of personal empowerment and societal transformation with Brandon Joe Williams. If you enjoy this conversation, make sure to check out Brandon’s free online course, and watch out for part two of our conversation coming soon.

Chapters:
00:00:00 — 1: Opening
00:03:53 — 2: Understanding Legalese: Defining Straw Man & Public Corporations
00:14:23 — 3: Breaking Down Status Collection: Defining Identities & Location
00:31:26 — 4: Self-Naturalization & Citizenship Legal Processes Explained
00:54:39 — 5: Exploring Sovereignty, Responsibility & How to Move Forward
01:18:39 — 6: Citizenship & Tax Law History
01:35:50 — 7: Overcoming Suppression with Access to Unconventional Knowledge
01:55:58 — 8: The 14th Amendment & What Happens to Our Income Taxes

Transcript:

[00:00:05] Luke: All right, Brandon Joe Williams, this has been a long time coming, man. I’m so stoked to chat with you today.

[00:00:10] Brandon: Yeah.

[00:00:12] Luke: So for those listening, we’ll have an in-person, in-studio chat booked here in a few weeks, and I just got so excited about the stuff you’re doing. I literally couldn’t wait. I’m just like, all right, we’re going to do one online. For that reason and because this information is going to be so new and mind blowing to many people, I think it’s going to require a couple of episodes for people just to get their head around it anyway.

[00:00:43] So as we jump into this, I want to give a shout out to my friend Alec Zeck, who texted me one of your podcasts a couple of months ago. And I was like, oh, you got to check this guy out. He’s going to come on my show. And so here we are. Let me see where I am. I’m on Lesson 17 of 39 of your course, and I’m just having my mind blown.

[00:01:04] So I think what we’ll do– yeah, it’s just I’m obsessed. Anyone that knows me is like, really? Is that all you do know? Yeah, pretty much. So in this one, we’ll do a nice overview for people, and then when you get out here to Texas, we’ll dive into more of some of the higher level complexities around infinite money, and discharging debt, and all of the fun stuff that happens once you get into this.

[00:01:29] Brandon: Yeah.

[00:01:30] Luke: So for those listening, you have already seen the show notes and the title to the show. For you, Brandon, just to set this up, it was probably 20 years ago, I think, when I heard this guy Jordan Maxwell, talking about common law terminology and the birth certificate, and why there’s a bar, and why the judge is sitting up on the thing with the black robe and there’s all this sort of legal ease doublespeak that really makes the world turn in the world of law.

[00:02:02] And so I’ve always found that very intriguing, but when I started to try and actually learn it in a way that I might be able to apply to my life someday, I found there was a huge roadblock because God bless them, all of these boomer patriot types that are teaching some of this law information had illegible 1997 websites.

[00:02:27] And there was no podcast featuring any of these people. Everything is written, not written that well. And so I’d start to study some of this and just basically get stuck and just give up because it wasn’t applicable and it wasn’t presented in here’s how you do it kind of way. It was like, well, there’s this thing out there, but good luck figuring it out.

[00:02:48] Brandon: Yeah.

[00:02:49] Luke: And you’re the first guy I’ve found that’s actually like, cool, I’ve dug in and studied all of this stuff and created your course and other things that you’re doing that actually show people how to do it. So I think that’s why I’ve been so fired up, because it’s a younger guy who speaks my language and seems to get this and is able to convey it in a way that is relatable. So thank you so much.

[00:03:11] Brandon: Yeah. And I say thank you to those people that could barely understand because the thing is that without them, I wouldn’t have had anything to work with to try to– I wanted to take the information that they were trying so hard because they care, because they’re great people. I tried to take a lot of their information, simplify it, add a lot of humor and entertainment value to it, and bring the average demographic age range of somebody who may be interested in it way, way down from that particular demographic.

[00:03:40] So while that is true, and I agree, and I say that a lot myself, I also at the same time try to appreciate a lot of what they did because if it wasn’t for what they did, such as even Copper Moonshine Stills and GMC, Lovett, and all these guys, I probably wouldn’t have never done any of this.

[00:04:00] Luke: Yeah, yeah. Me too. And I didn’t mean to be disparaging against them.

[00:04:03] Brandon: No, I know.

[00:04:04] Luke: It’s me expressing my frustration of going, I think there’s something really interesting and potentially life changing and transformative here to get an understanding of what really makes the world tick. And then digging into it and being like, okay, well what do I do with this?

[00:04:20] It’s frustrating when you can only be taken to a certain point. So maybe a good place to start would be– it’s funny, we’re in a selection year now, and I look on social media, and I see all these people fighting over the politician they want or don’t want.

[00:04:37] And as I learn more about this common law world, I’m really seeing the futility in arguing about politics because if someone has really taken their life into their own hands in a lawful way, it almost seems like it doesn’t matter who the politicians are because they’re essentially just c-level executives of various corporations that are really running things. So I think that’s something that’s very freeing about this as well. Maybe let’s start out in breaking down the three general types of law, land, air, and sea.

[00:05:21] Brandon: Yeah. Well, could we actually start with status correction? Would you mind? I think that would be more–

[00:05:28] Luke: Okay.

[00:05:28] Brandon: We can swing over to that a little bit later. So status correction. I was actually talking with someone the other day about this, and it’s a term that you’re starting to see more and more and more with all of this stuff.

[00:05:40] And it’s not really well defined even within our own community, if you’ve noticed that. No one’s ever really stopped and said, what does that even mean? And I was thinking about it yesterday. I was doing a pre-call with a very big show that will go unnamed for now.

[00:06:00] And he’s asking about status correction and I’ve been dealing with status correction for 20 years. And I go, well, what is status correction? And he goes, uh. And I realized. I was like, we talk about this all the time. And even within our own group, we don’t really totally know what that even means if we were to define it, let’s say in a courtroom.

[00:06:21] Because everything’s in my life is going into courtrooms and litigation now. So I’m starting to think like this all the time. Status correction. Status correction. What is that? Explain that to the jury. So I was thinking about that a lot over the past week, what is status correction?

[00:06:37] And I think I’ve developed what I would consider to be a good definition for it, which is two things. First and foremost, it’s the definition of the word person and realizing that you’re actually two different persons. So the definition of the term person means an individual or an organization.

[00:06:56] And if you look in the tax code, such as the Internal Revenue Code, Title 26, the definition of person is an individual, a trust, estate, partnership, association, corporation. Could be any of those things. So when you were born, there was a corporation that was made of your name in all capital letters, and that’s what the social security account is.

[00:07:18] And that’s what a lot of these different accounts are. That’s what all your banking bills come in this particular name. And a lot of people use the term the strawman to for describing that thing.

[00:07:30] So there’s all this chaos and confusion, and people say, straw man, and all this stuff, blah, blah, blah. And it goes on and on and on, but no one stops and says, what is straw man? So from the definition from Cornell Law School, which I’m reading here– I can do a screen share.

[00:07:45] We’re going to talk as though we’re not screen sharing for the audio audience, but for the video audience, I try as hard as I can to show everything I talk about. That way I’m not just some whack job who’s lost his mind on some show, right?

[00:08:00] Luke: Love it.

[00:08:01] Brandon: So here we have Cornell Law School, strawman. Strawman is a third party that holds property in intermission for the sole purpose of transferring it to another. Now, this is very, very interesting because if you go to my website, I have an old definition of the term attorn, such as attorney. This definition comes from the American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language fifth Edition.

[00:08:34] Attorn has three definitions. Definition one is to recognize or bring about a transfer, especially of property. Number two is to transfer something to another. Number three is to turn or transfer homage and service from one lord to another. This is the act of feudatories, vassals, or tenants upon the alienation of the estate. So you have this definition of attorn, which is what attorney means, which means to transfer.

[00:09:11] I laugh because they say, there’s a lot of guys like Dan S Kennedy. He’s one of my favorite marketing guys, and he says, an attorney should never be broke because it’s the only profession where you can legally steal. And literally, the word attorn means basically to steal, no joke.

[00:09:30] So it’s funny because people don’t like attorneys. Well, that’s because that’s the name attorn. It means to turn away from, to turn away from God, to transfer ownership, to transfer property. And then you have the definition of the word strawman. It’s a third party that holds property in intermission for the sole purpose of transferring it to another.

[00:09:53] So an escrow account could be a strawman, and then the attorney is the one getting the objects or things into the escrow, thus transferring its ownership through legalities and law, which is probably in some way illegal, even though it happens. So attorn and strawman actually go together pretty nicely, but the term that I use, the terms that I like, the terms that are actually more clear about what is the actual name of this particular thing that is created when you were born is actually these two terms, which I’ll say into the audio.

[00:10:37] So the first term that I really like comes from the Black’s Law Dictionary. It’s called Public Corporation. Very, very clear definition. We don’t need to go off onto some conspiracy theory about this. We just need to read the definition verbatim. And it’s very, very open, very clear, and very upfront as to what it is and how it works.

[00:11:00] A public corporation is one created by the state for political purposes and to act as an agency in the administration of civil government. I’m going to read that one again. It’s very important because it has everything to do with this whole status change, and taxation, and naturalization, and nationality. This is an important part of all of this information.

[00:11:26] Public corporation. A public corporation is one created by the state for political purposes and to act as an agency in the administration of civil government. So it’s basically like a middleman, or you could almost go so far as to say it could it be used as a strawman? Could it be a third party that holds property in intermission for the sole purpose of transferring it to another via an attorney?

[00:11:58] Sure, it could. That’s not what it is. That’s not what it is in its most basic form, and it’s most basic form it’s just a corporation that’s used as some sort of intermediary or relay station between the government and an individual. Whether it’s good, or bad, or evil, or horrible, or wonderful, that’s not really established in this definition.

[00:12:19] And that’s what I like, because it’s not really intrinsically evil. That’s the other problem. It depends on what you know and how it’s used. Another definition that’s very important that people should know, another way to describe this particular organization or corporation that’s born out of your birth certificate when it’s processed at the Department of Health and Human Services is ens legis, which is spelled E-N-S L-E-G-I-S.

[00:12:49] Definition of ens legis from the Black’s Law Dictionary is a creature of the law, an artificial being as contrasted with a natural person applied to corporations considered as deriving their existence entirely from the law. And then here I have the Title 26, the Internal Revenue Code Definition of the word person, which is probably one of the most important things to ever know in all of law and all of status correction.

[00:13:20] The term person shall be construed to mean and include an individual, a trust, estate, partnership, association, company, or corporation. So when it comes to status correction, you realize that you’re actually two different persons. You are a corporate body, and you are a living body, or human body, or man, whatever, flesh and blood, however you want to say it.

[00:13:54] In law, they call a human body or flesh and blood natural person. Now, if you dig down that definition far enough, you’ll find that they could possibly also be talking about artificial people within the definition of natural persons. So there is a bit of a nefarious and unclarity to the word natural person.

[00:14:17] But in general, especially if you want to operate in the courts like I do, where you’re actually in court a lot and dealing with court cases and litigating to get things done, you will need to operate as though you as the living being is a natural person in the law, even though that may not be entirely true.

[00:14:35] But if you don’t take that as truth to some degree or another, then you really just can’t even operate in the courts at all. It’s just not possible. Their terminology ends at that point in terms of what is a person.

[00:14:50] Luke: So another term that you hear people use in terms of status correction, and we will be defining more of this for those listening that are like, what are you even talking about, is they’ll use the legal fiction. So you’re born as a human being and then you’re issued this birth certificate that gets recorded and creates this ens legis or fiction person, etc.

[00:15:14] And so we’re walking around in a duality essentially, is the way I look at it. It’s like you, the living flesh person, and then there’s this micro corporation that’s been created, and that’s what’s interfacing with the government and required to pay taxes and all these things that we don’t want to do. But would you say a legal fiction is a viable way to frame that as well?

[00:15:37] Brandon: Well, yeah. Even in the definition of the term ens legis, a creature of the law, an artificial being as contrasted with a natural person. That’s an unaltered definition, straight out of the dictionary, literally.

[00:15:51] Luke: Got it.

[00:15:52] Brandon: So the first part of status correction, which I believe is more of a liquid understanding, it’s a lifestyle and not a piece of paper, like what you see a lot of people talking about. It’s just a bunch of paper that you sent off once and now all of a sudden you run a status correction. I don’t believe that at all. I used to believe that until I started to understand it more. And now I think it’s more of a martial art and a lifestyle, and it’s a lot more simple as well.

[00:16:18] So there’s two parts to “status correction”. The first one is persons. What persons are here? What persons are at play? And then what are the various persons? So when you put a credit card into a credit card machine, you’re actually producing currency or funds out of thin air.

[00:16:42] What is the only institution in this world that is allowed in the law to produce brand new currency out of thin air? The answer to that question is the word bank. So the all caps name is a public corporation. The all caps name is a bank. The all caps name is a lot of things. Anything that allows the government to interface between a human being and the government is basically operated through the confines of that public corporation.

[00:17:10] So the public corporation has many functions. It has banking functions. It’s a known fact in the corporate world that corporations give you limited liability and commercial activity. So the beautiful thing is that you can operate into the government with complete immunity as long as you operate into the government using your agency that was developed for the purpose of– let me reread it because I don’t like to just–

[00:17:42] A public corporation is one created by the state for political purposes and to act as an agency in the administration of civil government. When you use that person as an agency in the administration of civil government, you also get limited liability in everything that occurs in those transactions because the person that you are using, the public corporation, is the one with financial and legal responsibility, which I know is insane for most people hearing this for the first time.

[00:18:14] Probably breaking your skull, maybe feeling like glass. That’s normal. That’s what this is. And there’s really no way to really get around some of those feelings and how people may feel about that. That’s how this works, and that’s what this is. And some of it is hidden. A lot of it is not.

[00:18:32] When you get into the actual court and you start operating in the court, you can have full blown conversations with judges about this, and they know exactly what you’re talking about, and they will assist you to help you figure out which persons are in play, what are they, what are their responsibilities, and how does this all work?

[00:18:48] This is real. This is how it really works. Most people that are not involved in the court systems do not know any of this information. And the problem in status correction is that you are identifying with this particular corporation saying that you are this corporation, thus creating one person out of two different persons.

[00:19:13] That is a big, big issue. So you say the word status correction. For example, let’s say in a religious atmosphere. Some people believe, such as myself, that I am a spiritual being that inhabits a body. There are two different bodies, two different characteristics, or two different persons, or two different entities or two different awarenesses at play.

[00:19:39] You have the non-physical spiritual awareness, which is myself, the seat of creativity. And then you have the physical body, which is an awareness. The way that law operates, it’s exactly the same thing. If someone believes as though they are their physical body, they are two different awarenesses operating as a single unit.

[00:20:06] When it comes to status correction, you need to realize that you are not this public corporation ens legis. In the confines of the law, you are a natural person that operates the public corporation or ens legis as an agency in the administration of civil government.

[00:20:30] Luke: So from one respect then you’re acting as essentially an attorney on behalf of your corporate identity, the ens legis.

[00:20:43] Brandon: Precisely. To operate in America, to operate in law, to operate in banking, you are an attorney on behalf of the ens legis public corporation. So you can use terms like I am the agent on behalf of the ens legis. I am the attorney. In fact, in regards to the ens legis, I am the representative of the ens legis.

[00:21:11] These are all valid terms, and people may try to tell you that they’re not, but they very, very much are. And when you get into actual litigation and you get in front of an actual judge, especially a federal judge, they respect the fact that you actually know what’s going on, and you aren’t many, many terms that they use for people who are– even the word dolt, which is funny, D-O-L-T, the definition is a stupid person. What term uses the word dolt in it?

[00:21:44] Luke: Adult.

[00:21:45] Brandon: Adult. Literally, you are a dolt, right?

[00:21:49] Luke: That’s great.

[00:21:50] Brandon: But the thing that at the same time, you also have the term idiot, legal definition of idiot. One of the legal definitions of the word idiot is a private person, meaning somebody who’s not involved in any sort of legal capacity.

[00:22:07] So if they have you in a courtroom and they say you’re an idiot, then you could actually say, well, yeah, I don’t really know a lot about all your legalese and all your goofiness. And that’s actually one of the terms, the idiot. I want to find it. Maybe idiota is actually the actual– idiota, legal definition without digging through all sorts of things.

[00:22:34] Let me see if I can find it. A private man, one not in office, in common law, an idiot or fool. So you see here, these terms are really interesting because you can actually go and say, I’m an idiot. I’m a private man. I’m not involved in all of this goofiness.

[00:22:57] And that’s actually one of the definitions when you say the word adult. A dolt, what is that? It’s a stupid person. So my whole platform, and Luke’s aware of this, is all about the definitions of words and terms and not just using words and terms loosely. The word strawman is used very loosely.

[00:23:18] And you can go online, and you can find 580,000 people talking about that term, but not one of them will tell you it’s a third party that holds property in intermission for the purpose of transferring it to another. And that’s what it actually is. It’s not this nefarious, vague, God knows what. It’s almost like an escrow account essentially.

[00:23:42] I’ve heard this term, transferring utility. That might be another term that could be used for strawman, but strawman is something very specific. Now, that’s the first part of this status correction. How many persons are there? What is a person? Who are you as a person as a relation to the other persons in your life?

[00:24:08] If you have four corporations, four businesses, you actually are the agent on behalf of four corporations, four persons, and then your ens legis is also a person. And then within the confines of a legal action, you are a natural person. So if you have a Social Security Number and you have a birth certificate and you have a business owner, and you own two businesses or four businesses, you have however many businesses you have plus two additional persons in your life that you are operating.

[00:24:41] So you would have, in that case, six persons that you are operating. And you can think of these persons almost as game pieces, like monopoly pieces, the car, and the hat, and the little scruffy dog, and the iron. So you have six of these pieces in this game, and all of those pieces are considered persons in the law.

[00:25:11] So if you aren’t aware of that and you’re operating as though you are just one person, you are in an incorrect status. And that’s why the term status correction is correcting an incorrect status. That’s number one.

[00:25:33] Now, the second part of status correction is location. Where are all of these pieces located? How do you move these various playing pieces around? And what are the benefits and pitfalls of these various locations these pieces could be in? That’s the second part. So we’re going to go through–

[00:25:53] Luke: Because location determines jurisdiction, and jurisdiction is the whole game, right? That’s what–

[00:25:58] Brandon: Location determines jurisdiction. It also determines taxation. It determines a lot of things. Location is very important. I would say knowing which person’s which and having the identities worked out is probably a little bit more important than location. But location is very, very important. It’s number two in line.

[00:26:15] There’s nothing else at all, in my opinion, in terms of what status correction is. There’s just identity and location. That’s it. So when it comes to location, we’re going to start with 28 USC 3002. The 28 signifies the title, which is just the section of the United States Code. And then the second number, the 3002, represents the subsection inside of that title.

[00:26:42] So 28 USC 3002 can be typed into Google, just like that, and it’ll pop right up. I like Cornell Law School because Cornell Law, it takes all of the special definitions that are involved in these particular things, which some of them are really crazy and enraging. It’ll make those particular words clickable.

[00:27:03] So you can go right to the special definitions and never miss one. That could really, really be a big pitfall for you. Other websites, a lot of the other ones don’t do that for you. Cornell is very nice. So we’re going into Subsection 15. It says here, United States means Subsection A of that 15, is a federal corporation.

[00:27:23] Luke: Boom. There it is.

[00:27:23] Brandon: So United States is a federal corporation. Now, we already know. So as a corporation, a person, yes it is. Okay. So we’ve got a person now. Now, where is that person located? We’re going to go to a different body of law called the Uniform Commercial Code. Now, in the United States code, the different sections go by titles. In the Uniform Commercial Code, the different sections go by what’s called articles.

[00:27:56] So in the Uniform Commercial Code, we’re going to go to Article 9, Section 307. And the way that you write that is UCC 9-307. We’re going to go down to Subsection H, says here, location of United States. Below that, it says the United States is located in the District of Columbia.

[00:28:29] So we have a person, and that person is located inside the 10 miles square radius called Washington, DC. That’s probably pretty shocking for most people. Okay, so we have this location. So everyone thinks that United States is this gigantic sector, which includes all of North America. That is entirely and completely false.

[00:28:56] United States, we actually don’t know exactly where it’s located because you could say it’s located on the Southwest corner of District of Columbia. It could be located on the northeast corner of District of Columbia. It could be in the center. We also have the fact that District of Columbia is 10 square miles.

[00:29:21] How many square miles, and what shape is that zone called United States within the District of Columbia? We don’t know. I’ve never seen it anywhere. All we know is that the United States is located in the District of Columbia. We don’t know where. We don’t know how big, but we do know that’s where it’s located. Okay. So I usually just say it’s just all of DC because we don’t know where in DC it’s actually located.

[00:29:51] Luke: Right. Let me pause you for one second there just to try to give a bit of a 30,000-foot view. So we think that we live in a country called the United States when in fact we live in a country called the United States of America. So there’s, again, this duality. There’s this corporate infrastructure that’s been superimposed upon the original country.

[00:30:19] And then as an individual living person, we have another duality because there’s the person on paper, the ens legis. And then there’s the actual living, breathing human being. So we’re in this world where I would say 99.999% of the people living in this country, and we can talk about other countries a bit later, but just focusing on the US right now, is that there’s the real world and then there’s this legalese, superficial world that’s been superimposed upon it.

[00:30:52] Yet most of us don’t even know that the secondary world exists because that’s the only world we think is real. And underneath that is this foundational world where you’re a living person on a territory of 50 states. Can you take us back to the ratification of the 14th Amendment in 1871, when this trickery began to help us get amnesia as to the reality that we’re living in?

[00:31:25] Brandon: Well, would you mind if I just completed the location part and then we can jump straight into that? We’ll jump straight into that right afterward because I want make sure that we clean up because there’s only two parts to this thing called status correction, and location is an important aspect of it.

[00:31:39] But once we do that, I’d love to because it is important. How did all this start and what happened? Once we finish this conversation, that conversation will be very, very easy to go over.

[00:31:51] Luke: Perfect.

[00:31:52] Brandon: The next one we’re going to go to is 42 USC Section 9102. We’re going to scroll down to Subsection 18, and we’re going to see it says here, United States citizen means, a, any individual who is a citizen of the United States by law, birth, or naturalization. Law means that it was created under the laws of, or is contracted into the laws of the United States. Birth means born in the United States, which is difficult because we don’t actually know exactly where it’s located in Washington DC. And then we have naturalization.

[00:32:32] Naturalization, in my opinion, is where all the fun begins and ends. Naturalization is where all the excitement is, and it’s where status correction actually occurs. So naturalization, the definition comes from 8 USC 1101, Subsection A 23. And the definition is so simple and so powerful that it’s extremely shocking.

[00:32:58] And it took me a long time to be able to swallow this definition because I’m always thinking there’s got to be something nefarious here. There has to be some fine print. There has to be something more to this. And I was digging around, and bashing around, and hunting around, and I just couldn’t have the fact that this could possibly be true.

[00:33:15] And after some time of not really able to find anything underneath this and realizing that this is actually pretty clear and it actually is this crazy and this simple and this powerful, it’s mind blowing. And it has become the centerpiece for all of what I would consider status correction.

[00:33:33] The term naturalization means the conferring of nationality of a state upon a person– remember, person– after birth, by any means whatsoever. And you may feel like you’re in a full-blown daze, like a boxer just hit you in the head. And you might feel that way for a month about this definition. I assure you.

[00:34:05] Luke: Dude, when I first heard you talk about that definition, I’m like, there’s no way that it can be that way. It’s like, that can’t be true, especially the by any means whatsoever, which is essentially you sending a few affidavits off going, I’m now naturalized here or there, or wherever, and it must be followed. It’s like some of this stuff is so–

[00:34:29] Brandon: Correct.

[00:34:29] Luke: A, on one hand, it’s confusing. But on the other hand, some of it is so simple that one can’t even believe that it could be that easy to essentially leave the matrix lawfully. It’s insane.

[00:34:45] Brandon: It’s literally open sesame. No joke. No joke. Open sesame. So what this means is we’ve already covered that you have this monopoly board, you have your car, you have your top hat, you have your iron, you have your scruffy dog. Now, each of those things, and your ens legis would be in there. That would be the, whatever, other one.

[00:35:08] And then you have the natural person, which, again, that’s a little bit tricky, but some people are going to freak out. People who are on my side of the equation on all this, they hear the word natural person. They’re like, no, it’s not. Because of all this stuff. And there is some truth to that. But again, to operate at all within the confines of the courts, you are a natural person, which can definitely be rebutted as an assumption, but I use it. It’s fine.

[00:35:31] It’s not the end of the world. When you understand how all this works, the dangerousness of being considered a natural person goes down by 99% or 99.9% anyway. So the danger is being identified as a ens legis. That’s where all the danger is. Let’s cover this.

[00:35:49] So how does the monopoly game work when it comes to what’s called status correction? Okay, so first and foremost, you thought you had one playing piece. Now you’re learning, you have a whole bunch of playing pieces. Some people listening to this, people who have all sorts of estates, and trusts, and corporations, you’ve got all sorts of playing pieces. You might have 35 or 55 or 100 different playing pieces.

[00:36:13] If you’re a real estate investor and you put all your real estate, and trusts, and estates, you have so many persons, it’s unbelievable. You might have 35 or 45 persons. And your children are also two persons each, by the way. So you have two persons for each child. So you don’t actually have, in the legal world, one child. You have two persons for your children per child.

[00:36:38] Now, the second part, location is how do you move all of these playing pieces around on the board? You don’t roll a dice. You don’t ask for permission. You literally just say, and I am not kidding, and most people listening to this will not believe me– it’s okay because I didn’t believe it for a long time either.

[00:36:58] You grab your car, or your little dog, or your little iron, and you pick it up and say, I confer the nationality of the state of Boardwalk upon this car after birth by any means whatsoever. And you take the car, and you place the car on Boardwalk, and you are now at Boardwalk. I am not kidding when I say this.

[00:37:24] So status correction, most people will say is a one-time thing. You send in some papers, and now you have corrected your status. You can change the location of all of your game pieces 1,000 times an hour if you wanted to. You could move the dog, and the iron, and the car onto every single spot on the entire monopoly board, thousands of times per hour.

[00:38:03] So let’s say, for example, you wanted to operate in all 50 states inside of the corporate states. Because if United States is located in the District of Columbia, where do you think State of California is located? It’s also a corporation located in the District of Columbia. Now, let’s say you wanted to operate commerce in all 50 states. It’s very easy.

[00:38:31] You create 50 persons, 50 corporations, 50 trusts, 50 associations, 50 partnerships, and you naturalize each of the individual 50 persons into each of the 50 corporate states. For example, I can create 50 corporations called Brandon Joe Williams, California; Brandon Joe Williams, Utah; Brandon Joe Williams, New Mexico; Brandon Joe Williams; Texas, and I can confer the nationality of State of California upon Brandon Joe Williams, California, after birth, by any means whatsoever, and Brandon Joe Williams, California, that playing piece is now located in state of California, which is located in Washington, DC, which I know, again, is completely batshit insane.

[00:39:41] On a scale from one to 10 billion, it’s a 10 billion on the crazy scale, but I’m telling you that’s what this is, and that’s how it works. And those two things, one being identity, two being location, is status correction. And it’s not this, like, you send in some documents one time and it’s all– yes, that’s part of it. That is a correction of status.

[00:40:11] But getting up into martial arts level with this stuff is you can move and change, and you can have more persons. Let’s say you start losing the game. Put 100 more playing pieces on the board. Create 100 more persons. Nothing’s stopping you. You can locate all those persons anywhere you want.

[00:40:31] There’s no way you can lose. When you realize how this really works and you realize how identity and location really works, you can’t lose. You can’t lose ever, ever, ever, ever, ever, ever, ever, ever, ever, ever, ever. It is a physical, emotional, spiritual, financial, and legal impossibility that you could possibly lose.

[00:41:00] Now, when you say that you, which you’re actually referring to the ens legis, is a US citizen or is located in state of California, which we’ve already covered– it’s a sub corporation of United States, which the proof on that is you can find State of California, State of Utah, State of Texas, all listed on Dun & Bradstreet as businesses, which I’m not going to get into all that because the Dun & Bradstreet website irritates me sometimes. I can’t search very well in there.

[00:41:34] So when you go to voter registration and they have your name in all capital letters and they say, where is this person located? You’ll never notice it until now. Now you’ll start to notice this terminology. Like for example, when you get your driver’s license write the name of the person who is applying for a driver’s license.

[00:41:53] Very tricky. Very, very tricky. Because now you got to think identity, number one. Which identity are they referring to and how and why? So when you do voter registration or when you fill out a W-9 tax form, the bottom of the W-9 tax form states in Section two, which I will read it verbatim, I’m not going to paraphrase it.

[00:42:18] Section two, under the certification section, under penalties of perjury, I certify that, number three says, I am a US citizen or other US person. Where it says, sign here right next to where it has the little arrow for the signature, it says, signature of US person. You were not a US person until you said you were a US person.

[00:42:52] Luke: You just naturalized yourself.

[00:42:54] Brandon: You just naturalized yourself.

[00:42:56] Luke: Yeah.

[00:42:56] Brandon: You naturalized yourself with your driver’s license. You naturalized yourself with voter registration. You naturalized yourself with your passport. You naturalized yourself all over the place.

[00:43:08] Luke: Marriage license.

[00:43:09] Brandon: Marriage license, concealed carry permit, all the good stuff. Anytime that you sign under penalty of perjury that you are this ENS LEGIS, and this ens legis is located in the District of Columbia or State of California, or State of Utah, or State of Texas, you are conferring the– now, the thing is that on all these documentations, they are not referring to the natural person. They’re actually referring to the ens legis. So you are not actually naturalizing yourself as a natural person into any of these things.

[00:43:39] You’re actually unknowingly identifying yourself as the ens legis, and then you’re naturalizing the ens legis into the state after birth, by any means whatsoever. Now, traffic laws associated with State of California only apply to people who have contracted in and naturalized as residents of State of California.

[00:44:10] A ticket is a complaint. The word complaint is a lawsuit. All lawsuits when they first start, the first document that’s filed is called a complaint, unless it’s a petition, which is a little different. But just to keep it really simple, it’s almost always going to be what’s called a complaint. A complaint is a lawsuit.

[00:44:30] So what a ticket is is it’s a micro lawsuit for breach of contract. You have naturalized into State of California through voter registration. Usually it’s voter registration is one of the best ways that they can get you on the naturalization end.

[00:44:52] So just to keep it simple, US citizen is somebody who lives in United States. United States is located in the District of Columbia. Very simple. Very, very simple. So now you got to ask yourself, before we get into voter registration, I’m going to show one other thing here. So if we go up from naturalization and we go up just a couple of points to 8 USC 1101 Subsection A 21, we have another term here, another option.

[00:45:22] It says here, the term national means a person owing permanent allegiance to a state. This is a complicated thing. So first off, we have the word person. Could be a corporation, association, trust, partnership, whatever. Permanent– people get really tripped up over this word, which is great. Cornell’s great.

[00:45:47] They make it clickable. Boom. We can go right to it. The term permanent means a relationship of continuing or lasting nature as distinguished from temporary. But a relationship may be permanent, even though it is one that may be dissolved eventually at the instance either of the United States or of the individual in accordance with law. This is a trap word.

[00:46:07] Luke: That’s crazy, dude

[00:46:08] Brandon: This word means absolutely nothing. They put it in here just to trip people up, I guess. I don’t know why it’s here. It means it’s totally an oxymoron. It doesn’t have any definition. It’s circular, and it means absolutely nothing at all whatsoever. You can remove this word from this definition, and it’ll make absolutely no difference legally as to what this definition means.

[00:46:29] And it actually clears up the term very well. So let’s go ahead and just remove this and reread this word. The term national means a person owing allegiance to a state. Very simple. Very, very, very simple. Now it’s starting to take shape. I can think with that. That’s not too hard to think with. Now what we’re going to do is the term allegiance. I have a special document that I give away for free on my website for people to attach to their DS-11 passport application form. I believe you used this one, right, Luke?

[00:47:08] Luke: Indeed.

[00:47:09] Brandon: So we’re going to look up the definition of allegiance here, and we’re going to look up a few pieces of information in terms of how this works. So the term allegiance is something that a lot of people who are into the freedom movement and that kind of thing have an issue with. Because they think to themselves, well, I don’t want to pledge allegiance to the United States now that I know what it is. But here we go. Check this out.

[00:47:33] In Black’s Law’s second edition, allegiance is defined as the following. By allegiance is meant the obligation of fidelity and obedience, which the individual owes to the government under which he lives, or to his sovereign, in return for the protection he receives. It may be an absolute and permanent obligation, or it may be qualified and temporary.

[00:48:04] So the thing is that they’re not telling you you have to do– they say permanent, but then they define it and it destroys itself. So the thing is that it’s not actually absolute and permanent unless you would like it to be. It’s simply a statement of qualified and temporary allegiance. They will still issue you a passport in that way. And the way it works is as per 22 USC 212, it says here, no passport shall be granted or issued to or verified for any other persons than those owing allegiance, whether citizens or not, to the United States.

[00:48:43] Luke: That’s insane, dude.

[00:48:46] Brandon: And then we have another section here, 22 CFR 51.2. A passport may be issued only to a US national. Okay. What’s a US national? US national is defined in that same section right by where we saw naturalization in national. The term national of the United States means, a, a citizen of the United States, or, b, a person who, though not a citizen of the United States, owes permanent allegiance to the United States. Now think about this. Do you need to be located in the United States or even speak English to owe allegiance to the United States?

[00:49:35] Luke: No.

[00:49:36] Brandon: No, you do not. A person who is not living in Washington DC but pledges their allegiance with a unqualified or qualified statement would qualify as a person owing allegiance to a state. That state is called United States. So that person is now a national of the United States, or another way they put it on the I-9 Employment Eligibility verification form, a non-citizen national of the United States. Now, why is this important? You can see here on the I-9 for the video peeps, Section A, a citizen of the United States, Section B, a non-citizen national of the United States.

[00:50:27] If you scroll down, list of acceptable documents, it says here employees may present one selection from list A or a combination of one selection from list B and one from list C. In order to work, you have to establish identity, and you have to establish employment authorization. What does it say here on list A that proves both identity and employment authorization instantaneously, Subsection number one? What does it say right here?

[00:50:59] Luke: US passport, or US passport card.

[00:51:02] Brandon: So if you pledge allegiance to the United States, you are issued a passport. All you need to open bank accounts to get utilities hooked up to your house. To work in the United States is a passport. You do not need anything else. You do not need a registration card, a school ID. You do not need a Social Security number.

[00:51:25] You do not need absolutely anything else at all whatsoever to operate entirely in America as an American as if you were born and raised here. All you need is a passport. And all you need to be eligible to get a passport is to pledge allegiance to the United States.

[00:51:45] Luke: It’s just insane. You know what comes to mind when we’re going over this stuff and something I’ve pondered a lot as I’ve been studying is I feel so bad for people that want to come here and are excited to become a US citizen. And it’s such a paradox that if you are officially a US citizen, you essentially have no rights.

[00:52:09] You’ve unknowingly volunteered. And this is for people that were born here and people that are coming here. The Bill of Rights, the Constitution, these things that we claim protect our rights actually don’t apply to a US citizen. It’s like being a US citizen is actually a lower grade of citizenship than not being one, than being a state national, or whatever you want to call it.

[00:52:35] There’s many names for someone who has this. We’re talking about corrected their status, but I’ve always felt like, oh, thank God I’m a US citizen, man. I can hang out here in the States, and I can come and go as I please, get on an airplane, go to another country. I’ve got my passport, I can get back in. I’ve got my Social Security number and my id, my birth certificate.

[00:52:55] Everything that I’ve always thought were my keys to the kingdom are actually the lock on the prison door of the matrix. It’s just everything that’s like upside down world when you start to get into this stuff. It’s like everything you thought was good is not, and everything you thought was bad is good. It’s totally bizarre.

[00:53:17] Brandon: Well, you’re seeing that a lot in the media with all the illegal aliens. Illegal aliens are people who have not pledged allegiance to the United States. But the thing is, I don’t think a lot of them are illegal aliens because the thing is that they’re getting all these benefits. So someone who is not a US citizen but pledges allegiance to the United States who lives outside of the United States, such as in California– I don’t live in the United States and California because the United States is defined as a federal corporation located in the District of Columbia.

[00:53:47] As a non-citizen national, non-citizen nationals are actually Americans. So illegal aliens are actually Americans. US citizens are the foreigners. And that’s why you’re seeing all of these foreign aliens and illegal aliens getting all of these benefits from the government.

[00:54:06] We are treated better by the government. We are at a higher esteem than the government because we are the actual Americans. The quote, illegal aliens are actually the real Americans. The US citizens are our employees that are located on paper in the District of Columbia.

[00:54:23] The District of Columbia is not a state of the union called the United States of America. It is a foreign corporate zone, and its states are the US territories, which are all corporate sub states of United States such as Puerto Rico, Guam, American Samoa, Virgin Islands, etc. That is actually the United States. The United States is Washington, DC, Guam, Puerto Rico, American Samoa, Virgin Islands, and I think one other one. That is United States.

[00:54:56] And then the United States of America is the unincorporated independent, sovereign nation states such as California Republic or the Crown Colony of Vermont, or the Crown County of Connecticut, or the Southwest Territory, which is the original legal common law name for Tennessee. These are all the actual common law non incorporated locations.

[00:55:22] Your natural person can be located in California Republic and you ens legis, or one of your corporations, or one of your trusts, or one of your associations, or one of your partnerships, can be located in State of California. Now, Gavin Newsom is the governor of State of California.

[00:55:46] Luke: He’s basically the CEO of that corporation, just like Sleepy Joe is the CEO of the corporation called the United States located in the District of Columbia.

[00:55:56] Brandon: Precisely.

[00:55:56] Luke: I think a word that seems to come to mind a lot when dealing with this particular topic is the matrix. There’s been a lot of talk about that word, obviously, since that film and over the past four years with all the plandemic insanity, and all of this.

[00:56:11] People are really looking for a way out. And I think many people use that term as like, God, I’m caught in this matrix. But up until conversations like this, I don’t know that we’ve been able to fully define the matrix. And the way I see it is what I was describing for this, duality where you have this superimposed corporation that’s sitting on top of the country, and then you have your birth certificate, false identity, your corporate identity that’s sitting on top of you as a living, breathing man or woman. But it gets matrixy, really, when you think about the DC Corporation. Okay, I’m in Texas. Texas is a sub corporation of Washington, DC

[00:56:50] Brandon: State of Texas.

[00:56:52] Luke: State of Texas. Right. State of Texas. And then you have the city of Austin is another corporation

[00:56:57] Brandon: City Austin. Yeah.

[00:56:58] Luke: Right? You have Travis County.

[00:57:00] Brandon: Yeah.

[00:57:01] Luke: Yeah.

[00:57:01] Brandon: It wouldn’t be Travis County, though. It would be the County of Travis. Yeah.

[00:57:05] Luke: So there’s layers on layers on layers of all of this commercial law, basically. It’s all commerce. It’s all business. And correct me if I’m wrong, but it seems like the entire thing is just based on money. And it seems as though when we are born and assigned to this birth certificate that very much like the film, the Matrix, we’re this energy generation machine that is parasitically fed off of all of these layers of corporate entities. They’re feeding off our corporate entity, but we’re paying the price for that as just a person who wants to just live free and eat, breathe, and contribute to society. Right?

[00:57:51] Brandon: Yeah. And the most amazing thing about it, and I think now I’d like to go back to your previous question, this is perfect timing to go to how did this all starts, and the 14th Amendment, and all the good stuff. But to answer that, the real truth is that the most mind blowing thing of all this is that we live entirely voluntary, entirely voluntary.

[00:58:12] All of this is completely voluntary. Now, that’s another one that everyone’s going to think I’m full of s, which is fine. It’s fine. I thought so too. I went through years of this. Luke knows. I’m not expecting everyone to swallow this literal 400-pound fish oil pill in three seconds.

[00:58:32] But I am going to say we live in a system that is entirely voluntary. You never, ever once needed to fill out a single tax form. There is absolutely nothing in Title 26 in the Internal Revenue Code that forces you to fill out absolutely any forms at all whatsoever. All forms are voluntary. Once you have volunteered and you are now contracted, now you’re in a bit more of an involuntary situation.

[00:58:59] But the original volunteering was volunteer. Same thing with the banking system. There’s a lot of ways you can volunteer in different ways without having to volunteer as a US citizen. You volunteered as a US citizen. Even when you take on a lawyer and you’re put in prison, there’s bonds that the attorney actually signs on your behalf.

[00:59:19] You have to actually literally sign yourself and sign your own bonds to go to prison if you do not have a lawyer to sign them for you. So everything in our system, everything, which is exactly why the police make you sign the tickets they give you, everything is voluntary. And you say, well, if you don’t sign the tickets, they’re going to beat the fuck out of you, whatever.

[00:59:39] True. But the thing is that the actual structure, the actual system, the actual law, not the behavior of the police officer– the behavior of the police officer might be outside the confines of the law. When the officer threatens you, that’s outside the confines of the law. The way the law actually operates is you are not supposed to be issued a ticket until you agree and verify the fact that the ticket needs to be made.

[01:00:07] And honestly, truthfully, through the brainwashing system that’s so advanced in this country, people are actually okay with it. They get pulled over and the cop says, you’re going too fast, and say, oh yeah, you know what? You’re right. There’s kids, and I shouldn’t have been doing that. And you’ve now volunteered to accept a complaint for breach of contract.

[01:00:29] Luke: Right, right.

[01:00:30] Brandon: And this gets complicated because, let’s say, for example, you have a 35-mile an hour speed limit in a school zone where there’s lots of kids. Let’s say it’s a school zone where the bus stops across the street. Because the way that the school is structured, it’s like they had to put the bus stop over here, and then they have to cross the street to get to the actual school itself. Because the school itself is surrounded by roads, and they couldn’t get a bus line in there.

[01:00:54] Now let’s say there’s people speeding down that road all the time at going 130 miles an hour in their sports cars with their music blaring. Most people would not like that idea. So the people in the town get together and they voluntarily state that there needs to be this 35-mile an hour speed limit, or 15-mile an hour speed limit because there’s 5,000 kids going across this stretch of road every night, and they’re laughing, and they’re dropping stuff, and they’re not paying attention as to this careening, second gen Camaro coming down the road at 400 miles an hour. And then what happens is then the Camaro guy, blah, blah, blah.

[01:01:33] So this is a whole philosophical discussion because you got to think, how does a person– if a 15-mile an hour speed limit is only enforceable because a person naturalized into this corporation that has these traffic laws and it’s a breach of contract, if someone wasn’t naturalized into these particular traffic laws and they didn’t have a driver’s license anymore, how would you enforce the fact that all the local people want people going no faster than 20 miles an hour when there’s 5,000 kids walking across the street all the time?

[01:02:12] And that’s a valid discussion. The problem is that when somebody gets these tickets, where does the money go? And then the police. And it’s just like there’s all these different permutations and all these different directions. And that’s where common law is so fascinating.

[01:02:29] Because in a common law world, such as what you see in a lot of the Wild West films, someone’s causing too much gruff, the mothers or the locals get together, and they just go shoot the guy. He’s dead. Guy comes down the road at 400 miles an hour, cruising down the road. The women find out where he is at, and they go and take broomsticks, and crow bars, and all the good stuff, and they bash in all those windows, and they bash in his car, and they bash in his sides, and they bash everything in.

[01:02:55] And they say, we ever seen you going more than this kind of stuff, and this craziness, and throwing beer bottles out the window, going down this road with these kids, we’re going to kick you out of the town with pitchforks, and torches, and everything else. That was the justice system before.

[01:03:18] So you have to ask yourself, because we live in a voluntary system, what kind of a system do you want? And what kind of a system do you want to see? Because the this is that while I’m here telling you all about this system and this commercial system, it’s all based on commerce. That’s why everything is all fines and fines and fines and fines. It’s all commercial-based.

[01:03:39] Do you want this system to change? Do you want this system to go away entirely? Do you want this? People go, oh yeah, this is the best thing ever. We got to get rid of all this. And then they think like, second gen Camaro going 400 miles an hour drunk down the school lane.

[01:03:55] Brandon: They go, oh, well, wait a second. Maybe we shouldn’t. They pump the brakes, you see? So it does go both ways. This is not just a simple throw it out with the bath water kind of a conversation. This is a larger conversation where what I’m actually asking is we need a renaissance of people that are interested in governing their own space, their own family, their own town, their own zip code.

[01:04:24] Maybe just a small portion, maybe a larger portion, but it is a sovereignty. The definition of sovereignty is self-governance. It is a self-governance. It’s a governance of self, but it’s also a governance of environment. It’s a governance of environment to the level in which you would like to step up to govern.

[01:04:45] Most people don’t even have governance of self, let alone governance of their environment. So I know that’s asking a lot, but the thing is that that’s what this conversation becomes very rapidly.

[01:04:58] Luke: That makes me think of the common law definition of a crime. There has to be an injured party.

[01:05:05] Brandon: Yes.

[01:05:06] Luke: And that’s a law that I think any thinking, responsible, kind person would adhere to. I’m down with those laws. But what we’re dealing with are these layers of statutes and codes that are all based on commerce that are essentially put in place to trip you up to monetize you. You know what I mean?

[01:05:25] So that’s the thing, I think, fundamentally that’s always appealed to me about the idea of common law, is like, yeah, it’s the golden rule. Follow the golden rule, and you’re golden. That’s simple. Now, unfortunately, we live in a world where there are a lot of wounded people that are out of integrity and don’t have any interest in following that kind of system.

[01:05:44] But I tend to lean on the maybe hopeless optimism that there are more good people in the world than there are bad, and that I think most people don’t inherently want to harm other people. And maybe, even because we have such a broken system with all these statutes and codes, and all this stuff, taxes and all these oppressive mechanisms in place, that’s actually what’s impoverishing people and causing more suffering.

[01:06:12] And the people that are suffering are the ones that end up harming other people and breaking the moral code of society. It’s like a self perpetuating loop of destruction. I did want to point to one thing back to the responsibility, personal responsibility. I think from a metaphysical point of view with this kind of work, this perspective, this renaissance really that we’re starting to see bubble up thanks to you largely–

[01:06:40] Brandon: Thank you.

[01:06:40] Luke: Is that I felt like a victim of the system for most of my life, because I’ve just been an outlier. I’m someone that just doesn’t fit in. I question authority. I don’t like the rules that don’t make sense.

[01:06:53] And so for me, there’s a very empowering element about taking responsibility for the fact that I have volunteered, albeit unknowingly and maybe some trickery of legal ease encouraging me to sign documents in a certain way and to identify myself in a certain way legally, or to put myself in a certain location or jurisdiction, maybe, I was manipulated into volunteering in some cases, but that said, still, I’m the one that put the pen to the paper and said, yes, I’m a US citizen, or, yes, I live in the District of Columbia, etc.

[01:07:28] So for me, it’s been very freeing to go like, okay, I’m not going to blame myself for doing things that I didn’t understand, and I’m also not really going to blame the system. It’s very empowering to take responsibility for oneself because then victimhood starts to evaporate. I don’t feel like I’m a victim of the system.

[01:07:45] I feel motivated to learn how the system works and actually operate according to natural law and according to common law, which is really easy for me to do because I have no interest in harming anyone in any way ever. And I ever do, I’m very happy to make restitution immediately if I did something by mistake.

[01:08:06] So it’s very freeing. It’s super liberating. Aside from just, oh, sending some paperwork off here and there, and yay, I don’t have to pay taxes, it’s like, actually, I feel as we move into this movement that you can actually be an adult and not feel afraid of the system and the government, and even beyond that, not even hate them. It’s like they’re just operating out of this collective survival instinct, right? They seem to lack creativity, and they lack the ability to actually produce things of value and beauty. So they just parasitically siphon on us and get us to sign documents and enter into their world, and we just knowingly do it. And we’re also programmed and educated to believe that if you’re a good person, that you just play along.

[01:08:55] And if you ask questions and you buck the system and exit the system, that you’re therefore a bad person, and this kind of thing. But to me, all this information is just so empowering, and I have less fear of the state. I have less resentment toward the state. And I’m also just patting myself on the back going, well, you didn’t know the stuff you were signing your whole life, and now it’s time to start educating yourself.

[01:09:17] Brandon: Yeah. The police don’t know.

[01:09:18] Luke: It’s actually beautiful.

[01:09:19] Brandon: The people at the bank don’t know. The bankers don’t know. The senior bankers don’t know. I talked to guys with 15, 20, 29 years experience. They don’t know. The only people who know to some degree, and they actually aren’t even bad people, and they’ll help you get all this sorted out, are our judges, especially federal judges.

[01:09:41] They do know. And you think to yourself, well, why aren’t they telling everybody? Well, I don’t know the answer to that question. It’s not necessarily their responsibility. And in a way, they are telling people because if you were to go in and look at their various cases, which all are public information, you can see that they are talking about a lot of these things.

[01:10:00] Are they on your Instagram feed? No. So one of the big hurdles that I had to go over and everybody has to go over is you think that you call into the Department of State and you go see this passport officer down at your local post office, and you think they know all this information. They don’t know any of this information.

[01:10:20] And the ones that behave in a poor way towards you and they think you’re a sovereign citizen, they think in their mind that you are not paying taxes, and you’re going to live in their country without paying taxes, and you not paying taxes is going to destroy the roads, and you’re going to now enjoy the benefits of being an American and enjoy the benefits of nice roads without having to contribute.

[01:10:41] Their problem is the fact that they think you are now not going to have to contribute to something that they’re contributing to and paying for, or they think they’re paying for. That’s the actual issue.

[01:10:55] Luke: The crab is in the bucket.

[01:10:55] Brandon: It’s a good thing. No, it’s not. Sorry. It’s not that thing. It’s actually a good thing. The way that they think and the way they behave is actually a good thing. They don’t want people in their mind not contributing to the beneficial aspects of their society. They want their local roads in their mind to be properly paved and fixed so that other people, a mother with her children does not hit a giant effing pothole and careen off the side of the road, and her children die in her minivan.

[01:11:36] They might not go that farther on the mind, but that’s essentially what these people are thinking. And when you understand that, you understand that these people mean well. They actually mean good things. They actually intend good things, and they think that the thing that you’re doing or trying to do is going to harm other good people. That’s what they’re upset about.

[01:12:02] Luke: Like not wearing a mask. People that believed that, some of them had the best of intentions. They were just ill-informed.

[01:12:09] Brandon: That is what I mean. It’s okay. It’s okay. I don’t get mad about that. I don’t get mad about nothing anymore. Because the thing is that when you understand where they’re coming from and you understand how they think, you realize, like you said before, I don’t think I’ve ever met a single bad person in my entire life, I don’t think, maybe.

[01:12:28] Everyone’s trying so hard to do what they think is the best and to help people the best they can and to do the best thing that they can and to make sure that other people are taken care of. And everyone has a different sphere of reality of what that is. A lot of people are like, I can only care about myself.

[01:12:43] Some people, I can only care about my family. That’s enough for me. Some people want to go beyond that. And you can judge them or whatever. But that’s not really your place. It’s not really our place to judge people, in my opinion. So the thing is it’s our place to– and it’s not a– I’m a member of the Emirati, which I take very seriously, which is a men’s fraternity that has to do with understanding what it means to be a man in this world and walk through this world as a man, especially in our relationship with women and beauty.

[01:13:10] And Zan Perrion wrote a book called The Alabaster Girl, which is the basis of our group. And one of the things she says in there is that the only real sin there is in all of humanity is obligation. And the thing is that I believe that. I actually completely believe that the only real sin there is an obligation.

[01:13:31] You have such a serious obligation towards something, and then it becomes this very unfun activity. It solidifies the activity, and it pulls all the creativity and joy out of whatever it is that you’re doing. And it kills, I guess you could say, anything that it touches because it’s like a disease.

[01:13:49] Obligation is a disease, and I know that there are many people, like in the military, which is a main demographic that I was thinking of when you were speaking earlier about– you want to talk about people who are pissed off about this information, who hate themselves, who literally go through S-U-I-C-I-D-A-L thoughts about this situation? I’m not going to say that word. It’s the military. When the military found out about this, and then they think that I worked for that, I pushed that, I did that. And I will say something. They say the word duty. Duty and obligation are two very different things. Duty. I have a duty for what I do.

[01:14:30] I enjoy my duty. I feel honor from my duty. But it’s not an obligation. Obligation is a different word. It’s a negative word. It’s something that you feel chained to that you may not really want to have an involvement with. Duty is something that not only do you want to be involved with, but it’s extreme pride point, and it’s actually one of the most important aspects of your life.

[01:14:52] And you feel like without that specific thing, you wouldn’t even be who you are identity wise. And for me, someone like me, I wouldn’t even want to live without my duty. So the thing is, the duty is a very positive, empowering thing, whereas obligation is the opposing force of that, in my opinion.

[01:15:07] Now, when you’re talking about people going through some stuff, when it comes to this information, military goes through extreme difficulties, this information, because they go through this whole, like, I pushed this. I fought for this. I killed for this whole weird craziness that I had no idea.

[01:15:25] Now, what’s so beautiful about that, just as a side point, in case any of your people here are military, I love the military very much, and I have a lot of military in my family and police as well. The people who turn who are military, and police, and all these different things, they become the most dangerous adversaries.

[01:15:47] They have a bone to pick, and they are the kinds of people that really make some very big motions in this type of stuff very rapidly because they feel very fired up. I’m not a violent person. I’m strongly against violence, but it’s almost to that level with these kinds of people that are the turncoats.

[01:16:12] The turncoats are actually some of my favorite people. The military with 20 years experience, you find this information and cry for two months straight and debate if they’re going to lay on train tracks or hang themself by kicking a chair out from underneath their body.

[01:16:28] These people, when they convert, I should say, they become a massive force to be reckoned with. So I will say at the same time, while we’re on this subject, for people out there who might be hearing these things and going down these rabbit holes, or want to go down these rabbit holes, don’t allow whatever it is that’s happened in your past to overwhelm you now.

[01:16:56] I strongly recommend that you focus on your future and what’s happening now. And like I said, you can use your past as fuel to fuel your future. And when I see people do that, that fit these categories, these people change the world. These people are mountain movers.

[01:17:16] So it goes both ways. People like you and me, it’s like, oh yeah, I paid some taxes, whatever. But then you have guys that have 15 years of service. It’s like, ooh, boy. That’s a rough one. You know what I mean?

[01:17:29] Luke: Yeah. Unknowingly advocating and enforcing the system is a whole other level of regret than just going along with it and volunteering yourself into it unknowingly, and then going, oops, wow, this sucks to be robbed of 80% of my resources for the energy that I put into the world. You’re actually enforcing that around the world on behalf of the state. Yeah. That’s a lot.

[01:17:57] Brandon: I’ve seen a lot of that. It’s dark. These guys go through some darkness. And for people who want to try to explain this stuff to their marine grandpa, their marine father, tread lightly. You could literally explain this to someone in a way where they would literally go into their gun and whiskey room and end themselves.

[01:18:25] Luke: Yeah.

[01:18:25] Brandon: Kidding. This is a–

[01:18:26] Luke: There’s layers of identity. It’s like we form our self-worth and our duty, our purpose out of our identity. And it’s got to be a nightmare to realize that the identity that you’ve been motivated by was one that was essentially fraudulently hoisted upon you by a system that knew how to do that to get you on board.

[01:18:48] Brandon: And the thing is that you are dealing with confusion and brainwashing on a level that is so advanced and so professional, and the amount of money poured into the media, and they control Hollywood just so they can say words like US citizen, and just so they can say words like my country, and just so they can program these little words into all these different TV shows and everything else.

[01:19:16] The programming system is a multi, multi, multi-trillion every single direction. All newspapers, all media, all video games, all TV shows, all movies, all everything is programmed and paid.

[01:19:35] And there’s this gigantic, massive, humongous structure that costs millions or billions of dollars a day to sustain to make sure that you are using the correct words, using the correct incantation and volunteering into the system. And the thing is that the chances that anyone could have figured this out, or walked through this or seen this, or handled this, or noticed this is so low.

[01:20:01] And the professionality, and the focus, and the desire, and the investment into what has gone into what we experience on a daily basis in this country is so overwhelming and so crushing and designed to be so overwhelming and so crushing that human beings just do not stand a chance. They just don’t, period.

[01:20:25] Luke: Can you take us back to the 14th Amendment to create a little context for how we ended up in this. I’m sure a lot of it’s very old, but to me, the 1871, the Federal Reserve Act in 1913, the gold standard in ’33 or ’35, there’s a few key points where the system really sunk its teeth into us, collectively.

[01:20:52] And that the 14th Amendment one is one that really got– that one irks me because when most people think of the 14th Amendment, they think of freeing the slaves. And most people don’t realize that when that was done, there were a number of people in the country that wanted it, and there were a number of people that didn’t want it.

[01:21:09] So they seems to me like they compromised and just went, hey, we’ll just create this second class of citizen, and this works so well. Let’s just start applying it to everyone and calling everyone US citizens and creating what we have now, which is free range slavery and voluntary servitude, but involuntary servitude was made illegal. Can you frame that for us? Because I find that piece really interesting.

[01:21:35] Brandon: Oh yeah. So after the Civil War during the reconstruction of the Civil War, 1865-ish through 1871-ish, that time period is a really important time period. The organic Act of 1871 is when the government was changed into an incorporated version of the government.

[01:22:01] And if you look in the organic Act of 1871, the carrot or cookie that was put out in an effort to justify the incorporating and converting of the government was the free public school system. So all the people out there, all the angry moms, and all these angry dads that are angry at the public school system and how it works and how it operates, that all started in 1871.

[01:22:27] And that actually was the backbone, the full-blown spinal cord of the ushering in of the entire incorporated system of the United States. During that time period, it was a little bit before that time period, I think it was around 1865, 1866, 1867, right around that time period is also when they redefined the word person to include legal fictions.

[01:22:54] All of that happened around that same time period. So the word person and the incorporated superstate was all created around that same time period after the country was all beat up from fighting itself internally over the southern states and northern states over the subject of slavery. Who knows if it was even for that?

[01:23:13] I don’t know. So 1871, you have the 14th Amendment. The 14th Amendment alludes to there being multiple types of citizenship, two different types. In 1871, there was a series of Supreme Court cases called the slaughterhouse cases, where what they did is they interpreted the 14th Amendment for the first time.

[01:23:38] What happened was, is they determined and interpreted that the 14th Amendment was actually referring to the fact that there’s two different types of citizens. At that time, it was called the federal citizen and the state citizen. Now, from the research that I’ve done, I think, and this part is Brandon’s educated opinion, my professional opinion on why this is and how it happened was they wanted to end the war, but there were still many, many, many people that did not want slavery to be abolished.

[01:24:14] So what the government did is they said, look, no problem. We’re going to create this federal citizen category, and a federal citizen is essentially going to be a volunteer employee or officer of this new corporation we’re creating, and we’ll call it a federal citizen, and they won’t have the full rights of, what they call at that time during the slaughterhouse cases, a state citizen.

[01:24:39] And you can look up the slaughterhouse cases online. I’m not going to dig into all of it. It’s a lot. It’ll slow down the podcast, like a 100x. So that’s something that we’ll just talk about, and you can look it up for yourself. The slaughterhouse cases, you can look up lots and lots of information on it.

[01:24:53] You can see lots of information, them talking about the interpretation of the 14th Amendment and federal citizens, state citizens. So the federal citizen category, over the years, I don’t know when, became the US citizen category. The state citizen category became the national category or non-citizen national category.

[01:25:22] Now, it’s complicated because they don’t say specifically state citizen. You would say national of California Republic, and that’s the exact specific word for word technical way that you would say somebody who lives in the unincorporated nation state called California and is not involved in the corporate state called state of California. You would say a national of the California Republic.

[01:26:01] That person would not be a US citizen. That person would be a non-citizen national. When you look in Title 26 really quickly, I don’t want to get into this too much. It’s very simple, and it’ll just take two seconds. A citizen of the United States is a taxpayer and has a tax liability.

[01:26:23] A non-citizen, such as a non-citizen national, does not have a tax liability and is not a tax payer, which has a special definition. Taxpayer is found in Title 26, Section 7701, Subsection A 14, I have it all memorized. Definition of taxpayer is any person who is subject to any internal revenue tax.

[01:26:51] Now, when you go into all the frivolous argument section of the IRS, which a lot of people get sent– let’s say you want to go and tell all your family about all this information. They’re going to go online. They’re going to go to the IRS website, and they’re going to find this section called the Frivolous Tax Argument section.

[01:27:07] It’s going to say there are taxpayers that believe that they don’t live in the District of Columbia, and it’s called the United States. Now, if you click control+F for the Find feature and you type in the word taxpayer, you’ll see it used 95 times all the way down throughout all the Frivolous Arguments.

[01:27:26] The word taxpayer is a person who is subject to any internal revenue tax. So what they’re saying throughout all of the Frivolous Arguments section of the website is there are people who do have a tax liability stating that they don’t have a tax liability. A non-citizen national is not a tax payer by definition.

[01:27:48] It is not someone who is subject to any internal revenue tax, but they write it in a way where it seems like they’re talking about everybody. They’re not talking about everybody. They’re talking about taxpayers.

[01:28:01] Luke: Clever. Well, I think that’s a big distinction. And to me, the taxes are just so wrong. And we can get into that more, but I think when people from the outside hear about this approach to living, they think that if you change your status, you just stop paying taxes.

[01:28:24] But the definition here is more that you are no longer classified as a taxpayer, therefore you don’t have a tax liability. So it’s not just that you’re not paying taxes. It’s that you’re not legally required if you’re classified in a certain way to even file taxes, tax returns, let alone pay them.

[01:28:45] Brandon: And since we’re–

[01:28:46] Luke: And that’s really difficult for people to get their head around because we’ve been so indoctrinated by the morality of, well, who’s going to pay for the roads? All of this kind of thinking. And you can tell us in a bit where our tax money actually goes. It doesn’t go to the roads, spoiler alert.

[01:29:04] Brandon: And I feel like we’ve gone down this far enough to where I feel like I really should show this–

[01:29:09] Luke: All right. Let’s do it.

[01:29:10] Brandon: I just really have a bit of a duty, not an obligation. Once we start talking about things for more than a split second, I feel like I should show them. So for the purposes of the– this is from a different body of law called the Code of Federal Regulations, otherwise known as CFR.

[01:29:29] So Title 26 of the CFR is the same as Title 26 in the United States Code. It has to do with the Internal Revenue Code, IRC. So Title 26 CFR Section 1.871-1, for purposes of the income tax, alien individuals are divided generally into two classes, namely resident aliens and non-resident aliens.

[01:29:58] Now, it’s very simple. We’re going to read the rest of this. It’s really not that hard to understand, but it’s really simple. Resident aliens of what? Resident aliens of United States. Where is the United States located? In the District of Columbia. Where in the District of Columbia? No one knows. No one knows. Who knows?

[01:30:19] Maybe literally no one ever even tried to know. Maybe it’s literally never been described ever, and nobody really knows at all. Maybe there really isn’t an answer to the question, where in the District of Columbia it’s located? Who knows? You could ask that if you’re in a lawsuit and there’s discovery, and you ask, where is the United States located within the territorial boundaries of the Washington, DC? You may never, ever, ever get– they may literally, on this planet, not be an answer to that question.

[01:30:47] A non-resident, alien individual is somebody who does not live in United States, which is an unknown location inside of the District of Columbia. So let’s get back into this. We’ll finish this up. Resident alien individuals are in general taxable the same as citizens of the United States, meaning people who are employees or officers of the federal corporation.

[01:31:13] Non-resident alien individuals are taxable only on certain income from sources within the United States. Now, this is where things get complicated, and this is the same thing as the definition of naturalization. So I have naturalization memorized. I’m going to reread it to you from my head.

[01:31:43] Title 8 Section 1101 Subsection A 23, naturalization is the conferring of nationality of a state upon a person after birth by any means whatsoever. Now you’ll see here is they’re saying the exact same thing here, so I’m going to read this. This is now a quote back to the quote from 26 CFR 1.871-1.

[01:32:10] However, non-resident alien individuals may elect to be treated as US residents for purposes of determining their income tax liability. So once you naturalized into State of California, or State of Texas or United States, you were a non-resident, alien individual, who then elected to be treated as a US resident for purposes of determining your income tax liability through the power of naturalization.

[01:32:57] You were not a tax payer until you did that. Once you did that, you became a taxpayer. You became a taxpayer through what’s called the election. And we have a process that’s located in the Internal Revenue Code, because again, we live in a voluntary system, and this is an entirely voluntary situation. It’s an entirely voluntary contract.

[01:33:20] I can prove that. We’ve got 26, I believe it’s CFR 601.602. Could be wrong, but if it’s not, we’re going to find it in 10 seconds. Here we are. 26. Let me just verify that. 26 CFR 601.602 Subsection A. And it’s the final sentence of subsection A. It says as following, the tax system is based on voluntary compliance, and the taxpayers complete and return the forms with payment of any tax owed.

[01:34:07] Luke: Mind blowing.

[01:34:10] Brandon: And just for those people who I was saying the definition of the word taxpayer earlier for the video people, little bonus for you, we will pull that up right here, so that way it’s not just me talking. This is 26 USC, which is the Internal Revenue Code. Title 26 of the United States Code is the Internal Revenue Code.

[01:34:30] I will prove that as well. Scroll down to Title 26. Internal Revenue code. Title 26 Section 7701 Subsection A 14 says here, taxpayer. The term taxpayer means any person subject to any internal revenue tax. The word person is clickable. It’s going to take me to 26 USC 7701 Subsection A1.

[01:34:59] The term person shall be construed to mean and include an individual, a trust, estate, partnership, association, company, or corporation. So the tax code is extremely complicated. It goes on and on and on for thousands and thousands and thousands, if not tens of thousands. Who knows? Maybe even hundreds of thousands of pages. I just explained to you the entire tax code. You really don’t even need to know anything more about the tax code at all. It’s that simple.

[01:35:30] Luke: That is just so wild. It’s like I was saying earlier it’s so interesting how this is so complex, but at the same time, it’s also so simple that you can’t believe it’s true.

[01:35:43] Brandon: That’s exactly right.

[01:35:45] Luke: It’s so interesting. There are a few things in life like that. Usually if something’s complicated, it’s just by default that way. And you really have to work hard to figure it out. And then there’s some things that are just so simple that are just almost unbelievable. It’s insane.

[01:36:02] Brandon: So the definition of naturalization is–

[01:36:04] Luke: A few years ago I did an experiment when I was a US citizen and I had voluntarily signed all of this documentation my entire life and I was saving money. And so I just, for the first time in my life, filed my tax returns, my personal and corporate return and just didn’t pay the taxes to the state franchise in California or the IRS federally. And I just thought, I’ll deal with it later. I’ll get a few fines and some interest, and it is what it is. And I didn’t get around to paying it for a few months.

[01:36:34] And next thing I know, California actually just went in my bank account and just took the money. It’s insane. I was like, wow, they really do that. It was so interesting. And I had an attorney that called them and fixed it up, and then I paid it off.

[01:36:51] But why that happened was because I volunteered to be a taxpayer and to be a US citizen and to be a resident of the State of California, the corporation. So at the time, of course, I was pissed, like, how dare they? That’s my money. I’ll get to it when I get to it. And looking back now, learning what I’m learning here with you and some other people, it’s like, I’m the one that sent in the tax return and said, hey, I’m a taxpayer.

[01:37:19] I’ve done the accounting. This is how much I owe you, but hey, guess what? I’m not going to pay you. And they didn’t like that at all. Whereas on the flip side of that, what you’re describing here is a way of living where you’re not actually indicating yourself to be a taxpayer or a US citizen because you’ve corrected your status, and so on, as we talked about earlier.

[01:37:39] And therefore, not only would they have no legal grounds for that, but they wouldn’t be even inspired to try to do that because you’re out of that jurisdiction, I guess, would be one way of saying that. Do I–

[01:37:52] Brandon: You are not a taxpayer. You have no tax liability. A taxpayer has a tax liability, so if you don’t have no tax liability, you are not a taxpayer, period. End of story.

[01:38:00] Luke: Right, right. So over the past few years, we’ve seen insane levels of censorship with all of this medical stuff going on and the clot shots, and God knows what. And it’s eased up a little in certain cases, but I noticed, I’ll do certain episodes, and they’ll get pulled down by YouTube.

[01:38:21] In fact, today I got an email from YouTube saying, we’ve deleted your interview with Robert F. Kennedy, Jr. They didn’t like that one. It was early in 2020, and they finally got rid of that one. And there are other things that you can’t talk about, or you’ll be censored, if you start questioning the moon landing or a number of different things, your content on social media will just be yanked.

[01:38:46] What I find so interesting is that information like this is left alone. To me, this is more dangerous to the state than somebody talking about what kind of injections one should get or not. Have you seen any suppression of these ideas and this information at all?

[01:39:06] Brandon: No, and it’s very, very simple. This is a great observation, and it’s very, very simple. The way that I operate, I have a lot of PR training. I have warfare PR training. I have massive marketing sales background. So everything that I do is very, very carefully constructed, even though it may seem like a totally insane seven-year-old put it together.

[01:39:27] It was very thought out. But my formula for success is very, very simple. It’s a, always make people feel good. So that means that if it’s a liberal, if it’s a conservative, if it’s this, if it’s that– now you got to understand, I was a Trump conservative, bang the drum person for a long time screaming from the hilltops, the whole nine yards.

[01:39:56] This was from probably 2020 all the way up until I started studying this stuff, so mid 2021, something like that. And I felt a little bad about it once I started learning about all this. I go, uh-oh. I didn’t necessarily start doing all this out of some sort of reparation, but there definitely was a little bit of that in my world that I thought about during that time period.

[01:40:27] But again, it’s a difficult self-reflection situation because I got sucked into something that was a world class totally well put together, multi-trillion dollar international brainwashing campaign that I didn’t stand a chance. So it’s a difficult situation, and I think that, a, always made people feel good, no matter where they’re at.

[01:41:01] Like for example, when we did the Andy Kaufman show, he was talking about T-R-A-N-S people. And he was speaking about them as maybe something a little bit confrontational, and this and that, and I changed that discussion to these people that are doing this. The thing is that, in law, only men and women have rights.

[01:41:26] So what’s happening is the people who behave that way and do those things, they are burning their own rights, and they’re saying, I don’t have human rights because I am not, as per the definition of the law, a human, which is defined as either a man or a woman. The problem with that is that these people deserve to know that they are eliminating their own humanity, their own human rights in the eyes of the law.

[01:41:54] Now, if someone knows that information and they still decide to do whatever it is that they’re doing, that’s on them at that point. But I feel like I prefer to move the conversation in a way that empowers the person in that position rather than diminishes and destroys– the only demographic in a whole world that you’ll ever hear me, as much as I try, as much as I try– you may see a couple of things here and there, but as much as I try, there’s only one demographic in the world that I just love to just pee on. Okay. Can you guess who that is?

[01:42:34] Luke: Sovereign citizens.

[01:42:36] Brandon: No. No, I don’t even mind those people. Lawyers.

[01:42:40] Luke: Oh, right, of course. Yeah, of course.

[01:42:42] Brandon: That’s the only one. If it’s a lawyer, oh, let’s go, bro. Let’s go. I’ll talk about it all day long. I’ll pull my pants down and take a big poop right here. Anything else, I try to– and it’s not the end of the world. I’m doing the Dr. Graves howtowinincourt.com. He’s a lawyer. 35 years. Fantastic course. I think most lawyers are horrible, to tell you the truth. And I assume they are horrible more rapidly than I will assume that they are not. I am not closing the door on them.

[01:43:23] But everybody else, judge, police, jail officer, T-R-A-N-S people, you name it, G-A-Y, I don’t care. I don’t care what liberal this, that. I don’t care. I don’t care. I really don’t care. I’m in California. The amount of times I’ve heard liberals upset about the situation and starting to question their own beliefs and angry at what’s going on, and not have no clue where to go and what to turn because in their mind, the only other option is Trump, and they’re not going to do that.

[01:43:52] So they just don’t know what the eff to do, but they’re definitely not interested in what they’re doing anymore. Everyone’s frustrated. Everyone’s angry. Everyone’s frustrated. Everyone’s wants exchange and answers. And the cool thing about what we’re doing, and what I’m doing, and what you’re now doing is that this gigantic, pressurized, explosive political scene is starting to bleed off into this zone.

[01:44:22] This is where all that pressure’s going. And the bigger that we educate, and the faster we educate, and the more content that we create, such as this podcast, the more that we’re offering people a pressure valve of which they can choose to select, whether they’re liberal, whether they’re T-R-A-N-S, whether they’re gay, whether they’re straight, whether they’re bi, whether they’re conservative, whether they’re Trump, whether they’re a MAGA, whether they’re– it doesn’t matter.

[01:44:51] Insert into the box. Whatever it is that you want to insert into the box, it doesn’t matter. Lawyers are the only ones that can come in, tread carefully, my friends, because you are not particularly excited members of this group, but we’ll accept you if you prove yourself.

[01:45:07] But you’re going to have a little bit of a more difficult time. But I’d rather be upfront about that. Besides that, we’ve all been lied to. We’ve all been screwed. And as far as I’m concerned, the only people who were close enough to the scene to see what was going on, close enough to the scene to possibly do something about the situation are the lawyers.

[01:45:28] Even the judges. Your average federal judge has a 600-case load. I don’t even know how they have a personal life. I don’t know how they don’t lose themselves in drugs and alcohol, being involved in such insane craziness and the way that lawyers behave. They are so outrageous, and they’re so unacceptable with their behavior. It’s unbelievable. I don’t even know how judges keep themselves from going insane, frankly. So that’s just how I feel about the situation.

[01:46:02] Luke: Well, I love that perspective, man. It’s team humanity. It’s like what we need now, I think, as a civilization, as a society in this state, in this country, rather in other countries around the world, is unity, man. Unity is where the power is, but you’re never going to get unity when you have people that are ideologically so opposed.

[01:46:23] You’re not going to convince a Portland liberal that he should be agreeing with the Alabama MAGA guy, the truck driver. There’s never going to be a meeting of the minds. And it’s like, why even try? I feel this movement is a real middle ground because it’s like, hey, let’s follow the golden rule.

[01:46:46] Let’s get ourselves out from under the boot of this fraudulent, corrupt system and support and help one another. And it really doesn’t matter what your political beliefs, your social behaviors, ideologies, none of that actually means anything in this space. It’s just, hey, let’s become free. And every human being to some degree values freedom.

[01:47:10] And what does that even mean? And to me, this seems like a path right down the middle way that just negates all of that bullshit that’s so divisive and just says, hey, for those that are willing to put in the time to really– you really have to study this stuff is what I’m learning.

[01:47:28] I’m not just going and pulling the trigger on all this. I’m really putting hours and hours. Like I said, I’m only up to less than 14 in your 39-part course, which, by the way guys, I highly recommend, and we’ll link to it in the show notes. Let’s put those show notes at lukestory.com/brandon.

[01:47:45] But you have to have a passion to learn this stuff. But other than that, putting in some time and due diligence, it’s like there’s nothing that’s controversial about it whatsoever from my perspective. It’s just like, wow, we got to take responsibility. We unknowingly volunteered ourselves into some things that are very unfair and unjust, and no one’s going to come and hold her hand.

[01:48:09] No president is going to come and save us. I don’t care who it is. It’s up to us to free ourselves and to save ourselves. And that has to do with, like we talked about earlier, personal responsibility and like, okay, man, I don’t want to put in the time studying this stuff, but if I ever want to become truly free, metaphysically and physically in the world, I don’t really see another way out of it.

[01:48:34] That brings me to another funny point because you mentioned Donald Trump. I was watching a David Straight video the other day, which again, I’m watching this video. It’s the Utah course, by the way, if you want to put that in the show notes. Fantastic information. And I’m watching that on YouTube going, why isn’t this being censored? This is such powerful information, but who knows?

[01:48:56] Brandon: Well, there’s two things on that because I was going to actually going to finish that thought. So number one is make them feel good. Don’t alienate people and attack people for some political whatever. That’s number one, I think. Number two is, obviously, without question, my material is mind blowingly valuable. “My material” is just me showing definitions and terms from straight out of–

[01:49:22] Luke: And it’s free.

[01:49:23] Brandon: And it’s free.

[01:49:24] Luke: His stuff is free.

[01:49:25] Brandon: I don’t charge for anything except if you want to go into mainline litigation and you want to hire me for massive litigation and that kind of thing. Obviously, that’s mind blowingly expensive. But besides that, everything else is free all the way down. It’s the Dan S Pena, who I love so dearly.

[01:49:40] He is my favorite business coach ever. It’s the Dan S Pena style where everything’s free all the way down, including his book. And then it’s just the top, top, top tier, multi, extremely, wildly expensive, one single thing at the very top. So I really like that model. I love Dans Pena. Very huge section of my business training and my mentality. And I just love him so much.

[01:50:01] He talks a lot about it being the most stress free model and it being just a very beautiful model. And he says it more colorful language. So the second thing is when you tie everything down, like David Straight– I love him to death. He’s a great guy. He is one of the originals. Without him, a lot of us wouldn’t be here. The thing I do that’s different than a lot of these other guys is I want to show everything, and I want to say every single word perfectly.

[01:50:29] And I want every single definition of every word that could possibly be misconstrued to be defined on the spot like you saw me in this. So how can a fact checker ever hope to touch me? It’s a physical impossibility. I am the only guy on the planet pretty much– I don’t know of anybody else really at all, anywhere, on any field, whether it’s my field, or the medical field, or anything. Medical field is tough because there’s so much weirdness.

[01:51:02] My field is literally just so groundable that when I ground everything out to the level that I ground it out, fact-checkers can’t come near me. I am like a full-blown disease zone to them. They can’t come near me. They can’t touch me. I am immune to all fact-checking. And then you have the haters, and my entire platform is One Stupid F-U-C-K.

[01:51:33] So that’s all a big joke. It’s a self-deprecating, antagonism-based branding that I created. It’s very unique. You can’t touch me. You can call me whatever you want. I’m just going to laugh. And then take whatever you said and publish it, and we’re all just going to laugh at you. I show everything. I show the definitions of everything.

[01:51:54] I go to the original all the time, constantly. If I can’t share the screen, I’m sweating. I know almost everything I know I’ve repeated it to myself like I’m some kind of lunatic over and over and over again, thousands and thousands of times while I’m brushing my teeth, and eating food, and walking around town.

[01:52:11] And I don’t even want to think about it. I’m like, no, no. I need to say this particular statute to myself 1,500 times so I can memorize it forever. What in God’s name? And then on top of that, now I litigate. I’m litigating against everybody under the sun, moon, stars, and I pull the litigation trigger like I’m the most trigger happy human being walking the earth.

[01:52:32] Nobody wants to come near me, bro. Nobody wants to come within a million miles of me. And I developed all this prior. I developed all this with that forethought in place. How am I going not to get deplatformed, and how am I going to get the younger audience, and how am I going to get a non-fact checked, and how am I going to get all these things that I just– some of the stuff I developed based off of those questions. And some of the stuff I developed just because a lot of what I do and how crazy I am by the definitions of words and what it all means and how it all puts together, that’s how I would wish somebody would’ve taught me too.

[01:53:11] It’s like gold and a rule kind of thing. Do unto others as you would like to be done unto you. I teach in the way that I wish somebody would’ve taught me. God, if I would’ve had this sort of an explanation and this sort of teaching style for myself, it would’ve been very life changing.

[01:53:31] Luke: Yeah. Well, I think that’s another– and that makes a lot of sense actually. You can’t really be fact checked if your facts are verifiable. That’s one piece. Another thing that I think is really cool about the way you’re presenting this information in your course specifically, and I’m someone that learns from listening and watching more so than reading, which makes this a little difficult for me because, really, you got to be quite a reader to really get this stuff.

[01:53:57] But in your course, I’m going through it, and I’m pausing as you’re screen sharing, showing how you fill out a certain document or not. I’m literally like, I have the document over here. I pause the video. I’m doing it. You’re showing a very tactical approach to this.

[01:54:15] It’s not just theoretical. I love that David Straight Utah video. But it’s very much an overview. It’s on the concepts, the history. It’s really beautiful information, but from– and I haven’t watched every single one. I probably threw three or four of those videos, but he’s not pausing and going, okay, we’re going to break out the DS-11 passport application.

[01:54:34] And this is how you fill it out. It’s like in your course, it’s literally step by step every single thing that you do if you’re someone that is feeling strongly about going in this direction. What I was going to bring up about that video though, that was interesting because you reminded me of Donald Trump, in that video, David Straight says, and I’m going to paraphrase, he says, oh, Donald Trump knows all of this stuff, this 14th Amendment stuff, US citizen, what we’ve been talking about today.

[01:55:04] And he says in the video that Donald Trump corrected his status in 2007, or whenever it was, and that he’s trying to actually get in office and expose this and shake things up, which I don’t know if that’s true or not. His last efforts at Operation Warp Speed were a dismal and very deadly failure in my opinion.

[01:55:25] Brandon: Yeah, four years, all he had to do is just– here we are two hours and 16 seconds into this, and he could have told you all this, or even 1/10th of this, or even a tiny bit, or even just about naturalization. He could have told you any of this information if he knew it, and he didn’t. And I think that he doesn’t actually know a lot of this information.

[01:55:44] Luke: That’s the thing to me when it comes to politics. Now it’s all complete. And not that I believed in the of it anyway. It’s all theater and left and right. It’s like two masks on the same face. Now it’s so like white noise to me. Unless and until a politician comes forward and says, hey, let’s repeal the 14th Amendment. Let’s keep the 13th Amendment there so that no one can enslave anyone. Let’s nuke the 14th Amendment. Country fixed. To me, it’s that simple.

[01:56:15] Brandon: Well, check this out.

[01:56:16] Luke: And none of them talk about any of this. I love RFK Jr. He was on the show. I found him to be a very authentic, beautiful guy. I’ve really enjoyed my time. Went to his house. I spent half a day there. He was awesome. But he has a platform. He’s got a voice. He’s not talking about this.

[01:56:32] And he’s someone I would consider to be one of the more trustworthy of the people in the ring. No politicians will touch this. And I know some of them have to know it. So I’m just like, you’re white noise. You mean nothing to me until you start talking about this information publicly.

[01:56:49] Brandon: So first and foremost, I do not believe that Donald Trump is a bad person at all, not even in the slightest. I think he’s a very good person. I think he does care very, very much about a lot of things and a lot of people, and he does love humanity. And I think that RFK fits the same category.

[01:57:11] And I can only assume, because I think that Donald Trump has a huge monstrous breast, set of balls as well, so I can only assume that if he knew this information, everyone who finds out this information and learns this information in a coherent way, you couldn’t stop them from telling you if you had a gun in their mouth.

[01:57:32] Luke: 100%.

[01:57:34] Brandon: They’re telling their family, and their friends, and their job, and every single person that comes back to me says, everyone’s left my life. Everyone thinks I’m insane. I’ve lost all my friends, and my job, and my family. It’s always the same story. Because I went through the same thing.

[01:57:48] So you got to think. If he knew with how much he likes being in the limelight and how big his ball sack really is, you think he wouldn’t say something, even if it’s alluding to it? You don’t think he would say it in a way that might not be totally direct, but you don’t think he would say something about it? I don’t believe it.

[01:58:13] Luke: Yeah, yeah.

[01:58:14] Brandon: I don’t believe it.

[01:58:15] Luke: I know. That was my thought when I heard David Straight say that. I thought, man, how could he keep quiet about it? Because he’s not a man that has an easy time holding his tongue. You know what I mean?

[01:58:27] Brandon: That’s what I mean. And then just real quick, in 1967, I have it up on the screen here, but for the audio listeners, if you look in, and I don’t even really know how to even find this. Someone sent me this, which was mind blowing, but I’m going to go ahead and read this to you. So it’s a congressional record.

[01:58:45] It’s proceedings and debates of the 90th Congress. It’s the first session. It’s Volume 113, part 12, June 12th, 1967 to June 20th, 1967. This is page 15,641. It says here, the 14th Amendment. Is it a protection law or tool of usurpation?

[01:59:25] Luke: Whoa.

[01:59:26] Brandon: And they say, here– this is actually Congress. I’m going to stand up and get closer to the screen because I can’t fricking– can you read this?

[01:59:33] Luke: That’s tiny. It’s tiny on my end.

[01:59:35] Brandon: Let me see here. Oh, there we go. Sweet. “Whereas the reconstruction acts of Congress unlawfully overthrew their existing governments, removed their lawfully constituted legislatures by military force and replaced them with rump legislators, which carried out military orders and pretended to ratify the 14th Amendment.”

[02:00:10] Luke: Whoa.

[02:00:11] Brandon: This is Congress saying this.

[02:00:12] Luke: Whoa.

[02:00:14] Brandon: And we have here the 14th Amendment is unconstitutional. The purported 14th Amendment to the United States Constitution is and should be held to be ineffective, invalid, null, void, and unconstitutional for the following reasons. And then there’s reason number one.

[02:00:44] “The Joint Resolution proposing set Amendment was not submitted to or adopted by a constitutional Congress.” This is a bit above my head. I’m just going to read this, but I would need to go and dig into what all this means. Number two, “The Joint Resolution was not submitted to the president for his approval.”

[02:01:07] Number three, which is highlighted on this screen, three, “The proposed 14th Amendment was rejected by more than one fourth of all the states, then in the union, and it was never ratified by three-fourths of all the states and the union.” So the 14th Amendment is unique in a way that it doesn’t actually even effing exist.

[02:01:34] Luke: That’s insane, dude.

[02:01:35] Brandon: Not only does the 14th Amendment– I said that for a long time too. Oh, it needs to be pulled. It actually doesn’t. It actually is already non-existent. It needs to be acknowledged as already non-existent. Do you realize that the 14th Amendment was realized and acknowledged as non-existent? This is what would happen. The Federal Reserve Bank would disappear. The United States Citizen Classification would disappear. The FBI would disappear. The CIA would disappear. The police would disappear.

[02:02:17] Luke: Policy enforcers.

[02:02:18] Brandon: The United States Corporation would disappear. Everything would vanish. Now, what would we have left? If the 14th Amendment was acknowledged to have never been correctly, whatever, so basically through fraud, so it doesn’t actually exist even now, doesn’t actually exist at all, if it was simply acknowledged being in that condition, the condition of which it is, which is non-existent, we’d have the Wild West all over again. Boom. Instantaneously.

[02:02:47] You’d have the sheriff’s office, and you’d have national currency issued by each individual state. You’d have the California currency, you’d have the Utah currency, and those currencies would be stamped gold and silver coins. And banking would be reduced to almost non-existent. Instantly. Instantly.

[02:03:06] Every single person in all of North America would instantaneously regain all of their Bill of rights, all of their human rights, and the entire Constitution instantly. All concealed carry permits would instantly vanish, all serial numbers for firearms. Well, firearms won’t exist because if you look at the Second Amendment, it says nothing about firearms.

[02:03:28] Firearms is actually a corporate term. The correct term would be arms. So firearms would cease to exist entirely as a term in law. The only term that would apply at that point in time, from that point forward, is the term arms. The CFR would vanish. The USC would vanish. The UCC would vanish because I believe it’s only in America that they call it the UCC. It’s in other countries in other names.

[02:03:57] All of it would instantaneously, overnight, completely vanish. All the prisons would be emptied out except people who had swindled, murdered, harmed, stolen, crashed, drunk. Those would be the only things that would be left in the prison system. So 80, 90, 92, 94% of the entire prison system would be vacated instantaneously.

[02:04:23] Luke: All of the people found guilty of victimless crimes.

[02:04:27] Brandon: All of this would occur. And I always say the same thing. I don’t hate the FBI. I don’t hate the CIA. These people can go and they can work in the sheriff’s office. They can become sheriff’s deputies. And they can be very, very hard. And we can have this massive, humongous, gigantic sheriff’s office that’s very, very, very, very strong on victim crimes.

[02:04:52] Anywhere there’s a victim, you’ve got a swarm of huge burly men coming down on them with machine guns instantly. You can have that. You don’t need to just wipe out the FBI and wipe out the CIA and leave these people on the side of the road. You don’t need to do that. You can transfer all these people into the sheriff’s office, and they can operate as constitutional deputies. And they hear on the phone that grandma’s a victim of something, and they’re rolling 10 deep with a fucking SWAT truck. You know what I mean?

[02:05:22] It’s okay. That’s fine. Everyone would be happy with that. It’s like the fire department. The fire department doesn’t roll up all slow. No, they roll up 100 guys. There’s ladders. Everybody’s freaking out. They all these burly men. This fire needs to get taken out, and it needs to get taken out right now.

[02:05:42] If the sheriff’s office was massive and everybody from all these different agencies was all transferred into the sheriff’s office, they’re all bored sitting around. They get one call saying, grandma’s in trouble, and they’re crashing through the windows with machine guns and body armor.

[02:05:57] No one’s ever going to do anything to anybody anymore. And then very rapidly though, that kind of a situation is going to get boring for the sheriff’s office because then in about 10 minutes there’s not going to be any crime anymore because anybody hurts anybody else, and they’ve got 416 AR rifles in their mouth.

[02:06:14] So it’s a self-defeatist situation as well because then you take all those and you put them into the sheriff’s office, and then within two weeks, crime doesn’t exist anymore. Now what? Now what are they going to do? Now you got thousands and thousands and tens of thousands of guys that all want to have some fun and enjoy their thing, and they want crime because without crime, they don’t have no reason to exist.

[02:06:39] That’s going to be a weird situation. So it’s a self-defeating prophecy where, oh, yeah. Transfer all the FBI and the CIA into the sheriff’s office. Oh yeah, that’ll last about 10 minutes. But then at that point, you have a crimeless world.

[02:06:53] So it depends. It depends as a police officer or a sheriff because they’re two different things entirely. Sheriff’s on the unincorporated side, and police is on the corporate side, the commercial side. Do you really want a crimeless society? And if you had a crimeless society, would you be terribly bored?

[02:07:17] Like what you see in a lot of the old Wild West movies where the sheriff doesn’t really do much of anything. Because the thing is, is that if you repeal the 14th Amendment, that’s what you’re going to get. The 14th Amendment doesn’t already exist. So if you acknowledge the 14th Amendment as already not existing and remove its supposed illusionary ghost of it being existing, that’s what you’re going to get.

[02:07:45] Luke: Wild. Yeah. I’m thinking about the old West with the hangings in town square. When somebody murders someone, the whole town goes down to watch them hang, and crime starts to subside real quick.

[02:07:57] Brandon: That’s what you’re going to get, especially when you got 30,000 burly men with machine guns, and body armor, and cars. It’s not one guy on a horse with a six shooter. It’s a SWAT van, and body armor, and all this stuff. And they’re bored out of their mind, and they get a call, and they’re going to roll 35 deep on these people.

[02:08:15] It’s going to be horrifying. There’s not going to be one broken window on a car from here to Timbuktu. You’re going to have helicopters, and there’s like, oh, helicopters getting rushed on it. Might as well fire it up. You know what I mean? You want to talk about toxic masculinity?

[02:08:38] That’s masculinity. That’s what you’re going to get. You’re going to get one phone call, and you have an army coming down with these people, literally, a standing army coming down with these people. It’s not going to be the Wild West where you got one guy on horseback and he puts down his whiskey bottle to go roll across town and las with somebody.

[02:09:05] Especially if everyone from the CIA and FBI does get transferred into the sheriff’s office, it’s going to be crazy. There’s not going to be any crime. It’s just not going to exist anymore. Period. And then they’re going to get bored, and that’s not good. But that’s just how this is going to work, honestly.

[02:09:24] Luke: Well, the second I hear one politician AKA lawyer, because most of them are lawyers, come forward with this proposal, I’m on board. Unless and until then, I’m out. I’m really not interested. I’m interested in the work you’re doing and helping people become free. I want to ask you something real quick, and then we’ll start to wrap it up because there’s a whole other category of stuff that I’m going to get into when you come out here to Texas in the studio, like traveling in an automobile versus driving a motor vehicle, all that good stuff, debt, mortgages, all that.

[02:10:02] But the one thing for people listening that were programmed and indoctrinated into a false sense of morality, that paying your income taxes is a moral obligation, to use your obligation word again, would you explain to the listeners where our income tax actually goes and that it doesn’t go to build schools, and roads, and things that we would hope it would? Even people think it goes to Ukraine, and Israel, and foreign countries. It doesn’t even go there. So break that down because I find that really interesting.

[02:10:34] Brandon: It goes toward the national debt. Someone sent me the Grainger report or something like that. There’s even a report where they say that because the spending is so poor, a lot of it doesn’t even go to the interest on the debt. There’s basically zero accountability.

[02:10:52] It just basically just vanishes in thin air. It does not go to Ukraine. It does not go to all these things. It does not go to anything. State of California as a private corporation located in the District of Columbia, the Internal Revenue Service is a private corporation located in Puerto Rico.

[02:11:13] So if you believe that paying Federal Reserve notes, which are promissory notes– they’re not even real money. Real money is defined in Article 1 Section 10 of the Constitution as gold and silver coins.

[02:11:28] If you believe that Federal Reserve notes being transferred via a taxpayer to a private, non-governmental organization in Puerto Rico, which is a US territory, is now taking that money and then handing that money back to the private corporation called State of California so that the CEO named Gavin Newsom can take said money and use it to do whatever he’s going to do, I would need to see some evidence of that being the case because that does not sound very realistic to me, and the reports that I’ve seen do not indicate that at all.

[02:12:11] And if you believe that to be true, you should do a Freedom of Information Act request on that information. And if your Freedom of Information Act request is denied, you should be filing lawsuits with these organizations in order to get into what’s called discovery.

[02:12:29] When you are in a lawsuit and you get into discovery, you can ask all of these questions under penalty of perjury. And if the people you’re asking do not answer the questions, you can actually order the court to find them in contempt of court and they can be fined or imprisoned for not answering the questions.

[02:12:47] Now, if someone were to go onto discovery and ask these questions and proof were to be submitted to the fact that via a taxpayer, which is a person who is subject to any internal revenue tax, this Federal Reserve Notes, which are not money, you look in UCC 3-114, very, very clear that these notes, these promissory notes and bills of exchange are not money. It says it literally verbatim.

[02:13:17] If you believe that sending these non-money negotiable instruments via a taxpayer public corporation to a foreign non-governmental trust that behaves as though it is a government agency, whereas when you go on the internet, you type in is the IRS a government agency, and it’s very, very clear, even Google will tell you it is not a government agency.

[02:13:41] If you believe that those negotiable instruments or security is going to this private trust that’s located in an incorporated zone outside of what you would consider America, called Puerto Rico, is then turning around and transferring said securities to the private corporation located in the District of Columbia called State of California so that the private corporation called State of California, which is not even located where people think it’s located and has nothing to do with territorial boundaries of California Republic, is then going to now take said securities and negotiable instruments and use them in order to improve the living environments of that local area, that to me sounds like a delusional nightmare.

[02:14:26] Luke: It’s like the biggest shell game in history.

[02:14:33] Brandon: Yeah.

[02:14:33] Luke: It’s so much sleight of hand. It’s insane. And I think it this piece about taxes really plays on the inherent good in people. We all want to make a contribution to society. We don’t want to be selfish. We want to be giving. We want to support the less fortunate, and the poor, and disabled people that can’t take care of themselves.

[02:14:54] Any thinking, feeling person, of any moral character would want to contribute and help other people like most of us do. But that’s part of the manipulation that’s so insidious, is that’s not actually what’s happening. And you can see that by going to any city, especially blue cities and going downtown to Skid Row and watching the state of the poor people there that are suffering and aren’t being helped with our so-called tax dollars. So the whole thing is fraudulent.

[02:15:24] Brandon: And you start going down the nonprofit zones, and you start seeing all sorts of weird stuff with the nonprofits too. So I always recommend that if you really do– that’s one thing I like about the old country boys. I grew up in Indiana. If the road’s messed up, you buy a little something, you buy a little tar, you buy a little whatever it is at the store, and you head out there, and it’s the men, obviously. It’s a masculine thing. You pour a little whatever it is in there, and you scrape, scrape, scrape it, and you push it across, and you put up a couple of little orange cones, and that’s it. The road’s fixed now.

[02:16:00] Luke: Right, right. So I want to leave people with some links for you. We’re going to put all this stuff at lukestorey.com/brandon. So Brandon’s site, you guys, is quite hilarious, and it’s funny that the content is so serious in its nature, law, obviously, as you guys figured out by listening to this.

[02:16:19] But his site is onestupidfuck.com. His site is hilarious and also just really rich with valuable information. So if you guys found some of this intriguing, inspiring, you want to learn more, I highly recommend that you go there. And if you’re serious about this, sign up for his free course, the Contract Killers course.

[02:16:40] I’m in it, like I said a couple of times here tonight. And I am thoroughly enjoying it. To take something that is this dry and boring and make it entertaining is a real feat. So I want to congratulate you on that.

[02:16:52] It’s not the type of hour to hour and a half videos I would normally be able to watch and not fall asleep, but you bring so much levity and humor and just fun to it that. It’s actually really fun to learn this stuff, especially if you know what the possible rewards at the end of the rainbow are.

[02:17:11] If one was to implement this stuff and do so responsibly and not just go Wild West about it, but really be mindful and learn as you go and take certain steps, it’s extremely life changing information. So I want to make sure that people go check that out.

[02:17:30] Also, you’ve got your law firm now, Williams & Williams, and I think the last podcast I listened to of yours, you said, well, I’m overwhelmed studying and putting out content, and I’m full of clients. I’m sure there’s going to be a lot of people listening that are like, yeah, I want to do this, but I want you to hold my hand, or as you say, hold my phallus on your content.

[02:17:56] I think that people need to realize, and you can answer what your capacity is for helping people or people that want to hire you. But I think the way you’re putting out such a mass amount of high quality, high value information that people are beholden to digest that information because most of the questions and handholding, I’m assuming, and this has been the case for me, I’ve texted you a couple of times and asked you questions, and then I look like in the videos that I haven’t watched yet, and I’m like, oh shit.

[02:18:29] He covers that in number 27. I just got to finish the damn video. So I’ll stop bugging you. But I would recommend to people, if they’re interested, to really finish that course before trying to blow you up for questions you’ve already answered ad nauseum in your content. And I know how that is because I produce, two, three-hour podcasts once a week.

[02:18:49] I’ve been doing that for eight years. And people will hit me up on Instagram and be like, what’s the best water filter? And I’m like, ah, dude, that’s why I put out these exhaustive deep, dive podcasts. So I usually just send people the podcast. I’m like, your answer is here and enjoy. And obviously I’m happy to help people, but I’m sure that you find a lot of the questions you get from people that want your direct help are already answered in all of the content you put out that.

[02:19:19] Brandon: Yeah. I have a lot of shows, and I have stuff over here, and I have stuff over here, and I have stuff all over the place. And I’m about ready to make a update video, which is going to be placed right after video 11. And I will make an announcement to the whole email list, is huge, 36,000 people.

[02:19:36] I will make an announcement, and it’s going to be a bunch of updates to some of the things like, for example, the fact that I have an explanatory statement available now, the fact that I have my own revocation of election, which is now free, that can be used instead of the Form 56, which is what I use in the course to revoke that election that you made to be treated as a US resident for the purposes of determining your income tax liability from 26 CFR 187-1.

[02:20:07] 456 is what I talk about how to use in the course, but the revocation of election affidavit document that I now give away for free, which is pretty new, in my opinion, is a better choice. So I’m going to be making a video just updating some things. I’m going to place it after video 11. I’ve got a bunch of notes here in my little pack.

[02:20:25] I’m just making sure I have everything I want to say nailed down. But I try to do whatever I can, and explain whatever I can, and make updates, and make things, and as we go. And then what I’m working on now is the pro se litigant course, which is going to be released probably later this year.

[02:20:43] I don’t know how late. It depends. We got to get a couple of big Ws on these, couple of big wins on these cases. And then I’m going to be teaching everyone how to, all by yourself, no lawyer, nothing. You don’t even need any money upfront, literally, how to do it even for free. I’m going to teach you that too.

[02:21:04] Full-blown litigation, A to Z, no money down, no lawyer required. Anything you want, go after anybody you want. That’s going to be the pro se litigate course. And that course is also going to be free, so yeah.

[02:21:21] Luke: And what’s going on with your Williams & Williams, your upper and lowercase dual identity, your law firm? Are you guys working with people in this capacity or– I’m sure people are going to want to know that. Like, cool, I’ll study all this stuff, but I want help. Do you even do that, or are you at capacity at this point?

[02:21:42] Brandon: So I can show you real quick. So this is williamsandwilliamslawfirm.com. We have the current and previous litigation page. If you go down, I have the various cases that I’m working on, and then I have a link to the PDF files associated with the various complaints and civil cover letters and summons so you can actually see everything we’re doing.

[02:22:05] And then people don’t realize if you go to PACER, which is for federal cases, if you go to pacer.uscourts.gov, you can actually open up a free account, and you can actually search for cases. People don’t realize this. All cases and everything going on in these cases, and all the things that are being filed in these cases is all completely public information.

[02:22:34] And you can download it and print it, and you can do whatever you want. These are not private. Every once in a while, maybe there’ll be a– I don’t involve myself in child cases, but if you have a child involved and there’s certain laws against the information of the trial being published, specific filings into a court case may be considered private and may not be available on the PACER app, but 90%, especially of the stuff that we’re doing, almost everything is all public and available to be downloaded.

[02:23:04] So I just to make it easy. I have the PDF of the summons, and the complaint, and all the good stuff available right here for download for free. And then if you want to follow the cases, tremendous amounts of action is occurring. And my first case, the second, third case, are new and then my American Express case, which is going to be massive and people are really excited about seeing it, I just sent it off in the mail yesterday.

[02:23:33] I should have a case number within four or five days, and then that will get trumpeted through my email list and everywhere else. And everyone’s very excited to see that. So if you would like to see all the original documents of what we’re doing, you can download those for free from williamsandwilliamslawfirm.com.

[02:23:49] If you would like to follow along and see all of the tremendously hilarious activities of lawyers trying to intimidate my clients and complain that I am a sovereign citizen and flail around like children, you can see that in the PACER app, and you can look up the various case numbers, and you can follow along. Very exciting. I consider this, and I hear a lot of my people say that it’s more exciting than television, which I agree 100%. I think it’s more exciting than television. And to answer your question, I’m not really taking on a whole lot of people right now.

[02:24:21] We have a few clients, a bunch of cases for each client. I got a few clients that I’m onboarding, and then I have a lot of my own stuff. I’m trying to make time for all of my own stuff. I have so many things I want to file. And if you look here at how litigation works, there’s a breakdown of exactly how all of it works and exactly how we take on our clients and exactly what kind of clients we do accept.

[02:24:49] And then if you would like more information as to how is this legal and how can this even exist, and are you even a lawyer, and like, oh my God, this is the craziest thing I’ve ever seen? You can go to the questions and answers section where I answer all of those questions in great detail. And I have all of the definitions, and I have ideas, and the two types of attorney and what those mean and how they’re established.

[02:25:14] And are you a member of the bar, and are you practicing in state of California? And a lot of the information on this podcast is here, but it’s very, very good. And then one last thing I would like to actually share is on my YouTube channel. Let me stop sharing for just a moment. I have a few.

[02:25:35] It’s also the three pinned videos on my Instagram profile, which is @one.stupid.F-U-C-K. If you go to my YouTube channel, let me just see here, there are three videos that are only 10 minutes long. Let me show you those. Those are my favorite because if anybody–

[02:25:58] Luke: Infinite money, baby.

[02:26:00] Brandon: Yeah.

[02:26:00] Luke: Oh, man. Mind blowing.

[02:26:01] Brandon: So here’s the problem. You’re going to want to go, and you’re going to learn all this information, and you’re going to run around and try to tell everybody, and they’re all going to tell you you’re the most insane POS they’ve ever seen in our life.

[02:26:10] Okay, now, the way to handle that is I have this video here, how to have infinite money in less than 10 minutes. I have this video here, how to legally operate any car, motorcycle, etc., without smog, or a license, or whatever. 10-minute video. And then I have how to legally never pay taxes again in 10 minutes.

[02:26:28] Okay. Now, if you go on my Instagram, those three videos are the three pinned videos. If you go on my TikTok, those three videos are the pinned videos. Facebook, I only have just the infinite money video pinned because you can only pin one video. These are by far the best things to show people that you would like to share this information with, but you just don’t think you know enough and you don’t think you could capture their attention for several hours, which is a lot of what a lot of my other material is.

[02:27:01] The 10-minute videos are funny. They’re super fun. They’re super lighthearted, and they’re just so insane that I can– they were like flags in the ground. It’s like, if I can explain this stuff to someone that’s never heard of any of this in less than 10 minutes, I’ve really, really nailed it. I could just take a jury.

[02:27:22] I don’t care who the jury is, where they come from, age range, race, I could care less. I’m winning the case. For me it was that 10-minute mark. So I personally think that those videos are huge for the movement. I think they’re huge for what we’re doing, and I think they’re huge for people trying to share this information without being killed by their friends and family.

[02:27:48] Luke: I agree. I agree. Yeah. There is a lot of blank stares when you start to share this information with people. It’s just like right over the top of the head. But those are great videos. I highly recommend that. We’ll put them all in the show notes at lukestorey.com/brandon. Well, man, this has been enlightening, inspiring, super fun.

[02:28:10] I’ve been looking forward to this for a while, and I can’t wait to get you out here to Texas, man. I know you’re going to go on Alec’s show, The Way Forward, and you’re going to come over here. And we have a great group here, man, in Austin of like-minded folks, some buddies of mine and everyone’s starting to learn about this and become really interested and take some action.

[02:28:29] So it’s really exciting. This is the first thing in, I don’t know, maybe ever that I’ve actually seen as a viable way to really improve your life substantially. And to do so in a legal way that is devoid also of any– this isn’t a eff the government movement. This is like, we’re going to peacefully coexist with you.

[02:28:51] You guys do your thing in the District of Columbia and in the United States, and a group of us are just going to go do our own thing and go old school, United States of America. There’s a sense of diplomacy and peacefulness that actually feels really good to my nervous system.

[02:29:07] As someone who’s been eff the man my whole life, it’s like, wow, what if I just go my own way and forge my own path and allow them to keep doing whatever it is they want to do and just not participate in it. It’s a much more, I think, mentally healthy approach to it.

[02:29:24] And I really appreciate that. That’s where you’re coming from with this. And it’s really not subversive, or it’s not even rebellious. It’s just we talked about earlier, taking responsibility for your life and making different choices that are available. And I think it’s just a matter of educating people that there are other choices that are available for those that choose to pursue them.

[02:29:47] So man, thank you so much for being here. Thank you for all the work you’re doing. It’s super fun. I haven’t been this jazzed about something in quite a long time, so I’m excited.

[02:29:56] Brandon: I love it. Yeah, it’s good stuff, man. I’m the same way. I’m a freak, so it is what it is.

[02:30:02] Luke: You Sure.

[02:30:03] Brandon: Yeah, yeah, yeah.

[02:30:04] Luke: All right. Well, I’ll see you in a few weeks, my friend.

[02:30:06] Brandon: Awesome. Thank you so much, Luke.

Connect with Brandon Joe Williams at law firm website | state national theory website

Connect with Luke Storey

Cover image credit: Clker-Free-Vector-Images

Texas Wild Fires and Directed Energy Weapons

United Nations designated Smart Cities and corresponding “wildfires”

by Greg Reese, The Reese Report
March 15, 2024

Transcript:

Some are saying that Directed Energy Weapons are being deployed to spark the largest fire in Texas history. And we know that these weapons exist.

“This newly released footage shows the Dragon-Fire laser directed energy weapon system in action. And it could be in the hands of military personnel in five years time. It destroys targets with an intense beam of light and has pinpoint accuracy. It’s able to hit something the size of a £1 coin from a kilometer away.”
~ Claire Sadler (Forces News)

The fires we have seen in recent years, including the fires in Texas, are very different from what we have seen in the past. They often selectively spare the trees while burning the infrastructure into a powdery ash footprint.

“I have witnessed and observed some extraordinary damage in our state. Could be caused by hurricanes or tornadoes, and frequently when you see the aftermath of that damage, there’s a, some semblance of a structure that is still there. When you look at the damages that have occurred here, it’s just gone, completely gone. Nothing left but ashes on the ground.”
~ Texas Governor Greg Abbott

After the Maui fires, many people believed that a blue roof was able to deflect these Directed Energy Weapons and spare the home from destruction. And Joe Biden recently eluded to this twice.

“If you fly over these areas that are burned to the ground, you’ll see in a mist of 20 homes that are just totally destroyed, one home sitting there because they had the right roof on it. And, anyway…”
~ President Joe Biden

“And by the way, have you noticed when you fly over in a helicopter, those places with good roofs, they didn’t burn!”

“With the right materials.”
~ Unknown

“Yeah! So I gotta change that. Anyway…”
~ President Joe Biden

Joe Biden is clearly not a reliable source for accurate information, but why would a roof save a house from burning? And while there is plenty of circumstantial evidence that suggests Directed Energy Weapons are being used to start these recent fires, arsonists have been arrested starting them the old fashioned way. And there is a clear motive.

The United Nations, who have been orchestrating the open border policy of America and several other countries, have openly announced plans to clear the lands of people and move them into Smart Cities.

Starting with Agenda 21, a map which shows designated off-limits-to-humans areas, lined up with the 2018 California fires.

Nine Years ago, planning was announced for Smart Cities to be built on Maui. But the most coveted property was owned by natives whose families have lived there for generations prior to Hawaii being annexed by the US. In August of 2023, Maui was devastated by highly suspicious fires. Roads were blocked off to keep residents from escaping. And the US government gave survivors a mere seven hundred dollars per household.

A conference in April of 2023 met in Viña Del Mar, Chile to provide the municipality with support in the transfer of knowledge about the theory and solutions of smart cities. A year later, Viña Del Mar was ravaged by fires. It was blamed on Climate Change, but local officials claimed arson.

And in 2022, Amarillo Texas was reported to be the number one area ‘under the radar’ for the Texas housing market under the United Nations’ vision 2045. On February 26^th of this year, the biggest fires of Texas history broke out in this same area.

Vision 2045 is the latest iteration of the United Nations’ plan to seize control of ninety percent of the land and limit people to fifteen minutes cities.

“We’d like to think that change happens in manageable ways. It doesn’t happen like that. It happens in punctuated equilibrium where we have periods of stability and then periods of massive radical, disruptive and transformative change. And that is where we are right now.”

“This is the decisive decade in the history of humanity. We who are here now have a responsibility that no future generations will have.”
~ Vision 2045

Connect with Greg Reese

Cover image credit: screenshot from video

The WHO and Phony International Law

by Bruce Pardy, Brownstone Institute
January 31, 2024

A new pandemic treaty is in the works. Countries are negotiating its terms, along with amendments to international health regulations. If ready in time, the World Health Assembly will approve them in May. The deal may give the WHO power to declare global health emergencies. Countries will promise to follow WHO directives. Lockdowns, vaccine mandates, travel restrictions, and more will be in the works. Critics say that the agreements will override national sovereignty because their provisions will be binding. But international law is the art of the Big Pretend.

You drive down Main Street. Cars are parked everywhere. The signs say “No Parking” but they also say, “The City does not enforce parking restrictions.” In effect there’s no rule against parking. Laws are commands imposed with the force of the state. Rules without sanctions are mere suggestions. Some people may honor the request, but others won’t. Those who disagree with the rule can safely ignore it. In domestic law, “enforceable” and “binding” are synonyms.

But not in international law, where promises are called “binding” even if they are unenforceable. In the international sphere, countries are the highest authority. Nothing stands above them with the power to enforce their promises. No such courts exist. The International Court of Justice depends on the consent of the countries involved. No international police enforce its orders. The UN is a sprawling bureaucracy, but in the end, it is merely a place for countries to gather. The WHO is a branch of the UN whose mandate countries negotiate amongst themselves.

In the proposed pandemic treaty, parties are to settle disputes through negotiation. They may agree to be subject to the International Court of Justice or to arbitration. But they cannot be required to.

Yet international law jurists insist that unenforceable treaty promises can be binding. “The binding character of a norm does not depend on whether there is any court or tribunal with jurisdiction to apply it,” Daniel Bodansky, a professor of international law at Arizona State University, wrote in a 2016 analysis of the Paris climate agreement. “Enforcement is not a necessary condition for an instrument or norm to be legally binding.” Without this Big Pretend, international law would collapse like a house of cards on a windy beach.

All countries are sovereign. They are free to retaliate against each other for perceived wrongs, including breaches of treaty promises. They can seek to have other countries censured or expelled from the international regime. They can impose trade sanctions. They can expel ambassadors. But retaliation is not “enforcement.” Moreover, international relations are a delicate business. Aggrieved countries are more likely to express their disappointment in carefully crafted diplomatic language than to burn bridges.

The threat from WHO proposals come not from outside but from within. We live in a managerial age, run by a technocratic elite. Over time, they have acquired for themselves the discretion to direct society for the common good, as they declare it to be.

As journalist David Samuels puts it, “Americans now find themselves living in an oligarchy administered day-to-day by institutional bureaucracies that move in lock-step with each other, enforcing a set of ideologically-driven top-down imperatives that seemingly change from week-to-week and cover nearly every subject under the sun.” These bureaucracies regulate, license, expropriate, subsidize, track, censor, prescribe, plan, incentivize, and inspect. Pandemics and public health are the most recent justifications for yet more control.

Domestic governments, not international bodies, will impose WHO recommendations on their citizens. They will pass laws and policies that incorporate those directives. Even an exasperated WHO Director-General Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus said so in a briefing this week. “There are those who claim that the pandemic agreement and [amended regulations] will seed sovereignty…and give the WHO Secretariat the power to impose lockdowns or vaccine mandates on countries…These claims are completely false…the agreement is negotiated by countries for countries and will be implemented in countries in accordance with your own national laws.”

Ghebreyesus is correct. Local and national authorities will not give up their powers. To what extent international commitments will be “binding” on a country depends not on international law but on that country’s own domestic laws and courts. Article VI of the US Constitution, for example, provides that the Constitution, federal laws, and treaties together “shall be the supreme Law of the Land.” That does not mean that treaties supersede the Constitution or federal laws. Domestic legislation and policy will be required for the proposed pandemic treaty and WHO directives to be enforced on American soil. Such legislation is an exercise of sovereignty, not a repudiation of it.

The proposals are not benign. Domestic authorities seek cover for their own autocratic measures. Their promises will be called “binding” even though they are not. Local officials will justify restrictions by citing international obligations. Binding WHO recommendations leave them no choice, they will say. The WHO will coordinate their imperatives as the face of global public health.

The WHO is not taking over. Instead, it will be the handmaiden for a coordinated global biomedical state. Managers hate straight lines. Diffuse, discretionary powers avoid accountability and the rule of law. The global health regime will be a tangled web. It is meant to be.

Connect with Brownstone Institute

Cover image credit: Clker-Free-Vector-Images

German Truckers Team Up With Farmers to Raise Hell Over Disappearing Fuel Subsidies

by Tyler Durden, ZeroHedge
January 9, 2024

German truckers joined farmers for a week of protests over a government plan to scrap tax breaks on diesel used in agriculture in order to ‘combat climate change,’ after Chancellor Olaf Scholz’s three-party coalition announced plans last month to nix a car tax exemption for farming vehicles as well as diesel tax breaks.

Protesters in front of the Brandenburg Gate in Berlin parked tractors and displayed signs such as ‘No farmer, no food, no future’.

The government announcement is part of a plan to try and fix a 17-billion-euro (US$18.6 billion) hole in Germany’s 2024 budget, AP reports.

Holy shít. German farmers and truckers are fed up and are now united against their government. This is Berlin right now:

pic.twitter.com/Qtf8aQJWuI

— End Wokeness (@EndWokeness) January 8, 2024

On Thursday, the government walked back part of the plan, announcing that while the car tax exemption would remain, cuts in diesel tax breaks would be staggered over three years. This did not calm German farmers, whose Association demanded a full reversal, and said it would move forward with a “week of action” starting Monday, in which farmers used tractors to block entry roads to highways early in the day.

There was disruption due to convoys of tractors in and around some cities, too. Production at a Volkswagen auto plant in Emden in northwestern Germany was stopped because access roads were blocked, preventing employees from getting to work, German news agency dpa reported.

Among demonstrations across the country, several hundred tractors and other vehicles gathered in front of the Brandenburg Gate in Berlin.

The protests are under scrutiny after a group of farmers on Thursday prevented Vice Chancellor Robert Habeck from disembarking a ferry in a small North Sea port as he returned from a personal trip to an offshore island. -AP

And of course, authorities are warning that ‘far-right groups and others could try and capitalize on the protests. (Maybe Russia too!?).

Germany’s budgetary changes included the controversial cuts, which was ‘required’ after the country’s highest court annulled an earlier decision to redirect nearly US$66 billion originally meant to mitigate fallout from the COVID-19 pandemic in order to combat climate change and modernize the country.

Surely this won’t lead to more rampant inflation.

IT'S HAPPENING

The truckers have joined the German farmers protest!

They are standing together.

SHARE – The media won't show you this 🚜🇩🇪🚛🇩🇪pic.twitter.com/jOVxG0r1Wy

— PeterSweden (@PeterSweden7) January 8, 2024

Connect with ZeroHedge

Cover image credit: H-tt
protesting farmers in Munich, Germany 2024-01-08

Catherine Austin Fitts on “The Great Taking” Financial Coup That Intends to Strip Us of All Assets

The Great Taking

by Dr. Joseph Mercola
January 7, 2024

Video available at BitChute. Download interview transcript.

Story-at-a-Glance

David Webb, a former hedge fund investor, has written a book called “The Great Taking,” as well as filmed a documentary by the same name. His book and film detail how the Federal Reserve influences financial markets, and how its money creation has outpaced economic growth of the U.S., which is a huge red flag indicating that the velocity of money is collapsing
Central bankers and other globalists have carefully planned the coordinated takedown of the financial system using highly sophisticated strategies, including the manipulation of derivative markets. Whatever securities you believe you may own, you’re not the actual owner of, and when the derivative markets collapse, everything can be taken from you
While Webb’s work raises serious concerns, there are other more pressing issues that need our attention. Priority No. 1 is ensuring we have control over our financial transactions. We need to help state legislators to protect financial transaction freedom
North Dakota has a sovereign state bank, and the Florida State Legislature is getting ready to introduce legislation for state banking in the state of Florida. All states need to do this, as it’s one of the primary ways to protect the financial freedom of all citizens
Priority No. 2 is building and securing food freedom, and No. 3 is transparency and education. We need to educate people about the severity of what’s coming, so that we can, en masse, begin to make different choices

The video above features repeat guest Catherine Austin Fitts, a finance expert, and founder and president of the Solari Report. She’s one of the wisest persons out there when it comes to understanding finances and how to protect your wealth in the face of this global wealth transfer.

We also discuss the work of David Webb,¹ a former hedge fund investor and a good friend of Austin Fitts. He has written a book called “The Great Taking,” available for free as a PDF from thegreattaking.com, as well as a documentary by the same name, available on CHD.TV, Rumble and YouTube.

Webb’s book and film detail how the Federal Reserve influences financial markets, and how its money creation has outpaced economic growth of the U.S., which is a huge red flag indicating that the velocity of money (the rate at which money is circulating through the economy) is collapsing. In short, a major financial depression is at hand, and when it all falls apart, we will lose everything.

A Financial Coup Is Underway

Webb reveals how central bankers and other globalists have, for at least five decades or more, carefully planned the coordinated takedown of the financial system using highly sophisticated strategies, including the manipulation of derivative markets.

Whatever securities you believe you may own, you’re not the actual owner of, and when the derivative markets collapse, everything can be taken from you. At the end of it all, you truly will “own nothing,” as predicted/promised by the World Economic Forum (WEF).

But there’s more. In her annual wrap-up, Austin Fitts reviews what she calls “many great takings,” because Webb only describes one of them. Wealth is also being stolen from us in dozens of other ways, and we need to understand them all if we are to protect ourselves with any amount of success.

“My focus is hugely on remedies, not problems,” Austin Fitts says, “and when it comes to remedies, you want to make sure you sequence your remedies against the enemy’s various tactics. So, sequencing is very, very important when it comes to remedies.

The important thing to understand about the great taking is that the World Economic Forum has told you what they’re planning: It’s 2030 and you have no assets. So the question is, exactly how are they going to strip you of your assets?

What David is talking about is stripping you of your securities, but you need to worry about far more than just your securities. You need to worry about your bank, which he touches on and does a very good job of describing some of the history around banking. You have to worry about your real estate. You have to really worry about your precious metals and other currency alternatives.

You have to worry about your business and your local investments and then yes, you have to worry about your securities. David is focused on just securities, which is why we did this section called ‘The Great Taking’ that goes through everything.”

Top Three Priorities

While Webb’s work may raise serious concerns, there are other more pressing issues that need our attention. Priority No. 1, according to Austin Fitts, is ensuring we have control over our financial transactions. Her focus for 2024 is therefore to help state legislators in the U.S. to work with banks and citizens within its jurisdiction to protect financial transaction freedom.

“That’s where pushback is critical,” she says. “If they can get financial transaction control then they can take everything, and I mean, everything, including your children …

If you dive in and look at the terms and conditions that some of these payment gateways are asking for now … you’re giving them permission to go into your bank account and take everything. It’s frightening.

So, the No. 1 thing to remedy against is financial transaction control. If you go to Solari, we have something called a financial transaction freedom memo. Print it out and start looking at all the things you can do to protect yourself from somebody controlling your financial transactions.

If they get that, The Great Taking is on. They take everything — real estate, securities, everything. So first and foremost, don’t worry about your securities. Worry about your banking and your transactions.

The second Great Taking is … food and health. The push to control the food system is on because to control financial transactions, they also need to control food because, if you can get your food and energy outside the banking system, you can survive without their banking system. This is why we cannot allow a 100% digital financial system.

The third Great Taking I’m concerned about is the real estate, because we see an extraordinary move being done to take control of the land, the real estate, including farmland, which is very much related to the food.

There are all sorts of games that can be played with the banking system to default people on their mortgages, and of course, interest rates and inflation are part and parcel of that.”

As noted by Austin Fitts, the process of reducing the homeownership rate has been going on for decades. It’s related to monetary policy, because inflation has doubled the average payment on the median-price home in America over the last four or five years alone. So, the younger generation is being completely wiped out and cannot afford to buy homes.

It’s also related to another Great Taking, which is the fraudulent inducement of student loans. Most of the big banks are paying close to zero percent for their capital, while students with loans are paying 5% to 9%, and those with credit card debt are paying 17%. “It’s an extraordinary differential in the cost of capital that’s literally engineered into the system in a very unfair way,” she says.

A System to Rob Us of Our Security Assets

Austin Fitts goes on to review Webb’s background, and how he came to the discoveries he made. In summary, financial regulators have created a way, through the custodian system, of robbing 100% of the security assets as a senior creditor, most likely through a default of derivatives.

Austin Fitts is not overly concerned about this, though, because while Webb believes a legal pathway has been created through the Uniform Commercial Code (UCC), Austin Fitts and her experts don’t think it’ll stick. “We are still looking for a UCC expert who can figure this out,” she says.

What Webb has proven, however, is that there has been an extraordinary effort by the financial regulators to assert control of ALL collateral. Austin Fitts believes this was done to keep the financial bubble going.

“The reason I’m not worried about a grab of the securities in the near future is because I think the way you grab assets is by getting financial transaction control to the banking system,” she says. “Once you have that, you can do everything. You can take 100% of the assets, including securities. So, I think financial transaction control is coming faster.

I think in terms of sequencing, a grab of all the securities is not near. What David would say is, if they get themselves in a corner, they have to do it. My feeling is they have so many ways out of a corner, it’s not necessary. What they’re going to do is what I’ve seen them doing, which is pushing for financial transaction control.

But here’s what’s great about David’s research. No one goes through the bother of doing what they’ve done if there’s integrity in the system. I think David has proven, yet again, that the financial system is lacking integrity and is engineered to benefit a few at the expense of the many.

The other thing I thought was very good about his book was, he describes the game in terms of insiders and outsiders to the banking system through the Great Depression — how your bank could fold; you lose your deposits, but you’re still liable for your mortgage.

And of course, that’s how you get people’s real estate. You abrogate your income obligations to them, but then you hold them accountable for their debts.”

There’s No Safe Harbor for Anyone

It’s telling that Webb started this journey because he was trying to figure out how to protect his own family’s wealth only to, in the end, realize there is no safe harbor, not even for a financial insider like himself. The system is completely rigged from every angle. The sober realization is that there’s no getting away from this Great Taking.

We must face it head on, and do the work necessary to change the system so that it protects everyone. Part of that work is to make our political representatives understand what is happening, and that it is in their own self-interest to protect financial freedom.

Many of them are extraordinarily wealthy, and they too stand to lose everything if they don’t take action. They’re not insulated from this Great Taking. Like Webb discovered, there’s no safe harbor for them either. Webb’s contention is that the situation is salvageable, but we do need some kind of reset.

Just not The Great Reset the globalists have planned. One possibility would be to implement a small tax on digital transactions, like a fraction of 1%. The revenues generated from that transactional fee could fund the government, doing away with income taxes, provided we don’t have to engage in international wars.

Top Three Financial Drains

According to Austin Fitts, the top three things that are draining our wealth are:

Tyranny
The use of environmentally damaging processes like industrial farming instead of regenerative farming, the hardware required for the control grid and the electromagnetic field radiation that goes with it
The control of innovation, which prevents cost savings

All three of these are alterable. We can eliminate these financial drains, but we can’t start there. First, we need to secure our financial transaction freedom, because everything basically hinges on that. If we lose that, we’ve already lost everything else.

Three Basic Action Items

Again, be sure to download Solari’s financial transaction freedom memo. It details the problems, and the solutions. “Do what you’re comfortable doing,” Austin Fitts says.

“One is using cash. And when you use cash, start talking with local businesses and find ways of interacting locally that will give you more local resilience. And of course, the big one is food, because I don’t know a way of getting food that is safe, other than knowing where it’s coming from and knowing the people who are producing it …

The third thing you can do is to bring transparency, and this is really important. If you go to Solari, we’ve put together a list of short videos on CBDCs and financial transaction freedom. The first one is the one-minute video of the head of the BIS basically saying we can make the rules centrally and enforce them centrally with CBDCs.

The second one is Neel Kashkari, head of the Minneapolis Fed, one of the 12 Fed banks, saying ‘I can see why the Chinese would want this because it gives you complete surveillance and control. But why would Americans ever let this happen?’ If it’s so bad that one of the Fed presidents is telling you you don’t want it, that’s very helpful.

Then we have Bo Li [deputy managing director of the] IMF talking about the programmability of money, so if they decide you can only eat bugs and no pizza, your money will only buy bugs. And then the last one is Richard Werner talking about a top central banker telling him that CBDCs, ultimately, will be a chip that they want to put in your hand.

We need to tell people what’s going on and help them understand how serious this is, because it’s hard for many to fathom that somebody would want that kind of complete control. With AI and software, you can deliver that kind of complete control.

With a very short video, one minute or less, people get it. And that’s the point at which you can turn to your state legislators and your state banking association and say, ‘OK, what are you guys going to do to make sure I don’t end up like the Tennessee truckers?’

What’s very interesting … the states have the power to assert complete sovereignty over the money and the cash flows within their area, and to protect them. Now, they haven’t done it. And one of the reasons they haven’t done it is the Treasury and the central banks have been very good at making it financially attractive to buy into the federal system.

[Eventually], it’s going to be more important to be sovereign and free than to get another $2 billion in education — an education that requires you to teach your kids how to be sex slaves.

So, one of the things you can do bring transparency, but start working with your bankers, with your State Bankers Association, your state legislators, and encourage them to take the steps. And if you look at the Financial Transaction Freedom memo, we list all the different things that a federal legislator can do.”

Why We Need Sovereign State Banks

North Dakota already has a sovereign state bank, and the Florida State Legislature is getting ready to introduce legislation for state banking in the state of Florida. Tennessee is looking at ways to create independent payment systems, and is in the process of starting a Bullion Depository and authorizing their treasurer to start buying gold and silver.

These are just some of the strategies that can, and need, to be implemented by all states. As noted by Austin Fitts, “The only way I can protect my individual sovereignty is if my state protects my financial sovereignty.” And states can do that by implementing sovereign state banks that are not tied to the central banking system.

“If you have a sovereign state bank, what that means is, your citizens are paying taxes into your accounts, and you have the ability, working with the state banks and credit unions and financial institutions, to keep the transactions going so that the Treasury or the central bank can’t lock you down or shut you down.

I mean, that is amazing. If you also have a bullion depository, then you’ve got gold and silver reserves and that makes it easier for other people in the state to have a depository they can trust, and that means they can start doing transactions with gold and silver, particularly if you take the sales tax off.

Tennessee has taken the sales tax off golden and silver. And there’s a big squabble now — several states have put in bills making gold and silver legal tender, but do it in a way where the Feds can’t charge capital gains, so that you can use gold and silver as currencies locally. It’s a great way to start a local currency.”

A Building Wealth Reset

In conclusion, what we need to do, first and foremost, is to regain and safeguard our control of our financial transactions. Next, we need what Austin Fitts refers to as a “building wealth reset,” a reset of the financial system that allows us to build both living equity (health) and financial equity.

And we can do that. While it may seem as though we’re on a speed train headed for a brick wall, and that we have no way to get off, that may simply be an illusion. We probably have far more choice than we think.

“During my litigation [against the government], I had many different attorneys, and they would surround me and say, ‘You have to do this, you have no choice,’” Austin Fitts says.

“And I would say ‘I refuse. I’m not going to do that.’ That’s a choice. And then, what would happen? Suddenly, an option would open up that wasn’t there before. In other words, my refusal to go down the pathway that I had no choice created a new choice.”

Remember that as you move forward. Refusing to be part of the system may seem impossible, but the very act of making the choice to refuse may be the very thing that opens up brand new possibilities and options. Certainly, there are paths to victory, beginning with getting state leadership to get onboard with sovereign state banking.

1 TFTC December 18m, 2023

Connect with Dr. Joseph Mercola

Cover image credit: MV-Fotos

The Electronic Takeover of Every Asset on Earth, “The Great Taking,” and the Control of Humanity

by Gary D. Barnett
December 28, 2023

“Banking was conceived in iniquity and born in sin… Bankers own the earth. Take it away from them, but leave them the power to create money and control credit, and with a flick of a pen they will create enough to buy it back.”

~ Josiah Stamp

Sometimes things seem so complicated, that most simply avoid any effort to understand the problems facing them. Very little of anything is too complicated or too complex for any thinking individual to understand, so breaking things down to a level that is more easily understandable is often necessary for clarity. These efforts can be helped along by those with knowledge about important issues, who take the time to explain them in such a manner, that little expertise is necessary to figure out the basis of the matter at hand. A great impediment to this dilemma, is the fact that the State has over many decades, attempted, and most successfully, to dumb-down the population at large, by taking over the ‘schooling’ of each generation almost from birth until full adulthood and beyond, thereby harming the intellect of large numbers of ‘society’ to such an extent, as to effectively negate meaningful dialogue.

The result of this manufactured and manipulated outcome, has been the plotted creation of a blind, ignorant, and indifferent population, with voluminous propaganda being used as a tool of deception. This has led to mass slavery, even though the crowd for the most part, still believes due to extreme gullibility and brainwashing, that they are somehow free. This solidifies the statement made by Von Goethe, that “None are so enslaved as those who falsely believe they are free.” This country is the epitome of this reality, but few recognize the existence and scope of the extreme uncertainty confronting us, and the dire consequences of the mass inaction of the herd in the face of the staggering challenges ahead.

Our plight, at least in the economic and financial sense, has been recently explained by David Rogers Webb, in his documentary, “The Great Taking.” This is very well done so far as explaining much of what has happened, how it happened, and the players involved on Wall Street, in government and by so-called ‘law-makers,’ political regulators, corporate heads, and the central bankers, whose ability to create unlimited sums of currency has plunged this country into economic hell. A lot of what he is saying in this production is spot on, and does get very technical concerning the structuring of assets so as to place ownership of nearly everything intangible on earth in the hands of the few at the top of the banking cabal. Where he completely fails, is in his very confused ideas concerning the solutions to this takeover plot.

On one hand, he nails the problems, but on the other, he destroys all his efforts due to his gross ignorance and misunderstanding of government and the power structures bent on controlling everything. It is astounding to me that Webb understands so much about the corruption, dishonesty, and intricate criminal workings of those who control the ‘money,’ but fails miserably in his assessment of how to go about fixing these problems.

This is not uncommon, as most everyone seeks solutions from outside themselves, and inside the very failed system that has always been the problem. This is of course backward, but by accepting the system and attempting to change and reform it using that same system, negates any risk or responsibility of the individual, and places all efforts on ‘trusting’ others to be honest and noble for the benefit of the evil and moronic idea of the ‘greater good.’ Let’s just get ‘better people’ in government; let’s tell government not to seek power or expand; let’s just ‘educate’ the ruling class, because they really do not want this, but only inherited this ownership layer of power. “They (Rothschilds, Rockefellers, Royals, Presidents) did not design this, they did not put it into motion, they have allowed the juggernaut to continue; they are not particularly capable people.”

All we have to do according to Webb, is push the ‘awareness’ of the insanity of wanting to control everything, to the top levels of all the “muscle,” (politicians, agency heads, corporate heads, CIA, military brass, etc.) who enforce the criminal behavior of the real rulers, so that they will see the error of their ways, because “they did not know anything about this” plot. So all we have to do is reach people at high levels, in order to expect them to save us.

With Webb’s thinking, we do not need to get rid of this heinous system, all we need to do is repair it. We do not need a privately-owned central bank, (of course not) we need to have a central bank run like a ‘public’ utility, or in other words, the government should run the central bank and return all profits to the ‘public’ (government) and for the support of that same government. This is what I would refer to as a socialistic, communistic, nationalistic, and fascist, utopian monetary plan, based on pure fantasy.

According to Webb, “We have to have government. We have to have someone to ‘operate’ society.” “Anarchy and chaos; (opposites) we can’t have that.” His notion is that everything has to be done ‘legally,’ which only means by the forced and enforced rules of the State. All we have to do is to make government smaller, limited, and beneficial to humanity. Ah, so simple?

Enough of this poppycock, love and respect of the evil State, its laws, and the expectation that by informing the ruling class that it is not being good, that they will understand their complicity in evil, and voluntarily reverse everything they have done perpetually throughout history, and only act as benevolent masters and ‘leaders,’ ministers of peace for humanity, and lowly saints of man. All this nonsense means is that a full reliance on educating the near top level of rule, so that they will speak out against what is happening; those high level politicians, billionaires, corporate heads, and banking magnates, and then the ‘system’ will repair itself for the betterment of mankind.

All assets on earth are on the chopping block, as all assets are coming under the control of the ruling master class. The electronic takeover of all monetary, credit, and debt systems, total control the internet, and the all-consuming growth of artificial ‘intelligence,’ are going ahead full steam, and once in place universally, once all monetary transactions are digital, once CBDCs and other central bank monetary units (fed coins, etc.) are in place, and when currencies are cleared and controlled from a global central source or sources, the total loss of control by individuals, will be the result. All property will be subject to confiscation and management by the State, including the very lives of the sheep.

The bankers own the earth, (and all politicians) and will never give up their power to create money out of thin air, and without limit. Even if government was to somehow take over the monetary system and control the central bank, a joke to be sure, it would never rectify this gross corruption, or act in favor of the people. The entire system is the problem; government is the problem, so in order for any escape from this insanity, in order to ever regain any aspect of real freedom, this entire system, all of it, must be abolished.

Nothing of value can ever come from seeking redress from the same government that is the oppressor of humanity. No government or ruling class controlling government, will ever limit its own power in favor of individual sovereignty, for that would automatically negate any need of government or rule. No government or rule should exist, as it is completely immoral for any man to rule another by force. The natural state of man is to be free, and this is the responsibility of each and every individual; each and every one of you.

“Between the government which does evil and the people who accept it – there is a certain shameful solidarity.”

~ Victor Hugo

Reference links:

The Great Taking

The End of the World as We Know It

Harmonizing central bank digital currencies for cross-border transactions

Connect with Gary D. Barnett

Cover image credit: RichardsDrawings

Intentional Destruction: First Covid, Now Comes “The Great Taking”

by Matt Smith, International Man
December 16, 2023

The Great Depression was a well-executed plan to seize assets, impoverish the population, and remake society. What comes next is worse..

A recent book by David Webb sheds new light on exactly what happened during the Great Depression. In Webb’s view, it was a set up.

Webb is a successful former investment banker and hedge fund manager with experience at the highest levels of the financial system. He published The Great Taking a few months ago, and recently supplemented it with a video documentary. Thorough, concise, comprehensible and FREE. Why? Because he wants everyone to understand what’s being done.

The Great Taking describes the roadmap to collapse the system, suppress the people, and seize all your assets. And it includes the receipts.

You Already Own Nothing

Webb’s book illustrates, among other things, how changes in the Uniform Commercial Code converted asset ownership into a security entitlement. The “entitlement” designation made personal property a mere contractual claim. The “entitled” person is a “beneficial” owner, but not the legal one.

In the event a financial institution is insolvent, the legal owner is the “entity that controls the security with a security interest.” In essence, client assets belong to the banks. But it’s much worse than that. This isn’t simply a matter of losing your cash to a bank bail-in. The entire financial system has been wired for a controlled demolition.

Webb describes in detail how the trap was set, and how the Great Depression provides precedent. In 1933, FDR declared a “Bank Holiday.” By executive order, banks were closed. Later, only those approved by the Fed were allowed to reopen.

Thousands of banks were left to die. People with money in those disfavored institutions lost all of it, as well as anything they’d financed (houses, cars, businesses) that they now couldn’t pay for. Then, a few “chosen” banks consolidated all the assets in the system.

Centralization and Systemic Risk

As Webb shows, the cake has been baked for years. But this week came a sign it’s coming out of the oven. Last Monday, Bloomberg admitted that measures taken to ostensibly “protect the system” actually amplify risk.

In the wake of the 2008 financial crisis, G20 ‘leaders’ mandated all standardized Over The Counter (OTC) derivatives be cleared through central counterparties (CCPs), ostensibly to reduce counter party risk and increase market transparency. The best known CCP in the US is the Depository Trust and Clearing Corporation (DTCC), which processes trillions of dollars of securities transactions each day.

Before 2012, OTC derivative trades were bi-lateral and counterparty risk was managed by parties to a transaction. When doing business directly with other firms, each had to make sure it was dealing with reliable parties. If they had a bad reputation or were not creditworthy, counterparties could consider them toxic and shut them out of trades. This, according to the wise G20 leadership, was too risky.

With the introduction of central clearing mandates, counterparty risk was shifted via CCPs away from the firms doing the deal to the system itself. Creditworthiness and reputation were replaced with collateral and complex models.

Brokers, banks, asset managers, hedge funds, corporations, insurance companies and other so-called “clearing parties” participate in the market by first posting collateral in the form of Initial Margin (IM) with the CCP. It’s through this IM and a separate and much smaller Default Fund (DF) held at the CCP that counterparty risk is managed.

To ‘Mutualise’ Losses

Shifting risk from individual parties to the collective is a recipe for trouble. But, as explained in a recent report from the BIS, it’s worse than that. The structure of CCPs themselves can cause “Margin Spirals” and “wrong-way risk” in the event of market turbulence.

In flight-to-safety episodes, CCPs hike margin requirements. According to the BIS,

“Sudden and large IM hikes force deleveraging by derivative counterparties and can precipitate fire sales that lead to higher volatility and additional IM hikes in so-called margin spirals.”

We’ve already gotten a taste of what this can look like. Similar margin spirals “occurred in early 2020 (Covid-19) and 2022 (invasion of Ukraine), reflecting the risk-sensitive nature of IM models.”

Government Bonds as a source of trouble

The second area of systemic risk is the dual use of government bonds as both collateral and as underlying assets in derivatives contracts. Volatility in the government bond market can lead to a demand for more collateral underlying the derivatives markets precisely when government bond prices are declining. Falling bond prices erode the value of the existing IM. Collateral demands skyrocket just as the value of current and would-be collateral is evaporating.

Again, the BIS:

Wrong-way risk dynamics appeared to play a role during the 2010–11 Irish sovereign debt crisis. At that time, investors liquidated their positions in Irish government bonds after a CCP raised the haircuts on such bonds when used as collateral. This led to lower prices of Irish government bonds triggering further haircuts, further position closures and ultimately a downward price spiral.

Designed to fail

The BIS doesn’t admit it, but Webb says the CCPs themselves are deliberately under-capitalized and designed to fail. The start-up of a new CCP is planned and pre-funded. When that happens, it’ll be the “secured creditors” who will take control of ALL the underlying collateral.

Once more, the BIS:

…to mutualise potential default losses in excess of IM, CCPs also require their members to contribute to a default fund (DF). As a result, CCPs are in command of large pools of liquid assets.

That “large pool of liquid assets” is the full universe of traded securities.

In a market collapse, the stocks and bonds you think you own will be sucked into the default fund (DF) as additional collateral for the evaporating value of the derivatives complex. This is “The Great Taking”.

Buffett’s famous line rings true: “You only find out who is swimming naked when the tide goes out.” Most of us are on the verge of learning that we’re the ones without any clothes.

If you haven’t read “The Great Taking” or watched the documentary, I recommend you pour yourself a stiff drink and watch it now:

Video also available at Rumble.

Download eBook “The Great Taking”

Matt Smith is the Co-host of Doug Casey’s Take podcast (Odysee, Spotify, Youtube). In “the before times” he was a serial entrepreneur. Today, he lives on a ranch in Uruguay trying to learn the ins and outs of regenerative agriculture and is works to build parallel systems – all while struggling to learn Spanish. He publishes his ideas and podcast updates on Substack.

Connect with David Rogers Webb

Connect with International Man

Cover image credit: fajaws & dlsdkcgl

Whitney Webb: “They’ve Been Planning This Cyber Attack for Years”

Clayton Morris of Redacted interviews investigative journalist Whitney Webb

by Redacted News
December 13, 2023

[Should this video be taken down by Youtube, Whitney’s segment can be found in this full version at Rumble starting at 36:40.]

Transcript of video introduction by Clayton Morris:

“Is the deep state mafia setting up a massive cyber attack false flag on the American people that will disrupt the 2024 election?

Well, it turns out that the United States intel agencies have been running tabletop exercises on this exact scenario. And now the Department of Homeland Security head, Mayorkas, says the greatest cyber threat to America is something called Killware.

So what’s really going on here? Are we being set up for a massive false flag?

And investigative journalist Whitney Webb has been writing
about these cyber attack tabletop exercises for years. And she’s been exposing what they’ve been up to. And then this week, we had a crazy “cyber attack” that seemed to shut down half the internet this week. Banks. Rumble was down.

What exactly is going on here? Are we being played like a fiddle?”

Connect with Redacted News at Youtube | Rumble

Connect with Whitney Webb at Unlimited Hangout

Cover image credit: cliff1126

Italian Health Minister Gave Orders to Conceal Vaccination Deaths – Now Under Investigation for Murder

They knew the shots were killing people from the start and gave orders to conceal deaths

by Greg Reese, The Reese Report
December 12, 2023

Transcript:

Former Italian Health Minister Roberto Speranza is under investigation for homicide after emails reveal that, from the very start of the vaccinations, he knew the shots were killing people and gave orders to local health authorities to conceal deaths and serious side effects in order to reassure Italian citizens of their safety and to not jeopardize the vaccination campaign.

The story has been reported on both German and Italian news networks.

I will now provide an English translation.

The Rome Public Prosecutor’s Office is investigating Roberto Speranza, the Italian government’s health minister, during the time of COVID measures. He was responsible for the vaccination campaign.

The investigations are the result of complaints related to the so-called AIFA emails from the Italian Medicines Agency. The former director of AIFA, Nicola Magrini, is also under investigation.

The publication of these internal emails revealed that they had been aware of the dangers of the COVID vaccination from the start.

The accusation is that the responsible minister and the head of the drug authority knowingly and deliberately exposed the unsuspecting Italian population to this risk. Yes, they encouraged Italians to get vaccinated.

Vaccination was even made mandatory for certain professional groups. Consequently, many side effects, including fatal ones, came to light.

The investigations are for murder, serious bodily harm, and more, because Speranza and Magrini evidently gave instructions to the local health authorities to conceal the deaths and serious side effects that occurred immediately after the vaccinations began, in order not to jeopardize the vaccination campaign and to reassure the citizens about their safety.

The responsible minister and the head of AIFA are now expected to answer for these actions.

According to the complaints from the police unions and the financial police, as well as from the private organization Listen to Me, which represents 4,200 people damaged by vaccines.

In Italy, police officers and teachers were subjected to mandatory COVID vaccination.

Here is the former health minister, Roberto Speranza, proudly announcing vaccination statistics in Italy.

“We have now reached a massively significant percentage of vaccinated people in Italy, 89.41%. Therefore, currently in Italy, just over 10% of the population remains unvaccinated.”

Well, today Roberto Speranza is under investigation for lies he allegedly told about vaccines.

Among the crimes he is accused of are ideological falsehood and murder.

“Look, this is the document we are showing you tonight exclusively. It states the former minister Roberto Speranza, along with Nicola Magrini, the former general manager of AIFA, are both registered in the investigative records of the Rome Prosecutor’s Office.”

Last week, the House of Representatives of the Philippines passed a resolution to investigate over 260,000 unexplained excess deaths in 2021 and 67,000 unexplained excess deaths in 2022.

The next day, they were hit by a 7.6 magnitude earthquake.

Connect with Greg Reese

Trouble in Toyland: How the $16 BILLION “Smart Toys” Industry Spies on Your Children and Makes Their Data Available to Child Traffickers

by Brian Shilhavy, Vaccine Impact
November 18, 2023

If your end-of-year holiday traditions include buying presents for your children and grandchildren, please avoid high-tech toys such as the growing “smart toy” sector with toys connected to the Internet. These “toys” are mainly data collection tools to collect as much information on your children as possible, including their location.

It is a dream scenario for child traffickers.

The publication “Trouble in Toyland” by the U.S. PIRG Education Fund has just published their 2023 report with a significant section on “smart toys”.

Excerpts from their Executive Summary:

Last month, an 11-year-old girl was kidnapped by a man she encountered while playing a game online. Fortunately, she was found safe a short time later, about 135 miles away from her home. The game, Roblox, is one of the most popular mobile games this year.

This past spring, the Federal Trade Commission accused Amazon of violating the Children’s Online Privacy Protection Act Rule (COPPA) through its Alexa service by keeping the voice recordings of children indefinitely and failing to delete childrens’ transcripts, even when a parent requested they be deleted. Amazon also gathered geolocation data and used childrens’ transcripts for its own purposes.

A few years ago, Fisher Price’s Smart Toy Bear was discontinued. It was created for children ages 3 through 8 as “an interactive learning friend that talks, listens, and ‘remembers’ what your child says and even responds when spoken to,” according to WeLiveSecurity. But research found a security flaw in the app would allow hackers to get information about children without permission.

This toy bear is not an isolated case. Multiple toys from major manufacturers have been discontinued in recent years after research from various groups showed that children’s voices, images, locations and other information was being improperly collected or hacked. In other cases, vulnerable toys are still for sale.

These days, we’re surrounded by smart devices – all of these things with microphones, cameras, connectivity, location trackers and more. These devices connect to the internet and/or to the outside world, and they gather and store data, sometimes very poorly. Our children’s holiday gift wish lists may be filled with stuffed animals that listen and talk, devices that learn their habits, games with online accounts, smart speakers and watches, or all kinds of toys that require you to download an app.

The global market for smart toys grew from $14.1 billion in 2022 to $16.7 billion this year, according to a large market research firm. The business of smart toys is expected to more than double by 2027.

Download the full report.

Connect with Vaccine Impact

Cover image credit: nikscoop

The End of Privacy Is Near

by Dr. Joseph Mercola
November 17, 2023

Story-at-a-Glance

“CITIZENFOUR” is a documentary about NSA whistleblower Edward Snowden. It came out in 2014, but it’s even more pertinent today than it was then
In January 2013, when documentary film director/producer Laura Poitras received an encrypted email from a stranger who called himself “Citizen Four”
In June 2013, Poitras flew to meet Snowden at the Mira Hotel in Hong Kong, together with columnist Glenn Greenwald and Guardian intelligence reporter Ewen MacAskill. After four days of interviews, Snowden’s identity was made public at his request
Today, Snowden’s warnings ring truer than ever. Artificial intelligence now scours social media, podcasts and videos for key words identifying “anti-vaxxers,” for example. It doesn’t even matter if they agree with what you’re writing or saying. The mere inclusion of certain words will get you axed from the platform
Next, the plan is to eliminate privacy altogether by requiring a digital identity to access the internet

“CITIZENFOUR” is a documentary about U.S. National Security Agency (NSA) whistleblower Edward Snowden. It came out in 2014, but it’s even more pertinent today than it was then, so if you haven’t seen it, I urge you to do so.

The Snowden story began in January 2013, when documentary film director/producer Laura Poitras received an encrypted email from a stranger who called himself “Citizen Four.” Snowden reportedly chose this codename “as a nod to three NSA whistleblowers who came before him: Bill Binney, J. Kirk Wiebe and Thomas Drake.”

Poitras had already spent several years working on a film about monitoring programs in the U.S., and had been placed on a secret watch list after her 2006 film “My Country, My Country,”¹ a documentary about Iraqis living under U.S. occupation. In his initial email, Snowden wrote:

“Laura. At this stage, I can offer nothing more than my word. I’m a senior government employee in the intelligence community. I hope you understand that contacting you is extremely high risk and you’re willing to agree to the following precautions before I share more. This will not be a waste of your time …

The surveillance you’ve experienced means you’ve been ‘selected’ — a term which will mean more to you as you learn about how the modern SIGINT system works.

For now, know that every border you cross, every purchase you make, every call you dial, every cell phone tower you pass, friend you keep, article you write, site you visit, subject line you type, and packet your route, is in the hands of a system whose reach is unlimited, but whose safeguards are not.

Your victimization by the NSA system means that you’re well aware of the threat that unrestricted secret police pose for democracies. This is a story few but you can tell.”

Summary of Snowden’s Journey

In June 2013, Poitras flew to meet Snowden at The Mira Hong Kong, together with columnist Glenn Greenwald and Ewen MacAskill, an intelligence reporter for The Guardian. After four days of interviews, Snowden’s identity was made public at his request.

Within two weeks, the U.S. government demanded Snowden’s extradition. Facing prosecution in the United States, Snowden scheduled a meeting with the United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees and applied for refugee status.

He managed to depart Hong Kong, but became stranded at the Sheremetyevo International Airport in Moscow when his passport was canceled. There he remained for 40 days, until the Russian government finally granted him asylum.

The Greatest Weapon of Oppression Ever Built

The U.S. government implemented Stellar Wind, a program to actively — and illegally — spy on all Americans within days of the 2001 9/11 attack. Ten years later, in 2011, construction began on a NSA data center in the Utah desert. It’s now the largest surveillance storehouse in the U.S.

In his correspondence, Snowden warned Poitras that “telecommunication companies in the U.S. are betraying the trust of their customers.” Through Stellar Wind, all phone calls and text messages were being intercepted and stored, and the Stellar Wind program has only expanded from there.

The NSA not only intercepts American citizens emails, phone conversations and text messages, but also Google searches, Amazon.com orders, bank records and more.

“We are building the greatest weapon for oppression in the history of man,” Snowden wrote, “yet its directors exempt themselves from accountability … On cyber operations, the government’s public position is that we still lack a policy framework. This … was a lie.

There is a detailed policy framework, a kind of martial law for cyber operations created by the White House. It’s called ‘Presidential Policy Directive 20’ and was finalized at the end of last year.”

Linkability, the Key to Control — and Entrapment

As explained in the film, a key aspect of control through surveillance is the linkability of data. One piece of data about you is linked to another piece. For example, your bus pass can be linked to the debit card you used to buy the pass. Your debit card is also linked to all other purchases.

With two key pieces of information — WHERE you went on a given day, and WHEN you made purchases, they can determine who you spoke with and met up with by linking those data points with those of other people who were in the vicinity at the same time. And that’s without even using your cellphone data.

When all these various data points are aggregated — location data, purchases, phone calls, texts, social media posts and more — you end up with a collection of metadata that tells a story about you. However, while the story is made up of facts, it’s not necessarily true.

For example, just because you were standing at a particular street corner does not mean you had anything to do with the crime that was reported on that same corner at the time you happened to be there. The problem is, your data could be used against you in that way.

The January 6 prisoners are a perfect example of how bits and pieces of data can be misused. Many have now spent years in jail simply because their cellphone data showed them as being in the wrong place at the wrong time.

State Power Versus the People’s Power to Oppose That Power

When asked by Greenwald why he decided to become a whistleblower, Snowden replied:

“It all comes down to state power against the people’s ability to meaningfully oppose that power. I’m sitting there every day, getting paid to design methods to amplify that state power.

And I’m realizing that if the policy switches that are the only thing that restrain these states were changed, you couldn’t meaningfully oppose [them].

I mean, you would have to be the most incredibly sophisticated tactical actor in existence. I’m not sure there’s anybody, no matter how gifted you are, who could oppose all of the offices and all the bright people, even all the mediocre people out there with all of their tools and all their capabilities.

And as I saw the promise of the Obama administration be betrayed … and in fact, [how they] actually advanced the things that had been promised to be sort of curtailed and reined in and dialed back … As as I saw that, that really hardened me to action …

We all have a stake in this. This is our country, and the balance of power between the citizenry and the government is becoming that of the ruling and the ruled, as opposed to the elected and the electorate.”

A Decade Later Snowden’s Words Ring Truer Than Ever

“I remember what the internet was like, before it was being watched, and there’s never been anything in the history of man like it,” Snowden said.

“You could have children from one part of the world having an equal discussion, where they were sort of granted the same respect for their ideas and conversation, with experts in a field from another part of the world on any topic, anywhere, anytime, all the time.

It was free and unrestrained. And we’ve seen the chilling of that, and the changing of that model towards something in which people self police their own views. They literally make jokes about ending up on ‘the list’ if they donate to a political cause, or if they say something in a discussion. It’s become an expectation that we’re being watched.

Many people I’ve talked to have mentioned that they’re careful about what they type into search engines, because they know that it’s being recorded, and that limits the boundaries of their intellectual exploration.”

Today, after the extreme ramp-up of censorship, surveillance and harassment we’ve endured since the COVID pandemic began, Snowden’s warnings ring truer than ever.

Artificial intelligence now scours social media, podcasts and videos for key words identifying “anti-vaxxers,” for example. It doesn’t even matter if they agree with what you’re writing or saying. The mere inclusion of certain words will get you axed from the platform.

Snowden’s worst fears have indeed come true, and today most people have come to realize just how dangerous this kind of blanket surveillance can be. Countless individuals whose only “crime” was to share their story of how the COVID shot ruined their lives have had their posts censored and social media accounts shut down.

Canadians whose only “crime” was to donate a few dollars to a peaceful protest had their bank accounts frozen. Small companies and nonprofit organizations with the “wrong” viewpoints have had their online payment services cancelled, effectively strangling their ability to make a living and keep the operation going.

Others have been debanked without recourse, including yours truly. My CEO and CFO and all of their family members also had their accounts and credit cards canceled, apparently for no other reason than the fact that they work for me. In other words, guilt by association.

Will the Internet as We Know It Disappear in the Next Year?

I recently posted an interview with investigative journalist Whitney Webb in which she talks about the next steps in the ramp-up of tyranny. The World Economic Forum has warned we may face a cyberattack on the banks before the end of 2024. That means we almost definitely will, seeing how they like to announce plans ahead of time.

Such a cyberattack will not only destroy the current banking system and usher in programmable central bank digital currencies. It will also eliminate privacy online by requiring everyone to have a digital identification tied to their ISP.

The principles of “know your customer” (KYC) will be imposed on everybody for everything, and anything that doesn’t have that will be made illegal under National Security justifications.

Essentially, what we’re looking at is a cyber Patriot Act, which will allow for the unfettered surveillance of everyone’s online activities, and the ability to restrict or block access to the internet. As noted by Webb, “The internet as you know it will not exist after this happens.”

The goal is to surveil all online activity in real time and have AI perform predictive policing to prevent crime before it happens. At that point, all bets are off. Data points alone may land you behind bars. Thought-crimes will also have ramifications, potentially resulting in the seizure of private property and/or removal of “privileges” previously understood as human rights.

A Global Infrastructure Has Been Built

During their first meeting with Snowden in Hong Kong, he explained that a global infrastructure, built by the NSA with the cooperation of other governments, was already in place. That was 10 years ago, so you can imagine how it’s grown since then.

At that time, that network was already automatically intercepting every digital communication, every radio communication and every analog communication. This blanket siphoning of data allows the NSA and others that have access to the network to retroactively search an individual’s communications, even if all they have is a single identifier. Snowden explained:

“So for example, if I wanted to see the content of your email … all I have to do is use what’s called a selector, any kind of thing in the communications chain that might uniquely or almost uniquely identify you as an individual.

I’m talking about things like email addresses, IP addresses, phone numbers, credit cards, even passwords that are unique to you that aren’t used by anyone else.

I can input those into the system, and it will not only go back through the database … it will basically put an additional level of scrutiny on it moving into the future that says, ‘If this is detected now or at any time in the future, I want this to go to me immediately,’ and [it will] alert me in real time that you’re communicating with someone. Things like that.”

According to Snowden, the British Government Communications Headquarters (GCHQ) has “the most invasive network intercept program anywhere in the world.” That program, Tempora, intercepts all content, in addition to metadata, on everything and everyone.

Snowden also describes the “SSO,” which stands for Special Sorters Operations. The SSO passively collects data across networks, both in the U.S. and internationally. Domestically, this is done primarily through corporate partnerships.

“They also do this with multinationals that might be headquartered in the U.S. whom [they can] just pay into giving them access,” Snowden said. They also do it bilaterally with the assistance of other governments.

You’re Being Spied Upon Everywhere

Snowden also pointed out some of the many ways in which you’re being spied upon by the digital devices around you. As just one example, all VoIP phones, which transmit calls over an IP network such as the internet, have little computers inside of them that can be hot mic’d even if servers are down. As long as the phone is plugged in, someone can use it to listen in on your conversations.

Within days of their first meeting in Hong Kong, Greenwald and Poitras were publishing stories about the NSA’s illegal blanket spying domestically and internationally. CNN Live reported:

“Another explosive article has just appeared, this time in the Washington Post … that reveals another broad and secret U.S. government’s surveillance program.

The Washington Post and The Guardian in London reporting that the NSA and the FBI are tapping directly into the central servers of nine leading internet companies, including Microsoft, Yahoo, Google, Facebook, AOL, Skype, YouTube, and Apple.

The Post says they’re extracting audio, video, photographs, emails, documents, and connection logs that enable analysts to track a person’s movements and contacts over time.”

Greenwald also made numerous live news appearances. In one, he stated:

“In 2008, they eliminated the warrant requirement for all conversations, except ones that take place among Americans exclusively on American soil.

So they don’t need warrants now for people who are foreigners outside of the U.S., but they also don’t need warrants for Americans who are in the United States, communicating with people reasonably believed to be outside of the U.S.

So … the fact that there are no checks, no oversight about who’s looking over the NSA’s shoulder, means that they can take whatever they want, and the fact that it’s all behind a wall of secrecy, and they threaten people who want to expose it, means that whatever they’re doing, even violating the law is something that we’re unlikely to know until we start having real investigations and real transparency into what it is that the government is doing.”

Beyond Transparency

At this point, we’re beyond merely needing transparency. The intent to surveil and control every move we make and thought we express is now being openly expressed.

We can just assume that any digital devices can and probably are collecting data on our activities and whereabouts, and that those data are nowhere near held private and can be used against us in myriad ways.

Everyone must now choose between freedom and enslavement, and the option to choose freedom is rapidly closing.

Today, a decade after Snowden broke the dam of secrecy around the global surveillance scheme, we have but one choice left, and that is to actively reject that system by changing how we live our day to day lives. Everyone must now choose between freedom and enslavement, and the option to choose freedom is rapidly closing. Putting off making that choice is itself a choice.

Rejecting the control system means reverting back to “dumb” appliances and devices to the extent you’re able. It means getting savvier about privacy technologies such as deGoogled phones and computers² that cannot spy on you. It means using cash as much as possible and rejecting CBDCs and digital tokens. As noted by Whitney Webb in the interview I linked to earlier:

“There’s a huge need for to divest from Big Tech as much as possible, and it needs to happen quickly, because the choice is either participate in the system being designed for you by crazy people and become a slave, or don’t become a slave. And if you don’t want to be a slave, you have to invest now in Big Tech alternatives, unless you want to live a completely analog life …

The easiest route is to go the slavery route, and that’s how they’ve designed it on purpose. The whole selling point of that system is that it’s convenient and easy. So, obviously, it’s going to take some work to go the other route, but the future of human freedom depends on it so I think it’s a pretty easy choice.”

Connect with Dr. Joseph Mercola

Cover image credit: CDD20

See Related:

Five Ways to Prepare for the Online Privacy Crackdown

UN & Bill Gates Launch “50in5” Global Digital Infrastructure Plans

by Kit Knightly, OffGuardian
November 16, 2023

Last week the United Nations Development Program officially launched their new initiative promoting “Digital Public Infrastructure” (DPI) around the world.

The “50in5” program – so-called because it aims to introduce DPI in fifty countries in the next five years – began with a live-streamed event on November 8th.

For those of you unsure what “Digital Public Infrastructure” is, the 50in5 website is quite clear:

Digital public infrastructure (DPI) – which refers to a secure and interoperable network of components that include digital payments, ID, and data exchange systems.

There’s nothing new there, for anyone who has been paying even the slightest bit of attention. Digital identity and digital payment systems are self-explanatory (and we’ve covered them before). “Data Exchange Systems” essentially means national governments will share identity and financial records of citizens across borders with other nations, or indeed with global government agencies.

The key word is “interoperable”.

As we have written before, the “global government” won’t be one single health care system, identity database, or digital currency – but dozens of notionally separate systems all carefully designed to be fully “interoperable”.

As well as being a project of the UNDP, UNICEF, and the Inter-American Development Bank, the 50in5 is funded by various globalist NGOs and non-profits including the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation and (indirectly through an NGO called “Co-Develop”) the Rockefeller Foundation.

The eleven counties taking part in the program so far are Bangladesh, Brazil, Estonia, Ethiopia, Guatemala, Moldova, Norway, Senegal, Sierra Leone, Singapore, Sri Lanka, and Togo. A careful spread from every continent, including first, second, and third-world nations.

It is a list noteworthy for including NATO, EU, and BRICS members. Interesting implications on supposed “multipolarity” there.

In related news, on the exact same day the 50in5 program launched, the European Parliament and Council of Europe agreed on a new framework for a region-wide European Digital Identity (eID) system.

According to the official press release [emphasis added]:

The revised regulation constitutes a clear paradigm shift for digital identity in Europe aiming to ensure universal access for people and businesses to secure and trustworthy electronic identification and authentication. Under the new law, member states will offer citizens and businesses digital wallets that will be able to link their national digital identities with proof of other personal attributes (e.g., driving licence, diplomas, bank account). Citizens will be able to prove their identity and share electronic documents from their digital wallets with a click of a button on their mobile phone.

This comes on the back of announcements that the European Central Bank is moving on to the “next phase” of its Digital Euro plans this month. The digital euro will – according to former IMF (and apparent numerology nut) Christine Lagarde – afford some “limited control” over people’s spending.

India, another BRICS nation, has been at the forefront of DPI development for years, and now articles are appearing in publications like Forbes, claiming “India Has A Digital Infrastructure, America Needs One”.

At the same time, China is making strides toward ending online anonymity, while Western politicians like Nikki Haley say we should be doing the same.

As the world focuses on Hamas and Israel, the global re-organization phase of the Great Reset is just quietly going about its business. Building a net and waiting to tighten it.

Connect with OffGuardian

Cover image credit: irfanahmad

Rich Man’s War, Poor Man’s Blood

by Jim Quinn, The Burning Platform
November 13, 2023

“War is a racket. It always has been. It is possibly the oldest, easily the most profitable, surely the most vicious. It is the only one international in scope. It is the only one in which the profits are reckoned in dollars and the losses in lives.” ~ General Smedley Butler

I don’t need your civil warIt feeds the rich while it buries the poorYour power hungry sellin’ soldiersIn a human grocery store
~ Guns N’ Roses – Civil War

Whether it is a distinguished general who came to his senses in 1935, after doing the bidding of the monied interests by initiating conflict throughout the world to fill their coffers with blood money, or a rock & roll star fifty years later writing a hit song about the exact same theme, the song remains the same. The wealthy always benefit from war, the poor always die in their wars, and politicians are bribed to continually foment conflict, hate, and railing against whoever their puppet masters choose as the enemy of the moment. This is not a recent development, it has spanned centuries, just the sums of money feeding the military industrial complex are now astronomical.

The 20th Century began with Butler doing the bidding of the monied classes in South America, Mexico, and Europe, disguised as keeping America safe for democracy – the usual propaganda fed to the masses when they are running their racket. Just as Edward Bernays clearly laid out in his 1928 book – Propaganda – that the world is run by an invisible government who manipulate the minds of the masses to do as they are told, Butler unequivocally described why we are perpetually at war and who benefits from perpetual warfare. The invisible government/insiders run this world and have always run this world. Once you reconcile yourself to this fact, you will be well on your way to understanding all of the major events happening in the world today.

“A racket is best described, I believe, as something that is not what it seems to the majority of the people. Only a small “inside” group knows what it is about. It is conducted for the benefit of the very few, at the expense of the very many. Out of war a few people make huge fortunes. In the World War [I] a mere handful garnered the profits of the conflict. At least 21,000 new millionaires and billionaires were made in the United States during the World War.” ~ General Smedley Butler

It seems many more millionaires and billionaires have been created since World War I, the war Wilson promised not to enter. What a coincidence the Federal Reserve was created in shadowy back rooms on a secretive island in 1913 by men constituting the invisible government (bankers, corporate executives, corrupt politicians), just before the outbreak of the Great War. Of course, it was only great for the bankers, arms dealers, and corporations getting rich off the blood of the 20 million innocent soldiers and civilians who died to fill up their war chests with gold. Once the politicians, bankers, and connected corporations had the ability to use a central bank to print fiat and fund their wars for eternity, we’ve had over a century of total war.

“It is no coincidence that the century of total war coincided with the century of central banking.” ~ Ron Paul

“War against a foreign country only happens when the moneyed classes think they are going to profit from it.” ~ George Orwell

The moneyed classes profit from warfare no matter who wins. But even better, they profit the most when no one wins and the war is perpetual. Perpetual war equals perpetual profits. The United States has not been invaded by a foreign enemy since the War of 1812. The $1.8 trillion allocated to the Department of Defense in 2023 exceeds the GDP of most countries in the world and is a self sustaining mechanism where politicians: approve the trillions in blood money while promoting chaos and war around the globe; become multi-millionaires from bribes accepted from the corporations enriched by the military industrial complex; accelerate the downfall of America by enslaving future generations in chains of unpayable debt; and then convince the poor to become cannon fodder in their bloody game of thrones.

“Every war, when it comes, or before it comes, is represented not as a war but as an act of self-defense against a homicidal maniac.” ~ George Orwell

The propagandists for the military regime always need a “bad guy” to justify their wealth generating wars. First it was Hitler, even though corporate leaders like Ford admired and profited from his rebuilding of Germany. Then it was the generic “communist” which was used by the war profiteers to justify Korea and Vietnam. Keeping the world safe for democracy and corporate profits, at the cost of only 100,000 American lives and several million natives. Evidently a beneficial trade-off for the American Empire and the military industrial complex, warned about by Eisenhower.

The modern day “homicidal maniacs”, who threatened the peace that the American Empire has spread at the point of a gun and demanding use of their fiat currency, have included: the Ayatollah Khomeini when fighting our ally Sadaam Hussein, until Sadaam Hussein became the “homicidal maniac”; Soviet leadership in Afghanistan fought by our ally Osama bin Laden until bin Laden became the “homicidal maniac” blamed for 9/11; Muammar Gaddafi when he dared not fall in line regarding the USD; Bashar al-Assad when gas pipelines were needed to keep profits flowing; Vladimir Putin for revealing U.S. and Biden family corruption in Ukraine; and now Hamas because they tired of living in the open air Israeli prison of Gaza.

None of these “homicidal maniacs” has ever threatened the American homeland with invasion or meaningful attack. But they did provide justification for the Patriot Act, a never ending War on Terror, doubling of military spending, sacrifice of American lives for nothing more than oil and mammon, and creation of new eternal enemies across the globe (aka blow back). You see the regime propaganda media declare we are running low on bombs, missiles and military hardware because we’ve sent over $100 billion worth to their anti-Putin puppet Zelensky (with 10% for the big guy), and now we need tens of billions more to give to Netanyahu to aid in his genocide of Palestinians. What if the trillions spent on destroying things and killing people over the last seventy five years had been used for productive purposes?

“Every gun that is made, every warship launched, every rocket fired, signifies in the final sense a theft from those who hunger and are not fed, those who are cold and are not clothed.” – Dwight D. Eisenhower

The arms dealers who keep the war machine killing are more than happy to ramp up production to support the ongoing Ukraine debacle and now the powder keg in the Middle East which threatens to explode into World War III. Imagine the corporate bonuses if we get ourselves a new world war. Politician’s coffers will be filled with blood money. And if the neo-cons can just get China to attack Taiwan, champagne corks will be popping all over Washington DC. Since the Biden/CIA provoked Ukraine war began in early 2022, defense contractor stocks have soared (BAE Systems: +100%; Lockheed Martin: +36%; Northrup Grumman: +32%; General Dynamics: +26%), while the overall stock market was down 8%. It’s good to be the kings of war.

Our dementia ridden puppet president let the truth slip last week by saying these wars are good for the economy. And by good for the economy, he means good for the bankers, mega-corporations, military industrial complex, and the bank accounts of politicians bought off by war loving donors. What it is not good for are the bank accounts of average Americans, as relentless inflation created to wage these wars destroys their purchasing power as they spiral towards impoverishment. It’s not good for the poor who enlist and get to shed their blood for no good reason at all. It’s not good for the innocent civilians across the globe killed by the promoters of endless war and declared collateral damage by the likes of Dick Cheney, Lindsay Graham, Victoria Nuland, Hillary Clinton and Nikke Haley. It’s not murder if you are waving the flag of neo-con justice.

“It is forbidden to kill; therefore all murderers are punished unless they kill in large numbers and to the sound of trumpets.” – Voltaire

The absurdity of allowing rich men to decide millions should die for a fake cause in order to sustain their wealth, power and control, infuriates me and is why I hold out little hope for a positive outcome to this Fourth Turning. How could so many be so obtuse as to not see what is happening right in front of their eyes? I have no animosity towards average Russians, Ukrainians, Chinese, Iranians, Syrians, Turks, Palestinians, Israelis, or anyone on this earth trying to live normal lives. It’s the rich and powerful rulers of countries, kingdoms, and empires who I despise. Despite having no personal quarrel against anyone, the shadowy psychopaths in suits behind the curtain use religion and psychological manipulation to convince the masses they should hate and kill an enemy they are instructed to loathe and fear.

“What is absurd and monstrous about war is that men who have no personal quarrel should be trained to murder one another in cold blood.” ~ Aldous Huxley

Whether it was World War II or what is playing out before our very eyes today, the song remains the same. Rich man’s war, poor man’s fight.

Most have not come to the realization we are already in the midst of World War III. It began in the spring of 2022 when Boris Johnson was instructed by the globalist cabal to stop Zelensky from signing an agreed upon treaty between Russia and Ukraine to end the conflict. There was billions in war profits to be made and the opportunity to bleed Russia of financial resources. When this disastrous venture, which has killed 600,000 innocent victims, began to run out of steam and the enthusiasm of clueless dolts with their “Support Ukraine” lawn signs began to wane, miraculously Hamas attacked Israel. How convenient for the war machine.

World War II started in September 1939, but Americans set the date at December 7, 1941. In reality, the U.S. was already at war in 1939, as we supplied the UK with arms and financial support, while provoking Japan into attacking through economic sanctions. It is exactly the same situation today. We have been at war with Russia for over a year through our puppet proxy, the actor Zelensky. We are now at war in the Middle East through our Israeli proxy point of the spear. None of this is declared, but anyone with critical thinking skills knows we are calling the shots. What the military industrial complex is now actively seeking is a new Pearl Harbor, Gulf of Tonkin, or 9/11. They need a horrific event to usher in World War III. They are gathered in black masses, plotting death and destruction, while feeding their insatiable desire for mammon.

Generals gathered in their masses
Just like witches at black masses
Evil minds that plot destruction
Sorcerer of death’s construction

In the fields, the bodies burning
As the war machine keeps turning
Death and hatred to mankind
Poisoning their brainwashed minds
Oh lord, yeah!

Politicians hide themselves away
They only started the war
Why should they go out to fight?
They leave that role to the poor, yeah

~ Black Sabbath – War Pigs

So here we are, on the edge of Armageddon, waiting for the next shoe to drop. I don’t believe a word my government tells me. I consider those who are running this country, whether they be “elected” politicians, shadowy billionaires constituting the invisible government, or the globalist cabal seeking a new world order, to be my sworn enemies. When they initiate the false flag, designed to falsely generate the patriotic spirit of the masses and mobilize them for war against the enemy of their choosing (likely Russia, China or Iran), I will not be obeying, complying or sacrificing my three sons as cannon fodder for their evil agendas and wars for profit. The only ammo fired by my family in this coming conflict will be at any government thug attempting to invest my sons in their wars. That is my red line and I will die defending it. Time to prepare for the real war against the real enemy.

My hands are tiedThe billions shift from side to sideAnd the wars go on with brainwashed pride

My hands are tiedFor all I’ve seen has changed my mindBut still the wars go on as the years go by

~ Guns N’ Roses – Civil War

sourced from Zero Hedge

Connect with The Burning Platform

Cover image credit: Sammy-Sander & Alexas_Fotos

The Invasion of Gaza: Part of a Broader Israeli Military-Intelligence Agenda

“Justified Vengeance” and the Invasion of Gaza: Palestine Is Portrayed as “The Aggressor”

The Invasion of Gaza: Part of a Broader Israeli Military-Intelligence Agenda

by Michel Chossudovsky
updated October 24, 2023 at Global Research
published October 26, 2023 at Michel Chossudovsky substack

Author’s Introduction

There is a complex history behind Israel’s October 2023 plan to “Wipe Gaza off the Map.”

It’s genocide, an absolute slaughter:

“We are going to attack Gaza City very broadly soon,” Israel’s chief military spokesman, Rear Adm. Daniel Hagari, said in a nationally broadcast address, without giving a timetable for the attack.”

It’s a criminal undertaking based on Israel’s doctrine of “Justified Vengeance” which was first formulated in 2001.

(See below: my January 2009 article published at the very outset of Israel’s 2008-2009 invasion of Gaza under “Operation Cast Led”)

The “Justified Vengeance” doctrine propounds in no uncertain terms that (despite its limited military capabilities) Palestine rather than Israel is “the aggressor” and that Israel has the right to defend itself.

It is now established that the Hamas October 7, 2023 attack was a false flag operation carried out by a “faction” within Hamas, in liaison with Mossad and U.S. intelligence”:

“U.S. intelligence say they weren’t aware of an impending Hamas attack.

Did Netanyahu and his vast military and intelligence apparatus (Mossad et al) have foreknowledge of the Hamas attack which has resulted in countless deaths of Israelis and Palestinians.

Was a carefully formulated Israeli plan to wage an all out war against Palestinians envisaged prior to the launching by Hamas of “Operation Al-Aqsa Storm”?

This was not a failure of Israeli Intelligence, as conveyed by the media. Quite the opposite”

The History of False Flags: “The Green Light to Terror” (1997), The “Bloodshed as a Justification” to Wage War

The late Prof. Tanya Reinhart confirms the formulation in 1997 of a False Flag Agenda entitled “The Green Light to Terror” which consisted in promoting (engineering) suicide attacks against Israeli civilians, citing “the Bloodshed as a Justification” to wage war on Palestine:

“…This is the “green light to terror” theme which the Military Intelligence (Ama”n) has been promoting since 1997, when its anti-Oslo line was consolidated. This theme was since repeated again and again by military circles, and eventually became the mantra of Israeli propaganda…

The ‘Foreign Report’ (Jane’s information) of July 12, 2001 disclosed that the Israeli army (under Sharon’s government) has updated its plans for an “all-out assault to smash the Palestinian authority”

The blueprint, titled “The Destruction of the Palestinian Authority and Disarmament of All Armed Forces”, was presented to the Israeli government by chief of staff Shaul Mofaz, on July 8 [2001].

The assault would be launched, at the government’s discretion, after a big suicide bomb attack in Israel, causing widespread deaths and injuries, citing the bloodshed as justification.” (Tanya Reinhart, December 22, 2001)

Ariel Sharon: “A 1948 Style Solution”

According to the Prof. Tanya Reinhart:

“Mass expulsion could occur at some later stage of the ground invasion [2002- ], were the Israelis to open up Gaza’s borders to allow for an exodus of population … Expulsion was referred to by Ariel Sharon as the “a 1948 style solution”. For Sharon “it is only necessary to find another state for the Palestinians”. -‘Jordan is Palestine’ – was the phrase that Sharon coined.” (Tanya Reinhart, op cit)

The “Hamas-Mossad Partnership”

What is now unfolding in Gaza is part of a longstanding intelligence agenda, which has been on the drawing board of successive Israeli governments for more than twenty years. Founded in 1987 with the support of Israel, “The Hamas-Mossad partnership” is confirmed by Netanyahu:

“Anyone who wants to thwart the establishment of a Palestinian state has to support bolstering Hamas and transferring money to Hamas. … This is part of our strategy – to isolate the Palestinians in Gaza from the Palestinians in the West Bank.” (March 2019 Statement quoted by Haaretz, October 9, 2023, emphasis added)

“Support” and “Money” for Hamas

“Transferring Money to Hamas” on behalf of Netanyahu is confirmed by a Times of Israel October 8, 2023 Report:

“Hamas was treated as a partner to the detriment of the Palestinian Authority to prevent Abbas from moving towards creating a Palestinian State. Hamas was promoted from a terrorist group to an organization with which Israel conducted negotiations through Egypt, and which was allowed to receive suitcases containing millions of dollars from Qatar through the Gaza crossings.” (emphasis added)

Benjamin Netanyahu’s position defined several years prior to the October 7, 2023 “State of Readiness For War” consists in the total appropriation of Palestine Lands as well as the outright exclusion of the Palestinian people from their homeland:

“These are the basic lines of the national government headed by me: The Jewish people have an exclusive and unquestionable right to all areas of the Land of Israel. The government will promote and develop settlement in all parts of the Land of Israel — in the Galilee, the Negev, the Golan, Judea and Samaria.” (January 2023)

The Role of Mossad

The doctrine of “Justified Vengeance” initiated in 2001, is the cornerstone of Israel’s intelligence narrative. It provides a justification to carry out acts of genocide, with the support of the International community, first in Gaza, then in the West Bank.

“With an annual budget of about $3billion and 7,000 staff, Mossad is the second-largest espionage agency in the Western world after the CIA.”

These official figures are meaningless, intelligence agencies do not reveal the sources of their funding or the size of their staff (which are in excess of the figures quoted above).

Mossad (Foreign Intelligence) together with Shin Bet (Domestic National Security) and Aman (Military Intelligence) is the main actor in the conduct of “false flag operations”. It’s covert capabilities are extensive. It has over the years infiltrated both Hamas and the Palestinian National Authority, It also exerts –in liaison with US intelligence– control over Al Qaeda operatives, ISIS and Daesh throughout the Middle East.

Mossad’s mandate is to create “divisions” within the Palestinian Resistance Movement, while sustaining fear and routine terrorist false flag events against innocent Israeli civilians, which sustains the legitimacy of the “Justified Vengeance” narrative.

Chronology

Let us briefly review the history, the various stages following the:

Failure of Oslo I and II (1993-95) and The Assassination of Yitzhak Rabin (1995)

2001. “Operation Justified Vengeance”

Presented in July 2001 to the Israeli government of Ariel Sharon by IDF chief of staff Shaul Mofaz, under the title:

“The Destruction of the Palestinian Authority and Disarmament of All Armed Forces”.

See the Analysis of Tanya Reinhart and the Jane Report quoted above and in the article below).

“Operation Justified Vengeance” was also referred to as the “Dagan Plan”, named after the late General Meir Dagan, who headed Mossad, Israel’s foreign intelligence agency from 2002-2011.

The longer term objective of “Operation Justified Vengeance” (2001) was and remains the expulsion of Palestinians from their homeland.

2002. Decision to Build the Infamous Apartheid Wall by Sharon Government

2004. The Assassination of Yasser Arafat

It was ordered by the Israeli Cabinet in 2003. It was approved by the US which vetoed a United Nations Security Resolution condemning the 2003 Israeli Cabinet decision. It was undertaken by Mossad. (See details in article below)

2005. The Removal, Under Orders of PM Ariel Sharon of All Jewish Settlements in Gaza.

Proposed in 2003 by Prime Minister Ariel Sharon, implemented in August 2005 and completed in September 2005.

A Jewish population of over 7,000 was relocated. This relocation was required to transform the Gaza Strip into “An Open Air Prison”

2006. The Hamas Election Victory in January 2006.

Without Arafat, the Israeli military-intelligence architects knew that Fatah under Mahmoud Abbas would loose the elections.

2008-2009. “Operation Cast Lead”

In 2008 the “Bloodshed Justification” was an essential component of the military-intelligence agenda, which was first formulated in the 2001 “Operation Justified Vengeance”:

“The Destruction of the Palestinian Authority and Disarmament of All Armed Forces”

The killing of Palestinian civilians was justified on “humanitarian grounds.” as formulated in the “Operation Justified Vengeance Report”.

—Michel Chossudovsky, May 15, 2021, October 23, 2023

Below is my article published in early January 2009, at the height of the 2008-2009 Operation Cast Lead

The Invasion of Gaza: Part of a Broader Israeli Military-Intelligence Agenda

by Michel Chossudovsky, January 2009

“Operation Cast Lead”

The aerial bombings and the ongoing ground invasion of Gaza by Israeli ground forces must be analysed in a historical context. Operation “Cast Lead” [2008] is a carefully planned undertaking, which is part of a broader military-intelligence agenda first formulated by the government of Prime Minister Ariel Sharon in 2001:

“Sources in the defense establishment said Defense Minister Ehud Barak instructed the Israel Defense Forces to prepare for the operation over six months ago, even as Israel was beginning to negotiate a ceasefire agreement with Hamas.”(Barak Ravid, Operation “Cast Lead”: Israeli Air Force strike followed months of planning, Haaretz, December 27, 2008)

It was Israel which broke the truce on the day of the US presidential elections, November 4:

“Israel used this distraction to break the ceasefire between itself and Hamas by bombing the Gaza strip. Israel claimed this violation of the ceasefire was to prevent Hamas from digging tunnels into Israeli territory.

The very next day, Israel launched a terrorizing siege of Gaza, cutting off food, fuel, medical supplies and other necessities in an attempt to “subdue” the Palestinians while at the same time engaging in armed incursions.

In response, Hamas and others in Gaza again resorted to firing crude, homemade, and mainly inaccurate rockets into Israel. During the past seven years, these rockets have been responsible for the deaths of 17 Israelis. Over the same time span, Israeli Blitzkrieg assaults have killed thousands of Palestinians, drawing worldwide protest but falling on deaf ears at the UN.” (Shamus Cooke, The Massacre in Palestine and the Threat of a Wider War, Global Research, December 2008)

Planned Humanitarian Disaster

On December 8, [2008] US Deputy Secretary of State John Negroponte was in Tel Aviv for discussions with his Israeli counterparts including the director of Mossad, Meir Dagan.

“Operation Cast Lead” was initiated two days day after Christmas. It was coupled with a carefully designed international Public Relations campaign under the auspices of Israel’s Foreign Ministry.

Hamas’ military targets are not the main objective. Operation “Cast Lead” is intended, quite deliberately, to trigger civilian casualities.

What we are dealing with is a “planned humanitarian disaster” in Gaza in a densly populated urban area. (See map below)

The longer term objective of this plan, as formulated by Israeli policy makers, is the expulsion of Palestinians from Palestinian lands:

“Terrorize the civilian population, assuring maximal destruction of property and cultural resources… The daily life of the Palestinians must be rendered unbearable: They should be locked up in cities and towns, prevented from exercising normal economic life, cut off from workplaces, schools and hospitals, This will encourage emigration and weaken the resistance to future expulsions” Ur Shlonsky, quoted by Ghali Hassan, Gaza: The World’s Largest Prison, Global Research, 2005)

“Operation Justified Vengeance”

A turning point has been reached. Operation “Cast Lead” is part of the broader military-intelligence operation initiated at the outset of the Ariel Sharon government in 2001. It was under Sharon’s “Operation Justified Vengeance” that F-16 fighter planes were initially used to bomb Palestinian cities.

“Operation Justified Vengeance” was presented in July 2001 to the Israeli government of Ariel Sharon by IDF chief of staff Shaul Mofaz, under the title “The Destruction of the Palestinian Authority and Disarmament of All Armed Forces”.

“A contingency plan, codenamed Operation Justified Vengeance, was drawn up last June [2001] to reoccupy all of the West Bank and possibly the Gaza Strip at a likely cost of “hundreds” of Israeli casualties.” (Washington Times, 19 March 2002).

According to Jane’s ‘Foreign Report’ (July 12, 2001) the Israeli army under Sharon had updated its plans for an “all-out assault to smash the Palestinian authority, force out leader Yasser Arafat and kill or detain its army”.

“Bloodshed Justification”

The “Bloodshed Justification” was an essential component of the military-intelligence agenda. The killing of Palestinian civilians was justified on “humanitarian grounds.” Israeli military operations were carefully timed to coincide with the suicide attacks:

The assault would be launched, at the government’s discretion, after a big suicide bomb attack in Israel, causing widespread deaths and injuries, citing the bloodshed as justification. (Tanya Reinhart, Evil Unleashed, Israel’s move to destroy the Palestinian Authority is a calculated plan, long in the making, Global Research, December 2001, emphasis added)

The Dagan Plan

“Operation Justified Vengeance” was also referred to as the “Dagan Plan”, named after General (ret.) Meir Dagan, who currently heads Mossad, Israel’s intelligence agency.

Reserve General Meir Dagan was Sharon’s national security adviser during the 2000 election campaign. The plan was apparently drawn up prior to Sharon’s election as Prime Minister in February 2001. “According to Alex Fishman writing in Yediot Aharonot, the Dagan Plan consisted in destroying the Palestinian authority and putting Yasser Arafat ‘out of the game’.” (Ellis Shulman, “Operation Justified Vengeance”: a Secret Plan to Destroy the Palestinian Authority, March 2001):

“As reported in the Foreign Report [Jane] and disclosed locally by Maariv, Israel’s invasion plan — reportedly dubbed Justified Vengeance — would be launched immediately following the next high-casualty suicide bombing, would last about a month and is expected to result in the death of hundreds of Israelis and thousands of Palestinians. (Ibid, emphasis added)

The “Dagan Plan” envisaged the so-called “cantonization” of Palestinian territories whereby the West Bank and Gaza would be totally cut off from one other, with separate “governments” in each of the territories. Under this scenario, already envisaged in 2001, Israel would:

“negotiate separately with Palestinian forces that are dominant in each territory-Palestinian forces responsible for security, intelligence, and even for the Tanzim (Fatah).” The plan thus closely resembles the idea of “cantonization” of Palestinian territories, put forth by a number of ministers.” Sylvain Cypel, The infamous ‘Dagan Plan’ Sharon’s plan for getting rid of Arafat, Le Monde, December 17, 2001)

The Dagan Plan has established continuity in the military-intelligence agenda. In the wake of the 2000 elections, Meir Dagan was assigned a key role. “He became Sharon’s “go-between” in security issues with President’s Bush’s special envoys Zinni and Mitchell.” He was subsequently appointed Director of the Mossad by Prime Minister Ariel Sharon in August 2002. In the post-Sharon period, he remained head of Mossad. He was reconfirmed in his position as Director of Israeli Intelligence by Prime Minister Ehud Olmert in June 2008.

Meir Dagan, in coordination with his US counterparts, has been in charge of various military-intelligence operations. It is worth noting that Meir Dagan as a young Colonel had worked closely with defense minister Ariel Sharon in the raids on Palestinian settlements in Beirut in 1982. The 2009 ground invasion of Gaza, in many regards, bear a canny resemblance to the 1982 military operation led by Sharon and Dagan.

Continuity: From Sharon to Olmert

It is important to focus on a number of key events which have led up to the killings in Gaza under “Operation Cast Lead”:

1. The assassination in November 2004 of Yasser Arafat.

This assassination had been on the drawing board since 1996 under “Operation Fields of Thorns”.

According to an October 2000 document

“prepared by the security services, at the request of then Prime Minister Ehud Barak, stated that ‘Arafat, the person, is a severe threat to the security of the state [of Israel] and the damage which will result from his disappearance is less than the damage caused by his existence’”. (Tanya Reinhart, Evil Unleashed, Israel’s move to destroy the Palestinian Authority is a calculated plan, long in the making, Global Research, December 2001. Details of the document were published in Ma’ariv, July 6, 2001.).

Arafat’s assassination was ordered in 2003 by the Israeli cabinet. It was approved by the US which vetoed a United Nations Security Resolution condemning the 2003 Israeli Cabinet decision. Reacting to increased Palestinian attacks, in August 2003, Israeli Defense Minister Shaul Mofaz declared “all out war” on the militants whom he vowed “marked for death.”

“In mid September, Israel’s government passed a law to get rid of Arafat. Israel’s cabinet for political security affairs declared it “a decision to remove Arafat as an obstacle to peace.” Mofaz threatened; “we will choose the right way and the right time to kill Arafat.” Palestinian Minister Saeb Erekat told CNN he thought Arafat was the next target. CNN asked Sharon spokesman Ra’anan Gissan if the vote meant expulsion of Arafat. Gissan clarified; “It doesn’t mean that. The Cabinet has today resolved to remove this obstacle. The time, the method, the ways by which this will take place will be decided separately, and the security services will monitor the situation and make the recommendation about proper action.” (See Trish Shuh, Road Map for a Decease Plan, www.mehrnews.com November 9 2005)

The assassination of Arafat was part of the 2001 Dagan Plan.

In all likelihood, it was carried out by Israeli Intelligence. It was intended to destroy the Palestinian Authority, foment divisions within Fatah as well as between Fatah and Hamas. Mahmoud Abbas is a Palestinian quisling.

He was installed as leader of Fatah, with the approval of Israel and the US, which finance the Palestinian Authority’s paramilitary and security forces.

2. The Removal, Under the Orders of Prime Minister Ariel Sharon in 2005, of All Jewish Settlements in Gaza.

A Jewish population of over 7,000 was relocated.

“It is my intention [Sharon] to carry out an evacuation – sorry, a relocation – of settlements that cause us problems and of places that we will not hold onto anyway in a final settlement, like the Gaza settlements…. I am working on the assumption that in the future there will be no Jews in Gaza,” Sharon said.” (CBC, March 2004)

The issue of the settlements in Gaza was presented as part of Washington’s “road map to peace”.

Celebrated by the Palestinians as a “victory”, this measure was not directed against the Jewish settlers. Quite the opposite: It was part of the overall covert operation, which consisted in transforming Gaza into a concentration camp. As long as Jewish settlers were living inside Gaza, the objective of sustaining a large barricaded prison territory could not be achieved. The Implementation of “Operation Cast Lead” required “no Jews in Gaza”.

3. The Building of the Infamous Apartheid Wall

This was decided upon at the beginning of the Sharon government in 2002. (See Map below)

4. The Hamas Election Victory in January 2006.

Without Arafat, the Israeli military-intelligence architects knew that Fatah under Mahmoud Abbas would loose the elections. This was part of the scenario, which had been envisaged and analyzed well in advance.

With Hamas in charge in Gaza, using the pretext that Hamas is a terrorist organization, Israel would carry out the process of “cantonization” as formulated under the Dagan plan. Fatah under Mahmoud Abbas would remain formally in charge of the West Bank. The duly elected Hamas government would be confined to the Gaza strip.

Ground Attack, 2008-2009

On January 3, [2009] Israeli tanks and infantry entered Gaza in an all out ground offensive:

“The ground operation was preceded by several hours of heavy artillery fire after dark, igniting targets in flames that burst into the night sky. Machine gun fire rattled as bright tracer rounds flashed through the darkness and the crash of hundreds of shells sent up streaks of fire. (AP, January 3, 2009)

Israeli sources have pointed to a lengthy drawn out military operation. It “won’t be easy and it won’t be short,” said Defense Minister Ehud Barak in a TV address.

Israel is not seeking to oblige Hamas “to cooperate”. What we are dealing with is the implementation of the “Dagan Plan” as initially formulated in 2001, which called for:

“an invasion of Palestinian-controlled territory by some 30,000 Israeli soldiers, with the clearly defined mission of destroying the infrastructure of the Palestinian leadership and collecting weaponry currently possessed by the various Palestinian forces, and expelling or killing its military leadership. (Ellis Shulman, op cit, emphasis added)

Nakba 2.0: Mass Expulsion and a Ground Invasion Contemplated

The broader question is whether Israel in consultation with Washington is intent upon triggering a wider war.

Mass expulsion could occur at some later stage of the ground invasion, were the Israelis to open up Gaza’s borders to allow for an exodus of population.

Expulsion was referred to by Ariel Sharon as the “a 1948 style solution”. For Sharon

“it is only necessary to find another state for the Palestinians. -‘Jordan is Palestine’ – was the phrase that Sharon coined.” (Tanya Reinhart, op cit)

Connect with Michel Chossudovsky substack | website

Michel Chossudovsky is an award-winning author, Professor of Economics (emeritus) at the University of Ottawa, Founder and Director of the Centre for Research on Globalization (CRG), Montreal, Editor of Global Research.

Cover image credit: Wafa – creative commons

David Rogers Webb: “The Great Taking” — On the Covert Confiscation of Individual Assets & the Ongoing War Against Humanity

Truth Comes to Light editor’s note:

The video below was filmed by Oracle Films as part of the On Guard for the Liberty of Mankind Symposium that took place in Sweden on September 30, 2023, presented by The Children’s Health Defense and The Doctors’ Appeal.

This interview took place between Ivor Cummins & David Rogers Webb, author of the book “The Great Taking”. Find additional videos from this conference at Ivor Cummins’ Odysee channel.

Summary of “The Great Taking”

It is about the taking of collateral (all of it), the end game of the current globally synchronous debt accumulation super cycle.

This scheme is being executed by long-planned, intelligent design, the audacity and scope of which is difficult for the mind to encompass. Included are all financial assets and bank deposits, all stocks and bonds; and hence, all underlying property of all public corporations, including all inventories, plant and equipment; land, mineral deposits, inventions and intellectual property.

Privately-owned personal and real property financed with any amount of debt will likewise be taken, as will the assets of privately owned businesses which have been financed with debt.

If even partially successful, this will be the greatest conquest and subjugation in world history.

Private, closely held control of ALL central banks, and hence of all money creation, has allowed a very few people to control all political parties and governments; the intelligence agencies and their myriad front organizations; the armed forces and the police; the major corporations and, of course, the media.

These very few people are the prime movers. Their plans are executed over decades. Their control is opaque.

To be clear, it is these very few people, who are hidden from you, who are behind this scheme to confiscate all assets, who are waging a hybrid war against humanity.

sourced from The Great Taking website

Download the Book for free at David’s website

or download PDF from Odysee

Connect with David Rogers Webb

Cover image AI generated

“Billionaires Try to Shrink World’s Population”: Secret Gathering Sponsored by Bill Gates, 2009 Meeting of “The Good Club”

Is Worldwide Depopulation Part of the Billionaire’s “Great Reset”?

by Michel Chossudovsky, Global Research
October 3, 2023
[This article was originally published by Global Research on September 29, 2021.]

For more than ten years, meetings have been held by billionaires described as philanthropists to reduce the size of the world’s population culminating with the 2020-2022 COVID crisis.

Recent developments suggest that “depopulation” is an integral part of the so-called COVID mandates including the lockdown policies and the mRNA “vaccine”.

Flash back to 2009. According to the Wall Street Journal: “Billionaires Try to Shrink World’s Population”.

In May 2009, the Billionaire philanthropists met behind closed doors at the home of the president of The Rockefeller University in Manhattan.

This secret gathering was sponsored by Bill Gates. They called themselves “The Good Club.”

Among the participants were the late David Rockefeller, Warren Buffett, George Soros, Michael Bloomberg Ted Turner, Oprah Winfrey and many more.

In May 2009, the WSJ as well as the Sunday Times reported: (John Harlow, Los Angeles) that

“Some of America’s leading billionaires have met secretly to consider how their wealth could be used to slow the growth of the world’s population and speed up improvements in health and education.”

The emphasis was not on population growth (i.e Planned Parenthood) but on “depopulation”, i.e. the reduction in the absolute size of the world’s population.

To read complete WSJ article, click here.

According to the Sunday Times report:

The philanthropists who attended a summit convened on the initiative of Bill Gates, the Microsoft co-founder, discussed joining forces to overcome political and religious obstacles to change.

…

Stacy Palmer, editor of the Chronicle of Philanthropy, said the summit was unprecedented. “We only learnt about it afterwards, by accident. Normally these people are happy to talk good causes, but this is different – maybe because they don’t want to be seen as a global cabal,” he said.

Another guest said there was “nothing as crude as a vote” but a consensus emerged that they would back a strategy in which population growth would be tackled as a potentially disastrous environmental, social and industrial threat.

“This is something so nightmarish that everyone in this group agreed it needs big-brain answers,” said the guest. …

Why all the secrecy? “They wanted to speak rich to rich without worrying anything they said would end up in the newspapers, painting them as an alternative world government,” he said. (Sunday Times)

Shrinking the World’s Population

The media reports on the May 5, 2009 secret gathering focussed on the commitment of “The Good Club” to “slowing down” the growth of the world’s population.

“Shrink the World Population” (the WSJ article) goes beyond Planned Parenthood which consists in “Reducing the Growth of World Population”. It consists in “Depopulation”, namely reducing the absolute size of the world’s population, which ultimately requires reducing the rate of birth (which would include reduced fertility) coupled with a significant increase in the death rate.

Secret Meeting: At the Height of the H1N1 Pandemic

On April 25, 2009, the World Health Organization (WHO) headed by Margaret Chan declared a Public Health Emergency of International Concern (PHEIC). And a couple of weeks later, the “Good Club” met in NYC at the height of the H1N1 swine flu pandemic which turned out to be a scam.

It is also worth noting that at very outset of the H1N1 crisis in April 2009, Professor Neil Ferguson of Imperial College, London was advising Bill Gates and the WHO: “40 per cent of people in the UK could be infected [with H1N1] within the next six months if the country was hit by a pandemic.”

Sounds familiar? That was the same Neil Ferguson (generously supported by the Gates Foundation) who designed the coronavirus lockdown model (launched on March 11, 2020). As we recall, that March 2020 mathematical model was based on “predictions” of 600,000 deaths in the UK.

And now (summer-autumn 2021) a third authoritative “mathematical model” by the same “scientist” (Ferguson) was formulated to justify a “Fourth Wave Lockdown.”

Saving Lives to Achieve “Depopulation”

Was an absolute “reduction” in world population contemplated at that May 2009 secret meeting?

A few months later, Bill Gates in his TED presentation (February 2010) pertaining to vaccination, confirmed the following;

“And if we do a really great job on new vaccines, health care, reproductive health services, we could lower that [the world population] by 10 or 15 percent”.

According to Gates’ statement, this would represent an absolute reduction of the world’s population (2010) of the order of 680 million to 1.02 billion.

TED Talk [transcript link]

[At 04:21]

The same group of billionaires who met at the May 2009 secret venue at the Rockefeller University in Manhattan, have been actively involved from the outset of the COVID crisis in designing the lockdown policies applied worldwide including the mRNA vaccine and the WEF’s “Great Reset”.

The mRNA vaccine is not a project of a UN intergovernmental body (WHO) on behalf the member states of the UN: It’s a private initiative. The billionaire elites who fund and enforce the COVID vaccine project worldwide are eugenists committed to depopulation.

Connect with Michel Chossudovsky at substack

Cover image credit: Nika_Akin

How Vanguard Conquered the World

by James Corbett, The Corbett Report
September 25, 2023

So, you’ve watched How BlackRock Conquered the World and you’re now aware of how this financial behemoth with trillions of dollars of assets under management has taken over vast swaths of the economy. You know how BlackRock is one of the top institutional investors in seemingly every major Fortune 500 company, and you understand how Fink and the gang are leveraging this incredible wealth to wield political and social power, directing industry and ultimately steering the course of civilization.

And since you did watch that podcastumentary to the very end, you’ll also remember how I pointed out that the top institutional investor in most of these companies is not BlackRock, but The Vanguard Group.

So what is The Vanguard Group? Where did it come from? What does it do? And how does this financial colossus fit into the overall BlackRock/ESG/Net Zero plan for the future of the (controlled) economy? Good questions! Let’s roll up our sleeves and get to work answering them.

The Rise of Vanguard

Just as the official history of BlackRock starts with the humbling of a rising star of the financial world—with BlackRock founder Larry Fink having supposedly learned a valuable lesson in risk management after he lost $100 million in a single quarter at First Boston investment bank—the Vanguard story, too, begins with the lemons-to-lemonade tale of a financial whiz kid.

In the Vanguard case, the story starts with John Clifton “Jack” Bogle, a titan of the financial industry whose conservative investment ethos was forged, we are told, in the crucible of The Great Depression. Born in New Jersey in May 1929—just months before the great stock market crash that wiped out his family’s fortune, drove his father to alcoholism and, ultimately, led to his parents divorce—Bogle was forced to buckle down and excel at his schoolwork even as he worked an assortment of jobs to help keep the family afloat.

Beating the odds, Bogle ended up getting a scholarship to study economics at Princeton. But, being an average student at a prestigious institution full of bright, ambitious young phenoms, Bogle knew he would have to produce a stellar senior thesis in order to stand out. Vowing to write about something that had never been covered before, he found his thesis topic in the pages of the December 1949 issue of Fortune magazine: the mutual fund industry.

Mutual funds, Investopedia informs us, are financial vehicles that “pool assets from shareholders to invest in securities like stocks, bonds, money market instruments, and other assets.” They had existed in the US in various forms since the late 19th century, but it was a series of acts passed by Congress in the wake of the 1929 stock market crash—including, most notably, the Investment Company Act of 1940—that paved the way for the explosive growth of the mutual fund industry in the mid-20th century. Bogle just happened to read the right article at the right time to catch the very first wave of what would eventually become a financial tsunami.

If Bogle had hoped to turn his flagging academic career around with his thesis, he succeeded. Not only did the thesis lead to a magna cum laude diploma from Princeton, it even caught the eye of Walter Morgan, founder of the prestigious Wellington Fund, the first balanced mutual fund in the United States. Morgan offered the young whiz kid a job at Wellington Management Company, the firm that managed the fund, and Bogle set out on what would become a storied career.

Becoming an assistant manager in 1955, Bogle oversaw a period of explosive growth for the firm and the mutual fund industry as a whole. He persuaded management to capitalize on the public’s growing interest in such investments by creating a new fund composed solely of equities, the Wellington Equities Fund. The new fund’s success and Bogle’s hard work cemented his position as Walter Morgan’s hand-picked successor. He would go on to become president of the company in 1967 and CEO in 1970.

It was a decision Bogle made at the height of the go-go ’60s bull market, however, that would prove to be what he later identified as his greatest mistake. In 1966, facing growing competition from a crop of newer, riskier mutual funds that were promising investors greater returns than the boring, conservative Wellington funds, Bogle forged a merger with with the investment counseling firm of Thorndike, Doran, Paine and Lewis, managers of the the up-and-coming Ivest Fund out of Boston.

But Bogle and his new partners quickly found they had different visions for the merged company. So, when the bull market ended in the 1970s and the stock market cratered, the partners banded together to have him fired as chief executive of Wellington Management Company.

Bogle would later identify the merger as the greatest mistake of his career and his subsequent firing as the lowest point of that career. But being let go would serve as the springboard for the creation of The Vanguard Group.

Bogle came up with a plan to turn the lemon of being fired into the lemonade of a new venture:

Jack’s response to his firing was to appeal to the boards of directors of the Wellington funds. These groups were separate from the board of the Wellington Management Company which had just fired Jack. While separate, the boards of the funds were essentially captives of the management company and the chairman of each fund’s board was traditionally the CEO of the management company. That was the way things were done in the mutual fund industry. Nevertheless, Jack suggested that each of the boards consider taking over the management company’s functions.

The boards of the various Wellington funds went along with this idea and they decided to keep Jack as their president. He then proposed that—in a radical break from industry norms—that the fund boards assume responsibility for their own administrative services, which had been hitherto provided by Wellington Management Company. Wellington Management would stay on as the funds’ investment advisor and principal underwriter, but the fee the funds paid to the management company would be reduced by $1 million to reflect this changeover in administrative services.

The okay from the board of the Wellington Group of Investment Companies enabled Bogle to form a new corporation to take over the administration of the eleven funds of the Wellington Group. He named it The Vanguard Group after the flagship of Lord Nelson’s fleet in the legendary Battle of the Nile.

“Together, the Wellington tie-in, the proud naval tradition embodied in HMS Vanguard, and the leading-edge implication of the name vanguard were more than I could resist,” he later explained.

In one stroke, Bogle had created an entirely new entity that ended up revolutionizing the industry: the “mutual” mutual fund, in which profits did not flow to the management company, but back to the funds themselves, meaning that, “as a practical matter, Vanguard attempted to operate at cost and pass the savings on to the shareholders.”

There was yet another hurdle Bogle had to surmount. The funds’ directors decided that Vanguard was to have the narrowest of mandates: it would only look after the funds’ administration, and would not be permitted to engage in advisory or investment management activities. Bogle overcame this restriction by proposing a completely passive fund, one that would not be actively managed but instead be tied to the performance of the S&P 500 index.

To say that the initial reaction of seasoned investors to this innovation was disparaging would be an understatement. Dubbed “Bogle’s Folly,” the idea of investing not in a single company but in an entire index was alternately derided as a “cop out,” as a “search for mediocrity,” and—given its eschewal of the traditional market ethos of picking winners and dropping losers—as “un-American.”

Unfortunately for Bogle, the criticism was not confined to mere name calling. The $150 million underwriting target for the very first mutual index fund, First Index Investment Fund, proved to be overly ambitious. Indeed, when initial underwriting was finished in August 1976, however, the fund had only collected $11 million. That wasn’t even enough to invest in all 500 of the S&P 500 stocks, as was the fund’s intention. So the fund managers settled for investing in the top 200 stocks, plus 80 others that had been selected as representative of the remaining 300 stocks. Nevertheless, they pressed ahead and by the end of the year the fund’s assets had grown by $3 million, to $14 million.

“Bogle’s Folly” paid off. Literally. The indexing model grew in popularity during the bull run in the early 1980s and Vanguard also launched new funds, including a bond index fund and a total market fund that captured the entire stock market minus the S&P 500.

Today, The Vanguard Group is the largest provider of mutual funds in the world and the second-largest provider of exchange-traded funds (ETFs) after BlackRock’s iShares. It boasts over $7 trillion of assets under management, and, as we have already seen, is the single largest institutional investor in just about every company of importance in the United States.

Who Owns the Shares?

OK, so, there you go. That’s the very condensed nutshell version of how Vanguard rose to prominence. And, as we know, Vanguard is now part of the shadowy financial cabal that owns everything.

. . . Or do we know that? This is where the fact checkers will come in to make their nasally point about how the conspiracy theorists are wrong. And, you know what? For once, they may not be entirely incorrect.

You see, the fact checkers at AAP and Reuters have tackled the question of Vanguard and BlackRock’s growing financial oligopoly in the way fact checkers do: by taking the most ridiculous framing of the argument they can possibly find and contrasting it with the opinions of their credentialed “experts.”

In AAP’s case, “Global corporate monopoly claim dances on edge of reality,” tackles the very serious issue of the Vanguard/BlackRock leviathan by refuting a Facebook video featuring someone discussing the problem while performing an interpretive dance.

After conceding that the companies are indeed the largest shareholders in a number of important companies, AAP then explains that this is for a good reason: they are “strategically investing their client’s [sic] money in order get a good return.”

Oh, OK, then.

More to the point, AAP then brings in Rob Nicholls—an associate professor of regulation and governance at the UNSW Business School—to lend gravitas to its main point: Vanguard and BlackRock don’t “own” Pepsi and Coke and Amazon and Apple and all the other companies cited by the conspiracy theorists. Instead, their holdings in these companies are largely passive investments—either ETFs, in which shares are purchased in proportion to market capitalizations, or index funds, in which shares are purchased in proportion to the index on which they are traded. Thus the purchase and selling of shares in these companies is largely automatic: when a company’s market cap falls or when its stock gains in relation to the overall index, the associated ETF or index fund would be obligated to offload or purchase shares in order to maintain the fund’s mandate.

Thus, to the extent that Vanguard and BlackRock holdings represent passive investment, these holdings do not have any sway over the companies or their actions. The argument here is that Vanguard can’t threaten to sell Apple shares if Apple doesn’t conform to the woke agenda because Vanguard can’t really sell those shares on a whim. Instead, Vanguard is obligated to hold Apple shares in proportion to Apple’s position in the S&P 500 index (at least when it comes to their S&P 500 index fund). And, where there is no credible carrot to reward “good behaviour” (buying shares when Apple does what Vanguard wants) or stick to reward “bad behaviour” (selling shares when Apple doesn’t do what Vanguard wants), then there is no way for Vanguard to directly influence Apple’s behaviour.

Besides, as Lorenzo Casavecchia, a “senior lecturer at UTS Business School,” told AAP FactCheck, “an investor can only control a company if they have more than half of the votes cast at a general meeting.” But even when you combine the shares of the so-called Big Three investors (BlackRock, Vanguard and State Street), their holdings in these major companies do not even approach a majority. Often, they each hold a single-digit percentage point of overall shares.

What’s more, as Reuters point out in their fact check on the topic (citing a BlackRock spokesperson, of course): “BlackRock itself is not a shareholder” in these companies. Instead, “the owners of these securities are our clients, through their investments made on their behalf via the funds managed by Blackrock.”

The same goes for Vanguard, which likes to brag in its corporate PR that Vanguard “is owned by its funds, which in turn are owned by their shareholders—including you, if you’re a Vanguard investor.” So, the way Vanguard frames it, when you inevitably end up at the question of “who owns Vanguard?” (or “who owns BlackRock?” for that matter), the answer will be: “The investors do!”

So, you see? Vanguard and BlackRock (and let’s not forget State Street) don’t “own” the major corporations. They don’t manage those companies or have any influence over them. And, besides, their shares are held on behalf of their investors, so it’s the investors who are really the biggest holders of Apple and Exxon and Walmart and all the rest.

Well, I guess that sums it up, folks. Nothing more to see here, right?

Vanguard, BlackRock and the Shadows of Power

Oh, wait. Of course there is more to this story.

True, Vanguard and BlackRock and State Street don’t “own” these companies in the straightforward sense, but to say that the trillions of dollars of assets under their management doesn’t bring with it the clout needed to sway the direction of corporate America as a whole or even of select companies individually is beyond naive.

Indeed, as many serious, credentialed researchers—as opposed to the interpretive dancing TikTokers “refuted” by the fact checkers—have pointed out, there are ways that these investment companies can flex the muscles that come with trillions of dollars in investable capital.

As even AAP concedes in its fact check (citing Adam Triggs, research director at ANU’s Asian Bureau of Economic Research), there is evidence that common ownership of competing firms (like Coke and Pepsi) reduces competition, helping to cement the corporatocracy into place.

This common sensical and obvious point is backed up by researchers like John Coates at Harvard Law School, whose paper, “The Future of Corporate Governance Part I: The Problem of Twelve,” outlines how “in the near future roughly twelve individuals will have practical power over the majority of U.S. public companies.”

It shouldn’t take an economist or a university professor to imagine how such intense concentration of ownership could lead to a raft of problems, from higher prices on consumer products to reduced wages and employment. But while you hold your breath and wait for the fact checkers to tell you why this is a totally wonderful turn of events that won’t have any bad consequences whatsoever, you should take the time to digest Coates’ own summarization of the inherent threat that such an intense concentration of ownership poses for the market and even for the rule of law itself:

Indexation, private equity, and globalization threaten to permanently entangle business with the state and create organizations—advisors to index funds and private equity funds—controlled by a small number of individuals with unsurpassed power. That concentration of control underscores the gap between ordinary citizens’ experience of disengagement and distance from their government made visible in 2016, and the increasing wealth gap between the ultra-rich and the bulk of the population. Politics is shaped by perceptions. Law—itself a function (in part) of politics—will almost certainly change in response to these trends. The only question is how.

Then there’s the question of votes. Of course, shareholders get to vote in corporate elections, including electing directors and voting on shareholder resolutions. So who gets to vote when the shares are actually held by an asset manager on behalf of its clients? Traditionally, it’s Vanguard and BlackRock who actually do the voting. Vanguard calls it “stewardship” and likes to brag on its website how its managers “vote in accordance with the funds’ proxy voting policies.”

The funds, of course, tell the finger-pointers to just relax. After all, they don’t coordinate their votes as a bloc, so their small percentage of votes won’t be a decisively sway anything, anyway. But research published in 2017 found that the Big Three do in fact “utilize coordinated voting strategies and hence follow a centralized corporate governance strategy.” Heck, even Bloomberg can see through the propaganda suggesting that their voting power is small and insignificant:

And yet voting power is voting power. The fund companies’ combined votes and back-channel jawboning, in which they make their views known to directors and chief executive officers, could swing the outcome of important matters such as mergers, major investment decisions, CEO succession, and director elections—even if no fund house has the ability to decide the outcome of such matters alone. They’re potentially the most powerful force over a huge swath of America Inc. Alarm bells have begun to go off with some regulators, as well as with an ideologically diverse array of academics and activists.

To find out how these votes actually work, you can search Vanguard’s public record of proxy votes. For what it’s worth, a random search of the most recent Vanguard proxy votes for Exxon shows that Vanguard voted against every single resolution, including the ones pushing the woke green technocratic agenda.

But the issue remains: if the managers get to vote (even if its “on behalf of” their investor-owned funds) in accordance with ill-defined and ever-changing “principles,” who really gets to wield the power of the shares?

This is not a trivial issue. BlackRock, at least, recognizing that its claim to be simply a neutral asset manager rather than a civilization-shaping force is undermined by its ability to wield shareholder votes, has made a big PR campaign about introducing and then expanding a scheme to allow investors to opt for voting their own shares.

But when considering the <sarc>incredibly difficult</sarc> question of whether the people running the firms that collectively manage tens of trillions of dollars of assets have any sway whatsoever over the firms they are investing in, there is a simple answer: yes. Yes, they do.

As I explained in How BlackRock Conquered the World, even the boffins and eggheads at the prestigious universities have been forced to concede (after years of careful study, no doubt) that Larry Fink doesn’t pen his annual “Letter to CEOs” just for the fun of it. The word of Fink does carry weight in corporate boardrooms.

Sometimes referred to as a “call to action” to corporate leaders, these letters from the man stewarding over a significant chunk of the world’s investable assets actually do change corporate behaviour. That this is so should be self-evident to anyone with two brain cells to rub together, which is precisely why it took a team of researchers months of painstaking study to publish a peer-reviewed paper concluding this blindingly obvious fact: “portfolio firms are responsive to BlackRock’s public engagement efforts.”

So here’s the $20 trillion question: how much power does a Larry Fink or a Jack Bogle really wield over the world through their companies?

Well, on the most basic level, the latter question is easy to answer. Jack Bogle was forced out of the CEO position at Vanguard in 1996, retired as chairman in 2000, and died in 2019, so he isn’t wielding much influence these days.

But here’s the more serious point: Larry Fink at BlackRock and Mortimer “Tim” Buckley (the current chairman of The Vanguard Group) do exert power over the economy and, ultimately, over society. As long as their company’s remain the top institutional investors in the majority of the stock market, the only question is: how much havoc they will wreak by imposing their will on the world?

You have already seen Larry Fink and his woke ESG agenda-pushing. So, how about Buckley? Well, to his credit, Buckley did pull The Vanguard Group out of the Net Zero Asset Managers initiative, claiming that Vanguard is “not in the game of politics” and that “our research indicates that ESG investing does not have any advantage over broad-based investing.” And while Vanguard does offer so-called “sustainable” funds and ESG index funds, they amount to a miniscule percentage of the group’s offerings, with Buckley saying he wants to “allow investors to express their values and preferences” but the decision whether or not to pursue ESG investment “has to be an individual investor’s choice.”

Regardless of how much of this is just corporate blather designed to protect Vanguard from the growing ESG backlash (and subsequent withdrawal of investment funds) that has afflicted BlackRock in recent years, the underlying problem persists. Even if Buckley were an angel descended from heaven to protect us from the green woke mobs, who is to say his successor would be an angel, too? The very fact that people like Fink and Buckley are in a position to sway corporate decisions is itself the problem—not the particular ways they wield (or refrain from wielding) that power.

Ironically, this point was not lost on Jack Bogle. You’ll note that Bogle is not a name synonymous with nefarious corporate scheming in the same way that Fink currently is. In fact, in recent decades the now-deceased Bogle has become something of a saint in the investment world.

His idea of “mutualizing” the mutual funds by cutting out the management company middlemen and thus greatly reducing fees has put upwards of a trillion dollars back in the pockets of ordinary investors (and thereby kept it out of the pockets of Wall Street managers). And his common sense, down-to-earth investment strategies that eschewed get-rich-quick schemes and fancy quant-driven investment trends gave rise to an entire movement of investors who call themselves “Bogleheads” (yes, really), and continue to organize conferences in his name.

So what was Bogle’s take on the astonishing growth of Vanguard and BlackRock in the years before his death?

Most observers expect that the share of corporate ownership by index funds will continue to grow over the next decade. It seems only a matter of time until index mutual funds cross the 50% mark. If that were to happen, the “Big Three” might own 30% or more of the U.S. stock market—effective control. I do not believe that such concentration would serve the national interest.

He’s not wrong there, at least.

As always, I will note that the incredible power that the Finks and the Buckleys of the world wield is in fact our power, derived from our money through our investments of our time, our energy, our labour and our productive power in the service of their corporate agenda. Thus, the fundamental solution to the problem of Vanguard and BlackRock will not come from some outside force. It will come when we withdraw our wealth from their system.

For those who are interested in the solution to the Vanguards and the BlackRocks of the world, they are directed to my recent #SolutionsWatch episode on the subject.

Connect with The Corbett Report

Cover image credit: geralt

This Long Plotted World Takeover Scheme Is More Advanced Than Any Normal Human Can Fathom

“The takeover framework of these ruling psychopaths is based always on the prototype of problem-reaction-solution, of which all are fake premeditated events and false emergencies; conspiracies in fact, meant to instill fear, hatred, or confusion, so that the State can pretend to come to the rescue of its hapless slave-class.”

[…]

“While the state continues to build its new world order, the general population is consumed by one after another false flag event, claimed ’emergency,’ or new ‘threat,’ as stated by the ruling class bent on taking over the world. While the masses are at each other’s throats, the state continues its drive toward total domination. What this indicates is that the people are complicit in their own slavery due to their inability to see the big picture, while concentrating on every distraction thrown at them by this evil ruling force.”

This Long Plotted World Takeover Scheme Is More Advanced Than Any Normal Human Can Fathom

by Gary D. Barnett
September 21, 2023

“The drive of the Rockefellers and their allies is to create a one-world government combining supercapitalism and Communism under the same tent, all under their control. Do I mean a conspiracy? Yes, I do. I am convinced there is such a plot, international in scope, generations old in planning, incredibly evil in intent.”

~ Rep. Larry P. MacDonald [Note: Lawrence McDonald was killed (likely murdered) on Korean Air Lines 007, 1983, a few months after making this statement.]

To begin, I will preface my remarks by saying that this is an attempt to explain in simple terms, very complicated financial and economic crimes being used against Americans, and also against the entire world population, in order to create and sustain total control over humanity. This is meant to manifest itself in the concept of one world governance, the ‘Great Reset,’ or the New World Order.

This may seem a bold statement; it is not, but once you understand that everything that has happened over many decades is linked, especially since the plotted and premeditated false flag event called ‘9/11,’ you should be able to recognize the massive number of obvious connections that are incredibly evil.

It has recently become more prevalent by mostly alternative news sites and bloggers, to put forth the notion that many are waking up, and that the people are winning the battle for freedom. In my opinion, this is just not so, and in fact is misleading, as false hope is the driving force of this thinking.

It is evident that more are claiming to be against government tyranny, but absolutely nothing has been done to reduce or eliminate the power of the State at any level to date. In addition, the nefarious efforts of the State and its controllers continue to expand, and the drive toward more draconian policies is never-ending.

In the current environment, it is not known what the reaction by the masses might be considering the vast and imminent array of so-called ’emergencies’ that are certain to arise as this controlling cabal seeks to advance its agendas, but if the past is any indication, compliance should be expected.

The takeover framework of these ruling psychopaths is based always on the prototype of problem-reaction-solution, of which all are fake premeditated events and false emergencies; conspiracies in fact, meant to instill fear, hatred, or confusion, so that the State can pretend to come to the rescue of its hapless slave-class.

This strategy has worked most every time it has been tried to date, and the herd continues to simply go along, regardless of the erroneous rhetoric being spewed that this populace is winning. It is not, and so long as the State continues and succeeds in its push to remake and transform society, whether psychologically, financially, or economically, the power of the ruling class and its governing system, will advance its wealth transfers, its monetary monopoly, and its depopulation efforts.

Psychological manipulation and control is necessary in order for the State thugs to accomplish their mission of world takeover, but financial and economic control is mandatory.

This brings us to the real question; who owns and controls this world? It is certainly the big banking cartels, including all central banks, the large corporate magnates, the government protected NGO foundations, and of course, the entire global asset industry, which by 2020 controlled well over $100 trillion dollars. But who owns and controls all of these entities? Who has controlling interest in everything on earth? That is Blackrock and The Vanguard Group, and as I explained a year ago:

“There are a few thousand institutional investment firms that own every large bank, every large corporation, every large investment firm, every ‘news’ outlet, every large communication company, every large pharmaceutical company, every large transportation company; in other words, most every large company on earth is owned by these institutional investors. In turn, the small institutional investment firms are owned by larger institutional investment firms, and the larger investment firms, are owned by even larger investment firms. The two institutional investment companies that are the major owners and controllers of all the others in the world are Vanguard Holdings and Blackrock, and Vanguard is the largest shareholder (owner) of Blackrock. What this means is that Vanguard and Blackrock own and control this planet.”

The current CEO of Vanguard is Tim Buckley, and of course, the head and founder of the powerful Blackrock institution is Larry Fink. It should be noted that Fink and Blackrock have attained a position of extreme and almost infinite power over finance and economics, and according to many are now the fourth branch of government.

The connections of Fink are incredibly telling of the power wielded by Blackrock. Blackrock effectively has control of the Federal Reserve and the U.S. Treasury, as well as banks around the world. It should be noted that Fink was appointed to the World Economic Forum’s (WEF) Board on August 22, 2019, the onset of the fraudulent ‘covid pandemic,’ which was set up, solidified, and begun, the same month that Fink took his seat on the board of the WEF.

To gain a full picture of Fink and Blackrock’s history through today, watch this superb documentary by James Corbett; “How Blackrock Conquered the World.” In it, Corbett explains with full reference in video and text, how the entire ‘covid’ hoax was staged, and was first and foremost a financial takeover coup led by Blackrock. This connection of dots and people is of vital importance.

As I mentioned earlier, this is a very simplistic view of events, but it is necessary to tie a few things together in order that all can be seen to be completely connected; which would indicate a vast conspiracy that has been propagated over a long period of time.

All so-called ’emergencies’ since the fraudulent 9/11 inside job, have much in common, and why would they not, as the main agenda of world governing domination was always the goal sought.

Consider just three events, but there are many, many more, over that time.

The buildings that came down on 9/11 were turned into powder, an impossibility with fire caused by jet fuel. Consider that cars far away from any fire were burned to nothing, with melted metal, aluminum, windshield glass; all as if by spontaneous combustion.

But the same thing happened in the Paradise, California fires in 2018, with many similarities, including the incredible damage to automobiles not even in the path of fires that had to be well above any heat level of a wildfire.

The same also just occurred this past month in Lahaina, Hawaii.

How could this be? It could not, unless similar or exact methods of destruction were plotted beforehand, and carried out by criminal State (military) means. And this is happening around the world as well, all falsely explained away by the complicit and controlled mainstream media.

One very telling aspect of all these bogus ’emergencies,’ from 9/11 to Maui, is that Wall Street and the financial firms, the institutional asset firms, central banks, defense contractors, and military-controlled tech companies, and of course this includes Blackrock, tended to gain huge profits, capture (steal through land grabs) more property, government contracts, and massive bailout money, while walking away from disaster far richer and more powerful than ever before possible.

This happened with 9/11, the 2008 finance and housing collapse, the fake ‘covid’ plot, and now with the ultimate weapon against humanity, the completely illegitimate ‘climate change’ agenda; and this agenda placed Blackrock at the top of the heap worldwide, of this criminal fraud.

Each and every emergency brings about a bigger and more powerful State, more restrictions, more regulation, more mandates, more lockdowns, less travel, and more surveillance and censorship. This is all by design, and never coincidental or accidental, as all is a deliberate plot against humanity.

Regardless of political considerations or parties, this assault against us all is ongoing, and forever expanding. Every incident, every manipulation, every ’emergency,’ has been planned far in advance, and the world takeover is now closer at hand.

While the state continues to build its new world order, the general population is consumed by one after another false flag event, claimed ’emergency,’ or new ‘threat,’ as stated by the ruling class bent on taking over the world. While the masses are at each other’s throats, the state continues its drive toward total domination. What this indicates is that the people are complicit in their own slavery due to their inability to see the big picture, while concentrating on every distraction thrown at them by this evil ruling force.

What is being ignored is that this world has already been taken over and is being fully controlled by the very few, and the fighting of one against another is continuing to aid in this takeover plot. By concentrating on each and every tyrannical distraction, the people have left themselves open to dictatorial management, and in the process have lost all ability to stop the totalitarian usurpation of their lives and property at the hands of the financial cabal bent on world rule. By treating each indiscretion as independent of the real agenda being sought, nothing is being done to stop the state in its efforts to fully control all people on earth.

By participating in the political and ‘voting’ process; a process designed and implemented for the single purpose of control, by concentrating on the political side shows, by attempting to use corrupt government courts to gain redress from tyrannical maneuvers, by accepting the ruling system as legitimate, by allowing the Federal Reserve and all banks the ability to monitor and control assets through complete digitization, the lowly people are digging their own graves.

It may already be too late to continue this asinine exercise in futility, as the ruling class few are in control of the systems that will allow them to complete their takeover plot.

The only answer to this evil attempt to destroy us in favor of the few most powerful, is to negate all government, to negate and abolish the federal reserve system, to disallow any and all control by the banking cartels, to stop any and all efforts to monopolize the economic and monetary system’s efforts to create and implement any central bank digital currencies, and to not accept any new feigned emergency concerning health, fake ‘climate change,’ war threats, unnatural events, or any other intentional criminal acts meant to cause undue fear among the seemingly helpless proletariat.

The people are not winning; they are losing, but this deadly assault on humanity can still be reversed if even a small majority stand up and take responsibility for their own lives and freedom.

If the current trend continues, if the bulk of this population persists in hiding from the truth, if most expect others to save them, all will be lost, but if any true actionable awakening by large numbers becomes evident, the state will fold. This will never happen with any election, and no politician can change the course we are on, as depending on any master participating in this evil governing system, is the epitome of failure, and can only lead to eternal enslavement.

“The one thing man fears is the unknown. When presented with this scenario, individual rights will be willingly relinquished for the guarantee of their well-being granted to them by a World Government, a New World Order.”

~ Henry A. Kissinger

Connect with Gary D. Barnett

Cover image credit: EvgeniT

Eyewitness Proof That People Were Intentionally Trapped to Prevent Their Escape From the Lahaina Immolation

by Edward Hendrie, Great Mountain Publishing
September 20, 2023

Below is the shocking testimony of Ann Williams before the Disaster, Resilience, International Affairs, Planning Committee of the Maui County Council. Williams once lived at the now-destroyed house at 457 Lahainaluna Road in Lahaina, Hawaii.

She explains how the people fleeing Lahaina were intentionally trapped in the city to prevent them from fleeing the imminent immolation of Lahaina. From what she saw, Williams concluded that “it’s obvious we were intentionally trapped.”

The Lahaina immolation was intended to kill as many residents as possible.

The cover story for preventing people from gaining access to roads out of the city was the danger of electrocutions from downed power lines.

There are two problems with that argument.

1) The power company had shut down power to Lahaina shortly after 9:00 a.m. that morning. The police command knew this. Thus, there was no danger of electrocution in the afternoon when people were fleeing the city.

And 2) there were no power lines down on the main highway going north out of Lahaina.

Nonetheless. police blocked access to that highway ensuring that people would be trapped and killed in Lahaina. Ann Williams stated, in pertinent part:

We did Escape out the Fleming’s Chart House exit to go north. We went North free sailing at that point after Flemings, got out there, they hadn’t blockaded us yet.

I was one of the lucky few that got out that way.

No power lines whatsoever. It was a safe exit all the way North and we got to Honokowai that way.

After me though they decided to block it.

And there were still no power lines down because I did come out the next morning and I saw the death trap. It was where there were no power lines still yet the following morning.

Everybody could have gotten out. Everybody could have gotten out. It was free sailing going north.

But the police officer there quote unquote from direct other residents who talked to him were walking, saw all the cars stopped.

They finally walked all the way up to the front at the exit; policemen standing there and the guy said to the policeman there’s a fire, the fire is coming, you got to let these people go.

[The policeman responds,] “I’ve got orders.”

We need to investigate that. Who is giving these cops orders? I mean if the police officer might be taking orders. It’s not his fault personally. But there’s somebody above him that did this and they need to investigate that.

And then John said the far end of Front Street was blocked, bringing him in that way, and then blocked this way. It’s obvious we were intentionally trapped.

And I hope that this gets investigated further. And I have the eyewitnesses who have spoken to that cop directly. Thank you.

~ Testimony of Ann Williams

Ann Williams’ testimony is corroborated by another eyewitness, who goes by the nickname, “Fish.” He stated that police blocked traffic to prevent residents from fleeing the immolation of Lahaina.

There was no logical reason for the police to block cars fleeing the destruction of the city other than to ensure as many people died as possible. The witness describes the actions of the police as “a combination of stupid and evil.”

The video of that witness’ account has since been made private on YouTube. However, another video of his account of the police blockade can be found below.

Ann Williams’ and Fish’s testimony sheds light on the experience of Jonathan Herzog. Herzog’s video below reveals how police kept rerouting traffic in a circle through Lahaina in a way that prevented the people from leaving Lahaina as the city was being immolated.

As you watch the video, keep in mind that the police had continuous radio communication with their command center, which is orchestrating the traffic around Lahaina. Although electrical power was down, the police station had backup generators to power the command center.

Nobody knows the streets of the city better than the police department. The command center had the big picture. This was not a mistake. The command center knew that the rerouting of the drivers in a loop through Lahaina corralled the drivers so that they could not leave Lahaina.

Herzog’s video starts on the morning of August 8, 2023, as he is leaving Lahaina to drive north to Napili. But he was prevented from leaving by a police blockade of the road.

The video picks up again at 2:56 p.m. when he decides to travel south to Kihei. At the 2:41 mark in the video, he is driving southbound on Front Street in Lahaina. But at the 2:50 mark in the video, we see him driving northbound, he puts a caption indicating that “THEY KEPT DETOURING US IN CIRCLES AND THEN I START TO SEE SMOKE.” At the 3:17 mark in the video, we see that he is back traveling southbound on E 30 passing Dickenson Street.

At the 4:50 mark in the video, we then found him rerouted to drive northbound on Front Street.

At the 5:22 mark in the video, he is once again traveling southbound (probably on E 30) passing the intersection of Papalaua Street.

At the 6:50 mark in the video, he is traveling southbound, he sees the billowing smoke behind him and comments that there is a fire behind him and he is trying to get away from the area.

But at the 7:30 mark in the video, he is rerouted to northbound Front Street for the second time, which is right back into the fire that he saw earlier.

He soon realizes the peril he has been guided into. As the smoke approaches closer and closer he decides to park his car at Kingdom Hall and walk to the boat landing and pier. He eventually walks northbound along Front Street and out of Lahaina to safety.

How many of the people who got trapped in their cars on Front Street did not make it?

Jonathan Herzog’s Lahaina Escape

Video available at Bitchute & Rumble

Remnants of destroyed cars on Front Street that were caught in the traffic jam caused by a police blockade.

The reporter states that the passengers fled their cars. But did they? How does he know?

A directed energy weapon could have caught the passengers by surprise. If they were struck with a directed energy weapon, they would have been immolated as they sat in their cars.

Connect with Great Mountain Publishing

Cover image credit: US Civil Air Patrol

James Corbett: How BlackRock Conquered the World

How BlackRock Conquered the World

by James Corbett, The Corbett Report
September 18, 2023

What is BlackRock? Where did this financial behemoth come from? How did it gain such incredible power over the world’s wealth? And how is it seeking to leverage that power in shaping the course of human civilization?

Find out in this in-depth Corbett Report documentary on How BlackRock Conquered the World.

Watch on BitChute / Odysee / Rokfin / Rumble

Transcript

Hey! Let’s play a little game.

Let’s imagine you’re Joe Q. Normie and you need to run out for some groceries. You hop in the car and head to the store. What store do you go to? Why, Walmart, of course!

And, being an unwitting victim of the sugar conspiracy, what do you buy when you’re there? Coke, naturally!

And you can get jabbed at Walmart these days, right? Well then, you might as well make sure you get your sixth Moderna booster while you’re there!

And don’t forget to fill up with gas on your way home!

Is this creeping you out? Then why don’t you shut yourself in your house and never go out shopping again? That’ll show ’em! After all, you can always order whatever you need from Amazon, can’t you?

Are you noticing a pattern here? Yes, in case you haven’t heard, BlackRock, Inc. is now officially everywhere. It owns everything.

Sadly for us, however, the creepy corporate claws of the BlackRock beast aren’t content simply to clutch onto a near plurality of the shares of every major corporation in the world. No, BlackRock is now digging its talons in even further and flexing its muscles, putting that inconceivable wealth and influence to use by completely reordering the economy, creating scamdemics and shaping the course of civilization in the process.

Let’s face it: if you’re not concerned about the power BlackRock wields over the world by this point, then you’re not paying attention.

But don’t worry if all of this is news to you. Most people have no idea where this investment giant came from, how it clawed its way to the top of the Wall Street dogpile, or what it has planned for your future.

Let’s fill in that gap in public understanding.

I’m James Corbett of The Corbett Report and today you’re going to learn the story of How BlackRock Conquered The World.

Chapter 1: A Brief History of BlackRock

“Hold on a second,” I hear you interject. “I’ve got this! BlackRock was founded as a mergers and acquisitions firm in 1985 by a couple of ex-Lehmanites and has since gone on to become the world’s largest alternative investment firm, right?”

Wrong. That’s Blackstone Inc., currently headed by Stephen Schwarzman. But don’t feel bad if you confuse the two. The Blackstone/BlackRock confusion was done on purpose.

In fact, BlackRock began in 1988 as a business proposal by investment banker Larry Fink and a gaggle of business partners. The appropriately named Fink had managed to lose $100 million in a single quarter in 1986 as a manager at First Boston investment bank by betting the wrong way on interest rates. Humbled by this humiliating setback (or so the story goes), Fink turned lemons into lemonade by crafting a vision for an investment firm with an emphasis on risk management. Never again would Larry Fink be caught off guard by a market downturn!

Fink assembled some partners and brought his proposal to Blackstone co-founders Pete Peterson and Stephen Schwarzman, who liked the idea so much that they agreed to extend Fink a $5 million line of credit in exchange for a 50% share in the business. Originally named Blackstone Financial Management, Fink’s operation was turning a nice profit within months, had quadrupled the value of its assets in one year, and had grown the value of its portfolio under management to $17 billion by 1992.

Now firmly established as a viable business in its own right, Schwarzman and Fink began musing about spinning the firm off from Blackstone and taking it public. Schwarzman suggested giving the newly independent company a name with “black” in it as a nod to its Blackstone origins and Fink—taking roguish delight in the inevitable confusion and annoyance such a move would cause—proposed the name BlackRock.

STEPHEN SCHWARZMAN: So Larry and I were sitting down and he said, “what do you think about sort of having a family name? You know, with “black” in it. And I said that I think that’s a good idea. And I think he put on the table either BlackPebble or BlackRock. And so he said, “you know, if we do something like this, all of our people will kill us.”

Source: Squawk Box CNBC June 22, 2017 6:00am-9:01am EDT

The two evidently share the same sense of humour. “There is a little confusion [between the companies],” Schwarzman now concedes. “And every time that happens I get a real chuckle.”

But a shared taste for causing unnecessary confusion was not enough to keep the partners together. By 1994, the two had fallen out over compensation for new hires (or perhaps due to distress over Schwarzman’s ongoing divorce, depending who’s telling the story), and Schwarzman sold Blackstone’s holdings in BlackRock for a mere $240 million. (“That was certainly a heroic mistake,” Schwarzman admits.)

Having made the split with Blackstone and established BlackRock as its own entity, Fink was firmly on the path that would lead to his company becoming the globe-bestriding financial colossus that it is today.

In 1999, with its assets under management standing at $165 billion, BlackRock went public on the New York Stock Exchange at $14 per share. Expanding its services into analytics and risk management with its proprietary Aladdin enterprise investment system (more on which later), the firm acquired mutual fund company State Street Research & Management in 2004, merged with Merrill Lynch Investment Managers (MLIM) in 2006, and bought Seattle-based Quellos Group’s fund-of-hedge-funds business in 2007, bringing the total value of assets under BlackRock management to over $1 trillion.

But it was the Global Financial Crisis of 2007—2008 that catapulted BlackRock to its current position of financial dominance. Just ask Heike Buchter, the German correspondent who literally wrote the book on BlackRock. “Prior to the financial crisis I was not even familiar with the name. But in the years after the Lehman [Brothers] collapse [in 2008], BlackRock appeared everywhere. Everywhere!” Buchter told German news outlet DW in 2015.

Even before the Bear Sterns fiasco materialized into the Lehman Brothers collapse and the full-on financial bloodbath of September 2008, Wall Street was collectively turning to BlackRock for help. AIG, Lehman Brothers, Fannie Mae, and Freddie Mac had all hired the firm to comb through their spiraling mess of credit obligations in the months before the meltdown. BlackRock was perceived to be the only firm that could sort through the dizzying math behind the complicated debt swaps and exotic financial instruments underlying the tottering financial system and many Wall Street kingpins had Fink on speed dial as panic began to grip the markets.

“I think of it like Ghostbusters: When you have a problem, who you gonna call? BlackRock!” UBS managing director Terrence Keely told CNN at the time.

And why wouldn’t they trust Fink to pick through the mess of the subprime mortgage meltdown? After all, he was the one who helped launch the whole toxic subprime mortgage industry in the first place.

Oh, did I forget to mention that? Remember the whole “losing his job because he lost $100 million for First Boston in 1986” thing? That came just three years after Fink had made billions for the bank’s customers by constructing his first Collateralized Mortgage Obligation (CMO) and almost single-handedly creating the subprime mortgage market that would fail so spectacularly in 2008.

LARRY FINK: I started at First Boston in 1976. [. . .] I was the first Freddie Mac Bond Trader [. . .] and so the mortgage Market was just in its infancy. [. . .] And then in 1982 we had the ability to put a PC on our trading desk. Before that you had no ability to put a computer on that trading desk. And it was very clear to me that if we could have computing power on the trading desk, we were going to have the ability to dissect cash flows of mortgages.

That led in 1983 to the first carving up of a mortgage into different tranches. And so we created the first CMO.

Source: Laurence Fink Talks investing and Blackrock Culture 2020

So, depending how you look at it, Fink was either the perfect guy to have in charge of sorting out the mess that his CMO monstrosity had created or the first fink who should have gone to jail for it. Guess which way the US government chose to see it?

Yes, you guessed right. They saw Fink as their saviour, of course.

Specifically, the US government turned to BlackRock for help, with beleaguered US Treasury Secretary Timothy Geithner personally consulting Larry Fink no less than 49 times over the course of the 18-month crisis. Lest there be any doubt who was calling the shots in that relationship, when Geithner was on the ropes and his position as Secretary of the Treasury was in jeopardy at the end of Obama’s first term, Fink’s name was on the short list of those who were being considered to replace him.

The Federal Reserve, too, put its faith in BlackRock, turning to the company for assistance in administering the 2008 bailouts. Ultimately, BlackRock ended up playing a role in the $30 billion financing of the sale of Bear Stearns to J.P. Morgan, the $180 billion bailout of AIG, and the $45 billion rescue of Citigroup.

When the dust finally settled on Wall Street after the Lehman Brothers collapse, there was little doubt who was sitting on top of the dust pile: BlackRock. The only question was how they would parley their growing wealth and financial clout into real-world political power.

For Fink, the answer was obvious: move from the petty crime of high finance into the criminal big leagues of government. Accordingly, throughout the last decade, he has spent his time building up BlackRock’s political influence until it has become (as even Bloomberg admits) the de facto “fourth branch of government.”

When BlackRock executives managed to get their hands on a confidential Federal Reserve PowerPoint presentation threatening to subject BlackRock to the same regulatory regime as the big banks, the Wall Street behemoth spent millions successfully lobbying the government to drop the proposal.

But lobbying the government is a roundabout way to get what you want. As any good financial guru will tell you, it’s far more cost-efficient to make sure that no troublesome regulations are imposed in the first place. Perhaps that’s why Fink has been collecting powerful politicians for years now, scooping them up as consultants, advisors and board members so that he can ensure BlackRock has a key agent at the heart of any important political event.

As William Engdahl details in his own exposé of BlackRock:

BlackRock founder and CEO Larry Fink is clearly interested in buying influence globally. He made former German CDU MP Fridrich Merz head of BlackRock Germany when it looked as if he might succeed Chancellor Merkel, and former British Chancellor of Exchequer George Osborne as “political consultant.” Fink named former Hillary Clinton Chief of Staff Cheryl Mills to the BlackRock board when it seemed certain Hillary would soon be in the White House.

He has named former central bankers to his board and gone on to secure lucrative contracts with their former institutions. Stanley Fischer, former head of the Bank of Israel and also later Vice Chairman of the Federal Reserve, is now Senior Adviser at BlackRock. Philipp Hildebrand, former Swiss National Bank president, is vice chairman at BlackRock, where he oversees the BlackRock Investment Institute. Jean Boivin, the former deputy governor of the Bank of Canada, is the global head of research at BlackRock’s investment institute.

And it doesn’t end there. When it came time for Biden’s handlers to appoint the director of the National Economic Council—responsible for the coordination of policymaking on both domestic and international economic issues—naturally they turned to Brian Deese, the former global head of sustainable investing at BlackRock Inc.

And the rest, as they say, is history.

. . . or, more accurately, is the present. Because when we peel back the layers of propaganda from the past three years, we find that the remarkable events of the scamdemic have absolutely nothing whatsoever to do with a virus. We are instead witnessing a changeover in the monetary and economic system that was conceived, proposed and then implemented by (you guessed it!) BlackRock.

Chapter 2: Going Direct

Historians of the future will no doubt note 2019 as the year that BlackRock began its takeover of the planet in earnest.

It was in January of that fateful year that Joe Biden crawled cap-in-hand to Larry Fink’s Wall Street office to seek the financial titan’s blessing for his presidential (s)election. (“I’m here to help,” Fink reportedly replied.)

Then, on August 22nd of 2019, Larry Fink joined such illustrious figures as Al “Climate Conman” Gore, Chrystia “Account Freezing” Freeland, Mark “GFANZ” Carney, and the man himself, Klaus “Bond Villain” Schwab, on the World Economic Forum’s Board of Trustees, an organization which, the WEF informs us, “serves as the guardian of the World Economic Forum’s mission and values.” (“But which values are those, precisely?” you might ask. “And what does Yo-Yo Ma have to do with it?”)

It was another event that took place on August 22, 2019, however, that captures our attention today. As it turns out, August 22nd was not only the date that Fink achieved his globalist knighthood on the WEF board, it was also the date that the financial coup d’état (later erroneously referred to as a “pandemic”) actually began.

In order to understand what happened that day, however, we need to take a moment to understand the structure of the US monetary system. You see (GREATLY oversimplifying things for ease of understanding), there are actually two types of money in the banking system: there is “bank money”—the money that you and I use to transact in the real economy—and there is “reserve money”—the money that banks keep on deposit at the Federal Reserve. These two types of money circulate in two separate monetary circuits, sometimes referred to as the retail circuit (bank money) and the wholesale circuit (reserve money).

In order to get a handle on what this actually means, I highly suggest you check out John Titus’ indispensable videos on the subject, notably “Mommy, Where Does Money Come From?” and “Wherefore Art Thou Reserves?” and “Larry and Carstens’ Excellent Pandemic,” where he explains the split circuit monetary system:

CLIP 11m06s – 11m28s HARD CUT TO 21m38s – 22m47s

But the point of the two-circuit system is that, historically speaking, the Federal Reserve was never able to “print money” in the sense that people usually understand that term. It is able to create reserve money, which banks can keep on deposit with the Fed to meet their capital requirements. The more reserves they have parked at the Fed, the more bank money they are allowed to conjure into existence and lend out into the real economy. The gap between Fed-created reserve money and bank-created bank money acts as a type of circuit breaker, and this is why the flood of reserve money that the Fed created in the wake of the global financial crisis of 2008 did not result in a spike in commercial bank deposits.

But all that changed three years ago. As Titus observes, by the time of the scamdemic bailouts of 2020, the amount of bank money sitting in deposit in commercial banks in the US—a figure which had never shown any correlation with the total amount of reserves held on deposit at the Fed—suddenly spiked in lockstep with the Fed’s climbing balance sheet.

Clearly, something had happened between the 2008 bailout and the 2020 bailout. Whereas the tidal wave of reserve money unleashed to capitalize the banks in the earlier bailout hadn’t found its way into the “real” economy, the 2020 bailout money had.

So, what happened? BlackRock happened, that’s what.

Specifically, on August 15, 2019, BlackRock published a report under the typically eye-wateringly boring title, “Dealing with the next downturn: From unconventional monetary policy to unprecedented policy coordination.” Although the paper did not catch the attention of the general public, it did generate some press in the financial media, and, much more to the point, generated interest from the gaggle of central bankers who descended on Jackson Hole, Wyoming, for the annual Jackson Hole Economic Symposium taking place on August 22, 2019—the exact same day that Fink was being appointed to the WEF’s board.

The theme of the 2019 symposium—which brings together central bankers, policymakers, economists and academics to discuss economic issues and policy options—was “Challenges for Monetary Policy,” and BlackRock’s paper, published a week in advance of the event, was carefully crafted to set the parameters of that discussion.

It’s no surprise that the report caught the attention of the central bankers. After all, BlackRock’s proposal came with a pedigree. Of the four co-authors of the report, three of them were former central bankers themselves: Philipp Hildebrand, the former president of the Swiss National Bank; Stanley Fischer, the former Federal Reserve vice chairman and former governor of the Bank of Israel; and Jean Boivin, the former deputy governor of the Bank of Canada.

But beyond the paper’s authorship, it was what “Dealing with the next downturn” actually proposed that was to have such earthshaking effects on the global monetary order.

The report starts by noting the dilemma that the central banksters found themselves in by 2019. After years of quantitative easing (QE) and ZIRP (zero interest rate policy) and even the once-unthinkable NIRP (negative interest rate policy), the banksters were running out of room to operate. As BlackRock notes:

The current policy space for global central banks is limited and will not be enough to respond to a significant, let alone a dramatic, downturn. Conventional and unconventional monetary policy works primarily through the stimulative impact of lower short-term and long-term interest rates. This channel is almost tapped out: One-third of the developed market government bond and investment grade universe now has negative yields, and global bond yields are closing in on their potential floor. Further support cannot rely on interest rates falling.

So, what was BlackRock’s answer to this conundrum? Why, a great reset, of course!

No, not Klaus Schwab’s Great Reset. A different type of “great reset.” The “Going Direct” reset.

An unprecedented response is needed when monetary policy is exhausted and fiscal policy alone is not enough. That response will likely involve “going direct”: Going direct means the central bank finding ways to get central bank money directly in the hands of public and private sector spenders. Going direct, which can be organised in a variety of different ways, works by: 1) bypassing the interest rate channel when this traditional central bank toolkit is exhausted, and; 2) enforcing policy coordination so that the fiscal expansion does not lead to an offsetting increase in interest rates.

The authors of BlackRock’s proposal go on to stress that they are not talking about simply dumping money into people’s bank accounts willy-nilly. As report co-author Phillip Hildebrand made sure to stress in his appearance on Bloomberg on the day of the paper’s release, this was not Bernanke’s “helicopter money” idea.

PHILIPP HILDEBRAND: Something that goes into the direction of essentially what we call go and direct which would be ways of putting money into pockets of consumers or corporates directly in order to spend so to go around the interest rate channel as opposed to traditional central banking where you really only uh always work through the interest rate channel so kind of like helicopter money do you have to be coordinated yeah i think what it means helicopter money is a sort of catchphrase from the famous paper that ben bernanke gave in in the early 2000s but the point is yes you have to go in a different way than working through the interest rate channel because interest rates are already so low

Source: Risk of a Recession in 2020 Is More Elevated, Says BlackRock’s Hildebrand

Nor was it—as report co-author Jean Boivin was keen to stress in his January 2020 appearance on BlackRock’s own podcast discussing the idea—a version of Modern Monetary Theory (MMT), with the government simply printing up bank money to spend directly into the economy.

No, this was to be a process where special purpose facilities—which they called “standing emergency fiscal facilities” (SEFFs)—would be created to inject bank money directly into the commercial accounts of various public or private sector entities. These SEFFs would be overseen by the central bankers themselves, thus crossing the streams of the two monetary circuits in a way that had never been done before.

Any additional measures to stimulate economic growth will have to go beyond the interest rate channel and “go direct” – when [sic] a central bank crediting private or public sector accounts directly with money. One way or another, this will mean subsidising spending – and such a measure would be fiscal rather than monetary by design. This can be done directly through fiscal policy or by expanding the monetary policy toolkit with an instrument that will be fiscal in nature, such as credit easing by way of buying equities. This implies that an effective stimulus would require coordination between monetary and fiscal policy – be it implicitly or explicitly. [Emphases added.]

Alright, let’s recap. On August 15, 2019, BlackRock came out with a proposal calling for central banks to adopt a completely unprecedented procedure for injecting money directly into the economy in the event of the next downturn. Then, on August 22, 2019, the central bankers of the world convened in Wyoming for their annual shindig to discuss these very ideas.

So? Did the central bankers listen to BlackRock? You bet they did!

Remember when we saw how commercial bank deposits began moving in sync with the Fed’s balance sheet for the first time ever? Well, let’s take another look at that, shall we?

It wasn’t the March 2020 bailouts where the correlation between the Fed balance sheet and commercial bank deposits—the tell-tale sign of a BlackRock-style “going direct” bailout—began. It was actually in September 2019—months before the scamdemic was a gleam in Bill Gates’ eye—when we started to see Federal Reserve monetary creation finding its way directly into the retail monetary circuit.

In other words, it was less than one month after BlackRock proposed this revolutionary new type of fiscal intervention that the central banks began implementing that very idea. The Going Direct Reset—better understood as a financial coup d’état—had begun.

To be sure, this going direct intervention was later offset by the Fed’s next scam for forcing more government debt on depositors, but that’s another story. The point is that the seal had been broken on the going direct bottle, and it wasn’t long before the central bankers had a perfect excuse for forcing that entire bottle down the public’s throat. What we were told was a “pandemic” was in fact, on the financial level, just an excuse for an absolutely unprecedented pumping of trillions of dollars from the Fed directly into the economy.

The story of precisely how the going direct reset was implemented during the 2020 bailouts is a fascinating one, and I would encourage you to dive down that rabbit hole, if you’re interested. But for today’s purposes, it’s sufficient to understand what the central bankers got out of the Going Direct Reset: the ability to take over fiscal policy and to begin engineering the economy of Main Street in a more . . . well, direct way.

But what did BlackRock get out of this, you ask? Well, when it came time to decide who to call in to manage the scamdemic bailout scam, guess who the Fed turned to? If you guessed BlackRock, then (sadly) you’re exactly right!

Yes, in March 2020 the Federal Reserve hired BlackRock to manage three separate bailout programs: its commercial mortgage-backed securities program, its purchases of newly issued corporate bonds and its purchases of existing investment-grade bonds and credit ETFs.

To be sure, this bailout bonanza wasn’t just another excuse for BlackRock to gain access to the government purse and distribute funds to businesses in its own portfolio, though it certainly was that.

And it wasn’t just another emergency where the chairman of the Federal Reserve had to put Larry Fink on speed dial—not simply to shower BlackRock with no-bid contracts but to manage his own portfolio—although it certainly was that, too.

It was also a convenient excuse for BlackRock to bail out one of its own most valuable assets: iShares, the collection of exchange traded funds (ETFs) that it acquired from Barclays for $13.5 billion in 2009 and that had ballooned to a $1.9 trillion juggernaut by 2020.

As Pam and Russ Martens—who have been on the BlackRock beat at their Wall Street On Parade blog for years now—detailed in their article on the subject, “BlackRock Is Bailing Out Its ETFs with Fed Money and Taxpayers Eating Losses“:

BlackRock is being allowed by the Fed to buy its own corporate bond ETFs as part of the Fed program to prop up the corporate bond market. According to a report in Institutional Investor on Monday, BlackRock, on behalf of the Fed, “bought $1.58 billion in investment-grade and high-yield ETFs from May 12 to May 19, with BlackRock’s iShares funds representing 48 percent of the $1.307 billion market value at the end of that period, ETFGI said in a May 30 report.”

No bid contracts and buying up your own products? What could possibly be wrong with that?

The numbers speak for themselves. After BlackRock was allowed to bail out its own ETF funds with the Fed’s newly minted going direct funny money, iShares surged yet again, surpassing $3 trillion in assets under management last year.

But it wasn’t just the Fed that was rolling out the red carpet for BlackRock to implement the very bailout plan that BlackRock created. Banksters from around the world were positively falling over themselves to get BlackRock to manage their market interventions.

In April 2020, the Bank of Canada announced that it was hiring (who else?) BlackRock’s Financial Markets Advisory (FMA) to help manage its own $10 billion corporate bond buying program. Then in May 2020, the Swedish central bank, the Riksbank, also hired BlackRock as an external consultant to conduct “an analysis of the Swedish corporate bonds market and an assessment of possible design options for a potential corporate bonds asset purchase programme.”

As we saw earlier, the Global Financial Crisis had put BlackRock on the map, establishing the firm’s dominance on the world stage and catapulting Larry Fink to the status of Wall Street royalty. With the 2020 Going Direct Reset, however, BlackRock had truly conquered the world. It was now dictating central bank interventions and then acting in every conceivable role and in direct violation of conflict-of-interest rules, acting as consultant and advisor, as manager, as buyer, as seller and as investor with both the Fed and the very banks, corporations, pension funds and other entities it was bailing out.

Yes, with the advent of the scamdemic, BlackRock had cemented its position as The Company That Owns The World.

But yet again we are left with the same nagging questions: what is BlackRock seeking to do with this power? What is it capable of doing? And what are the aims of Fink and his fellow travelers?

Let’s find out.

Chapter 3: Aladdin’s Genie and the Future of the World

As you now know, BlackRock started out life as “Blackstone Financial Management” in the offices of The Blackstone Group in 1988. By 1992, it was already so successful that founder Larry Fink and Blackstone CEO Stephen Schwarzman spun the company off as its own entity, christening it BlackRock in a deliberate attempt to sow confusion.

But it was in 1993 (or so the story goes) that arguably the most important of BlackRock’s market-controlling tools was forged. It was that year that Jody Kochansky, a fixed-income portfolio manager hired the year before, began to tire of his daily 6:30 AM task of comparing his entire portfolio to yesterday’s numbers.

The task, done by hand from paper printouts, was long and arduous. Kochansky had a better idea: “We said, let’s take this data, and rather than print it out, let’s sort it into a database, and have the computer compare the report today versus the report yesterday, across every position.”

It may seem obvious to us today, but in 1993 the idea of automating a task like this was a radical one. Nonetheless, it paid off. After seeing the utility of having an automated, daily, computer-generated report calculating the risk on every asset in a portfolio, Kochansky and his team hunkered down for a 72-hour code-writing exercise that resulted in Aladdin (short for “asset, liability, and debt and derivative investment network”), a proprietary investment analysis technology touted as “the operating system for BlackRock.”

Sold as a “central processing system for investment management,” the software is now the core of BlackRock Solutions, a BlackRock subsidiary that licenses Aladdin to corporate clients and institutional investors. Aladdin combines portfolio management and trading, compliance, operations and risk oversight in a single platform and is now used by over 200 institutions, including fund manager rivals Vanguard and State Street; half of the top ten insurers in the world; Big Tech giants like Microsoft, Apple and Alphabet; and numerous pension funds, including the world’s largest, the $1.5 trillion Japanese Government Pension Insurance Fund.

The numbers themselves tell the story of Aladdin.

It is used by 13,000 BlackRock employees and thousands of BlackRock customers.

It occupies three datacentres in the US, with BlackRock planning to open two more in Europe.

It runs thousands of Monte Carlo simulations—computational algorithms that model the probability of various outcomes in chaotic systems—every day on each one of the tens of millions of securities under its purview.

And, by February 2017, Aladdin was managing risk for $20 trillion worth of assets. That’s when BlackRock stopped reporting this figure, since—as the company told The Financial Times—”total assets do not reflect how clients use the system.” An anonymous source in the company had a different take: “[T]he figure is no longer disclosed because of the negative attention the enormous sums attracted.”

In this case, the phrase “enormous sums” almost fails to do justice to the truly mind-boggling wealth under the watchful eye of this computer system. As The Financial Times went on to report, the combination of the scores of new clients using Aladdin in recent years and the growth in the stock and bond markets in that time has meant that the total value of assets under the system’s management is much larger than the $20 trillion reported in 2017: “Today, $21.6tn sits on the platform from just a third of its 240 clients, according to public documents verified with the companies and first-hand accounts.”

For context, that figure—representing the assets of just one-third of BlackRock’s clientele—itself accounts for 10% of the value of all the stocks and bonds in the world.

But if the idea of this amount of the world’s assets being under the management of a single company’s proprietary computer software concerns you, BlackRock has a message for you: Relax! The official line is that Aladdin only calculates risk, it doesn’t tell asset managers what to buy or sell. Thus, even if there were a stray line of code or a wonky algorithm somewhere deep inside Aladdin’s programming getting its investment analysis catastrophically wrong, the final decision on any given investment would still come down to human judgment.

. . . Needless to say, that’s a lie. In 2017, BlackRock unveiled a project to replace underperforming human stockpickers with computer algorithms. Dubbed “Monarch,” the scheme saw billions of dollars of assets snatched from human control and given to an obscure arm of the BlackRock empire called Systematic Active Equities (SAE). BlackRock acquired SAE in the same 2009 deal that saw it snag iShares from Barclays Global Investor (BGI).

As we’ve already seen, the BGI deal was unbelievably lucrative for BlackRock, with iShares being purchased for $13.5 billion in 2009 and rising to a $1.9 trillion valuation in 2020. Testifying to BlackRock’s commitment to the machine-over-man Monarch project, Mark Wiseman, global head of active equities at BlackRock, told The Financial Times in 2018, “I firmly believe that, if we look back in five to 10 years from now, the thing that we most benefited from in the BGI acquisition is actually SAE.”

Even The New York Times was reporting at the time of the launch of the Monarch operation that Larry Fink had “cast his lot with the machines” and that BlackRock had “laid out an ambitious plan to consolidate a large number of actively managed mutual funds with peers that rely more on algorithms and models to pick stocks.”

“The democratization of information has made it much harder for active management,” Fink told The NY Times. “We have to change the ecosystem — that means relying more on big data, artificial intelligence, factors and models within quant and traditional investment strategies.”

Lest there be any doubt about BlackRock’s commitment to this anti-human agenda, the company doubled down in 2018 with the creation of AI Labs, which is “composed of researchers, data scientists, and engineers” and works to “develop methods to solve their hardest technical problems and advance the fields of finance and AI.”

The actual models that SAE uses to pick stocks is hidden behind walls of corporate secrecy, but we do know some details. We know, for instance, that SAE collects over 1,000 market signals on each stock under evaluation, including everything from the obvious statistics you would expect in any quantitative analysis of the equities markets—trading price, volume, price-earnings ratio, etc.—to the more exotic forms of data harvesting that are possible when complex learning algorithms are connected to the mind-boggling amounts of data now available on seemingly everyone and everything.

A Harvard MBA student catalogued some of these novel approaches to stock valuation undertaken by the SAE algorithms in a 2018 post on the subject.

One of the ways BlackRock is including machine learning in its investment process is by ‘signal combination’, in which a model mines data attempting to learn the relationships between stock returns and various quantitative data. For example, it would analyze web traffic through corporate’s websites as an indicator of future growth of the company or would look at geolocation data from smartphones to predict which retailers are more popular. In doing so, researchers must recalibrate and refine the model, to make sure it was adding value and not just rediscovering well known market behaviors already know [sic] by ‘fundamental’ fund managers.

Another important machine learning application came when it was combined with natural language processing. In this model, the technology learns in an adaptive way what are the words that can predict future performance of stocks. This model was used on analysis of broker reports and corporate filings, and the technology discovered that CEO’s remarks tend to be generally more positive, so then it started giving more importance to the comments of the CFO, or the Q&A portion of conference calls.

So, let’s recap. We know that BlackRock now manages well in excess of $21 trillion of assets with its Aladdin software, making a significant portion of the world’s wealth dependent on the calculations of an opaque, proprietary BlackRock “operating system.” And we know that Fink has “cast his lot in with the machines” and is increasingly devoted to finding ways to leverage so-called artificial intelligence, learning algorithms, and other state-of-the-art technologies to further remove humans from the investment loop.

But here’s the real question: what is BlackRock actually doing with its all-seeing eye of Aladdin and its SEA robo-stockpickers and its AI Labs? Where are Fink and the gang actually trying to take us with the latest and greatest in cutting-edge fintech wizardry?

Luckily, we don’t exactly need to scry the tea leaves to find our answer to that question. Larry Fink has been kind enough to write it down for us in black and white.

You see, every year since 2012, Fink has taken it upon himself as de facto ruler of the world’s wealth to pen an annual “letter to CEOs” laying out the next steps in his scheme for world domination.

. . . Errr, I mean, he writes the letter “as a fiduciary for our clients who entrust us to manage their assets – to highlight the themes that I believe are vital to driving durable long-term returns and to helping them reach their goals.”

Sometimes referred to as a “call to action” to corporate leaders, these letters from the man stewarding over a significant chunk of the world’s investable assets actually do change corporate behaviour. That this is so should be self-evident to anyone with two brain cells to rub together, which is precisely why it took a team of researchers months of painstaking study to publish a peer-reviewed paper concluding this blindingly obvious fact: “portfolio firms are responsive to BlackRock’s public engagement efforts.”

So, what is Larry Fink’s latest hobby horse, you ask? Why, the ESG scam, of course!

That’s right, Fink used his 2022 letter to harangue his captive audience of corporate chieftains about “The Power of Capitalism,” by which he means the power of capitalism to more perfectly control human behaviour in the name of “sustainability.”

Specifically:

It’s been two years since I wrote that climate risk is investment risk. And in that short period, we have seen a tectonic shift of capital. Sustainable investments have now reached $4 trillion. Actions and ambitions towards decarbonization have also increased. This is just the beginning – the tectonic shift towards sustainable investing is still accelerating. Whether it is capital being deployed into new ventures focused on energy innovation, or capital transferring from traditional indexes into more customized portfolios and products, we will see more money in motion.

Every company and every industry will be transformed by the transition to a net zero world. The question is, will you lead, or will you be led?

Oooh, oooh, I want to lead, Larry! Pick me, pick me! . . . but please, tell me how I can lead my company into this Brave New Net Zero World Order.

Stakeholder capitalism is all about delivering long-term, durable returns for shareholders. And transparency around your company’s planning for a net zero world is an important element of that. But it’s just one of many disclosures we and other investors ask companies to make. As stewards of our clients’ capital, we ask businesses to demonstrate how they’re going to deliver on their responsibility to shareholders, including through sound environmental, social, and governance practices and policies.

Yes, to the surprise of absolutely no one, Larry Fink has signed BlackRock on to the multi-trillion-dollar scam that is “environmental, social, and governance practices and policies,” better known as ESG. For those who don’t know about ESG yet, they might want to get up to speed on the topic with my presentation earlier this year on “ESG and the Big Oil Conspiracy.” Or they can read the summary of the ESG scam by Iain Davis in his article on the globalization of the commons (aka the financialization of nature through so-called “natural asset corporations”):

This will be achieved using Stakeholder Capitalism Metrics. Assets will be rated using environmental, social and governance (ESG) benchmarks for sustainable business performance. Any business requiring market finance, perhaps through issuing climate bonds, or maybe green bonds for European ventures, will need those bonds to have a healthy ESG rating.

A low ESG rating will deter investors, preventing a project or business venture from getting off the ground. A high ESG rating will see investors rush to put their money in projects that are backed by international agreements. In combination, financial initiatives like NACs and ESGs are converting SDGs into market regulations.

In other words, ESG is a set of phoney-baloney metrics that are being cooked up by globalist think tanks and would-be ruling councils (like the World Economic Forum) to serve as a type of social credit system for corporations. If corporations fail to toe the line when it comes to globalist policies of the moment—whether that’s committing to industry-destroying net zero (or even Absolute Zero) commitments or de-banking thought criminals or anything else that may be on the globalist checklist—their ESG rating will take a hit.

“So what?” you may ask. “What does an ESG rating have to do with the price of tea in China, and why would any CEO care?”

The “so what” here is that—as Fink signals in his latest letter—BlackRock will be putting ESG reporting and compliance in its basket of considerations when choosing which stocks and bonds to invest in and which ones to pass over.

And Fink is not alone. There are now 291 signatories to the Net Zero Asset Managers Initiative, an “international group of asset managers committed to supporting the goal of net zero greenhouse gas emissions by 2050 or sooner.” They include BlackRock, Vanguard, State Street and a slew of other companies collectively managing $66 trillion of assets.

In plain English, BlackRock and its fellow globalist investment firms are leveraging their power as asset managers to begin shaping the corporate world in their image and bending corporations to their will.

And, in case you were wondering, yes, this is tied into the AI agenda as well.

In 2020, BlackRock announced the launch of a new module to its automated Aladdin system: Aladdin Climate.

Aladdin Climate is the first software application to offer investors measures of both the physical risk of climate change and the transition risk to a low-carbon economy on portfolios with climate-adjusted security valuations and risk metrics. Using Aladdin Climate, investors can now analyze climate risk and opportunities at the security level and measure the impact of policy changes, technology, and energy supply on specific investments.

To get a sense of what a world directed by digital overlords at the behest of this ESG agenda might look like, we simply need turn to the ongoing conflict in Ukraine. As Fink wrote in his letter to shareholders earlier this year:

Finally, a less discussed aspect of the war is its potential impact on accelerating digital currencies. The war will prompt countries to re-evaluate their currency dependencies. Even before the war, several governments were looking to play a more active role in digital currencies and define the regulatory frameworks under which they operate. The US central bank, for example, recently launched a study to examine the potential implications of a US digital dollar. A global digital payment system, thoughtfully designed, can enhance the settlement of international transactions while reducing the risk of money laundering and corruption. Digital currencies can also help bring down costs of cross-border payments, for example when expatriate workers send earnings back to their families. As we see increasing interest from our clients, BlackRock is studying digital currencies, stablecoins and the underlying technologies to understand how they can help us serve our clients.

The future of the world according to BlackRock is now coming fully into view. It is a world in which unaccountable computer learning algorithms automatically direct investments of the world’s largest institutions into the coffers of those who play ball with the demands of Fink and his fellow travellers. It is a world in which transactions will be increasingly digital, with every transaction being data mined for the financial benefit of the algorithmic overlords at BlackRock. And it is a world in which corporations that refuse to go along with the agenda will be ESG de-ranked into oblivion and individuals who present resistance will have their CBDC wallets shut off.

The transition of BlackRock from a mere investment firm into a financial, political and technological colossus that has the power to direct the course of human civilization is almost complete.

JAMES O’KEEFE: Meet Serge Varlay, a recruiter at BlackRock.

SERGE VARLAY: Let me tell you, it’s not who the president is. It’s who’s controlling the wallet of the president.

UNDERCOVER REPORTER: And who’s that?

VARLAY: The hedge funds, BlackRock, the banks. These guys run the world.

Campaign financing. Yup, you can buy your candidates. Obviously, we have this system in place. First, there’s the senators. These guys are f***ing cheap. You got 10 grand? You can buy a senator. “I could give you 500k right now, no questions asked, Are you gonna do what needs to be done?”

REPORTER: Does like, everybody do that? Does BlackRock do that?

VARLAY: Everyone does that. It doesn’t matter who wins. They’re in my pocket at this point.

Source: BlackRock Recruiter Who ‘Decides People’s Fate’ Says ‘War is Good for Business’ Undercover Footage

Conclusion

As bleak as the exploration of this world-conquering juggernaut is, there is a ray of hope on the horizon: the public is at least finally becoming aware of the existence of BlackRock and its relative importance on the global financial stage. This is reflected in an increasing number of protests targeting BlackRock and its activities. For example:

NOW – BlackRock HQ in NYC stormed with pitchforks

Climate Activists March to BlackRock HQ for Occupy Park Ave Protests – NYC

Keen-eyed observers may note, however, that these protests are not against the BlackRock agenda I have laid out in this series. On the contrary. They are for that agenda. These protesters’ main gripe seems to be that Fink and BlackRock are engaged in greenwashing and that the mega-corporation is actually more interested in its bottom line than in saving Mother Earth.

Well, duh. Even BlackRock’s former Chief Investment Officer for Sustainable Investing wrote, after leaving the firm, an extensive, four-part whistleblowing exposé documenting how the “sustainable investing” push being touted by Fink is a scam from top to bottom.

My only gripe with this limited hangout critique of BlackRock is that it implies that Fink and his cohorts are merely interested in accumulating dollars. They’re not. They’re interested in turning their financial wealth into real-world power. Power they will wield in service of their own agenda and will cloak with a phoney green mantle because they believe—and not without reason—that that’s what the public wants.

Slightly closer to the point, you get nonprofit groups like Consumers’ Research “slamming” BlackRock for impoverishing the real economy for the benefit of itself and its clients. “You’d think a company that has made it their mission to enforce ESG (environmental, social and governance) standards on American businesses would apply those same standards to foreign investments, but BlackRock isn’t pushing its woke agenda on China or Russia,” Consumers’ Research Executive Director Will Hild explained earlier this year after the launch of an ad campaign targeting the investment giant.

But that critique, too, seems to miss the underlying point. Is Hild trying to say that if only Fink applied his economy-destroying standards equally across the board then he would be beyond reproach?

More hopefully, there are signs that the political class—always willing to jump out in front of a parade and pretend they’re leading it—are picking up on the growing public discontent with BlackRock and are beginning to cut ties with the firm.

In recent months, multiple US state governments have announced their intention to divest state funds from BlackRock, with 19 states’ attorneys general even signing a letter to Larry Fink in August calling him out on his agenda of social control:

BlackRock’s actions on a variety of governance objectives may violate multiple state laws. Mr. McCombe’s letter asserts compliance with our fiduciary laws because BlackRock has a private motivation that differs from its public commitments and statements. This is likely insufficient to satisfy state laws requiring a sole focus on financial return. Our states will not idly stand for our pensioners’ retirements to be sacrificed for BlackRock’s climate agenda. The time has come for BlackRock to come clean on whether it actually values our states’ most valuable stakeholders, our current and future retirees.

As part of this divestment push, the Louisiana state treasurer announced in October that the state was withdrawing $794 million in state funds from BlackRock, South Carolina’s state treasurer announced plans to divest $200 million from the company’s control by the end of the year, and Arkansas has already taken $125 million out of money market accounts under BlackRock’s management.

As I noted in my appearance on The Hrvoje Morić Show, regardless of the real motivations of these state governments, the fact that they feel compelled to take action against BlackRock is itself a hopeful sign. It means that the political class understands that an increasing portion of the public is aware of the BlackRock/ESG/corporate governance agenda and is opposed to it.

Once again, we arrive at the bottom line: the only thing that truly matters is public awareness of the issues involved in the rise of a financial (and political and technological) giant like BlackRock, and it is only general public opinion that can move the needle when it comes to removing the wealth (and thus the power) from a behemoth like the one that Fink has created.

But before we wrap up here, there’s one last point to be made.

You might remember that we opened this exploration by highlighting BlackRock’s position as one of the top institutional shareholders in Walmart:

And in Coca-Cola:

And in Moderna:

And in Exxon:

And in Amazon:

. . . and in seemingly every other company of significance on the global stage. Now, the fact checkers will tell you that this doesn’t actually matter because it’s the shareholders who actually own the stock, not BlackRock itself. But that raises a further question: who owns BlackRock?

Oh, of course.

Now, I realize this is a lot of information to take in at once. Go ahead and re-read this series once or twice. Follow some of the many links contained herein to better familiarize yourself with the material. Share these reports with others.

But if, after reading all of this you find yourself looking back over these “Top Institutional Holders” lists and saying: “Hey wait! Who’s The Vanguard Group?” . . .

. . . Well then, I’d say you’re starting to get it! Good job!

So who is the Vanguard Group? It’s an excellent question, and one that I’ll be answering in the next edition of The Corbett Report Subscriber newsletter! I hope you’re there for the answer!

***

NOTE: This documentary originally ran as a three-part series in The Corbett Report Subscriber Newsletter in November 2022. To stay up to date on the latest info, please become a Corbett Report member.

Connect with James Corbett — website — substack

Cover image based on creative commons work of davevs & LN_Photoart

Etienne de la Boetie² on the Federal Reserve and Mass Control

by Jeremy Nell, Jerm Warfare
September 18, 2023

The Federal Reserve has a significant grip on the US economy, its political system and, by extension, the rest of the world.

Created by a banking cartel, it’s designed to serve the interests of the banking industry at the expense of the general population. A staggering 90% of the US money supply is essentially created out of thin air by private banks. These banks then loan this money and collect interest, essentially making profits from nothing. (This is known as fractional reserve banking.)

The US government borrows from these central banks, adding to the public debt, which is then shouldered by the citizens.

Plus, the government has no real control over the Federal Reserve, despite the appearance of regulation. The Federal Reserve Board and the heads of the Federal Reserve Banks are the ones who determine the economic policy of the US. These board members have strong ties to big banking and investment companies (such as Vanguard and BlackRock).

The Federal Reserve is a corrupt institution that facilitates war and mass slavery through inflation and theft.

The article claims that this system essentially robs society by inflating prices and reducing the purchasing power of existing dollars. It also discusses how a small number of companies, primarily banks and financial institutions, control a significant portion of global wealth. The article suggests that the death of the dollar could be imminent due to the exposure of these systems. It is obviously unfair that banks are given the monopoly privilege of creating money, which steals the purchasing power from everyone else in society.

Moreover, there are around 147 firms, primarily banks and financial institutions, that control about 40% of global wealth. (Vanguard and BlackRock alone control around $16.5 trillion.)

The ability to create money out of thin air has enabled banks to buy, consolidate, and weaponise the media and other industries,. This has led to a form of monopoly where a small number of companies control significant sectors.

Etienne de la Boetie² is the founder of the Art of Liberty Foundation and the author of Government – The Biggest Scam in History.

Connect with Jerm Warfare

Connect with Art of Liberty Foundation

Cover image credit: Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System

The Government Slaughter in Lahaina: Eerily Similar to NYC on September 11, 2001

The Government Slaughter in Lahaina: Eerily Similar to What Happened in New York on September 11, 2001

“Cars were melted where no evidence of a fire was even present, and the scene looked eerily similar, almost exact, as to what happened in New York on September 11, 2001. This is not coincidental, it is apparent, and telling of a pre-planned slaughter and mass destruction.”

The Government Slaughter in Lahaina: Maui Revisited!

by Gary D. Barnett
September 11, 2023

“Whoever lays his hand on me to govern me is a usurper and tyrant, and I declare him my enemy.”

~ Pierre-Joseph Proudhon

We are in the midst of a heinous crime in what is falsely referred to as the ‘American’ State of Hawaii, so vile and evil, that it should sicken all who have any remote possibility of exhibiting mental acquaintance with truth, compassion, or empathy.

The State’s attack on the people of Maui was in my studied opinion, premeditated, brutal, murderous beyond explanation, and targeted to achieve a preconceived agenda which was the total destruction of Lahaina by extreme property devastation and mass death of much of the local population. This was necessary in the mind of the State in order to steal the land and rebuild based on the World Economic Forum and U.N. plan for captured cities, as evidenced by the evil piece of garbage governor, Josh Green, who immediately claimed he wanted to acquire by theft the purposely destroyed land and property for the State, while smoldering embers still burned, and bodies had not been found.

Today, I went to the ten top mainstream news sites searching all news stories, and did not find a single story about the Lahaina fires, except one showing the slimy Biden sleeping while at a meeting with Maui victims; this after offering these victims $700 per family after they had lost everything, including many of their family members.

In other words, this story has been purposely scrubbed from view, not different than what happened after the intentional chemical fire devastated East Palestine, Ohio, and left that town and many others with deadly pollutants.

A tall black fence was actually built around the town of Lahaina, at taxpayer cost of course, and a no fly zone order was given to hide the gruesome murder scene from any view and scrutiny.

What is insanely troubling about the reporting concerning this horrific crime in Maui by all mainstream outlets, and even many alternative sites, is that most continue to call this a ‘wild fire,’ while the evidence of such nonsense does not exist. The anomalies and reactions to this so-called ‘natural’ event, are staggering beyond recognition, and reek of the stench of total corruption at the highest levels.

This was a land grab of epoch proportion, but it was much worse than that, as high death counts were pursued by the State thugs, as they locked the residents of Lahaina inside the rings of deadly fire likely caused by directed energy and microwave attacks; creating fires that were strategically targeted, with heat that was in some cases double that of any wild fire.

This was clearly evident given the melting of aluminum and steel, and also the melting of automobile windshields which requires heat at or above 2,500 degrees. Cars were melted where no evidence of a fire was even present, and the scene looked eerily similar, almost exact, as to what happened in New York on September 11, 2001.

This is not coincidental, it is apparent, and telling of a pre-planned slaughter and mass destruction.

The fires in Maui that were said to have been caused ‘naturally,’ a brazen lie, were almost identical to the fires in Paradise, California as well; fires that were targeted, burning homes to white ash without burning trees or plastic, and in areas desired by the State criminals for rebuilding so-called “smart cities.”

In Lahaina, homes of the very rich were magically spared, as were certain state buildings, grand hotels, and other areas of State favor.

But the homes and families of the local residents were attacked head on, with absolutely no regard for the lives or property of these innocent people.

The ‘crime’ supposedly committed, as seen by the State, was not bowing down, and giving up their homes and lives voluntarily, so a direct false flag action of slaughter and murder was created to complete the State’s agenda of land theft. To hell with the people and their property was the private battle cry of these State politicians and their murderous enforcers called police.

No sirens were turned on even though there were 80 active sirens on Maui.

All water was turned off so fires could not be fought.

Wi-fi was turned off, as was most all electric power.

Roads out were closed, and police roadblocks were manned to forcibly keep all the residents inside the fire perimeter, causing purposeful mass death.

Schools were shut down, so that children were home alone when these intentional fires raged through Lahaina, and many burned to death without help from any State service. The real numbers of deaths are still being hidden as far as I can tell.

In addition, before and after the fire, speculators were attempting to buy these properties, and while bodies were still unfound, the government announced its intentions to buy up this land.

None of these are coincidences, but the State and its complicit media would have you believe that all of these, and many, many, more impossibilities are all coincidental. How could anyone with two brain cells to rub together, buy into the propagandized narratives being presented by the evil State?

I fully realize, especially considering the nearly complete lack of any ability to think critically by the masses, that what I am presenting here will be ignored by a very large swath of the population.

The long-term dumbing down of individuals, and the now digitally-manipulated population, has embraced indifference to such an extent, as to have escaped all reality. In fact, common sense, logic, and reason appear to be nearly non-existent generally speaking. It is much easier for the collective herd to believe the State narratives than to do the work necessary to ferret out fact and truth.

Unfortunately, the ruling class understands this weak and apathetic trait that seems to have captured the very large percentage of dead men walking among us.

How much more obvious corruption, lies, and murder at the hands of the State will have to take place before any majority comes to terms with the reality that this world is ending in favor of mass slavery and depopulation? Will the flock ever fight back?

The forced annexation of Hawaii, the staged Pearl Harbor attack, the world wars, Operation Northwoods, MK Ultra, the Cuban missile crisis, the JFK assassination, Operation Gladio, U.S. aggressive invasion after invasion, Desert Storm, 9/11, the Patriot Act, the War of Terror, the fake ‘covid pandemic,’ bogus ‘climate change, intentional chemical spills, and weather geo-engineering; these just a few of the major false flag events, and government terror operations that have taken place.

Now there are deliberately set fires in Canada, all over the U.S., Hawaii, Australia, Turkey, Greece, China, and many other areas, and the sheep continue to hide their proverbial heads in the sand.

Everything happening is planned, and being done intentionally in order to achieve a particular agenda. This has been outlined, discussed openly, warned about, written about in policy journals at the WEF, WHO, U.N., and most everywhere else I might add. The big picture has been discussed for decades, and the agenda being sought is a one-world governing order, where the ‘elite’ rule all, and the rest of us are slaves of the State.

This agenda is as clear as day, so why cannot the lowly collective herd see that the way to achieve this evil goal is for the State to destroy the current system in favor of a system that will allow the control of everyone?

Each planned event, whether fire, weather, war, geo-engineering, bio-weapon production and use, fake ‘viruses,’ and every so-called emergency, are staged only to create fear and panic through economic devastation, property theft, (land grabs) monetary and transaction digitization, mass surveillance, and total censorship.

Will the blind ever see, will the deaf ever hear, will the dumb ever speak, or will the bulk of this dependent and lazy population, simply sit back locked inside their cell phones and ‘social media’ absurdity, waiting for the end of times?

No one should forget or ignore what happened, and is happening in Maui. Your neighborhood could be next, and what chance will you have given the advanced weapon systems being used against us by the military industrial complex, and its controllers?

The government controls nothing, as all politicians and their enforcers are fully controlled themselves, and act on orders from the real ruling class. Denounce them, abandon them and eliminate them, so that the real rulers will have no cover!

“I have certain rules I live by. My first rule: I don’t believe anything the government tells me. Nothing. Zero.”

~ George Carlin

Best explanation by 48 year arborist concerning Lahaina, Maui fires

Maui Fire video and comments

Lahaina land grab

Lahaina, Maui and California fire anomalies

Arson, DEW, HAARP, fake ‘climate change’ and fires

The U.S. is the false flag empire

Hawaii governor declares ’emergency’ three weeks before Maui fire

Connect with Gary D. Barnett

Cover image credit: United States Department of Homeland Security

Sweden: New Dystopian DIGITAL ID

Now people need a phone with a camera and NFC to register their new digital ID

by Peter Imanuelsen, The Freedom Corner
September 10, 2023

Do you remember when people were called “conspiracy theorists” for warning about the covid passports? Turns out that those who warned about them were correct!

The same people have now been warning for quite some time about digital ID, and with good reason.

In Scandinavia, we have already had digital ID for a long time. People need it to be able to do everyday tasks like online banking, buying things online and much more.

Now, the digital ID system in Sweden called “BankID” is getting a few changes regarding security.

When setting up your digital ID, people can be asked to have passport or national ID card available.

The way it works is that you have to have a smartphone with a camera and NFC contactless reader built in.

When setting up the new digital ID, you simply take a picture of the photo on your passport or ID card, then you “touch” the phone against the passport or ID to scan the contactless NFC chip – And boom you have verified your digital ID.

Yes, Swedish passports have a contactless NFC chip built into them. So when you use your phone to scan your passport it confirms your identity.

You can watch the video on how Swedish people have to set up their digital ID in this video from Swedbank.

Have you ever wondered what digital ID really is and the real plan behind this agenda?

It is all about control. Imagine a world where we have central bank digital currencies. Everyone needs a digital ID to access their digital wallet.

Imagine how easy it is for the state to control everything people do and buy.

In fact, there is already a Swedish company that has technology to track your purchases and calculate your C02 emissions. Many banks are already using this technology to inform people of their carbon emissions based on what they buy. In other words, tracking your purchases.

If you haven’t already, make sure to read my in-depth article on the TRUTH about the digital ID.

The truth about digital ID

But it gets worse!

In Sweden, thousands of people have already implanted microchips in their hands to use for contactless payments. All you have to do is hold your hand over the card reader and it gets scanned.

During covid, some people even used their implanted microchips for their covid passports, meaning they just scanned their hands to show up their “green” covid passport status.

This is scary stuff.

You can read my article on this here:

People are now paying with microchips in their hand.

Connect with Peter Imanuelsen

Cover image credit: PixxlTeufel

There Is no Limit to State Power, and There Never Has Been!

by Gary D. Barnett
September 8, 2023

“Winston Smith: Does Big Brother exist?
O’Brien: Of course he exists.
Winston Smith: Does he exist like you or me?
O’Brien: You do not exist.”

~ George Orwell, 1984

From the time of birth, Americans have been inundated (indoctrinated — brainwashed) to believe that they live in a free country, and that the reason for this rests on the notion that the United States was ‘founded’ on the principle of a ‘limited government,’ where the State is greatly restricted in its power.

Fiction at this level resides only in the most extreme fantasy, and can only be propagated successfully if the entire population is put into a type of mystical trance where critical thinking is completely absent.

This did not occur recently, it has always been the case in every government on earth since the beginning of what is falsely referred to as ‘civilization.’

I should preface my remarks for those who still cling to the ridiculous idea that government can be benevolent, restricted, limited, and that any government document called a constitution, has anything whatsoever to do with rights or freedom. It absolutely does not.

The State as a political structure is based on fear, force, terror, and power gain, and nothing else.

The idea of freedom is based solely on the premise that no man has any right to rule over any other. All government is in direct contradiction of this premise, and therefore it is the antithesis of liberty, not its creator or protector.

Every aspect of the falsely claimed ‘founding,’ was and is a lie in my estimation. This statement will anger most, and what that exposes, is that people’s desires (emotions) outweigh reason and logic, and cause total confusion concerning what are the actual rights of man.

The natural rights of man are inherent; they do not come from the sky or heavens, nor any government, as each and every one of us as an unique individual, is born with a right to live, a right to life. All other rights spring from this clear assumption, regardless of those who believe otherwise, or who claim that man has no rights at all.

Because each individual has a right to his life, it stands to reason that he has every right to defend his life. In addition, he has every right to sustain his life, which indicates that he has a right to work, to prosper, to supply his every need, which leads to his right to property, and all the fruits of his labor. Every individual has a right to do whatever is necessary in order to sustain, protect, and continue his life, so long as he does not aggress or infringe on the same rights due all other individuals.

This demands the understanding that there is no such thing as a collective right, which is a government scam used to fool the herd in order to control what are falsely referred to as ‘societies.’ Since every man is an unique individual, there are only groups of individuals, not collective ‘societies.’ This leads to the reality that no one has any right to take the property of one to benefit another or any State.

Therefore, there is no right to be fed, housed, or supported, no right to medical or health care, no right for State retirement, no right to basic income, no right to universal defense, no right to universal infrastructure, no right to any ‘welfare’ by the State, and on and on.

There are no ‘social’ rights whatsoever, there are no paranormal rights; for if these unfounded mystical rights were to exist, the individual would cease to exist, and no right for any man could then exist. In fact, if any so-called ‘social’ rights exist, it would demand the slavery of all in order to sustain by force and violence the lives of those unwilling to be responsible for themselves. This would negate every right of every man.

This is why any constitution created and drafted by government is absolutely worthless if the actual rights of man are considered. In fact, the very idea of constitutions issued by the State is ludicrous, and based on deception.

The single concept alone, that government (The State) can give, define, or protect rights, is asinine, for if the State could do so, it could just as easily take all rights away at its whim, which it has done, regardless of the most idiotic notion that government could ever define human rights in the first place. They are natural, and therefore cannot be questioned. This is little understood by this largely dumbed down and indoctrinated population.

The ruling class, and the State, and all governments, have but one agenda, and that is to rule. In order to rule, the State must seek total power, therefore it will never limit itself, or restrict its own ability to garner control over its ‘claimed’ territory, or that of other states and nations.

Pieces of parchment cannot limit government, it can only enhance its ability to fool the people into believing a lie, and therefore letting down their guard in the face of extreme tyranny.

The permanent goal of all States, is to gain more power, so eliminating all limits and restrictions on its powers is the ultimate goal. This has always been, and always will be, so if real freedom is sought for the individual, the State can never be allowed to have any power over any individual.

This is why all states in existence are structured as single entities, seen to be populated only by collective hordes, all overseen by a political monopoly. This allows for all to be considered as single units, instead of areas populated by individuals. This is only a recipe for mass control.

Towns, cities, counties, states, and nations, are a plot to collectivize all individuals, so that the individual is made impotent, and destroyed in favor of the group. This is simply a control mechanism meant to avoid the power of the individual; this because to accept the individual, is to abandon all government.

This short essay is meant to clarify the basic tenets of real freedom of the individual, as opposed to the evil power of the State. It is based upon the ideas of common sense, logic, reason ethics, morality, and reality. The State has no limits, and could not survive if that were not the case. Since all government is based on force and compliance, it is impossible for the existence of any State to coexist with the individual, his natural rights, and freedom.

Quotes by Ayn Rand:

“A government is the most dangerous threat to man’s rights: it holds a legal monopoly on the use of physical force against legally disarmed victims.”

“The smallest minority on earth is the individual. those who deny individual rights cannot claim to be defenders of minorities.”

“Freedom (n.): To ask nothing. To expect nothing. To depend on nothing.”

Connect with Gary D. Barnett

Cover image credit: Alexandra_Koch

Did BlackRock, Vanguard, or StateStreet Have Anything to Do With the Hawaii Fires?

by Nutritruth

Did BlackRock, Vanguard, or StateStreet have anything to do with the Hawaii fires?

Jeff Bezos, Oprah Winfrey, Jimmy Buffett and Nvidia cofounder Jensen Huang are among the billionaires with land or homes on Hawaii’s second-largest island.

Lots of money will be dedicated towards “rebuilding”.

Did they just reset an area for a Smart City?

Jeff Bezos alone established a $100 million Maui Fund to “help Maui get back on its feet now and over the coming years.”

The top institutional investors of Amazon are BlackRock & Vanguard…

So very nice of them… :/

Connect with NutriTruth

Cover image credit: United States National Guard

Expert Forensic Arborist Explains That Unburned Trees Are Clear Evidence Lahaina Was Hit by Directed Energy Weapons

Truth Comes to Light editor’s note: The video shared within Edward Henrie’s excellent article is one of the most comprehensive on the Lahaina situation thus far. You will find it mirrored at Odysee. Please share it widely.

The conversation in the video covers all the evidence available thus far and also shares some details about Hawaii as an occupied territory and unwilling participant in the United States Corporation.

See Stand Together Hawaii for additional information and to join others in taking action. For additional information on contributing to food and support efforts see Hungry Heroes Hawaii.

Expert Forensic Arborist Explains That Unburned Trees Are Clear Evidence Lahaina Was Hit by Directed Energy Weapons

by Edward Hendrie, Great Mountain Publishing
September 3, 2023

Robert Brame is a forensic arborist with more than 38 years of experience. In the video below, he takes us through the evidence indicating that the Lahaina immolation was not a natural fire. He opines that it was some kind of directed energy weapon using microwaves. Most notably, he points out that the Lahaina trees appear stressed and probably dead or dying, but the branches and leaves did not burn. He points out that the trees have had the moisture sucked out of them, much like a microwave oven does to a piece of bread.

He makes note of the fact that the windows in the cars are all melted. That would be impossible for a wildfire, which burns at 1,447 degrees Fahrenheit. It would take a temperature of at least 2,500 degrees Fahrenheit to melt glass. Many of the cars are nowhere near any source of fuel that could burn at that temperature. Even gasoline would not burn at that temperature. A hydrocarbon fire in the atmosphere burns at a maximum temperature of 1,517°F; 825°C.

Brame has personally investigated more than one hundred alleged wildfires. He opines from his on-the-scene observations that 35 wildfires he investigated were caused by directed energy weapons, with the primary electromagnetic energy being in the microwave frequency. He offers that opinion due to the nature of the damage, where metals are destroyed, and wood and plastics are not burned unless they are in close proximity to a dense metal.

Directed energy weapons involve a range of focused energy technologies, including, but not limited to, lasers, microwaves, sound beams, and particle beams. The U.S. Air Force Research Laboratory (AFLR) Directed Energy Directorate explains:

The two classes of DE [directed energy] weapons, high-energy lasers and high-powered microwave systems, give the Air Force the capability to engage targets at substantial ranges with precision and reduced collateral damage. In high-energy laser systems, rather than using a kinetic weapon as a bullet or a bomb, a laser beam creates an effect on [a] target. High-powered microwave systems transmit short, extremely high power burst[s] of energy to create a wide range of effects on a target, often electronics.

Directed energy weapons were deployed to destroy the World Trade Center Towers on 9/11. I explain their use in my book, 9/11-Enemies Foreign and Domestic. Read Dr. Judy Wood’s analysis of the evidence proving that directed energy weapons were used.

The government is nothing but force. We must look at money powers behind the scenes who really control the force of government. The 9/11 attack using directed energy was the first salvo in the new war for world dominion. The powerful Zionists who control the U.S. Government are ramping up their attack on the U.S. through directed energy. They are doing so under the cover story of wildfires caused by the mythical “climate change.”

The most notable fact is that the palm trees survived the fires. Palm trees are particularly susceptible to ignition. They are like dried grass. A small flame will cause a dried frong to ignite in seconds. Yet we find unburned palms trees that survived an alleged wildfire that immolated houses and cars. The trees are wilted because the microwave directed energy weapon sucked the moisture out of the trees, but they did not burn. Much like how moisture is cooked out of bread in a microwave oven. That is clear evidence that the immolation of Lahaina was from directed energy weapons.

Lahaina Is Within 40 Miles of a U.S. Government Directed Energy Facility on Maui

The Dog That Didn’t Bark

Lahaina Was Destroyed by a Directed Energy Weapon

Police Blocked Roads To Prevent Residents From Fleeing the Immolation of Lahaina

Telltale Evidence That Lahaina Was Destroyed By Directed Energy Weapons

More Evidence That Directed Energy Weapons Were Used to Immolate Lahaina

Revisiting Paradise California – Where Are the Chimneys?

The Lahaina Fire Patsy Is Not Going Quietly

Connect with Great Mountain Publishing

Cover image credit: US National Guard

How Big Business Uses Big Government to Rape You (And Why You Love It)

by James Corbett, The Corbett Report
September 2, 2023

Watch on Archive / BitChute / Odysee / Rokfin / Rumble

FROM 2016: You’ve probably heard all about Upton Sinclair’s 1906 expose of the turn-of-the-century American meatpacking industry and the Chicago stockyards…but everything you’ve heard about it is wrong. The book wasn’t an expose of the meatpackers, the legislation it inspired served to help the industry it sought to punish, and Sinclair himself hated the end result of his book, which aimed for the heart and hit the stomach by accident.

Join us for this month’s edition of the Film, Literature and the New World Order as we learn not to trust what’s on the label of mainline history.

FLASHBACK SHOW NOTES:

Big Government Has Come for This Small-Town Amish Farmer. Here’s How He’s Fighting Back.

Episode 227 – The Regulation Trap

Interview 1382 – The Social Media Regulation Psyop

Upton Sinclair’s “The Jungle” – FLNWO #35

EPISODE SHOW NOTES:

The Jungle (Free Audiobook)

Upton Sinclair – Spartacus Schoolnet

History Brief: Teddy’s Food and Drug Regulation

Horse Meat, Hanford Leak, Obama’s Oscar

Genetic Fallacy: How Monsanto Silences Scientific Dissent

Why Government Regulation is a Lie (and what you can do about it)

Excuse Me, Professor: Challenging the Myths of Progressivism

Meat Packers Rape You – And You Love It

Meat Packing – Mises Wiki

How the Wholesome Meat Act Gives Us Less Wholesome Meat

Connect with The Corbett Report

Cover image credit: Angela_Yuriko_Smith

The Maui ‘Build Back Better’ Script

by Rosanne Lindsay, Nature of Healing
August 31, 2023

Can the government take control of the land after a natural disaster and then deem it off limits? Is government capable of creating the “natural” disaster?

Land Grab?

“I’m already thinking about ways for the state to acquire that land so that we can put it into Workforce Housing and to put it back into the families or to make it open spaces in perpetuity as a memorial.”

– Gov. Josh Green interview with Michael Henessey, Snowflake news, Green Wants State to Own Lahaina, August 15, 2023, [13:00 minute mark].

The new governor of Hawaii, Josh Green M.D., a licensed medical doctor, resident of Hawaii, but not a Hawaiian, became governor in December of 2022 and took office in January of 2023. In similar fashion, Maui also elected a new mayor, Richard Bissen, at the same time. But where was the mayor during the disaster? And why is he now facing calls to resign?

“I’m not sure who was in charge.”

– Maui Mayor Richard Bissen

Was the unspeakable Maui disaster the result of incompetence or was it orchestrated by design?

According to an article in the California Globe, Josh Green has been a puppet for the United Nations and a spokesperson for the Build Back Better (bbb) 2030 agenda, which seeks to create “Stack-N-Pack” housing in Smart™ Cities all over the world by 2030.

According to the July 13, 2020 World Economic Forum Playbook, the “bbb” agenda includes: “destruction,” “green recover,” “reset and reinvent,” disasters,” based on “Climate Change.”

In Hawaii, the BBB created the Build Beyond Barriers Working Group empowered to approve and streamline housing construction projects, scheduled for a 5-year build-out based on the U.N. Sustainable Cities and human Settlements. In other words, no more single family homes.

“The 2030 Agenda Sustainable Development Goal 11, “make cities and human settlements inclusive, safe, resilient and sustainable.”

– Build Beyond Barriers Working Group (BBBWG), August 11, 2023,Office of the Governor

The UN document details “Sustainable Human Settlements” under 6) promoting human settlements planning and management in disaster-prone areas.”

Green is not the only politician promoting the U.N.’s Build Back Better Agenda, the largest effort to “combat climate change.” On October, 28, 2021, President Biden announced the Build Back Better Framework for the U.S.

The buildup to the Maui fires began when Gov. Green issued an emergency housing proclamation three weeks prior. Along with Hawaii’s robust emergency siren warning system, everything should have been ready to flush out any wayward spark. So why did the warning sirens sit silent during the deadly fires?

Agenda Timeline to Fires

Thanks to Peggy Hall for her “Peggy-isms” and her historical reporting featured in her “Maui Fires” Playlist.

One month before the Maui fires …(July 12, 2023), Governor Green issued a press release highlighting a commitment to the United Nations (U.N.) 17 Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) under the narrative of uniformity.

“We cannot put off changing things any longer. We refuse to stand idle when 2030 looms closer and closer… We only have one Island Earth, let us do our best to take care of it and each other. We are one species, with one planet, one chance.”

– Gov. Josh Green, July 12, 2023

Three weeks before the Maui fires… (July 18 2023), Governor Green issued a controversial Emergency Housing Proclamation titled, Emergency Proclamation relating to Housing” related to natural disasters or Covid. The proclamation not only suspends the laws of Hawaii to gives the Governor broad powers over any emergency, but also removes barriers to building new homes.

The laws suspended include provisions related to historic preservation, county zoning and the state Land Use Commission, which functions as a state-level zoning authority. The order also suspends Hawaii’s environmental review law, which requires in-depth environmental impact statements for projects determined to have a significant impact on natural and cultural resources.

The fast-tracked environmental review process will largely be conducted by the working group and housing officer. While Green promised the group and officer will work transparently, the working group will not be subject to Hawaii’s Sunshine Law, which among things requires decision-making agencies to hold their meetings in public.

One week before the fires… Governor Green spoke at the UN Sustainability Forum:

“We have done some things. One is The Aloha Plus Challenge, which is a data-driven approach… to track the SDGs to make sure that we embed them in all of our policies.”

– Governor Josh Green speaks at Sustainability Forum, United Nations, Source: Green Wants State to Own Lahaina, August 15, ,2023 [minute mark 19:00].

After the fires… Gov. Green took the spotlight several times. Did he make any contradictory statements?

“This is going to be a multi-year recovery. It’s going to take essentially years to rebuild Lahaina which was destroyed. But we will build it back better……We will find a way to make sure there is more housing…”

Source: KTIV interview August 11, 2023, 5:11 minute mark

“It was so hot that even metal contorted.”

– Gov. Josh Green, August 14, 2023 CBS Morning News

“When you see mostly fatalities and very few injuries, that tells you it was a natural disaster.”

– In response to “You would still call this a natural disaster and not man-made? Gov. Josh Green, August 14, 2023 CBS Morning News

“I would call this a natural disaster because the winds were moving any fire between 60 and 80 miles per hour, that’s a mile a minute.”

– Gov. Josh Green, August 14, 2023 CBS Morning News

“If you put a fire truck in the way of the flames that were coming through at a thousand miles per hour, the fire truck would have been incinerated in addition to the people.”

– Gov. Josh Green, August 14, 2023 CBS Morning News

*I’m already thinking about ways for the state to acquire that land so that we can put it into Workforce Housing and to put it back into the families or to make it open spaces in perpetuity as a memorial.”

– Gov. Josh Green interview with Michael Henessey, Snowflake news, Source: Green Wants State to Own Lahaina, August 15, 2023,

“That level of destruction in a fire hurricane, something new to us in this age of global warming, was the ultimate reason that so many people perished.”

– Josh Green KITV News, Source Global Warming Caused Deaths says Gov. Josh Green, August 16, 2023

“There are going to be fires months in and months out for decades to come.”

– Josh Green, local news update KITV, Source: Not Sounding the Sirens Was Intentional. August 17, 2023

Things Don’t Add Up

One of the few objective investigators connecting the dots, and highlighting the odd behavior of Governor Green, is Peggy Hall.

Peggy raises concerns that everyone should be raising about the dramatic changes happening behind the devastating scenes of Lahaina, Hawaii.

“Why did the emergency alert not go out to the population?”

Things Don’t Add Up, August 11, 2023

“How is it that my NAV System in my car can know exactly to the minute when I’m going to arrive, but it [technology] can’t predict these weather events?”

Things Don’t Add Up, August 11, 2023

“Why was there no water in the pumps?

– Global Warming Caused Deaths says Gov. Josh Green, August 16, 2023

“Because Maui is now in a state of emergency, he [Josh Green] can suspend any law he wants… he can take people’s private property. He can take control of the public property. He can prevent people from moving in or out. And then, he wants to prevent people from having their own will to sell their property.”

– GLOBAL WARMING CAUSED DEATHS Says Gov. Josh GREEN August 16, 2023

“It was not a ‘wild fire.’ It was an urban fire.”

– (More) Weird Comments from Josh Green, August 17, 2023

“How did the fire get put out? Who put the fire out? There was no water. The fire fighters fled the scene in a police car… Why was the fire chief not even on the island?”

Maui Fire Chief Missing, August 22, 2023

“Am I the only one bothered by the phrase ‘human settlements?'”

– Emergency Declared 3 Weeks Before Maui Fire. August 23, 2023

“There is no legal authority for this governor to do what they are doing.”

Proof Of Lahaina Land Grab, August 29, 2023

“The suspension of laws will work? We are are a nation that is supposed to follow laws, not suspend them.”

Proof Of Lahaina Land Grab, August 29, 2023

These “holes in the narrative” strengthen the premise for a land grab. Some of the biggest holes include 1) the fires were instigated by a “hurricane-fire” that blew in from hurricane winds too far away from the island to spread any natural flames, and 2) The flames spread at a speed of” 60-85 mph, “or even “1000 mph,” both speeds suggested by Governor Green in the same interview.

Directed Energy Weapons

How did the fire begin? Some say power lines. Some say a brush fire near the site. Some say ‘a ‘compound disaster’ and climate change. Army Major General Kenneth Hara, the man in charge of the Hawaii National Guard says, “We don’t know what actually caused the wildfires in Hawaii.”

The U.S. Government admits to manipulating hurricanes. The history of Project Cirrus describes the extent to which corporations and government work together to manipulate the weather. [See Peggy’s take].

The nature of the Maui fires cause some to compare Maui to Paradise, California that burned in a similar pattern in November of 2018 where homes and cars burned while trees were left standing.

If “metal contorted” and bodies turned to ash in Lahaina, Peggy Hall reminds viewers that metal melts at 250oº F for a sustained amount of time, whereas normal fires bun at 1400º F. Is the Maui devastation proof of a natural fire fed by grass, as the narrative goes, or directed microwave energy?

Companies that contract with the Department of Defense include the Air Force and companies such as Northrop Grumman which have used unmanned aerial systems, including directed energy laser technology for the last 50 years. Is it a coincidence that the AMOS site is located on Maui, Hawaii?

“The sodium laser excites sodium atoms in the upper atmosphere to create a source of light or beacon 90 kilometers (55 miles) above the Earth.”

– AFRL at the Maui, Hawaii Site, part of the Space Electro-Optics Division.

Reinventing Capitalism

The Build-Back-Better Agenda is part of the World Economic Forum script, tied to reinventing Capitalism that reads as follows:

Thanks to the ongoing pandemic, the world is off-balance – and it will remain so for years to come. Far from settling into a ‘new normal’, we should expect a COVID-19 domino effect, triggering further disruptions – positive as well as negative – over the decade ahead….

A true recovery from COVID-19 will not be about putting things back together the way they were: we need to ‘build back better’, to ‘reset’, if we are to address the deep systemic vulnerabilities the pandemic has exposed.

Increasingly, comprehensive and integrated risk assessments will be essential for companies to fulfil their fiduciary obligations and maintain their social license to operate.

The U.S. version of the Build Back Better script can be read here.

The questions left to ponder are: were the fires set intentionally? Were they accelerated? Augmented? If so, where will the next one be? What will the new restrictions on freedom look like? Did the 1976 Eagles song, The Last Resort, from the album Hotel California, foretell the events in Paradise and Lahaina? [see verses 4, 6, & 8].

Will you agree to the new U.N. terms?

Thank you to the amazing Peggy Hall for compiling the dots!

Related Articles

Connect with Rosanne Lindsay

Cover image credit: State Farm under Creative Commons License

TCTL editor’s note:

In the article above, Rosanne shared links to The Last Resort by The Eagles. “Did the 1976 Eagles song, The Last Resort, from the album Hotel California, foretell the events in Paradise and Lahaina?”

Here are the lyrics:

She came from Providence
One in Rhode Island
Where the old world shadows hang
Heavy in the air
She packed her hopes and dreams
Like a refugee
Just as her father came
Across the sea

She heard about a place
People were smilin’
They spoke about the red man’s way
How they loved the land
They came from everywhere
To the Great Divide
Seeking a place to stand
Or a place to hide

Down in the crowded bars
Out for a good time
Can’t wait to tell you all
What it’s like up there
They called it paradise
I don’t know why
Somebody laid the mountains low
While the town got high

Then the chilly winds blew down
Across the desert
Through the canyons of the coast
To the Malibu
Where the pretty people play
Hungry for power
To light their neon way
Give them things to do

Some rich men came and raped the land
Nobody caught ’em
Put up a bunch of ugly boxes
And Jesus people bought ’em
They called it paradise
The place to be
They watched the hazy sun
Sinking in the sea

We can leave it all behind and sail to Lahaina
Just like the missionaries did so many years ago
They even brought a neon sign said, “Jesus is coming.”
Brought the white man’s burden down
Brought the white man’s reign

Who will provide the grand design?
What is yours and what is mine?
‘Cause there is no more new frontier
We have got to make it here

We satisfy our endless needs
And justify our bloody deeds
In the name of destiny
And in the name of God

And you can see them there
On Sunday morning
They stand up and sing about
What it’s like up there
They call it paradise
I don’t know why
You call someplace paradise
Kiss it goodbye

Doug Casey on Argentina’s Javier Milei, Anarcho-Capitalist Front-Runner in the Presidential Primaries

Doug Casey on the World’s First Anarcho-Capitalist President

by Doug Casey, International Man
August 30, 2023

International Man: Anarcho-capitalist Javier Milei recently won Argentina’s presidential primary. He is now the undisputed front-runner in the upcoming elections.

The outcome took many by surprise. Milei is an outsider who bested the country’s two entrenched establishment parties.

How did this happen, and why should anyone outside of Argentina care?

Doug Casey: It could be the most dramatic thing that’s happened politically since at least World War II. Anywhere. Why? Because he’s an AnCap libertarian who’d like to abolish the State—or come as close as possible. If he’s elected in October, he’ll make every move possible to eliminate—not just reduce—as many government departments as possible as quickly as possible. And most people seem oblivious to it.

Milei was in first place in the primary. Historically, in Argentina, the person who wins the primary wins the general election. There’s only been one exception to that rule. Even more encouraging is his ratings have gone up from 30% to 40% since the primary. It appears his campaign is not just a flash in the pan but a trend that’s building momentum.

Argentina was one of the most prosperous countries in the world a hundred years ago when it was about as free as any country economically. Before Peron, the Argentine GDP equaled the rest of the continent put together. But since the accession of Juan Peron in 1946, it’s consistently gone downhill every year.

Why might that be?

Peron was an overt fan of Mussolini and fascism. Fascism—a word coined by Mussolini—is defined as the complete subordination of corporations and business to the State. After WW2, the word “fascism” was a no-no, so the system was rechristened “Peronism” in Argentina. It’s not a consistent philosophy; it has many mutations. It’s all about businessmen and politicians using each other, through the State, to get rich. The lower classes are made dependent, and the middle class is impoverished. Fascism has little to do with militarism and jackboots; it’s an economic system. Almost every country in the world is fascist today—including the US, the EU, China, and Russia.

Despite the triumph of Peronism, Argentina still has the most classically liberal traditions in all of Latin America. It’s always been the most outward-looking country in Latin America. I’ve always believed it was the most fertile ground for a pro-individual liberty revolution in Latin America. Now, that may be happening.

If we divide Argentine society into a ruling, a lower, and a middle class, it’s clear that for the last 80 years, the ruling class has used welfare schemes and lies to get the lower classes to vote against their own interests. The middle class has paid for it with immense taxes and regulations. Inflation has basically destroyed the lower and middle classes; high inflation has made it impossible for them to save and build capital.

Milei could totally overturn all of this. The average Argentine is fed up with being ripped off. Milei’s support is greatest among the young and what’s left of the middle class. Estimates are that half the country is hard-pressed to feed themselves. They desperately and enthusiastically want radical change, and only the most stupid can’t see what fascism, socialism, and other varieties of statism have done. The main supporters of the status quo are the unions and welfare mooches. Everyone else hates them.

International Man: Milei has called central banking and fiat currency a historical fraud. He has vowed to “burn down the central bank” and replace the peso with the dollar and whatever commodity the free market would choose as money. He is favorable to precious metals and Bitcoin.

He has called taxation theft and seeks to drastically reduce—and eventually eliminate—many taxes.

Milei also wants to radically cut down the size of the government and eliminate numerous departments.

He also rejects the climate change hoax and was critical of the Covid mass hysteria.

Doug, you are a prominent anarcho-capitalist. What is your take on the soundness of Milei’s platform?

Doug Casey: I am totally in favor of Milei. In fact, he’s more radical (using radical in the proper sense of getting to the root of the problem) than Ron Paul was in his US campaigns. He’s as radical and sincere as my old friend Harry Browne, who ran for the US presidency in 1996 and 2000.

Milei is extremely outspoken and vibrant. He realizes that, since the average person doesn’t understand economics and has no interest in philosophy, politics is 90% entertainment. I urge everybody reading this to go to YouTube and tune into several videos of Milei (here, here, and here).

Milei is totally sound from an economic, political, and a philosophical point of view. But—and this is critically important—he’s sound from a moral point of view.

He deals in basic concepts of good and evil, right and wrong. That’s something that no politician anywhere discusses, certainly not in South America. It’s the equivalent of hitting a donkey between the eyes with a two-by-four to get his attention. Everyone intuitively understands that the political class is essentially criminal—but only Milei is brave enough to say it. The average guy wants to do the right thing, the moral thing. That’s what Milei is pointing out to people and why they like him. He doesn’t use doubletalk, brook compromise, or support half measures.

That’s why, in the US, I actually respect the Democrats more than the Republicans.

How can I say that?

Every idea the Democrats have is wrong and rotten to its core, but at least they’re not hypocrites. They say what they want to do. They actually believe in something, even though it’s stupid and evil.

The Republicans, on the other hand, don’t have any real core beliefs. They don’t disagree with the moral premises of the Democrats. They just say that the Democrats are going too far, too fast.

Milei, on the other hand, wants to overturn the moral structure that politics is built on.

International Man: The global mainstream media has synchronized their talking points on Milei.

It’s almost impossible to find an article about Milei—in any language—that doesn’t preface him with some kind of meaningless pejorative, labeling him a “far-right populist,” an “ultra-rightist,” or something to that effect.

Why is the Davos class so afraid of Milei? Can he overcome their opposition?

Doug Casey: This is further proof of how worthless the mainstream media is. They call Milei a Donald Trump lookalike, or ultra-right wing, in an attempt to scare Boobus argentinus. These people don’t deal in issues and factual programs but fear-mongering. Everywhere in the world, the chattering classes are only malevolent mouthpieces of the ruling class.

Milei is not “ultra-right.” He’s a libertarian who believes in free minds and free markets. In fact, he’s more than a libertarian; he’s an AnCap—an anarcho-capitalist. He doesn’t believe the State serves a useful purpose. He believes that society, certainly in an advanced industrial country, can live without a government. I’ve discussed this philosophy here and here.

His plan is to reduce the size of the government by 50% this year, 50% the next year, and so on, until it’s as near zero as possible. The horrible people in Davos hate him because he’s attacking their very essence. He doesn’t intend just to make a few changes around the edges but to transform Argentina into the freest and most prosperous country on the planet.

In some ways, he’s symptomatic of what’s going on in the world at large today. The United States itself, in my opinion, is on the ragged edge of a civil war. Freedom and personal liberty have been retreating at an accelerating rate for years. People in the US are just as fed up as the Argentines; we just don’t have a proper firebrand. Trump is as close as we get, but he’s just a traditionalist, not a libertarian.

Milei is cause for optimism in the world at large.

International Man: President Nayib Bukele dramatically transformed El Salvador at lightning speed—drastically reducing crime, making Bitcoin legal money, and initiating reforms to bring business and productive people to the country.

Although Argentina is much bigger than El Salvador, does Bukele’s example suggest that enormous positive change is possible in Argentina?

Doug Casey: Bukele is another symptom of a possible major turnaround in the world.

The statists and collectivists may finally have overplayed their hand. They’re just clever criminals with large followings, like Hitler in Germany and Mao in China. Only the brain-dead buy their themes. “You’ll own nothing, and you’ll be happy.” The world is ending because of climate change. Vaccinate or die. 15-minute cities. Restricted travel. No eating meat. ESG. DEI. No fossil fuels. It’s a long litany. They can destroy civilization itself.

People with a brain are looking for a lightning rod to catalyze change.

In El Salvador that may be Bukele. He definitely has libertarian instincts, indicated by the fact his main economic advisor is Safedean Ammous, an AnCap. He’s one of the most important economists in the world today, along with Walter Block and Hans-Hermann Hoppe. I urge you to listen to the interview he did with me last month on AnCap principles (link).

El Salvador is the last country in the hemisphere—with the exception of Haiti—I would have picked to turn around. It’s the most overpopulated country in the hemisphere. It’s crime-ridden, which is why he’s locked up 65,000 gang members. It had a nasty civil war from 1979-1982. It has no exports except for coffee, bananas, and poor people. Who could have guessed?

Bukele already made Bitcoin legal tender. It’s possible that he’ll reform El Salvador in the same way as Milei will try to reform Argentina.

International Man: What are the investment or speculative implications of Milei’s rise for Argentine assets?

What are the lifestyle and other international diversification implications?

Doug Casey: Right now, Argentina is the cheapest, nice country in the world. Certainly the cheapest country in the Western world.

That’s especially amazing in view of the immense tax burden that the Argentine economy has to bear, paying huge numbers of useless mouths who detract from prosperity.

If Milei is elected, he’ll radically reduce taxes, which means that costs of production will drop radically. As the country dollarizes, the currency will stabilize, and gold could come next. Real prices could drop further, but not because of a collapsing currency. The economy should boom economically as investment pours in. People will go back to work, start saving, and rebuild domestic capital. Argentina could quickly become, again, one of the world’s richest countries.

What could go wrong with the scenario? The parasites now living off the State don’t want their rice bowls broken. Even though Milei has huge support from people across the social spectrum—including the lower classes who are fed up with being kept like pets by the people in the Deep State. The Deep State will undoubtedly fight Milei’s reforms viciously. I hope he has plenty of competent bodyguards around him because these people are genuinely evil, just like the Deep State in the US.

If he’s elected, both the lifestyle and investment implications could be huge.

Argentina has always been one of my favorite countries in the world, bar none. But if they go to sound banking, a sound currency, and disregard the rules laid down by the US, the IMF, the World Bank, and the World Economic Forum—it could really be one of the best places in the world to live.

You ought to keep in mind that citizenship is available with only two years of residency. And even during those two years of residency, it’s only necessary to spend half of the year in the country. Culturally, Argentina is more European than some countries in Europe.

If Milei manages to wash away the socialist immorality and criminality that has corrupted Argentina for so many years, I won’t just live down there half of the year, but all of the year.

Connect with International Man

Cover image credit: VOX España

Revisiting Paradise California – Where Are the Chimneys?

by Edward Hendrie, Great Mountain Publishing
August 29, 2023

In the pictures below, we find that the houses in Paradise, California destroyed during the alleged wildfire on November 8, 2018. Notice that unburned trees surround the houses razed to the ground.

How could the houses be destroyed by a wildfire fed by burning trees when none of the trees in the forest surrounding the homes burned? The answer is disturbing, but it is the only logical answer: the buildings were immolated through directed energy weapons.

The unburned trees are a clue that directed energy weapons were used. One of the two principal directed energy weapons uses microwaves. Microwaves have little effect on wood and paper because they absorb little of the microwaves. It is similar to putting a paper plate in a microwave oven. It will not burn. But putting aluminum foil into that same microwave oven will spark and catch fire. Another directed energy weapon developed by the military uses lasers, which are able to burn wood and other combustible materials.

Another clue that directed energy weapons were used is the absence of fireplaces or chimneys in the remnants of the immolated houses. Ordinarily, a chimney and fireplace will remain standing after a house is burned down. That is because the fireplaces and chimneys are designed to withstand the heat of fires. But directed energy weapons work on a different principle. They are a form of electromagnetic energy that affects material at the molecular level. Heat results in the process of destruction, and often there will be fire. But the microwave directed energy weapons destroy material by affecting the molecular bonds. Thus, the directed energy weapons can destroy chimneys and fireplaces, where those same chimneys and fireplaces would withstand the heat of an ordinary fire. The absence of chimneys and fireplaces is evidence that directed energy weapons were used to raze the houses to the ground.

Above and below are some of the homes that were destroyed during the alleged November 8, 2018, wildfire in Paradise, California. The problem is that the trees that are supposed to have caused the immolation of the houses are still standing and show no sign of any fire damage.

One notable feature of the house that have been completely razed to the ground is that most houses have no remaining chimneys or fireplaces. In an ordinary house fire, the fireplace and chimney typically remain because they are designed to withstand the heat from a fire.

There is only one way to cause the kind of selective destruction where fireplaces and chimneys are destroyed but combustible trees remain: directed energy weapons. There are two principal kinds of directed energy weapons, microwave and laser. Microwave directed energy weapons affect dense materials causing destruction at the molecular level, but will not burn tree. Laser directed energy weapons will ignite wood and trees.

Above are the remains of the Brennan House in Wellfleet, Massachusetts, which was believed to have been destroyed by an arsonist in 2017. Notice that the chimney and concrete foundation remained. It is typical in a house fire to find the chimney and fireplace remaining because they are designed to withstand the heat of fires. Compare that to the houses in Paradise, California, that were allegedly razed to the ground by wildfires. But there are no remaining chimneys on any of the immolated homes.

Directed energy weapons decimate around 14,000 homes in Paradise CA

BREAKDOWN#DirectedEnergyWeapons pic.twitter.com/mZWZwrYdUs

— Redpill Drifter (@RedpillDrifter) August 13, 2023

Lahaina Is Within 40 Miles of a U.S. Government Directed Energy Facility on Maui

The Dog That Didn’t Bark

Lahaina Was Destroyed by a Directed Energy Weapon

Police Blocked Roads To Prevent Residents From Fleeing the Immolation of Lahaina

Telltale Evidence That Lahaina Was Destroyed By Directed Energy Weapons

More Evidence That Directed Energy Weapons Were Used to Immolate Lahaina

Connect with Great Mountain Publishing

Cover image credit: Test Subject 51

Was Weaponized GIS Used in Lahaina?

Click-and-destroy program for “sustainable redevelopment”

by Sasha Latypova, Due Diligence & Art
August 28, 2023

This information is from an anonymous contributor. It describes the evidence from the GIS (Geographic Information System) of extreme precision and selectivity of the Lahaina fire. It also points to the plans of potentially moving all low-income residents off their properties and into a ~~concentration camp~~, ahem, a 15-minute city.

GIS system is a computer system for capturing, storing, checking, and displaying data related to positions on Earth’s surface. GIS can show many different kinds of data on one map, such as streets, buildings, and vegetation. This enables people to more easily see, analyze, and understand patterns and relationships. US Government has all these data layers in extreme detail for all developed areas in the country.

As of today (Aug 25, 2023) if you navigate your web browser to Google Maps, select “satellite view”, then select “globe view”. It appears that the aerial imagery was recently updated to reflect the damage from the recent “event”, that took place in Lahaina Hawaii earlier this August. Out of curiosity I also looked at GIS information on Lahaina, (link below) and wanted to see if there is correlation between damaged structures and particular zoning. I found some interesting things here.

GISLink: https://qpublic.schneidercorp.com/Application.aspx

Starting at the North end of Lahaina, I see the Fire Station, Courthouse, Civic center, Police Station where all spared from fire damage despite very clear fire damage to surrounding undeveloped land around these buildings.

What I found interesting is the surrounding undeveloped land with extensive fire damage, are parcels owned by “Department of Hawaiian Homelands”, “Housing Finance and Dev Corp”, which both appear to be the same and fall under Hawaii’s HUD authority. HUD appears own property running south from the civic center down to the Lahaina Bypass.

Everything west of HUD owned parcels are hundreds of small residential lots which where all destroyed seemingly from fires on originating from that HUD land.

Only a small home community was spared and appears intact between Leiali Pkwy and Kaniau Road. Interesting thing about this community is it appears to fall
Under HUD authority as well!

Large inland parcels south of the Lahaina Bypass are owned by large developers and trusts, and everything west of these parcels were hundreds of small residential lots which were all destroyed as well.

What’s most interesting about looking at the aerial imagery, is that amongst the destruction are various structures still standing with green grass & green trees, nearly right up to edge or property line. Looking at GIS data & street view some don’t make sense, as a few have all wood construction! In other cases, condo complexes that appear to be of concrete construction, completely destroyed.

The large commercial area in the center of Lahaina appears to be untouched, the schools on eastern end of Lahaina also appear untouched. This could also very well be due to the construction of these buildings.

A standout of precise destruction is a cluster of what appear to be recently constructed townhomes and condominiums, called “Kahoma Village”. The entire community appears intact, intact homes, green grass. Yet four of the buildings in the center completely destroyed, with cars in the adjacent parking areas looking untouched.

Overall if you’re in a residential zone, commercial mixed use, industrial, hotel zone, damage or destruction is heavy. It appears the government is assigning a “Destroyed 823” code to a lot of these parcels as well.

I can’t help but notice the destruction of buildings is almost following the property lines, even extents of building exteriors. It would be akin to clicking a parcel or structure in GIS and selecting the “terminate” option.

I was looking at this more last night and discovered some drone footage uploaded earlier this week. 18 min of drone footage taken the day after:

Footage is mainly the southern end of Lahaina:

-At 2:05 you can see the Komoha Village I referenced. 4 buildings burned to the ground, yet no evidence of surrounding damage to remaining buildings fully intact. Buildings to the right don’t even have soot on the roof or burned shingles! I’m guessing this complex was being built sometime after March 2020 based on parcel data.

-At 2:18 he flies drone south over front street apartments, according to GIS these are low-income homes completely destroyed.

-At 2:32 he’s flying east, structure on the left in foreground was formally a 4-story condo complex. On the top left of the screen on background you see new homes being constructed, this is on HUD owned land according to parcel map.

-At 4:42 he’s now flying south; you see the fully intact Lahaina Shores beach resort. Directly north to this resort was formally a bunch of small businesses in two story structures you can see on street view. Appears the only thing remaining is the elevator shaft. What’s interesting about this is according to GIS, Lahaina Shores also owned this but had their parcel subdivided into hotel & historic. The structure sat on historic, yet the hotel is fine. Still, I see no smoke damage, heat damage, nor soot on the hotel.

I was looking more at GIS map as well. Looks like there is a right of way cutout for the Lahaina bypass to continue north at some point. In addition, the road adjacent to the gov building is called Lelali Pkwy and looks designed to handle high traffic. If I continue on GIS map north into Kaanapali, parcels owned by private developers appear the have a right of way for a roadway that could connected to Lahaina bypass.

What’s unique about this is the infrastructure of this town is intact. The gov buildings are fine, all roadways are fine and usable. Bridges are intact. The water treatment plant on top of the hill adjacent to school (east end of Lahaina) is fine. School is intact. The substation and solar farm next to school are intact. The commercial area and new low-income homes being built off Lahaina bypass are fine. Wastewater treatment plant appears to be north of Lahaina in Kaanapali is intact. Essentially, it’s a turnkey community ready to be “redeveloped”. I call it weaponized GIS, because to me it looks like parcels and buildings were clicked and destroyed in a GUI program (much like they would be in my CAD programs).

My 2 cents: government signs emergency order to rezone the agri land owned by HUD on northeast end of Lahaina, all the displaced indigenous and low-income residents are put there. The is all expediated due to urgent need for homes. All the land west of them adjacent to the water is redeveloped into condos to pay for the project. Residents are hit with some kind of “hazardous environment fee” to financially prevent them from rebuilding their property. The other partially destroyed condo complexes file massive insurance claims for damaged buildings. New structures will also have to conform to some kind of environmental sustainability regulations which will also be cost prohibitive to low-income native residents. Aside from the water, the community has two main points to enter and exit, residents have their very own new 15-minute city.

Connect with Sasha Latypova

Cover image credit: happyskrappy

Hawaiian Electric Soars After Statement: Power Lines “De-Energized” When Fire Started

by Tyler Durden, ZeroHedge
August 28, 2023

Hawaiian Electric Industries Inc. surged as much as 43% in premarket trading in New York after the utility released a statement: their power lines were de-energized for more than six hours in Lahaina when the “Afternoon Fire” broke out on Aug. 8 that ultimately leveled the resort town in West Maui.

Just last week, Maui County slapped Hawaiian Electric with a lawsuit, accusing the utility of negligence that sparked the devastating wildfire that leveled Lahaina and killed more than 100 people, with hundreds still missing.

“We were surprised and disappointed that the County of Maui rushed to court even before completing its own investigation,” said Shelee Kimura, president and CEO of Hawaiian Electric.

Kimura said, “We believe the complaint is factually and legally irresponsible. It is inconsistent with the path that we believe we should pursue as a resilient community committed and accountable to each other as well as to Hawaiʻi’s future. We continue to stand ready to work to that end with our communities and others. Unfortunately, the county’s lawsuit may leave us no choice in the legal system but to show its responsibility for what happened that day.”

Shares of Hawaiian Electric surged as much as 43% in premarket trading.

But still well down from the start of the fire…

Hawaiian Electric outlines important facts about what happened on Aug. 8:

A fire at 6:30 a.m. (the “Morning Fire”) appears to have been caused by power lines that fell in high winds.
The Maui County Fire Department responded to this fire, reported it was “100% contained,” left the scene and later declared it had been “extinguished.”
At about 3 p.m., a time when all of Hawaiian Electric’s power lines in West Maui had been de-energized for more than six hours, a second fire (the “Afternoon Fire”) began in the same area.
The cause of the devastating Afternoon Fire has not been determined.

The utility provided more details about the fire:

The records conclusively establish that Hawaiian Electric power lines to Lahaina were not energized when the Afternoon Fire broke out shortly before 3 p.m. on Aug. 8, in a field near Lahaina Intermediate School. Power had been out for more than six hours by that time. There was no electricity flowing through the wires in the area or anywhere else on the West Maui coast. Hawaiian Electric has informed ATF investigators of the availability of records that demonstrate these facts.
The small Morning Fire, seen in videos taken by local residents, began more than eight hours earlier. Those videos show that power lines had fallen to the ground in high winds near the intersection of Lahainaluna Road and Hoʻokahua Street at approximately 6:30 a.m. A small fire that can be seen by the downed lines spread into the field across the street from the Intermediate School.
The Maui County Fire Department responded promptly to the Morning Fire. According to the Department’s public statement that morning, by 9 a.m. the Morning Fire was “100% contained.” The Maui County fire chief subsequently reported that the Fire Department had determined that the Morning Fire was “extinguished,” and the Fire Department left the scene by 2 p.m.
Once the fire was out, Hawaiian Electric emergency crews arrived at Lahainaluna Road in the afternoon of Aug. 8 to make repairs; they saw no fire or smoke or embers. All lines to Lahaina remained de-energized and all power in the area remained off.
Shortly before 3 p.m., while the power remained off, our crew members saw a small fire about 75 yards away from Lahainaluna Road in the field near the Intermediate School. They immediately called 911 and reported that fire.
By the time the Maui County Fire Department arrived back on the scene, it was not able to contain the Afternoon Fire and it spread out of control toward Lahaina.

“The county’s lawsuit distracts from the important work that needs to be done for the people of Lahaina and Maui,” said Scott Seu, president and CEO of Hawaiian Electric.

What distraction could that be?

More Lahaina, Maui, Hawaii Victims Speak Out. They Are Telling The World What Happened Was NOT Natural, NOTHING That Happened Was A “Coincidence” 🚨
‌
“Jeff Bezos, you got what you wanted. Oprah, you got what you wanted. — F*** us all over”
‌
“We busted our ass and this is what… pic.twitter.com/c9APLLsBoy

— Wall Street Apes (@WallStreetApes) August 27, 2023

Here are the following eight questions that we should all be asking about the fires in Hawaii right now…

#1 How did the fires start? Governor Green is convinced that they were caused by a confluence of factors. Do you buy his explanation?…

Echoing wildfire experts, Gov. Green said Friday that he believes a confluence of weather conditions contributed to the ignition and spread of the blazes.

“It is a product, in my estimation, of certainly global warming combined with drought, combined with a super storm, where we had a hurricane offshore several hundred miles, still generating large winds,” Green told CNN.

#2 How did the fires spread so rapidly? According to multiple news reports, people were literally jumping into the ocean to escape because the fires were moving so rapidly…

With fires raging on Maui, two men felt there was nowhere to escape the flames – except for the ocean.

The two men live in Lahaina, a historic part of Maui loved by tourists, which appears to be heavily damaged by this week’s raging fire. They described a terrifying scene as they evacuated from Prison Street, right in the heart of Lahaina.

“I saw a couple people just running, I heard screams out of hell … explosions. It felt like we were in hell, it really was. It was just indescribable,” one of the men told Nexstar’s KHON.

#3 How did a fire that was supposedly “out” end up causing the most damage of all? According to Governor Green, the Lahaina fire was supposedly given new energy “by far-off Hurricane Dora”…

After first erupting early Tuesday, the fire was initially deemed to be out, but winds whipped up by far-off Hurricane Dora that reached up to 81 mph fanned the flames and spurred the blaze to travel about 1 mile every minute, Green said.

#4 According to U.S. Representative Jill Tokuda, the alarm system that is supposed to warn residents that a disaster is happening appears to have failed. How is that possible?…

We know everybody who’s ever lived in Hawaii knows the warning sirens. It goes off once a month at the beginning of the month at 12 noon, and it blares and if it doesn’t, it gets fixed, because that is our first line of defense. Unfortunately, in this situation, sadly, tragically in this situation, those sirens likely did not go off. The warning signals that were on cell phones, we had no cell coverage or electricity in some of these areas. And the reality is with those warning signs, it tells all of us to turn on the television or look at our phones or turn on the radio. The reality is was how fast this burn was. And you could see it in the videos that survivors were showing me. You could see it in the wreckage. If you turned on your phone, you turned on a radio, if you even could. Remember things were out at that particular point, you would not know what the crisis was.

#5 Why are emergency supplies not getting to the people that desperately need them? It is being reported that a “telecommunications blackout” has been one of the factors that has been hampering relief efforts…

But an enduring telecommunications blackout hampered government and grassroots efforts to distribute those supplies in the worst-affected neighborhoods, especially for an unknown number of survivors waiting out the aftermath in the few buildings still standing in the historic town of Lahaina and neighborhoods on the outskirts.

With their vehicles burned to a crisp, some sheltering at home have no way to drive to distribution centers miles away, or their cars have run out of gas. Others simply don’t know where to go for help. Toxic fumes and downed power lines with live wires make venturing outdoors dangerous.

#6 Why are people that have just had their homes burned down in the fires already being bombarded with calls with offers to purchase their properties?

The vultures are circling, and it appears that there are some people out there that are extremely interested in scooping up land inexpensively.

#7 Why has the FBI moved a “mobile refrigerated morgue” into Lahaina?…

A mobile refrigerated morgue has been brought to the devastated town of Lahaina as Maui officials continue their search for victims of the worst U.S. wildfire in 100 years.

The death toll on Sunday rose to 96, but Hawaii officials said it was likely to rise significantly.

John Pelletier, the Maui police chief, said only three percent of Lahaina – home to more than 9,000 people – had been searched so far.

#8 Why is Joe Biden lounging on the beach while all of this is happening?…

Outraged Americans blasting President @JoeBiden after he said ‘no comment’ when asked about the catastrophic Maui wildfire, now the deadliest US blaze in over a century. Despite the death toll climbing to about 100, Americans were outraged that Biden remained sunbathing on a beach near his Delaware home.

Before the fire, locals feared billionaires would transform their town into a “Satellite City” for elites. How the elites would acquire the land remained a mystery, but now not so much.

Connect with ZeroHedge

Cover image credit: State Farm

TCTL editor’s note: Below you will find two videos where locals examine cars that were burned at temperatures so high that some metals were liquified and glass was melted.

Police Blocked Roads to Prevent Residents From Fleeing the Immolation of Lahaina

by Edward Hendrie, Great Mountain Publishing
August 24, 2023

An eyewitness reveals that police blocked traffic to prevent residents from fleeing the immolation of Lahaina.

There was no logical reason for the police to block cars fleeing the destruction of the city other than to ensure as many people died as possible.

The witness describes the actions of the police as “a combination of stupid and evil.”

Remnants of destroyed cars on Front Street that were caught in the traffic jam caused by a police blockade. The reporter states that the p a s s e n g e r s fled their cars. But did they? How does he know? A directed energy weapon could have caught the passengers by surprise. If they were struck with a directed energy weapon, they would have been immolated as they sat in their cars.

Lahaina Is Within 40 Miles of a U.S. Government Directed Energy Facility on Maui

The Dog That Didn’t Bark Lahaina Was Destroyed by a Directed Energy Weapon

Connect with Great Mountain Publishing

Cover image credit: US National Guard

Ramiro Romani With James Corbett: Take Back Our Tech

“So there’s so many things coming at once. There’s essentially four freedoms that technology has allowed. But then also there are powers — we all know these organizations that are also very scared of us having these freedoms.

“So those are the freedom to travel, the freedom to exchange (which has been bolstered by things like cryptocurrency), the freedom of speech and the freedom of privacy.

“And these four things make it really easy to interact in a way that is in alignment, right, that is voluntary with what you would like.

“And now you see pretty much a law in most Western countries that are coming after these exact freedoms…

…

“It’s almost like the simulation itself is making it so — it’s forcing us to leave these bigger platforms and into smaller, decentralized community-based groups.

“So throughout things we’ve seen over the past few years — we’ve seen technology being used to try and track and trace every single one of our movements.

“COVID-19 was a perfect example of this. And an article I’m working on talks specifically about contact tracing, which, if people didn’t know, most phones have the ability through Google and Apple for them to install an app on their phone and actually activate it. And they did that en masse to millions of people at once…

…

“We see technology and we are throwing it out. We’re not going to use it…

“You’re cutting yourself off. You’re doing your own thing, which I completely support your right to live a life free of technology. That’s absolutely your right…

…

“Ignoring it is not going to make it go away. It’s not going to make these people stop their plans. Understanding it, working with it, changing it — which you absolutely have the possibility to change it. That is the way you can make it better for everyone.”

~ Ramiro Romani

Take Back Our Tech

by James Corbett, The Corbett Report
August 23, 2023

Ramiro Romani of TakeBackOurTech.org and AbovePhone.com joins us today to discuss technology: what it is, how it works, and how we can make it work for us.

We discuss how governments and big tech corporations are collaborating to undermine our rights to privacy, free expression and even freedom of travel and how we can remove the Big Brother surveillance and controls from our devices.

Watch on Archive / BitChute / Odysee / Rokfin / Rumble / Substack

Show Notes:

TakeBackOurTech.org

Building a digital army: UN peacekeepers fight deadly disinformation

AbovePhone.com

Who Can We Call On? How Our Phones Are Tracked By Big Tech, Telecom, and Government

Electromagnetic Radiation – Shield & Educate Yourself, Save a Life

Connect with The Corbett Report

The Dog That Didn’t Bark: On Why Lahaina’s Disaster Warning Alarms Did Not Sound

by Edward Hendrie, Great Mountain Publishing
August 21, 2023

On August 20, 23, I revealed in an article that within 40 miles of Lahaina on the Island of Maui is located the Air Force Maui Optical and Supercomputing (AMOS) site, which is part of the AFLR Directed Energy Directorate. The AFLR states “the Directorate develops and transitions technologies in four core technical competencies: laser systems, high power electromagnetics, weapons modeling and simulation, and directed energy and electro-optics for space superiority.”

The disaster warning alarms did not sound to warn that alleged fires were about to engulf the Maui city of Lahaina. The silent sirens on Maui now speak loudly about who was behind the destruction of Lahaina. In one of Arthur Conan Doyle’s Sherlock Holmes stories, “Silver Blaze,” the famous fictional detective deduced the murderer’s identity because a guard dog failed to bark at the time of the murder. Sherlock Holmes deduced that the murderer must have been the dog’s master. It is the same with the sirens not sounding in Lahaina. The sirens did not sound because the perpetrators had complete control of the sirens.

Hawaii Governor Josh Green first claimed that the sirens did not sound because they were immobilized due to the intense heat. If there was an approaching fire as claimed, the very loud 121-decibel sirens would have sounded at the first sign of fire before it would ever reach the sirens which were located along Lahaina’s coast. And so the story by the governor was not believed by anyone. The sirens are tested each month and had just been tested on August 1, 2023, one week before the disaster.

The emergency sirens may have been destroyed, but not in the way the governor claimed. The destruction would not be from fires, as alleged by the governor, but from directed energy weapons. The sirens were along the coast, far from the alleged path of the fire coming from the inland area. Thus, the fire could not have destroyed them. But a sudden burst from a directed energy weapon certainly could have done the trick.

It was eventually claimed that the alarms did not sound because nobody from either the state or county government activated the alarms. Could it be that it was because they knew that the directed energy weapons had disabled the sirens? Now they had a problem on their hands. They now claim that the sirens were purposely not sounded. And so they had to devise a good reason for not doing so. They had to conceal the use of directed energy. They trotted out The Administrator of the Maui Emergency Management Agency, Herman Andaya, who claimed that the sirens were purposely not sounded because they are primarily used for tsunamis. His concern was that people would hear the sirens and run toward the mountains to flee an imagined tsunami. In doing that, he claimed that the people would have run toward the alleged source of the fires.

When asked, Anday stated that he does not regret not sounding the alarms. He said:

The public is trained to seek higher ground in the event that the siren is sounded. Had we sounded the siren that night, we’re afraid that people would have gone mauka [meaning inland, or toward the mountainside]. And if that was the case, then they would have gone into the fire.

That statement is false. CNN reported:

Before Andaya’s resignation was announced, state Sen. Angus McKelvey – who represents Lahaina and lost his own home in the fires – blasted Andaya’s response as “insulting.”

“I’ve heard the line that ‘people would have panicked and ran up to the mountains because it’s a tsunami siren.’ … It’s insulting to think that people would be that clueless, that they wouldn’t know that sirens blasting was because of the fire,” McKelvey told CNN on Thursday.

“These are not tsunami sirens. They’re disaster sirens.”

There’s more! The Deputy Chief, Telecommunications Branch, State of Hawaii Emergency Management Agency, Ryan Hirae, during an interview on or about September 2020, stated the following:

In the state of Hawaii we have a statewide alert and warning system, which we also call SAWS. That involves not only the siren warning system, but as well as IPAWS. IPAWS is the integrated public alerts and warning system provided by FEMA. And that has the Emergency Alert System, also known as EAS. It also has Wireless Emergency Alerts, which are known as WEA. We also use sirens for hurricanes, brush fires, flooding, lava, hazmat conditions, or even a terrorist event. We have over 400 Sirens spread out through four counties. Our Sirens have a rating of 121 decibels. We have to visit each siren minimally once a year for preventive maintenance. Our role in the state of Hawaii in Emergency Management, especially telecommunications, is to prevent loss of life and to minimize property damage.

The State of Hawaii Emergency Management Agency website indicates that the sirens are part of a warning system for:

Hurricane
Flooding
Wildland Fire
Tsunami
Earthquake
Volcanic

So we now know that the sirens are, in fact, used to warn of fires. Andaya lied about why the sirens were not used. Indeed, every reason given by government officials for the sirens not sounding has been proven false. Why would government officials lie about such a thing? Because the real reason the alarms were not sounded was that government officials were behind the disaster. They owned the dog that didn’t bark.

The destruction of the city was planned to kill people in a single fell swoop using directed energy weapons. The sirens were not even considered by the perpetrators in planning their attack because there was no slow lumbering fire dancing from house to house for the sirens to warn people about. They activated the directed energy weapon, and the immolation of the city and the sirens immediately ensued. Most of the people were hit by surprise and killed instantly in their houses by the directed energy weapon. Notably, while 114 people have been confirmed dead, 1,000 people are still unaccounted for as of August 19, 2023, eleven days after the disaster. The dog didn’t bark because the master was the murderer.

Lahaina Is Within 40 Miles of a U.S. Government Directed Energy Facility on Maui

Lahaina Was Destroyed by a Directed Energy Weapon

Connect with Edward Hendrie

Cover image credit: web3525

The Global Uprising Against CBDCs Has Begun!

by James Corbett, The Corbett Report
August 20, 2023

Stop the presses! Here’s my hot take for the day: CBDCs are a bad thing.

OK, maybe that take is not so hot. After all, I don’t even need to spell out “Central Bank Digital Currencies” for my well-informed, switched-on readers to know what I’m talking about when I refer to CBDCs. And the idea that a digital form of programmable money with a central banker’s on/off switch is a bad thing? Come on! Even the normiest of the normies can sense that.

But here’s the hot part of my hot take: CBDCs are deeply unpopular with the general public and we have a chance of stopping them in their tracks.

At first glance, you might not think this is such a controversial statement, but really think about it for a minute.

If you listen to the stenographers and presstitutes of the establishment dinosaur media, you’ll believe that CBDCs not only represent an exciting opportunity to bring our outdated paper money system into the digital age, but that they’ll be bestowed on us by the benevolent central banker technocrats in the next year or two (if we’re lucky!).

If you listen to the pundits in the alternative media, however, you’ll believe that CBDCs not only represent the greatest threat to human freedom in our lifetime, but that they’ll be forced upon us by the evil central bankster overlords in the next year or two (no matter what we do to fend them off).

Do you see the similarities in these two “competing” narratives? In both cases, you and your opinion about CBDCs are utterly irrelevant. It’s a fait accompli. You can love ’em or hate ’em, embrace them or recoil from them, but whatever your position, you will be forced to use them.

But this just isn’t true. In fact, we’re already seeing a massive global pushback against the CBDC agenda. And this pushback is already causing the banksters to panic and to pull back on their grand plan for world domination.

Of course you’re not hearing about this CBDC pushback in the establishment media. Why would they tout their masters’ failures, after all?

But, weirdly enough, you’re not hearing much about this pushback in the alt media either.

Let’s correct that today, shall we?

Global Pushback

As we all know, when globalists are looking for a population to test out their latest technology of enslavement, they turn to Africa. From genetic manipulation to vaccine experiments to agricultural “revolution,” there is no shortage of examples of pathocrats disguising their experiments in technocratic tyranny as philanthropic concern for the poor, beleaguered people of that continent. It’s hardly surprising, then, that Africa is once again serving as a laboratory for the latest globalist technocrat pet project: digital money.

Accordingly, Nigeria became one of the first nation’s in the world to adopt an official, national central bank digital currency when the Central Bank of Nigeria (CBN) launched the eNaira amid much fanfare in October 2021. Promoted with the slogan “Same Naira, more possibilities!” the bankster class collectively held its breath as it watched this trial run of digital money unfold before their eyes.

The early results of this experiment, however, were not promising for the money manipulators. Despite a massive push of the eNaira by the government and breathless coverage of its rollout in the establishment media, it was revealed one year after the digital currency’s launch that a mere 0.5% of the population—one in every 200 people—had actually used it.

Not to be dissuaded, the CBN imposed new banking regulations last December, limiting cash withdrawals from ATMs to just ₦20,000 ($45) per day in a bid to increase adoption of the nation’s CBDC.

The result? Again, utter failure. In fact, worse than utter failure. An actual uprising!

Nigerians took to the streets in February of this year to protest the cash restrictions and even attempted to storm the central bank.

CBN officials are now rearranging the deck chairs on the Titanic, upgrading the eNaira app to allow contactless payments, as if that was what was keeping people from using the banksters’ new digital enslavement tokens. But, try as they might to cover it up, the results of this experiment in monetary manipulation are now clearly visible for all to see. The eNaira is a failure of such gargantuan proportions that it now serves as a cautionary tale to central bankers around the world about how pear-shaped things can get when a digital currency is shoved down an unwilling public’s throat.

But it isn’t just Nigeria where people are saying “no, thanks” to the banksters’ digital money agenda.

In the European Union, protesters are already marching against the European Central Bank’s (ECB) proposed “digital euro.” In Croatia, for example, activists are warning that their government’s adoption of the euro “will be followed by the introduction of a digital euro, and then you will have to kiss all the freedoms you know goodbye.” In the Netherlands, meanwhile, demonstrators have staged rallies warning about the coming European CBDC and the ECB’s plan “to control the spending habits of the population.”

In Russia, too—where Putin has just signed the Central Bank of Russia’s “digital Ruble” into law as an official national currency—people are already threatening to go Nigerian on their government. Recent polls show that a mere 6% of Russians are actually excited about their opportunity to use the new CBDC. This widespread distrust of the digital Ruble is reflected in the coverage of the currency in the nation’s alternative news websites, which are filled with articles decrying the technocratic tyranny. One such article sums up the situation by noting that “we can only say that if citizens actively use non-cash transactions, then they themselves will enter the electronic banking concentration camp, seemingly completely voluntarily.”

And how about in the bastion of liberty, the beacon on the hill, the good ol’ US of A? Well, the grandstanding politicians—always eager to get in front of a parade and pretend they’re leading it—are already introducing (and even passing) legislation to ensure CBDCs never sees the light of day in America.

Of course, readers of this column will know that these political promises aren’t worth the paper they’re written on. Nevertheless, the proposed legislation is important because it reflects two underlying realities. Firstly, it demonstrates that the American public is not on board with the CBDC agenda. And secondly, it signals to the Fed and other central banksters that they risk upsetting their whole rigged monetary system if they push this agenda too far and too fast.

Banksters Running Scared

Yes, it’s safe to say that, on the CBDC issue at least, the momentum is not in the banksters’ favour. In fact, things are so bad that the establishment is now beginning to contemplate whether the mad dash toward CBDCs might just wake up the public to the whole monetary scam.

In a revealing op-ed in The Financial Times last month, Brookings Senior Fellow Eswar Prasad warned, “Central banks must not be blind to the threats posed by CBDCs.” After dutifully detailing all of the nifty features of programmable money that would-be world controllers can take advantage of (“imposing negative nominal interest rates to disincentivise saving,” for example), he then cautions the central banksters that their pretense of “political neutrality” might be exposed for the self-evident sham that it is if central banks start meddling in people’s everyday transactions.

Central banks could be viewed as political agents if their visibility into payment transactions is used for law enforcement or surveillance purposes. [. . .] Central banks already face threats to their independence, credibility and legitimacy. The more extensive the functionality of the money they issue, the greater the political pressures they will be exposed to. At a minimum, such innovations pose risks to the integrity of central bank money.

Oh, won’t somebody think of the central banksters’ credibility!?

And—wouldn’t ya know it?!—just as Prasad and others are beginning to warn that the banksters might be pushing too far and too fast with this whole “programmable money” idea, it looks like the monetary mafia are now stepping back from the CBDC brink . . . at least publicly.

Just this past week, the Central Bank of Colombia issued a white paper on the “Expected Macroeconomic Effects of Issuing a Retail CBDC,” which admits that if central banks push the cashless agenda too far and the situation “reaches a point where the use of cash is about to disappear, central bank money could lose its role as a monetary anchor for deposits and other forms of private money.” Also this past week, the Bank of Canada issued a report on “Unmet Payment Needs and a Central Bank Digital Currency,” which acknowledges that “consumers face few payment gaps or frictions and therefore might have relatively weak incentives to adopt and — especially — to use CBDC at scale.”

In other words, central bankers are quietly admitting there are no real advantages to retail CBDCs and there are even potential downsides to their introduction.

Of course, as my astute readers will already know, this does not mean that the issue is settled, that the bankers have given up, and that the CBDC dream is officially done. No, it just means that they have to change tack and try to find other ways to cajole the public into the digital gulag. Perhaps this is why the central banking minions are now openly strategizing about how best to sell their digital money agenda to an unwilling public.

Take the Bank of Israel, for example. It just released a new white paper purporting to identify “Principles for creating ‘Acceptance’ and ‘Network Effect’ for the Digital Shekel,” or, in plain English: “Ways to convince the rubes to use our virtual slave coins.” The document considers ideas for leveraging the “Network Effect” to artificially stimulate adoption of the digital shekel. Naturally, the plan does not focus on ways to incentivize the use of CBDCs but rather on ways to enforce their acceptance, including obligating banks, payment providers and merchants to participate in the scheme or forcing the government to officially declare the digital shekel to be legal tender.

On its face, the fact that the banksters are now openly plotting how best to stuff digital money down the public’s throat may be a worrying development.

But, upon further reflection, the fact that the banksters are now turning from the carrots of incentives and bonuses and discounts to the stick of government regulation and enforced adoption does not mean that the anti-CBDC movement is doomed to failure.

On the contrary. That the banksters are now actively engaged in a struggle against the general public is a sign that we are winning and that CBDCs are not inevitable.

Resistance is Fertile

I’ve made the point before, but it bears repeating: the constant stream of propaganda, conditioning and censorship that we are subjected to from governments, establishment institutions and their lapdog media is not a sign of their strength. It is a sign of their weakness.

The fact that they have to spend billions of dollars a year pumping lies and misinformation into the heads of the citizenry in order to keep people from seeing the truth is a tacit admission that our thoughts and opinions actually do matter. After all, why would they bother propagandizing to us at all if they didn’t require our approval (or at least our docile apathy) to continue pursuing their agenda?

Similarly, the fact that the banksters are ramping up the next stage of their CBDC indoctrination operation—attempting to convince an increasingly skeptical public that a complete overhaul of the fabric of our monetary reality is somehow beneficial to Joe Sixpack and Jane Soccermom—is a tacit admission that we are the ones who decide whether CBDCs are implemented or not. They can tout the benefits of their digital slave tokens all they want, but if we refuse to use them, then the CBDC world order will not come to fruition.

The banksters, for one, are well aware of this fact. But are we aware of it?

I understand why this message—that pushback and protest do matter and that the globalist agenda is not inevitable—is such an unpopular one in the “alternative” media. If the message is simply: “Relax, everyone! The battle is over and CBDCs have been defeated! Now go back to sleep!” then it is indeed no different from enemy propaganda.

But that is not the message here. Instead, the message is that the public is—for the time being and until the propaganda machine kicks into high gear—overwhelmingly on our side. People DO NOT WANT programmable money and the vast majority see it for what it is: another trick on the part of the establishment to take more power and control away from every day people and put it in the hands of the banksters and their cronies.

That’s why this is the time to seize the momentum of public opinion and steer it into actual productive activity. We can encourage Cash Friday awareness. We can build up local trading communities based on alternative and complementary currencies. We can introduce those around us to Agorist.Market. We can promote community currencies and precious metals and decentralized cryptos and barter circles and the million other forms of survival currency that clued-in Corbetteers have been researching for years.

The time has come to harvest those seeds you’ve been planting! The public is on our side!

Yes, your resistance and pushback do matter. It does make a difference. We do have a part to play in this. Now, let’s go out there and put the final nail in the CBDC coffin.

What are we waiting for?

This weekly editorial is part of The Corbett Report Subscriber newsletter. To support The Corbett Report and to access the full newsletter, please sign up to become a member of the website.

Connect with James Corbett

Lahaina Is Within 40 Miles of a U.S. Government Directed Energy Facility on Maui

by Edward Hendrie, Great Mountain Publishing
August 20, 2023

In my August 11, 2023, article, I explained the evidence that a directed energy weapon was used to destroy Lahaina, a city on the Island of Maui in Hawaii. The only culprit who could possibly have used such a weapon is the U.S. Military. The cover story for the destruction of Lahaina was that out-of-control wildfires caused it. Indeed, Major General Kenneth Hara, the commanding general of the Hawaii Army National Guard, gave the world the wildfire cover story during an August 9, 2023, briefing. One would think that the head of the Maui Emergency Management Agency, Herman Andaya, would be the proper source of information about the alleged wildfires.

But, strangely, Herman Andaya was not even present in Maui at the time of the destruction of Lahaina. Administrator Andaya was absent in the days following the conflagration in Lahaina. Where was he? According to local news, Hawaii News Now, “Andaya was in Waikiki at the Alohilani Resort attending what was scheduled to be a three-day FEMA disaster preparedness seminar called the Pacific Partnership Meeting.” Oddly, the conference did not start until the morning of August 8, 2023, after the destruction of Lahaina was well underway and well known. Yet, Andaya remained at the conference during the first day of the disaster, and records show that he did not check out from his hotel until August 9, 2023.

Another odd thing about the fires was that the emergency alert system of sirens was not implemented after the destruction began. Someone other than Andaya made the decision not to warn the populace. That failure caused many to die needlessly. Andaya subsequently resigned on August 17, 2023, after his alleged dereliction became publically known.

Back to General Hara: while he is not an expert in emergency management, he is an expert in military armaments. It just so happens that Maui is the location for one of two major sites for the Air Force Research Laboratory (AFLR) Directed Energy Directorate. The other major location is Kirkland Air Force Base in New Mexico. You read that correctly; within 40 miles of Lahaina on the Island of Maui is located the Air Force Maui Optical and Supercomputing (AMOS) site, which is part of the AFLR Directed Energy Directorate. The AFLR states “the Directorate develops and transitions technologies in four core technical competencies: laser systems, high power electromagnetics, weapons modeling and simulation, and directed energy and electro-optics for space superiority.”</span

One of the products under study on Maui by the AFLRE uses “laser propagation through the Earth’s atmosphere.” So powerful is the directed energy technology that AMOS states it “has the ability to propagate light into the sodium layer of the atmosphere and create an artificial star.” AMOS further states that the “state-of-the-art electro-optical facility, the MSSS combines research and development with an operational mission; the only one of its kind in the world.”

Also located at the 10,023 foot-summit of Haleakala on the island of Maui, Hawaii, is the 15th Space Surveillance Squadron (15 SPSS). “The mission of 15 SPSS is to develop, assess, deliver, and operate cutting-edge SDA [Space Domain Awareness] capabilities to support warfighter needs.” The 15 SPSS also operates the experimental systems under the AFRL “15 SPSS is a component of Space Delta 2 and also operates experimental systems under the Air Force Research Laboratory [AFRL].” The Directed Energy Directorate is a component department of the AFRL with expertise in directed energy. That means that the 15 SPSS operates the AFRL experimental directed energy weapons. And it does so from the summit of Haleakala overlooking Maui. Haleakala is the perfect location to control directed energy weapons targeting Lahaina.

Picture of the Maui Space Surveillance facility atop Haleakala shooting a sodium guidestar posted on the AFRL website

Apparently, Lahaina became a target of one of the AFLR’s directed energy “operational missions” on August 8, 2023. Administrator Andaya took the fall for the death and destruction caused by a U.S. military operation against its citizens. The people are being led to believe that the death and destruction were exacerbated by incompetence. That way, they are kept from the reality that the destruction of Lahaina was premeditated mass genocide orchestrated by its own government.

It is notable that U.S. President Biden, the Commander in Chief of the U.S. Armed Forces, was utterly silent about the conflagration. The media did not even have an opportunity to ask him about it until Sunday, August 13, 2023, at which time he responded with “no comment.” Think about that for a moment. An entire city is destroyed, and the media does not even have access to the President of the United States to ask him about it until five days later.

And President Biden’s response is an incriminating “no comment!” Instagram influencer Rogan O’Handley wrote on Twitter that the more we learn about Hawaii, ‘the more we learn why Joe Biden has consistently responded with ‘no comment.’ He stated the obvious: ‘There is something REAL fishy going on here.”

How did the words “no comment” come out of his mouth? Who, President or not, responds to a tragedy with “no comment?” I will tell you who. A person who is part of the conspiracy that committed the tragedy. That is the kind of statement made by someone guilty of a crime! President Biden repeatedly refused to answer any questions about the Lahaina tragedy. On August 19, 2023, the White House officially announced that the President would visit Maui on Monday, August 21, 2023.

The Lahaina disaster has many parallels with the 9/11 attacks. Notably, Administrator Andaya was attending a three-day FEMA disaster preparedness seminar at the time a real disaster was taking place. In like manner, on 9/11 there were also several military drills involving hijacked airplanes while the actual 9/11 attacks took place. Three of the military exercises were called Northern Vigilance, Vigilant Warrior, and Vigilant Guardian. Rather suspiciously, the scenarios matched almost exactly the story of the alleged highjacked airplane attacks on 9/11.

9/11 War Games by James Corbett

Stanley Hilton, former chief of staff to Senator Robert Dole, represents over 400 plaintiffs in a seven billion dollar class action lawsuit against President George Bush, Vice President Richard Cheney, National Security Advisor Condoleezza Rice, Secretary of Defense Donald Rumsfeld, FBI Director Robert Mueller, and others in high government office, alleging that they planned and orchestrated the 9/11 attacks. The lawsuit was dismissed in 2004. The federal district judge ruled that the President and his subordinates enjoyed sovereign immunity from what the court described as a “non-justiciable political question.”

Mr. Hilton has documentary proof and eyewitnesses that President George Bush personally ordered the 9/11 attacks. Furthermore, he has eyewitnesses and documentary evidence that the U.S. Air Force and NORAD conducted 35 drills over the two months prior to 9-11-01 rehearsing attacks by airliners against various targets, including specific drills where the World Trade Center was to be the target of attacks by airplanes.

In fact, on 9-11-01 there were five drills being conducted by NORAD and the Air Force involving attacks by commercial airliners. The 35 rehearsals by the U.S. Government for attacks by airliners impeaches the credibility of National Security Advisor Condoleezza Rice, who said during a May 16, 2002 press briefing: “I don’t think anybody could have predicted that these people would take an airplane and slam it into the World Trade Center, take another one and slam it into the Pentagon; that they would try to use an airplane as a missile, a hijacked airplane as a missile.” Why would she say such a thing when it is so clearly false? Because she did not think that anyone would ever find out about the prior rehearsals. Now that the rehearsals have leaked out the conspirators had a problem. But that was all taken care of by the district court judge who ruled that the administrative officials had sovereign immunity.

Lahaina has all the earmarks of a directed energy attack, just as was done on 9/11. For more information about directed energy use during the 9/11 attacks read 9/11 – Enemies Foreign and Domestic.

Connect with Edward Hendrie

Cover image credit: Wtp22
Lahaina burning during the night of August the 8th, from Wailea.

See Related:

Dane Wigington With Greg Hunter: Lahaina Incineration Is Deadly Weather Warfare

by Greg Hunter, USAWatchdog
August 19, 2023

Climate engineering researcher Dane Wigington says the total incineration of Lahaina in Hawaii was caused by man-made weather modification called geoengineering. Wigington says this is really an attack using “weather warfare.”

According to Wigington, they used climate engineering to create a “wind tunnel effect right over Lahaina” with wind speeds up to 100 miles per hour to superheat the fire.

Wigington explains, “This creates a bellows effect, and that escalates temperatures exponentially over what they would have otherwise been. They have been melting steel around the world by exactly that manner for thousands of years by feeding air in. That’s the bellows effect.

“This is the same as an acetylene torch. If you burn just the acetylene, you have 1,500 degrees. When you add oxygen, now you get 6,000 degrees. People are not considering this. They don’t need Directed Energy Weapons (DEWs). . . .

“There is a 140-page U.S. military document that we found and posted at GeoEngineeringWatch.org. It is titled ‘Wildfires as a Military Weapon.’

“It describes surface preparation . . . prior to their commencement of the surface firestorm incineration. That’s exactly what we saw in that region of Hawaii. . . .

“We cannot prove the source of ignition in Lahaina, but what we can say is the template for this event to happen cannot be separated from climate engineering operations.”

Wigington says weird and deadly weather events are going to intensify.

Wigington points out millions of acres are burning in Northern Canada, while California and the Western U.S. brace for a huge hurricane coming from the Pacific Ocean. It looks like somebody wanted Lahaina burned to the ground no matter how many people had to die.

Wigington contends, “We have the disaster capitalists trying to profit off any cataclysm, but I would argue the stakes are much, much more grave. These people know that the planet’s life support system is failing.

“They should know because they are a party to bringing us to this dark place. There are much bigger powers in play. . . .Climate engineering is a covert weapon because they can bring populations to their knees without the population ever realizing they are under assault.

“They mire populations in difficulty, and that makes them easier to control. . . . Climate engineering is far to dignified a term. This is weather warfare.

“We at GeoEngineeringWatch.org are focused on the biggest hole in the bottom of the boat. Whatever people are worried about, political theater or whatever concern they have, none of it will matter if we continue on the current course.

“I mean, in the very near term, none of it will matter.”

Wigington says more and more people are waking up to the dire problems that weather engineering is causing. If there is a critical mass of awakening, many lives could be saved, and at least part of the planet’s life support system can be salvaged.

Wigington says, “It’s far easier to kill a million people that to control them. The U.S. population especially is a rapidly increasing liability to those in power. Many U.S. citizens are armed, and they are not happy about what’s going on.

“Those in power don’t want to get to a point that these citizens take to the street with their proverbial pitchforks and torches looking for them. So, they are going to debilitate, control and reduce that population as fast as they can. Anyone who can’t see that at this point has their eyes wide shut. So, of course, they are using weather as a weapon. Why wouldn’t they?”

There is much more in the 55-minute interview.

Join Greg Hunter of USAWatchdog.com as he goes One-on-One with climate researcher Dane Wigington, founder of GeoEngineeringWatch.org for 8.19.23.

Connect with Greg Hunter

Cover image credit: US Dept of Homeland Security
A cadaver dog with FEMA urban search and rescue searches a Lahaina neighborhood

See Related:

Wildfires As a Weapon: US Military Exposed

The Only ‘National Defense’ Needed in This Country, Is Defense Against the Real Enemy: The Ruling Class and the U.S. Government

by Gary D. Barnett
August 18, 2023

“I believe that all government is evil, and that trying to improve it is largely a waste of time.”

~ H.L. Mencken

Throughout our history, and today, little, if any defense of this country or its people, has been necessary or warranted. The true enemy of the people of America is, and has always been, its own government.

The real enemies are most all the politicians, regardless of party, the courts, the CIA, the NSA, the FBI, the IRS, the entire military industrial complex, and in general, the federal and state police forces. In other words, all the ruling class and it pawns in government, its enforcers, and all their institutions and bureaucracies, are the real threat to this populace and its natural freedoms.

The ludicrous notion of national defense, and that government forces actually “defend the country,” is an outright lie; propagandized by the State and its mouthpieces in media, simply as a way to gain great power in order to own and control society.

Many will take offence to these statements, mostly due to the fact that since birth, they have been inundated and indoctrinated by false ‘authority’ figures, to believe that they cannot survive and prosper without restrictive laws and rule, and worthless government schooling, all kept in check by severe coercive State prosecution.

They are taught (schooled) to abandon their individuality in favor of the so-called ‘greater good’ of a collective society, to depend on and trust others in power to protect and sustain them and their families throughout their lives. This breeds only ignorance and passivity in the face of State terror.

Independence, a supposed hallmark of this nation-state and its residents, is literally vilified, and even prohibited in many instances, causing personal sovereignty to be discarded in the name of unified slavery.

We live in a country that has warred aggressively against fictitious enemies, meaning without cause or necessity, more than any other country on earth.

It is stated, and supported, that the United States has been at war for at least 93% of its entire existence. I firmly believe this number to be much higher, and with proper consideration, it is likely closer to 100%.

If one is to determine the actual damage done, the actual harm due to direct war, proxy war, what is insanely considered ‘collateral damage,’ what is the horrid long term cost to human life in the aftermath of this terror, the total number of causalities, including the dead, would be tens if not hundreds of millions of innocent people.

But what is sold to the wrongly named ‘public, is that this country is and has been the savior of ‘democracy,’ a completely evil and failed ideology, which is a gross lie beyond the imagination of any sane and thinking human being.

Yes, the truth hurts, but without acceptance of truth, what is left is a deceitful lie; a manufactured myth so atrocious as to have caused an entire nation’s abhorrent and hostile policies to be supported by the masses to such an extent, as to have caused the most broad-based, aggressive, and egregious destruction of humanity in history. This should be the epitaph upon the death of this empire.

At this time in our lives, aggressive war by this government and all who support its heinous deeds, has graduated from its main objective of slaughtering innocent men, women, and children, in addition to the other devastation, in other countries most everywhere on earth, to include the entirety of this country’s population as well.

The major war currently is against all of us who live and work in the U.S. by those who continue to claim to be our protectors. This contradiction is absurd, but is still little understood by the average American, as can be evidenced by the terroristic treatment inflicted, and with little if any resistance, on this society these past few years.

At a time when this country and the world are steeped in madness and hate, more and more atrocities continue to take place, with almost zero empathy evident by the political class.

The last evil ‘ruler,’ just one among all, ‘chosen’ by the ‘people,’ was Biden, and this was his response to the State’s complicit murder of those in Lahaina just recently, after a very suspicious and devastating fire had destroyed an entire town and its residents.

He had the audacity to offer these poor people who lost everything, including many family members, a one-time $700 payment per household. This was in the midst of giving over $200 million more to Ukraine’s political criminals recently, with plans to give many more billions; this after more than $113 billion has already been paid to enrich the newly rich politicians in Ukraine. (Apparently, blackmail garners payment more than actual need of Americans.)

This alone should be enough for everyone in this country to grasp how little this government cares about its own, and how worthless all in the governing system have become. To depend on, or trust this scum to defend you from harm, is asinine beyond explanation.

Who will defend you from harm? Who will defend you from foreign invasion, although that has never once happened in this country’s history, not even including the pre-planned setup called the Pearl Harbor attack? Who will defend you from hyper-inflation and the resulting extreme prices for goods? Who will defend you from mass censorship and constant surveillance? Who will defend you from food shortages, energy shutdowns, and extensive restrictions on all transactions and travel? Who will defend your children from the consuming perversion being forced on them at every opportunity with this government’s blessing? Who will defend you from aggression and tyranny? Who will defend you from yourself?

It will never be the evil State that defends you, nor will it be its ‘national defense systems,’ its enforcers in the military and police, the politicians, the banking cartels, the large corporate monsters, or any government at any level.

There is only one legitimate defense, and that is self-defense.

Only you, each of you, has the ability and desire to defend himself. No other and no State entity can or will ever be your savior. Until that is accepted, expect total serfdom to become your voluntarily accepted way of life.

Much more tyranny is coming. Lockdowns, fake ‘viruses,’ bioweapons, threats and totalitarian measures based on bogus ‘climate change, central bank digital currency, social credit restrictions, more inflation, destruction of money, health mandates, curfews, travel shutdowns, food shortages, transhuman promotion, among many other atrocities, including perpetual war.

National defense is an outright lie, and can never protect you, it can only harm you. There is but one enemy, and that enemy is the State!

There is but one defense against this demon called government, and that is when individuals, or individuals working together en masse, abolish all rule. The responsibility for you is you, and any dependence on government whatsoever can only lead to despair, hopelessness, disaster, and enslavement. Defend yourself from this evil State, and break the chains that bind you.

“Every government is run by liars. Nothing they say should be believed.”

~ I.F. Stone

Reference links:

America’s perpetual wars of aggression

What the media won’t tell you about the Maui fires

Connect with Gary D. Barnett

Cover image credit: kirillslov

Mass Murder and the West Maui Land Grab

Maui will either be a major milestone for the ruling class, or a line in the sand for we the people.

by Greg Reese, The Reese Report
August 18, 2023

The blame for the destruction of West Maui is falling upon Hawaiian Electric who knew as early as four years ago that there was a risk of fire due to their own negligence of maintaining power lines. But did nothing.

Hawaiian Electric, who is owned by Vanguard and BlackRock, has been shifting their focus to clean energy. But in order to Build Back Better, they must first destroy the old system. And so the power was left on to feed the fires.

The outdoor siren warning system on Maui is one of the most advanced and maintained warning systems on Earth. Residents are accustomed to monthly tests and on the day of the fire, no sirens went off.

The director in charge of this warning system was at a FEMA disaster seminar in Oahu as the fires were devastating the people of Maui.

When asked if he regretted not sounding the alarm, he said no. Because he was worried that the people would run into the fire.

But instead, they burned to death. Including an untold number of children who were home alone that morning because of a school cancellation.

The water wasn’t on. Fire hydrants were dry. And the Deputy Director of Water Resource Management, who was named an Obama Foundation Leader, refused to release water for the west Maui fires until it was too late. He says that in order to share water, Hawaiians need to discuss equity.

Without any warnings and without any water, the people tried to flee. But they were stopped by the police who had orders to keep people from escaping.

The Maui chief of police, John Pelletier, was the incident officer at one of the biggest cover-up operations in US history; the 2017 Las Vegas shootings.

Residents are not allowed to leave unless they get a permission slip from the federal government. But the government recently decided to shut that option down.

While the fires burned, a book was published about the entire event. The book blamed climate change and was written by a Dr Miles Stones. The definition of milestone is; an action or event marking a significant change or stage in development.

Hawaii is being usurped by the same billionaires pushing for the World Economic Forum’s Great Reset. They have been planning on turning Maui into a test bed for their Artificial Intelligence Smart Grid. But the people were in their way, so they burned them out.

Maui will either be a major milestone for the ruling class, or a line in the sand for we the people.

The federal government offers a one-time payment of seven hundred dollars to each family that has lost their home. And the Governor of Hawaii tells reporters that the state plans on acquiring the land.

And if it wasn’t for the local community, the survivors would be left alone to die in the ashes of their neighbors.

Connect with The Reese Report

Multi-Billion Dollar “Direct Energy Weapons (DEW)” Market, for Military and “Civilian Use” (?). Were DEWs Used in Hawaii?

by Prof Michel Chossudovsky, Global Research
August 17, 2023

Directed Energy Weapons (DEW) constitute a buoyant $5.3 Billion dollar business (2022) which is slated to increase to $12.9 Billon dollars by 2027. This profit-driven military-industrial market is dominated by six “Defense Contractors” including Raytheon, Northrup Grunman, BAE Systems (plc), Boeing, Lockheed Martin and L3Harris Technologies.

According to Raytheon:

“The development of directed energy (DE) technology is used to counter the drone threat”.

While DEWs are largely intended for military use, so-called “non lethal” and/or “less lethal” Direct Energy Weapons are envisaged for so-called “Homeland Security applications”.

The Evidence: Were Direct Energy Weapons Used in Hawaii?

Images confirm the extent and nature of devastation and destruction. (see videos below).

They also suggest that the damage incurred was not attributable to “natural causes”.

The evidence suggests that Direct Energy Weapons (DEW) may have been used (yet to be fully ascertained) and that the acts of destruction were deliberate.

Video: Houses are Targeted? Green Trees Remain Untouched

Burned out houses between green trees? pic.twitter.com/j8OfYh7Oad

— David Wolfe (@DavidWolfe) August 16, 2023

Note the above CBS report points to “A Wildfire Disaster”.

Thousands of families have lost their homes, burnt to the ground. The devastating impacts resulting from possible DEW attacks are not mentioned. The official statements point to “Natural Causes”:

“Can you imagine calling up a family that has just seen their home burn to the ground and offering to buy their land for below market value?

This is apparently happening in Hawaii right now on a massive scale.”

Michael Snyder, (August 17, 2023)

***

Among the six private companies of the military industrial complex, Raytheon and BAE Systems are also involved in ENMOD technologies on behalf of the U.S. Air Force.

There is a flourishing international market. DEWs are exported Worldwide.

The usage for so-called “Homeland Security applications” includes “non-lethal” civilian applications including Airport protection, riot controls, protection of infrastructure (see below).

A Citizens’ Criminal Investigation?

Are these so-called “non-lethal or “less lethal” DEWs available for acquisition or purchase by private sector and/or governmental entities?

A citizens’ investigation is required to establish what is behind this devastating process of destruction in Hawaii and in various parts of America.

Our thoughts today are with the people of Hawaii.

Below is an examination of the Direct Energy Weapons Market by:

Marketandmarkets.com

click image below to access the complete document:

Connect with Global Research

Cover image credit: US National Guard
Combined Joint Task Force 50 (CJTF-50) search, rescue and recovery elements conduct search operations of areas damaged by wildfires in Lahaina, Maui, Aug. 15, 2023. Members of CJTF-50 from the Hawaii Army and Air National Guard, U.S. Army Active Duty and Reserve are actively supporting Maui County authorities to provide immediate security, safety, and well-being to those affected by the wildfires to ensure unwavering support for the community of Maui and first responders. (U.S. Army National Guard photo by Staff Sgt. Matthew A. Foster)

Glyphosate: Cancer and Other Health Concerns

by Stacy Malkan, U.S. Right to Know
July 21, 2023

Glyphosate, a synthetic herbicide patented in 1974 by the Monsanto Company and now manufactured and sold by many companies in hundreds of products, has been associated with cancer and many other health concerns discussed in this fact sheet. Glyphosate is best known as the active ingredient in Roundup-branded herbicides, and the herbicide used with “Roundup Ready” genetically modified organisms (GMOs).

Herbicide tolerance is the most prevalent GMO trait engineered into food crops, with some 90% of corn and 94% of soybeans in the U.S. genetically engineered to tolerate herbicides, according to USDA data. A 2017 study found that Americans’ exposure to glyphosate grew by about 500 percent since Roundup Ready GMO crops were introduced in the U.S in 1996.

Why is Bayer taking glyphosate off the U.S. consumer market?

In July 2021, Monsanto owner Bayer AG said it would remove glyphosate-based herbicides from the U.S. consumer market by 2023 due to litigation. More than 100,000 people are suing Bayer alleging they developed non-Hodgkin lymphoma from exposure to the company’s glyphosate herbicides, such as Roundup. We are posting documents released via discovery on our Monsanto Papers page.

Glyphosate will still be used in large quantities in agriculture in the U.S. Reformulated versions of Roundup brand herbicides without glyphosate will also remain on the market, but may contain other chemicals of concern. For example, one of the active ingredients in “Roundup for Lawns” is dicamba, a chemical that can damage non-target plants and crops.

How much glyphosate is used around the world?

According to a February 2016 study, glyphosate is the most widely used agricultural chemical: “In the U.S., no pesticide has come remotely close to such intensive and widespread use.” Findings include:

Americans applied 1.8 million tons of glyphosate (or 1.6 billion kilograms) from its introduction in 1974 to 2014.
Worldwide, 9.5 million tons (or 8.6 billion kilograms) of the chemical has been sprayed on fields —enough to spray nearly half a pound of Roundup on every cultivated acre of land in the world.
Glyphosate use has risen almost 15-fold since Roundup Ready GMO crops (genetically engineered to tolerate glyphosate) were introduced in the mid 1990s.

In the U.S., approximately 281 million pounds of glyphosate were applied to 298 million acres annually, on average, from 2012 to 2016, according to the Environmental Protection Agency. The most glyphosate was applied to soybean (117.4 million pounds annually), corn (94.9 million pounds annually), and cotton (20 million pounds annually). Many citrus fruits, including grapefruit, oranges and lemons, and field crops such as soybeans, corn and cotton have high percentages of their acres treated with glyphosate.

What do scientists and health care providers say about glyphosate?

Many scientists, health care professionals and public interest groups have raised concern about the health impacts of glyphosate. Here are some key statements:

Statement by the International Federation of Gynecology and Obstetrics (FIGO) Reproductive and Environmental Health Committee: “We recommend that glyphosate exposure to populations should end with a full global phase out.” (2019)
Essay in Journal of Epidemiology and Community Health: “Is it time to reassess safety standards for glyphosate based herbicides?” (2017)
Consensus statement in Environmental Health Journal: “Concerns over use of glyphosate-based herbicides and risks associated with exposures: a consensus statement” (2016)

Monsanto owner Bayer AG maintains that glyphosate and glyphosate-based herbicides are safe when used as directed and do not cause cancer. “Glyphosate is one of the most studied herbicides in the world – and, like all crop protection products, it is subject to rigorous testing and oversight by regulatory authorities,” Bayer states on its website. “There is an extensive body of research on glyphosate and glyphosate-based herbicides… that confirm that glyphosate and our glyphosate-based formulated products can be used safely and do not cause cancer.”

Internal Monsanto documents, investigative journalism and independent research have established that Monsanto used many tactics over decades to manipulate the scientific record on glyphosate and that regulatory agencies relied on poorly conducted studies and insufficient data.

How much glyphosate is in our bodies?

More than 80% of urine samples drawn from children and adults in a U.S. health study contained glyphosate, according to the U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Out of 2,310 urine samples taken from Americans intended to be representative of the population, CDC found that 1,885 contained detectable levels of glyphosate. Scientists described this finding as “disturbing” and “concerning.”

A 2017 study in JAMA found that Americans’ exposure to glyphosate increased approximately 500 percent since Roundup Ready GMO crops were introduced in 1996.

While it is clear that most Americans are being exposed to glyphosate, the literature on glyphosate exposure levels, especially in children, remains limited, according to a 2020 paper in Environmental Health. “Without more data collected in a standardized way, parsing out the potential relationship between glyphosate exposure and disease will not be possible,” the researchers concluded.

Why are corporate studies a problem?

Regulators in Europe and the United States, Canada and elsewhere have repeatedly affirmed the corporate assertions of glyphosate safety. In making determinations about safety, these regulators have relied in part on tests that are conducted by or for the companies that have not been published or peer reviewed.

The corporate studies have long been kept secret, even by regulators. But in Europe, litigation by a group of European Parliament lawmakers led to the release of dozens of such studies. More than 50 of those corporate studies were analyzed in 2021 by independent scientists from the Institute of Cancer Research, Department of Medicine at the Medical University of Vienna, Armen Nersesyan and Siegfried Knasmueller.

Their goal was to determine if the industry studies comply with current international guidelines for chemical testing. The researchers concluded that the bulk of the industry studies were outdated and did not meet current guidelines. An array of shortcomings and flaws were found in the studies, rendering most of them unreliable. Of the 53 studies submitted to regulators by the companies, only two were acceptable under current internationally recognized scientific standards, Knasmueller said.

Glyphosate and cancer: What do scientific and regulatory agencies say?

The scientific literature and regulatory conclusions regarding cancer links to glyphosate and glyphosate-based herbicides show a mix of findings, making the safety of the herbicide a hotly debated subject.

In 2015, the World Health Organization’s International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC) classified glyphosate as “probably carcinogenic to humans” after reviewing years of published and peer-reviewed scientific studies. The team of international scientists found there was a particular association between glyphosate and non-Hodgkin lymphoma.

U.S. agencies: At the time of the IARC classification, the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) was conducting a registration review. The EPA’s Cancer Assessment Review Committee (CARC) issued a report in 2016 concluding that glyphosate was “not likely to be carcinogenic to humans” at doses relevant to human health. In December 2016, the EPA convened a Scientific Advisory Panel to review the report; members were divided in their assessment of EPA’s work, with some finding the EPA erred in how it evaluated certain research. Additionally, the EPA’s Office of Research and Development determined that EPA’s Office of Pesticide Programs had not followed proper protocols in its evaluation of glyphosate, and said the evidence could be deemed to support a “likely” carcinogenic or “suggestive” evidence of carcinogenicity classification. Nevertheless the EPA issued a draft report on glyphosate in December 2017 continuing to hold that the chemical is not likely to be carcinogenic. In April 2019, the EPA reaffirmed its position that glyphosate poses no risk to public health. But earlier that same month, the U.S. Agency for Toxic Substances and Disease Registry (ATSDR) reported links between glyphosate and cancer: “numerous studies reported risk ratios greater than one for associations between glyphosate exposure and risk of non-Hodgkin’s lymphoma or multiple myeloma,” the report said.

The EPA issued an Interim Registration Review Decision in January 2020 with updated information about its position on glyphosate, continuing to hold the position that glyphosate is unlikely to cause cancer. In June 2022, the Ninth Circuit Court of Appeals rejected EPA’s decision. EPA withdrew its interim decision in September 2022 and the agency will start over in its review.

European Union: The European Food Safety Authority and the European Chemicals Agency have said glyphosate is not likely to be carcinogenic to humans. A March 2017 report by environmental and consumer groups argued that regulators relied improperly on research that was directed and manipulated by the chemical industry. A 2019 study found that Germany’s Federal Institute for Risk Assessment report on glyphosate, which found no cancer risk, included sections of text that had been plagiarized from Monsanto studies. In February 2020, reports surfaced that 24 scientific studies submitted to the German regulators to prove the safety of glyphosate came from a large German laboratory that has been accused of fraud and other wrongdoing.

In June 2021, the European Union’s (EU) Assessment Group on Glyphosate (AGG) issued an 11,000-page draft report concluding that glyphosate is safe when used as directed and does not cause cancer. The finding is based in part on a dossier of roughly 1,500 studies submitted to European regulators by the “Glyphosate Renewal Group (GRG),” a collection of companies that includes Monsanto owner Bayer AG. The companies are seeking the renewal of the EU authorization of glyphosate. Current authorization in Europe expires in 2023.

WHO/FAO Joint Meeting on Pesticide Residues determined in 2016 that glyphosate was unlikely to pose a carcinogenic risk to humans from exposure through the diet, but this finding was tarnished by conflict of interest concerns after it came to light that the chair and co-chair of the group also held leadership positions with the International Life Sciences Institute, a group funded in part by Monsanto and one of its lobbying organizations.

California OEHHA: In March 2017, the California Environmental Protection Agency’s Office of Environmental Health Hazard Assessment confirmed it would add glyphosate to California’s Proposition 65 list of chemicals known to cause cancer. Monsanto sued to block the action but the case was dismissed. In a separate case, the court found that California could not require cancer warnings for products containing glyphosate. On June 12, 2018, a U.S. District Court denied the California Attorney General’s request for the court to reconsider the decision. The court found that California could only require commercial speech that disclosed “purely factual and uncontroversial information,” and the science surrounding glyphosate carcinogenicity was not proven.

Agricultural Health Study: A long-running U.S. government-backed prospective cohort study of farm families in Iowa and North Carolina has not found any connections between glyphosate use and non-Hodgkin lymphoma, but the researchers reported that “among applicators in the highest exposure quartile, there was an increased risk of acute myeloid leukemia (AML) compared with never users…” The most recent published update to the study was made public in late 2017.

What health problems are linked to glyphosate exposure?

Cancer

July 2023 study in Chemosphere: Researchers from the University of California, Berkeley, conducted a systematic review of mechanistic studies on glyphosate and glyphosate-based formulations to evaluate them for the 10 key characteristics of cancer hazard identification. Data analysis revealed “strong evidence” for five of the key characteristics of carcinogenicity. An in-depth analyses of genotoxicity and endocrine disruption revealed “strong and consistent positive findings.” The researchers wrote, “Our findings strengthen the mechanistic evidence that glyphosate is a probable human carcinogen and provide biological plausibility for previously reported cancer associations in humans, such as non-Hodgkin lymphoma.”

March 2023 Leukemia and Lymphoma journal: Pooled study of three case-control studies found statistically significant increased risk and confirmed an association between Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma (NHL), including sub type hairy cell leukemia, and exposure to certain herbicides including glyphosate.

A February 2020 paper in Environmental Health presents a comprehensive review of chronic exposure animal carcinogenicity studies of glyphosate. It reports toxicologically plausible pathways for why glyphosate may cause various cancers in rodents.

In April 2019, the U.S. Agency for Toxic Substances and Disease Registry issued its draft toxicological profile for glyphosate, reporting an increased cancer risk from glyphosate exposures. Emails released via court proceedings show officials at EPA and Monsanto tried to hinder the ATSDR report. (The ATSDR profile is now final, and raises concerns about cancer.)

March 2019 study published in the International Journal of Epidemiology analyzed data from more than 30,000 farmers and agricultural workers from studies done in France, Norway and the U.S., and reported links between glyphosate and diffuse large B-cell lymphoma.

February 2019 meta analysis in Mutation Research/Reviews in Mutation Research reports a “compelling link” between glyphosate-based herbicides and non-Hodgkin lymphoma. Three of the study authors were members of the EPA’s scientific advisory panel on glyphosate who have stated publicly that the EPA failed to follow proper scientific practices in its glyphosate assessment.

A January 2019 analysis in Environmental Sciences Europe argues that the U.S. EPA’s classification of glyphosate disregarded substantial scientific evidence of genotoxicity the negative impact on a cell’s genetic material) associated with weed killing products such as Roundup.

For an analysis released in July 2021, researchers from the University of Vienna analyzed 53 glyphosate studies submitted to regulators by pesticide companies found that most of the studies do not comply with modern international standards for scientific rigor, and lack the types of tests most able to detect cancer risks. The same researchers reported in November 2021 that only two of the 11 studies Monsanto submitted to EU regulators were deemed “reliable.”

In June 2022, the Ninth Circuit Court of Appeals rejected EPA’s decision that glyphosate likely poses no “unreasonable risk” to the environment and human health. In September 2022 the U.S. EPA withdrew its interim decision on glyphosate.

Endocrine disruption, fertility and reproductive concerns

July 2023 study in Environmental Pollution investigated the potential effects of low levels of glyphosate exposure from weaning to adult life in male Wistar rats on hypothalamic-pituitary-thyroid (HPT) axis function. Various changes suggest that glyphosate “may affect several steps of HPT axis regulation at the transcriptional level in an age-dependent manner and alter the morphometric parameters of the thyroid gland and TH synthesis, with potential repercussions in the TH-target organs.”

November 2022 paper in the Review of Economic Studies discusses glyphosate exposure and birth outcomes of populations surrounding GMO soy growing regions in Brazil. “We document a significant deterioration in birth outcomes for populations downstream from locations that are likely to have increased relatively more the use of glyphosate … average increase in glyphosate use in the sample during the 2000-2010 period led to an increase of 5% of the average in the infant mortality rate.”

October 2022 study in Environmental Health found glyphosate in 99% of pregnant women in a Midwestern cohort. Higher maternal levels in the first trimester were associated with lower birth weight, higher NICU admission risk. See also Indiana University School of Medicine news release.

In a March 2021 paper in Frontiers in Endocrinology, researchers that glyphosate is detected in the urine of residents of rural and urban environments and there is a correlation between “farmers’ exposure to glyphosate-based herbicides and altered thyroid hormone levels or incidence of thyroid pathologies.”

October 2020 paper in Chemosphere journal is the first comprehensive review consolidating the mechanistic evidence on glyphosate as an endocrine-disrupting chemical (EDC). The paper concludes that the world’s most widely used herbicide meets at least eight of the 10 key characteristics of EDCs, as proposed in an expert consensus statement published in 2020. See also article by USRTK.

July 2020 paper published in Molecular and Cellular Endocrinology, Are glyphosate and glyphosate-based herbicides endocrine disruptors that alter female fertility?” summarizes the endocrine-disrupting effects of exposure to glyphosate and glyphosate-based herbicides at low or “environmentally relevant” doses in the female reproductive tissues. Data suggesting that, at low doses, glyphosate-based herbicides may have adverse effects on the female reproductive tract fertility are discussed.

June 2020 paper in Veterinary and Animal Science concludes that some ingredients of glyphosate-based herbicides appear to act as reproductive toxicants, having a wide range of effects on both the male and female reproductive systems, including endocrine disruption, tissue damage and dysfunction of gametogenesis.

June 2020 paper in Environmental Pollution finds that neonatal exposure to glyphosate-based herbicides decreased cell proliferation and altered the expression of molecules that control proliferation and development in the uterus, potentially affecting the female reproductive health of sheep.

July 2020 study in Toxicology and Applied Pharmacology found indications that “chronic low-level exposure to glyphosate alters the ovarian proteome and may ultimately impact ovarian function.”

September 2020 study in Food and Chemical Toxicology reports that perinatal exposure to a glyphosate-based herbicide or glyphosate “disrupted critical hormonal and uterine molecular targets during the receptive state, possibly associated with the implantation failures.”

A 2018 ecological and population study conducted in Argentina found high concentrations of glyphosate in the soil and dust in agricultural areas that also reported higher rates of spontaneous abortion and congenital abnormalities in children, suggesting a link between environmental exposure to glyphosate and reproductive problems. No other relevant sources of pollution were identified.

A 2018 rat study by Argentinian researchers linked low-level perinatal glyphosate exposures to impaired female reproductive performance and congenital anomalies in the next generation of offspring.

A birth cohort study in Indiana published in 2017 – the first study of glyphosate exposure in US pregnant women using urine specimens as a direct measure of exposure – found detectable levels of glyphosate in more than 90% of the pregnant women tested and found the levels were significantly correlated with shortened pregnancy lengths.

2011 study in Reproductive Toxicology reported that glyphosate impairs male offspring reproductive development by disrupting gonadotropin expression.

2009 study in Toxicology found that glyphosate-based herbicides are toxic and endocrine disruptors in human cell lines.

Liver disease

A 2023 prospective cohort study using data from the Center for the Health Assessment of Mothers and Children of Salinas (CHAMACOS) reports a strong association between glyphosate and AMPA levels in the urine of 4-year-old and 14-year-old Hispanic children and markers of damage in the liver indicative of future non-alcoholic fatty liver disease and metabolic syndrome. See also reporting in Inside Climate News.

A 2019 study based on urinary analysis for glyphosate reported that glyphosate excretion is significantly higher in patients with nonalcoholic steatohepatitis (NASH) who are considered to be at a higher risk of fibrosis progression and development to cirrhosis and hepatocellular carcinoma.

A 2017 study associated chronic, very low-level glyphosate exposures to non-alcoholic fatty liver disease in rats. According to the researchers, the results “imply that chronic consumption of extremely low levels of a GBH formulation (Roundup), at admissible glyphosate-equivalent concentrations, are associated with marked alterations of the liver proteome and metabolome,” the biomarkers for NAFLD

Kidney disease

The American Association for the Advancement of Science awarded two Sri Lankan scientists, Drs. Channa Jayasumana and Sarath Gunatilake, the 2019 Award for Scientific Freedom and Responsibility for their work to “investigate a possible connection between glyphosate and chronic kidney disease under challenging circumstances.” The scientists reported that glyphosate plays a key role in transporting heavy metals to the kidneys of those drinking contaminated water, leading to high rates of chronic kidney disease in farming communities. See papers in SpringerPlus (2015), BMC Nephrology (2015), Environmental Health (2015), International Journal of Environmental Research and Public Health (2014).

The AAAS award to the scientists was suspended amidst a fierce opposition campaign by pesticide industry allies to undermine the work of the scientists. After a review, the AAAS reinstated the award.

Microbiome disruption

November 2020 paper in the Journal of Hazardous Materials reports that approximately 54 percent of species in the core of the human gut microbiome are “potentially sensitive” to glyphosate. With a “large proportion” of bacteria in the gut microbiome susceptible to glyphosate, the intake of glyphosate “may severely affect the composition of the human gut microbiome,” the authors said in their paper. See also reporting by USRTK.

A 2020 literature review of glyphosate’s effects on the gut microbiome concludes that, “glyphosate residues on food could cause dysbiosis, given that opportunistic pathogens are more resistant to glyphosate compared to commensal bacteria.” The paper continues, “Glyphosate may be a critical environmental trigger in the etiology of several disease states associated with dysbiosis, including celiac disease, inflammatory bowel disease and irritable bowel syndrome. Glyphosate exposure may also have consequences for mental health, including anxiety and depression, through alterations in the gut microbiome.”

A 2018 rat study conducted by the Ramazzini Institute reported that low-dose exposures to Roundup at levels considered safe significantly altered the gut microbiota in some of the rat pups.

Another 2018 study reported that higher levels of glyphosate administered to mice disrupted the gut microbiota and caused anxiety and depression-like behaviors.

Neurotoxicity

A large nationwide study published in the journal NeuroToxicology (December 2021) reports that “several neurotoxic pesticide exposures estimated using residential location were associated with statistically significant increased risk of ALS (amyotrophic lateral sclerosis). These include the herbicides 2, 4-D and glyphosate, and the insecticides carbaryl and chlorpyrifos.” ALS is a progressive nervous system disease that affects nerve cells in the brain and spinal cord, causing loss of muscle control.

Anemia

A July 2023 study in Environmental Science and Pollution Research, Taiwanese researchers analyzed data from the 2013-2014 National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey (NHANES) of 1466 adults to explore the relationship between glyphosate exposure and erythrocyte profiles. The study found a “significant negative association between urinary glyphosate levels and hemoglobin and hematocrit … and provides “preliminary evidence of a plausible association between glyphosate exposure and anemia in a subset of the adult population in the United States.”

What are the environmental impacts of glyphosate?

Harm to bees and monarch butterflies

A 2023 study reports that glyphosate impairs learning in bumblebees. See news coverage in Phys.org.

A 2018 study reported that glyphosate damaged the beneficial gut bacteria in honeybees and made them more prone to deadly infections.

Research from China suggests that honeybee larvae grew more slowly and died more often when exposed to glyphosate.

A 2015 study that found field-levels of exposure impaired the cognitive capacities of honeybees.

Research from 2017 correlated glyphosate use with reduced populations of monarch butterflies, possibly due to reductions in milkweed, the main food source for monarch butterflies.

Why are people suing Bayer over glyphosate?

More than 100,000 people have filed suit against Monsanto Company (now Bayer) alleging that exposure to Roundup herbicide caused them or their loved ones to develop non-Hodgkin lymphoma (NHL), and that Monsanto covered up the risks. As part of the discovery process, Monsanto has had to turn over millions of pages of internal records. See our Monsanto Papers page for documents released during the trials. The first three trials ended in large awards to plaintiffs for liability and damages, with juries ruling that Monsanto’s weed killer was a substantial contributing factor in causing them to develop NHL. Bayer is appealing the rulings. The U.S. Supreme Court has so far upheld the rulings against Bayer.

Monsanto influence over research

In March 2017, the federal court judge unsealed some internal Monsanto documents that raised new questions about Monsanto’s influence on the EPA process and about the research regulators rely on. The documents suggest that Monsanto’s long-standing claims about the safety of glyphosate and Roundup do not necessarily rely on sound science as the company asserts, but on efforts to manipulate the science.

More information about scientific interference

Internal documents reveal pesticide industry science denial and manipulation: glyphosate case study, by Stacy Malkan et al. Excerpt from Merchants of Poison report (December 2022)
Whistleblowers Expose Corruption in EPA Chemical Safety Office, by Sharon Lerner (July 2021)
The Monsanto Papers – Deadly Secrets, Corporate Corruption and One Man’s Search for Justice, by Carey Gillam (March 2021)
The Monsanto Papers: Poisoning the Scientific Well, by Leemon McHenry (2018)
Roundup litigation discovery documents: implications for public health and journal ethics, by Sheldon Krimsky and Carey Gillam (June 2018)
Letter to Nature by Stéphane Horel and Stéphane Foucart (March 2018)

Why is desiccation of wheat and other crops a problem?

Some farmers use glyphosate on non-GMO crops such as wheat, barley, oats, and lentils to dry down the crop ahead of harvest in order to accelerate the harvest. This practice, known as desiccation, may be a significant source of dietary exposure to glyphosate.

How much glyphosate is in our food?

Despite having annual pesticide residue testing programs for more than 30 years, the USDA U.S. FDA mostly skipped testing food for glyphosate until after criticism from the Government Accountability Office in 2014. The USDA said it would start testing but then dropped the plan in 2017. Internal government documents obtained by U.S. Right to Know show USDA had planned to start testing over 300 samples of corn syrup for glyphosate in April 2017; but the agency killed the project before it started. FDA began a limited testing program in 2016, but the effort was fraught with controversy and internal difficulties and the program was suspended in September 2016. The FDA did later resume limited testing.

One FDA chemist found alarming levels of glyphosate in many samples of U.S. honey, levels that were technically illegal because there have been no allowable levels established for honey by the EPA. Here is a recap of news about glyphosate found in food:

October 2018: FDA issued its first-ever report showing the results of its glyphosate residue in food testing. The FDA said no residues of glyphosate were found in milk or eggs, but residues were found in 63.1 percent of corn samples and 67 percent of soybean samples, according to FDA data. The agency did not disclose in that report the findings of glyphosate in oatmeal or honey products.
April 2018: internal FDA emails indicated the agency had trouble finding food sample without traces of glyphosate.
Sept. 2016: FDA found glyphosate in US honey at double the levels allowed in the EU, and FDA tests confirm oatmeal and baby foods contain glyphosate.
Nov. 2016: FDA chemist found glyphosate in honey in Iowa at 10X higher levels than allowed in EU. Also in November, independent testing by consumer group Food Democracy Now found glyphosate in Cheerios, oatmeal cookies, Ritz crackers and other popular brands at high levels.

What mixtures of glyphosate and other pesticides are in our food?

USDA data from 2016 shows detectable pesticide levels in 85% of more than 10,000 foods sampled, everything from mushrooms to grapes to green beans. The government says there are little to no health risks, but some scientists say there is little to no data to back up that claim. See Chemicals on our food: When ‘safe’ may not really be safe.

In 2020, a group of FDA scientists published a research paper examining pesticide residue data collected from 2009-2017. The scientists said: “In this study, results for over 56,000 human food samples collected and analyzed under the FDA pesticide residue monitoring program between fiscal years (FY) 2009 to 2017 were reviewed to identify trends not apparent in annual reports. The overwhelming majority of these samples, 98.0% of domestic and 90.9% of import human foods, were compliant with federal standards. Although herbicides may be more widely used, the 10 most frequently detected residues were insecticides and fungicides. On a yearly basis, the violation rate for imported samples is 3-5 times higher than the rate for domestic samples. The import violation rate increased over time, as did the number of residues detected. Targeted sampling of foods with higher commodity-specific violation rates appears to be a major contributor to the increased violation rate. Mismatches between US tolerances and international MRLs can lead to violations; this was especially marked for rice. Overall, the majority of violations are due to residues of pesticides not authorized for use in the US (lack of tolerances). While DDT continues to persist in the environment and was found in 2.2% of domestic samples and 0.6% of imported samples, 42.3% of DDT-positive samples were below the limit of quantitation. The trends and analyses identified in this paper may help FDA plan future sampling and continue to protect the food supply.”

Monsanto owner Bayer AG maintains that residues of glyphosate in food are not harmful at levels approved by the EPA. A 2021 paper written by longtime Bayer (former Monsanto) scientist John Vicini and published in Comprehensive Reviews in Food Science and Food Safety states that “dietary exposures to glyphosate are within established safe limits.”

For a complete history of the use of glyphosate, including regulatory action and inaction, scientific controversies, human and environmental impact data, read Whitewash: The Story of a Weed Killer, Cancer and the Corruption of Science, winner of the 2018 Rachel Carson Book Award from the Society of Environmental Journalists. See also USRTK’s report on what internal corporate documents reveal about the tactics Monsanto and Bayer used to defend glyphosate. Merchants of Poison: How Monsanto Sold the World on a Toxic Pesticides by Stacy Malkan, with Anna Lappe and Kendra Klein, PhD.

This fact sheet was originally written by Carey Gillam and is regularly updated by USRTK staff

Connect with U.S. Right to Know

Cover image credit: maxmann

Dependency on the State Is the Core of the Takeover Plot of Humanity

by Gary D. Barnett
August 16, 2023

“It’s not an endlessly expanding list of rights — the ‘right’ to health care, the ‘right’ to food and housing. That’s not freedom, that’s dependency. Those aren’t rights, those are the rations of slavery — hay and a barn for human cattle.”

~ P.J. O’Rourke

Most of you have entered the final stage of your voluntary acceptance of mass slavery, and that slavery is fully dependent on the concept of fear, compliance to a false ‘authority,’ and total dependence on the very tyrant called government, whose plan is to control the world by controlling the common, ignorant, and apathetic collective crowd called ‘the people.’ The most vital component of this ‘Great Reset’ agenda, is for the majority to be dependent on the State, and that phenomenon is now close at hand. The final foundation of all restriction, control of financial and monetary transactions, and control of movement, will hinge on the farcical fraud called manmade ‘climate change.’ No worries however, because many other excuses, and aspects of control and manipulation will be used as well, but at this point, the ‘climate change’ hoax is the lynchpin of the future takeover plot.

The speed of this agenda has accelerated far past earlier time projections, and I believe this to be due to more exposure by the few who understand what is actually happening, to explain all the contradiction, lies, and propaganda, that have inundated society for the past few decades. At this point, the somewhat panicked ruling class and its pawns in government, have vastly escalated their terror campaign worldwide, in order to shut down dissent before it can gain too much ground. This campaign of terror is meant to drive the tool of fear to a much higher degree, so as to be able to accomplish takeover goals with less resistance. As mentioned earlier, the main focus of this increased intimidation is based on the fake ‘climate change’ model.

One obvious example of this fear campaign, is the purposely heightened threat of so-called weather anomalies, especially what are conspicuous (intentionally set) fires burning at ridiculously high temperatures, destroying particular properties, towns, cities, and valuable mineral-laden land holdings. These unnatural fire outbreaks began in earnest in early spring, and have continued incessantly since that time. What began in Canada, has now overtaken the Hawaiian island of Maui, among many other areas around the world, and the devastation is incredible. Only psychopaths could perpetrate such evil as this, but the coverup and blame on bogus ‘climate change,’ has been accepted by most of course, and promulgated by the ruling class, and every State-owned or controlled mainstream media outlet. The attack on all truthtellers claiming these horrendous fires to be intentionally set, was instant, without any legitimate evidence to the contrary to back their plotted refutations, and in fact, this universal response was certainly coordinated.

Now there is a fight to see who will take this land in Maui, and by take, I mean exactly that. It has been exposed that many are attempting to buy and gain contracts to build a new ‘smart city’ on this hallowed ground, and many big players are involved, including Blackrock.. Those claiming to help, people like Jeff Bezos and Oprah Winfrey, are already heavily involved, and the governor of Hawaii, Josh Green, has taken control of this, and not to the benefit of those residents and business owners who lost everything. (As an aside, the houses and property of Bezos and Winfrey magically escaped the fire?) This evil governor, a true controlling politician, said, and before all bodies have been recovered, or any funerals for the dead have taken place, “I’m already thinking of ways for the state to acquire that land so that we can put it into workforce housing, to put it back into families, or make it open spaces in perpetuity as a memorial to the people who were lost,” Democrat Gov. Josh Green said. What about all those who own that land the ‘State’ is going to force buy? (Steal)

But let us not stop here, as during this same year, there were unbelievable train derailments. most all of which involved very poisonous, and toxic materials, the most noted of course, being the purposely released (due to deliberate fire-setting) noxious chemicals in East Palestine, Ohio, that poisoned much of the northeast U.S. There were many more incidents of this nature as well.

As to extreme fear-mongering, weather ‘services’ nationwide, have intentionally changed all reporting in order to strike extreme fear in the collective herd called the ‘citizenry.’ Fantastic claims of record heat, which are bogus in most every case, are rampant. Instead of greens and darker muted colors to show heat, dark reds and purples just so happen to be the new norm across the entire country, and simultaneously; a coincidence certainly? In addition, the heat is not just hot, it is now “boiling” according to these weather idiots. These descriptions, while ludicrous and plotted, are purposely meant to cause undue alarm in an uninformed ‘public’ with little or no desire or effort to understand any truth.

All of these things, and an endless supply of other threats, including the threat of nuclear war, of financial collapse, of food shortages, of extreme inflation leading to extreme prices, to new ‘pandemic’ emergencies, to travel restrictions, lockdowns, monitoring of all transactions, and of total digitization of the economy in order to control all, are now constant. The end of cash is being pursued aggressively, and the replacement by central bank digital currency (CBDC) is looming in the near future. This agenda too, has recently accelerated greatly, indicating that the ruling element of society is attempting to expand its control mechanisms more quickly so as to avoid any pushback. Given what is happening in open view, the great increase of intentionally-structured disastrous events, the massive transfer of wealth and property, the government’s aggressive stance immediately following every manufactured ‘weather event’ or so-called ‘natural’ emergency, and the total disregard for life and personal property, how long will it be until this takeover plot becomes fully entrenched in reality?

All of these events are meant to make the average ‘citizen’ dependent on the State. The more dependency, the easier to control. When the bulk of society cannot or will not take care of themselves, will not be responsible for their own lives and freedom, will not fight back in their own defense, and voluntarily choose to acquiesce to authority and State relief instead of taking any personal responsibility, what will become of this country?

It will be very telling to watch this State terrorism that has been released on Maui, and how the people respond. Will they give up their homes and land that was destroyed by and due to evil forces, or will they demand to keep and hold their property? Will they disallow this totalitarian scum called a governor from his nefarious U.N. plans, and keep what is theirs? Or will they simply allow the State’s political class to do as they please with everything they have deliberately destroyed, and become wards (slaves) of the State?

Once mass dependence is in place, there will no longer be any chance of a free society. The State seeks to control all, and the way to accomplish that heinous mission, is to make the populace at large completely impotent, so that they have not the ability or drive to fight back. Total dependency is key to any takeover conspiracy by the ruling class and its State thugs, and many feigned threats and so-called emergencies will erupt on a regular basis going forward. This is without doubt in my opinion, so believe nothing, trust no State representative at any level, trust no mainstream media, and question everything!

“Between the government which does evil and the people who accept it – there is a certain shameful solidarity.”

~ Author: Victor Hugo

Reference links:

A message to Maui … The truth may shock you!

Canada fires four times more toxic

California firestorms

Lahaina rebuild scheme

Additional government complicity in Lahaina fires

Hawaii governor wants to swoop in and buy up Lahaina

East Palestine, Ohio intentional chemical fire corruption

Connect with Gary D. Barnett

Cover image credit: stevepb

Michael Tellinger With Reiner Fuellmich: ‘One Small Town’ vs the Globalist Agenda’s ’15-Minute Cities’ — On Creating a Life Outside the Enslaving Government Systems

TCTL editor’s note:

Below, you will find a conversation between international attorney (US & Germany) Dr. Reiner Fuellmich, attorney/economist Dexter Lejay Ryneveldt from South Africa, & Michael Tellinger (founder of Ubuntu and One Small Town intiatives) also from South Africa. Also in attendance is Emil Borg, the new One Small Town (OST) ambassador for Sweden.

As some of the readers here will know, the One Small Town (OST) initiative has gone through many challenging phases over the past 17 years, learning from failures and gaining wisdom through discussion and experience of many of its supporters. Many years of trial and error — blood, sweat and tears — have gone into the creation of this OST model.

Those of us who have lived long lives and have experienced the falling apart, again and again, of our work and our dreams, know what it takes to remain trusting and persistent in spite of the odds.

In this interview, Michael presents the basic details of what One Small Town (OST) initiative is, its history and its evolution from the Ubuntu Contributionism vision. He also discusses the new digital Infinity token and explains that it differs from cryptocurrency coins, and that they are keeping it separate from the current global financial system.

Reiner and Dexter asked some key questions during this interview and will be doing a follow-up interview with Michael after they have the chance to do additional research and look into the details of the OST initiative.

As Reiner said in the interview:

“The one thing that most people, when it comes to setting up your own self-sufficient systems, have been worried the most about is what do we do about the monetary system.”

As this conversation is of great importance to many of us, the follow-up interview will be posted here at TCTL when it is available.

Below the video is a basic description provided by ICIC (International Crimes Investigative Committee). The video can be found at ICIC channels at Odysee and Rumble.

I have added show notes and a transcript to make review of this information easier. This is a lot of information for most of us to take in. You’ll likely have your own questions about this initiative. Some may want to join the One Small Town initiative and/or offer support to this vision by purchasing Infinity tokens.

Following the transcript, you will find links to One Small Town and Michael Tellinger websites where you can do further research.

My thanks go to paying substack supporters and others who have made donations via the donation page at here at TCTL. You make this work and the maintenance of this website possible, providing access to thousands of readers around the world.

~ Kathleen Stilwell, editor & curator, Truth Comes to Light

One Small Town vs. 15 Minute Prisons

by Dr. Reiner Fuellmich, ICIC
with Michael Tellinger, Dexter Lejay Ryneveldt & Emil Borg
August 14, 2023

In this episode of ICIC, Dr. Reiner Fuellmich talks with Michael Tellinger, a scientist, author, explorer, humanitarian founder of the ‘One Small Town‘ initiative, as well as Emil Borg, New National Ambassador for One Small Town Sweden, and Dexter Ryneveldt, lawyer and economist in South Africa: possible solutions to help free ourselves from the dependencies of the systems and live a dignified and free life.

Especially in the so-called Corona pandemic with its inhumane measures, it became abundantly clear that the prevailing governmental systems have nothing good in mind for humanity and that they have long been pursuing a subtle global agenda to install totalitarian mechanisms. This is to make humanity controllable and fully dependent on their system at their will.

These brutal procedures have made many people wake up rather uncomfortably, and question the authorities as well as the reality in which we live.

Michael Tellinger presents the idea of the “One Small Town Initiative” in detail.

He has been involved with its development since 2005 and has dedicated all his time, possessions and manpower to this project, as he is completely convinced of this possibility of living together without depending on and being abused by a governmental system.

He talks about the beginnings of the ‘One Small Town’ project, formed from the so-called Ubuntu movement and Contributionism, a system in which people contribute their skills and talents for the benefit of the community. In this way, everyone can benefit from each other’s skills.

It’s about realizing how much power and potential a small town of several thousand people has, where everyone co-operates with everyone else at all levels instead of competing.

If the mindset changes, there is an infinite abundance of opportunities to live with each other, from growing food, to starting businesses, to creating property and to participate in these same local small town businesses.

The basis of this project lies in returning ownership to those, away from global world corporations, and towards those who provide and work to create real value.

Why is this kind of free coexistence impossible within the framework of political systems?

How exactly does the underlying exchange of goods and services work from an economic perspective?

Is this method feasible, and how does one manage not to fight against the system, but to create one’s own independence within the legal framework?

Where do one-small-town companies already exist?

What explains their rapid growth worldwide and how can people become part of these projects?

Transcript & Show Notes prepared by TCTL editor:

00:00:42

Introduction

Reiner:

Dear friends, today we will try and talk about, not the problems, but the solution to those problems that we’ve been talking about for so long — for at least three years.

Some people have been talking about these problems for even longer — those who have realized that we’ve been lied to by those who we used to trust.

But today we have Michael Tellinger from South Africa. We have Emil Borg from Sweden. And we have my friend and colleague Dexter Ryneveldt from South Africa to discuss how we can get away from under the thumb of the system and have much better lives than we do under the system.

So thank you very much for making the time. It’s an honor, and it’s a pleasure, of course, Michael, to have you. And same with you, Emil. It’s always fun to talk to you.

So what do you do in South Africa? You have been working on these solutions for, not just for the last three years, but for much longer, right?

00:01:50

The Evolution of Ubuntu Contributionism & One Small Town Philosophy

Michael:

Yes, I have, Reiner. Thank you very much. It’s great to meet you and I’m very excited to have this conversation with you. Thanks to Emil for setting this up. And great to meet you, Dexter, out here in South Africa as well.

Yes, look, the One Small Town initiative has been around for a long time. Initially I started talking about this idea in 2005 already and slowly but surely it evolved.

We’ve walked the talk, we’ve paid the price, we’ve — it’s taken blood, sweat and tears. Everything I’ve had. Everything I have. Every cent I’ve ever earned has been poured into this. So it’s been my lifelong passion the last two decades at least. And here we are.

Something that started as a crazy idea that everybody laughed at me. They wanted to beat me up for even suggesting these kind of crazy ideas. And it was was really a thing about people. It needed to evolve and also grow into a time when the level of consciousness was a little bit higher around the world.

And I think this, especially the whole COVID plandemic and the lockdown that people felt attacks, they felt the abuse of governments, they felt — they realized how abusive governments can be and how they can completely and utterly overstep their boundaries.

That helped a lot of people wake up, and it really — during the lockdown is when the One Small Town movement really exploded.

So just a little bit more background. So the One Small Town movement grew out of what I started calling Contributionism and the Ubuntu movement out in 2007, 2006-2007.

So it all started with the Ubuntu movement, with the idea called Contributionism: a system in which people contribute their skills and talents towards the benefit of their community, so that everybody benefits from everybody’s skills and talents. And it’s slowly but surely evolved, gotten better and stronger over time.

We also had a period that we went through politics. We got involved in politics in South Africa. I registered the Ubuntu Party in 2010. We participated in three elections — 2012, 2014 and 2016.

So in essence, I ran for president in 2014 during the national elections as the leader of the Ubuntu Party.

And I must tell you, that’s when I truly discovered how crooked the political arena is and how the entire outcome of the elections is prepared. It is laid out for us. It is not elected, it is selected.

And that taught me really to use the One Small Town philosophy. We then participated in the 2016 elections in South Africa again, but just in the municipal elections under the One Small Town banner. By then we’re in transition from trying to promote the philosophy of Ubuntu because it was a bit vague. And it turned into the One Small Town philosophy where you take small towns and you turn them around by waking people up and showing them that if they cooperate and collaborate, they can achieve so much more.

In fact, any small town of several thousand people has infinite potential to create abundance for themselves.

The only thing that people have to do is change the way they think. And start to, instead of competing against each other, start to cooperate and collaborate on every level — starting with growing food, starting as many businesses as they can, and creating the ownership of the businesses in our small towns.

The ownership start needs to come back to the people away from the large corporations, away from the multinational retailers, away from the multinationals that control everything.

And that’s where I realized in 2016 that this is most likely not going to happen on the political arena. And then we exited the political arena in 2016 and One Small Town became a non-political and nonprofit community development program. But since then it’s just exploded.

Just to add a little bit more before I stop yapping, the Ubuntu Party, actually with the philosophy of unity within community and people cooperating, and the whole philosophy of Contributionism — which I must say really appeals to people and still appeals to people around the world in larger and larger numbers because it’s such a simple, beautiful philosophy of people contributing towards their own prosperity.

The philosophy of Contributionism turned into the Ubuntu Party in a number of countries, so we had the Ubuntu Party in Canada, in the UK, in Australia. And we almost launched in the USA and that didn’t happen. The Canadian Ubuntu Party fell apart because of inner conflict, and then after the 2016 elections it became very clear that going into politics is not a solution.

You cannot inject a seed of consciousness into the political beast and think that the political beast is going to change.

But the important thing here is that we walk the talk. I walk the talk and therefore I have the experience to talk about all these things where most other people do not have these experiences.

The Failure of Intentional Communities

We also engaged with intentional communities around the world, whether it’s Esalen or Damanhur and other — many, many other communities that I met the founders of such communities around the world, only to realize that all of these communities are a huge disaster and a huge failure on every possible level.

And that’s where it just gave more and more strength and credence to the One Small Town initiative, which is completely and utterly different from any other community upliftment project or an initiative. And this is why it is suddenly growing around the world at such a rapid rate.

And that’s my little introduction, just to familiarize people with who I am and where I come from and what we’ve done in the last 17 years.

00:08:12

Reiner:

I think it’s great that I’m finally meeting someone who really knows what they’re talking about, because I’ve been propagating, and most people on our side of the fence have been propagating, the disconnection, the shutting ourselves off of the system — because the system is not only thoroughly infiltrated and utterly corrupt, therefore you can’t fix it, but it is also not worth fixing. Because it’s based on the wrong virtues. In fact, there are no virtues except materialism. And it’s fighting each other. It’s competition in the worst sense imaginable.

So I can’t wait to hear more about this because we all know that we cannot trust the global corporations. We cannot trust the global NGOs because they’re all run by the same very few, very evil, people.

And we also know — because I’ve been into politics as well, for about, I don’t know, a year maybe. And then I got out because I was totally frustrated. I realized this is totally corrupt because you’re part of the system when you enter politics.

So there’s no other way than to reimagine ourselves as free, independent, sovereign people who can do whatever they want. And we should do it for our own benefit, and not even think about that old rotten system that is now definitely coming apart. This whole house of cards is collapsing.

00:09:47

A New Paradigm: Competition Within a Cooperative Spirit

Michael:

I think what you said there is absolutely 100%. I resonate with every word you say.

It’s also important for me to stress that the One Small Town initiative is not a system — we’re not fighting the system.

You know, like you said, this the system that we’re in is broken. It cannot be fixed, and it’s not worth fixing. Because, as you said, it’s built on the rotten foundation. Foundation of greed, control, competition — destructive competition.

So within the One Small Town initiative, we still have competition, but it’s competition within a cooperative spirit. And that’s a completely different thing.

You know, as long as you have competition within a cooperative spirit then you achieve things. And the achievements that you create actually benefit the community. And not become a detriment to the community because now… So I’ll go into more detail later.

So I just want to stress to everybody watching this that the One Small Town initiative, we’re creating a new reality. We’re creating a new paradigm, a new system that will slowly but surely make the current system obsolete.

So there’s no violence, no opposition, no conflict. We don’t have to fight anyone or anything or any government. We just build this up in our small towns in larger and larger numbers across the world.

All the small towns are connected to each other through our centralized blockchain, our centralized exchange mechanisms and sharing and so forth. I’ll go into more detail about this.

And this is how we slowly but surely take back the power to the people and especially into the small towns.

Hubs of Innovation, Creativity & Investment Opportunity

So the small towns not only become hubs of innovation, of excitement, of technology, of creation, of happiness and everything else we’ve always imagined for our families and our future. But also the small towns suddenly become the most exciting investment opportunities for the conscious investors of the world.

Because once the investors with the billionaires and the millionaires realize that the Small Towns is a safe and ongoing investment opportunity with unlimited potential for growth, watch the stampede.

I anticipate that once the first billionaire or millionaire joins us and invests into a number of the cornerstone businesses in a Small Town, and… by doing that, really, exposes the opportunity.

Watch the stampede of conscious investors around the world move away from the very, very scary and questionable investment opportunities on the stock markets and the normal kind of investment opportunities that are running dry very, very quickly.

And when people realize that by investing into a community where you go into a partnership with an entire community, you’ve literally created for yourself a safe haven for you and your family. The safest town that you can imagine, where everybody works together because the businesses that we start all belong to us.

The profits that we make belong to us. They don’t go offshore to some shareholders sitting in a boardroom somewhere else. And the technology and innovation that we create is used to help the community, and not help a few rich individuals on some board, in some foreign country, that are selling us electricity and withholding medicines and cures for disease from us. And that goes for the supply of food, obviously.

So with the One Small Town initiative, we have a very small, very simple plan of action, how to initiate it, how to start it.

Start it small and grow it as quickly as we can. And as people see this excitement and the joy in their fellow town folk, that creates the domino effect that becomes unstoppable.

00:13:56

Two Worlds That Cannot Be Rejoined

Reiner:

And one more thing. In that previous discussion I just had with that person who — a nice guy — who believes in this utopian dream of reviving the public television and radio stations. I told him I think this is utopia, but I wish you the best of luck.

For me, however, the reality looks like this. And this is based on another interview I had the day before, which deals with a scientist who is now deeply into spirituality.

And it resonates with what some of the people from the Maori who we speak with in terms of bringing justice to the world. In terms of what they call restoring the peace for the world, it resonates with their spirituality.

We already have a divided world. We have two worlds. And I think that they cannot be rejoined. It’s impossible. Because the other side of the fence, they’re either in cahoots, knowingly in cahoots, with those who are pulling the strings, or too stupid — stupidity out of cowardice because they don’t dare use their brains. Or too stupid to realize that they’re being used for evil purposes.

So if they want to join us, if they want to join your One Small Town initiative, fine. Of course we’ll welcome them, but we don’t really worry about them. I don’t.

I think we should, on our side of the fence, focus on what’s good for us because we’re the ones who are creative.

It’s not the large corporations. Guess why they’re buying up all these small and medium sized businesses: because they don’t have their own creativity.

So let’s keep that power for ourselves and make use of it for our own benefit.

What is your take? Go ahead, Michael.

00:15:52

“If It’s Not Good for Everyone, It’s No Good at All.”

Michael:

So, Reiner, I just say, you know, if you have any questions about One Small Town, please shoot them at me. Because I feel, I don’t want to just feel like I’m talking away here. So if you have any specific questions about how does this work, how does that work, please feel free to shoot them at me.

But I just want to outline a little bit for your viewers that might be new to this. Go to our website onesmalltown.org. Watch all the videos. And you’ll also realize that some of the videos go back, you know, one year, two years, five years, 10 years, 15 years. Some of the videos are very old. And you’ll see how we’ve evolved, how this thing has grown and matured into what it is today.

That’s why it is so strong. That’s why I can speak with such confidence and passion about how this thing works. How One Small Town has all the solutions that you can think of for all the problems. And the solutions already built into the One Small Town model.

Not because I’m smart, but because the solutions have evolved over the years from the One Small Town model and just presented themselves.

Because if it’s not good for everyone, it’s no good at all. That’s one of our slogans.

And one of the other important slogans that’s really important for people to try and digest here is that we’re not fighting the system.

We’re not opposing anyone. We are using the tools of enslavement as tools of liberation. This is really important.

And this is why most, not most, every other sort of intentional community initiative that has been attempted around the world — even the great Osho out in California, in Oregon, was it? Which could have been an incredible solution, but the ego got in the way.

And every other intentional community that has started has been a failure. And we can say that because if it was a success we’d be using it. We’d be doing it and we’re not.

So One Small Town comes and brings together all the lessons we’ve learned from all the failed experiments and presents a very simple transitional phase for people that are sick and tired, people that resonate with what we are talking about here, people that know there’s a better way, there’s a better life.

That we can live in a utopian world. That Utopia is a good word. It’s not a bad word. It’s been made a bad word by the negative people in the world, right?

So yes, we’re striving and we’re creating a utopian world for ourselves. And this is a step-by-step introduction of how to get from here to there. And it does not have to take a long time.

But in the process of going from here to there, we have to realize that the reason why the corporations are so successful and have such a strong stranglehold on all of humanity is because of their systems, their structures and their control mechanisms.

So what we are doing, we’re using the same kind of systems and structures and control mechanisms so that we can create success.

But these structure systems and control mechanisms are controlled and managed by the people of the community. They are the owners of these systems.

It just helps them to navigate the treacherous seas and oceans of corruption, and theft and deceit, and so forth so that it provides our blockchain and our online platform.

One Small Town (OST) Token & Blockchain Platform — An Alternative Exchange System

The One Small Town platform and blockchain provides a secure environment for investors to know — if they invest into a brewery or growing food or medicinal plants or whatever else it is — that they’re investing into our small town.

They can follow their investment. They know exactly how the money is being used, that it’s going where it’s intended to go.

That all the members from our community — that are 60% or 90% shareholders in some cases of all the businesses — that they see, exactly how much profit we’ve made in each and every business and how many dividends are going to be distributed every month to all our members.

Everything is completely transparent in every town and every One Small Town initiative and community. And this is why we have to put these structures into place.

This, however, has caused a little concern with some of the slightly more “spiritual” — and I use the word with love — some more sort of hippie-minded members, right.

They go ‘Wow, you guys are behaving just like the corporates now. You know, like, wow, man, I really don’t like the way you’re doing this. You’re just acting just like the corporates.’

And the answer is yes, we are. For your own safety. Because if we don’t do this, everyone’s gonna rip you off, dude. And everyone’s gonna run away with all your hard work and you’re gonna have nothing to show for it.

And this is why all the hippie colonies of the past, and all the intentional communities of the past have failed, for this very simple reason.

And to just to add one final thing before I hand over to you: to do this, we’ve created what our what we call the One Small Town platform and blockchain. And that then also, about just more than a year ago, spawned out of the blue, the most exciting opportunity that we realized — is that because we have this as a membership. One Small Town has a voluntary membership that people join for free. You don’t have to pay an entrance membership fee or nothing. You just join for free. Go online, sign up as a member. You instantly become a member and you open your digital wallet.

On the Infinity Token & Contribution of Three Hours a Week

So what we’ve created is an Infinity token. Which is really the token. (Excuse my noisy Rife machine right here that’s just finished treating my feet.)

So what we’ve suddenly had an epiphany is that, instead of using —

Before I go there, I need to say that the only thing that One Small Town members have to do is that, when when you become a member, you’ve pledged to contribute three hours a week towards your businesses, towards your community. Three hours a week. It’s all it takes, right?

People that know what I’m talking about will understand. That turns our community into an incredibly powerful labor force. If you have a town of 10,000 people, suddenly you have 30,000 hours of free labor a week. Because we contribute our time voluntarily towards our own businesses, towards fixing our town.

Now, the difference between our 30,000 hours of labor a week and a large corporation. You know how much a large corporation would pay for 30,000 hours of labor. It’s very simple to do the calculation. That’s what they can’t afford. And yet we can afford it, and we do it with love and willingly for free.

And this is why a small town of 10,000 people, that every member just contributes three hours a week, suddenly becomes a fierce competitor to any global-multinational corporation.

Immediately and instantly. We can grow anything, build anything, manufacture anything, distribute anything. Because we choose to do it together, and we are the owners of these businesses. It’s a very powerful position to be in.

And to manage all of this, we’ve had to create the system that is foolproof and cannot be cheated, etc.

So in the process we had to find a way of — how do we know when somebody arrives to do their three hours in one of our businesses or, you know or cutting the grass in the park or helping the orphans, or delivering food to the elderly, or whatever it is that we do (we’re gonna do all kinds of things in our community).

And that certainly presented us with an incredible opportunity. Instead of just using a punch card system — you know the old punch card system that you clock into your job and clock out — suddenly we use technology with QR code readers. And we created what is known as the Infinity Token, which is a membership-asset-backed-NFT token which is created every time one of our members contributes three hours towards one of our businesses or community.

So suddenly we’re now also sitting with the fact that all our members, the moment they contribute their 3-hours a week, over and above the dividends that we distribute to ourselves from the profits of our businesses, and the food and everything that we grow, that we distribute to ourselves every month.

We also reward ourselves with our own Infinity tokens that are growing in value at a rapid rate, because it’s the only truly asset-backed-NFT community token that’s backed by true and real human sweat equity.

And the more members we have around the world contributing three hours a week towards their businesses, the more the value of the Infinity token grows.

And to finish this little ranting monologue is — to utilize these Infinity tokens, we’ve created what we call the One Small Town digital wallet that every member instantly gets in your account. When you open your account online, you get your digital wallet and you start collecting your Infinity tokens every time you contributes three hours towards the One Small Town initiative.

And you can send those tokens from your digital wallet instantly for free to any other member around the world. As long as they’re member, you can send it to them via their e-mail (boom) and I send it from me to your digital wallet instantly, outside of any banking system, outside of anybody’s prying eyes. And you and I can exchange anything we want by exchanging these tokens.

So we’ve created an alternative currency system, if you can call it. An alternative exchange system. It exists. It’s real and everyone, everywhere in the world can use it right now.

00:25:57

Dexter Ryneveldt Questions the Financial Reality & Implications

Dexter:

I’m actually very, very impressed what you have said in the synopsis that you have given, Michael, as to what is the basis for you guys working and working towards, like you say, Utopia, the One Small Town initiative.

One of the things that I just want to find out from you. I know here in South Africa, one of the big things within the communities we are talking about, and you have mentioned cooperative units.

So what I want to find out from you, and in particular when it comes to the financial implications and things.

I want to find out, when we talk about cooperative units, organizations that are the One Small Town initiative is actually driving.

Is it actually registered with the South African Reserve Bank or are you actually trying to keep it not connected to any system here in South Africa?

00:27:01

The Financial Organization of OST – 17 Years in the Making

Michael:

Yeah, no, it is a completely independent system. The One Small Town company is registered as a nonprofit company.

The way we operate right now is that every One Small Town initiative is actually registered as a pool under the One Small Town nonprofit company. So they operate as a pool. So they’re also then seen as a nonprofit company.

Remember that we’re not providing work. We’re not creating work, so we don’t fall under the labour law. Because everybody that contributes their three hours a week is a co-owner of the business.

So they’re just working in their own business. So it’s not a job.

So we’ve eliminated all these potential problems with government and labour and any of that.

So yeah, this is why it’s taken 17 years to get to this point. It didn’t happen overnight. Slowly but surely, we found the problems and the solutions were presented to us.

One Small Town Trading Platform About to Go Live

And now with the Infinity tokens, that has opened up a door, not only to reward ourselves with our own Infinity tokens and be able to exchange them amongst ourselves. And also sell them and trade them on our One Small Town trading platform, which is about about to go live probably about four weeks from now.

And again, this is a private trading platform. This is not trading on on any open cryptocurrency markets or any of that. You have to be a member of One Small Town.

In other words, the Infinity token cannot be crashed. It cannot devalue. No one can steal your tokens. You can’t lose them because it’s an NFT that can be traced.

And so it’s a very, very different system from any other cryptocurrency or NFT scenario. We operate in a way that we don’t fight the system. If they’re taxes to be paid, we’ll pay the taxes.

You know, so we don’t want to create any ripples. We don’t want to resist or fight anyone. We use the tools of enslavement as tools of liberation.

And one of those tools of liberation is finding the smartest tax advisers there are, so that we as a community, that very soon could be turning over millions and maybe billions of dollars or rands or euros per town —

(Please, remind me to come back to this where I can make such an outrageous statement.)

If we’re turning over billions of euros in our little town, we’re going to find the best bloody tax adviser.

Just like Bill Gates and these rich bastards. They pay zero tax because they have very smart people doing their tax for them.

00:29:43

Dexter:

So if I understand you correctly, when we talk about — when you talk about the Infinity token, the Infinity Token is basically based on each and every individual member of the One Small Town initiative, where they give three hours of their time, and there is then an investment. And then from that investment, that creates the value. And from that value, that can be an exchange globally.

That’s basically the foundation of this Infinity token.

00:30:17

On the Challenges Faced by OST Organizing Resources & Finances

Michael:

It is a foundation. And more and more people are getting excited about it.

It’s taken a little while for the crypto heads and the, you know, those kind of people that are so stuck in Bitcoin mind. It’s just, it’s sickening. But they’re starting to realize how faulty and how insane that world is. And how sane and safe our world is.

And that penny is starting to drop for people to say, wow, hold on, this is a far more safer environment. I invest in this. I contribute in this. And I’m gonna talk to you more about our additional investment tokens we’re about to launch related to the businesses and the profits of the businesses.

So this is an infinite potential for growth on every level you can image. And it’s a safe environment, completely safe.

Blockchain. Membership protected. Investor protected. Members protected. Everyone is protected. No one can ever run away with you. No one can collapse it. No one can collapse your investment. The stock markets can’t collapse it.

It is bulletproof, right? So it’s controlled by the people and the members.

Right now we can determine the value of the Infinity token. That’s how we actually launched the Infinity token. We launched it at $1.00.

Based on the value — the launch value was actually $40 and the reason we can say that is because the average three hours of labour — If you had to work in the United States or Europe or — and some of the Western countries — where you looked at all the different possible scenarios. So for a three-hour shift you would earn on average $40, U.S. dollars. For a three hour shift.

So that is in real life, real terms, the true value of the Infinity Token. It’s $40. Right? And we launched it at $1.00.

So at this stage, it is grossly undervalued. So anyone that buys the Infinity Token now is buying it at an incredibly discounted rate because it’s going up and up and up towards $40. Whether the people like it or not, that’s what the true value of it is.

And then it’ll just go higher and higher. And the reason it’s gonna go higher and higher is that because — there’s an algorithm. We created an algorithm. Our programmers created an algorithm to determine the value of the token.

So it’s not just me sitting here deciding what the value is. The algorithm is linked to the issuing of the tokens. And basically every time one of our members — every time a member joins and every time members contribute their three hours, the blockchain picks up on it and it increases the value of the token by my minute little fraction.

So if we have a few hundred members working and contributing, it goes up slowly. If we have a few thousand members, it goes up faster. Once we have a dozen thousand or 100,000 members, watch the value of the Infinity token go higher and higher. Very, very quickly and steadily.

And then finally the other true value of the token, which is really playing games with people’s minds is this one:

So imagine you now live in a small town situation where we’ve created really abundance and utopia for ourselves. We’re growing vast amounts of food. We’re keeping a portion of the food for ourselves. The rest of the food we sell, to export internationally. We bring the dividends back. We distribute our dividends.

We build laptops and fridges and bicycles and nail clippers. And bread and milk and cheese. And I mean everything you can imagine. Because that’s what we do, we choose to do it. It’s our decision. Right?

And now the more we grow and build and create, the more we’re gonna have every week and every month.

Where do we put it? We have to put it somewhere, right? So this suddenly gave birth to the One Small Town superstore, like a Walmart. So suddenly we open a superstore that belongs to the people, the community.

But because everything we put in there, we have manufactured, we have grown, and made the bread and milk and bicycles and laptops, whatever. Whatever goes into the One Small Town superstore is made by us. That means we can sell it for a much cheaper price than Walmart or anybody else.

You see the interesting situation that’s developing here. Right? So even the greedy, multinational retailers are gonna not be able to compete with our own retail store — that makes all our products and food available to everyone that wants to buy.

They come in there and they buy in fiat currency. They don’t buy it in tokens. They pay dollars or pounds or whatever. And this is where we get fiat currency and cash to still manage and meet the needs in a in a system.

So we are not jumping out of the system. We are still using, you know, profits in cash and euros and everything to help distribute to the people, so they can still live in this crazy world we find ourselves in.

But slowly, but surely, we’ll transition into a whole new world in which that money is no longer needed.

But, this is how it works. So the benefits to members of One Small Town, there are three benefits.

First one, you get tokens. Every time you can do about 3 hours, you get a token in your digital wallet. You can contribute up to three hours a day. So in one month you can earn 31 tokens. The maximum you can earn in a month — 31 tokens a month.

Or, minimum, to get your benefits, one token per week, right? So one three-hour shift a week. That’s a minimum you have to contribute to get the labor, the free labor force, that we know we can allocate people towards a number of businesses. So we know we’ve got the labor force to perform certain tasks.

And the second benefit we give to ourselves from the One Small Town is all the profits from all the businesses are pooled collectively and distributed evenly to all the members.

So you don’t have to work — Just because you worked in the bakery and you didn’t work in the in the stables doesn’t mean that you’re not going to get benefit from the stables. You get benefit from everything because you’ve contributed towards your businesses in your community.

So you’ve pooled — The One Small Town initiative is a is not a bartering trade, a one-to-one exchange. It is a one-to-many exchange.

I contribute towards the well-being of my community. So does everybody else. And therefore we share in everything that we create. And we distribute it evenly to all of us. That’s why it’s called contributionism.

So I benefit from everybody’s input and they benefit from my input and that’s why it’s such a perfect leveling of the playing fields.

So even if you’re a surgeon and your doing brain surgery for three hours, you’re still going to get one token. And if I’m cutting the the lawn or draining the sewage pipes in the hospital, I get the same token that you get as a surgeon, because if the sewage pipes aren’t cleaned, you ain’t doing any surgery. Right?

So this is the absolute leveling of the playing field. Everybody’s treated equally and their contribution is valued equally. And that’s what most people truly appreciate because now they feel appreciated for who they are and what they do, not diminished because they’re doing some measly work.

But the third thing — the benefits that we get — is at the end of each month —

So it’s the tokens, the dividends, the distribution of the profits and then the basket of goods. Every month at the end of the month, you go to the One Small Town superstore. And all the food that we’ve created, we keep keep a portion of everything that we do. Whether its laptops, we make a limited number of laptops to distribute to our members. The rest is sold. If it’s bread or cheese or milk or corn flour or whatever.

So you go to the One Small Town superstore. You put in your membership card. And it prints out a ticket and says this month you get a bag of this, you get a bicycle, you get nail clippers, you get a helmet or whatever it is that we created.

So you go there and get your basket of goods for free. The only thing you have to sacrifice is one Infinity token. That’s to show that you received your basket of goods.

Alright, now obviously every month we’re going to distribute food. Food is number one. So you’re always going to have food distributed to all our people. So they never, ever go hungry.

And there’ll be building materials. There’ll be bricks and cement and God knows what. Windows and doors and, you know. Who knows what we’re going to be manufacturing. It could be a car.

So what is the value of that one Infinity token that you’ve had to sacrifice to get your basket of goods?

The value of that token is the total value of the basket of goods that you just received. And the people will know this. My God, for one token he got all the stuff that doesn’t add to the value of the token on the algorithm. But in the minds of the people, the people know that that’s what the value of the token is.

So just to understand, we didn’t include the value of the basket of goods into the algorithm of the value of the token, because the moment we do that we breach the Securities and Exchange Act. So suddenly we’re dealing in Securities and Exchange and we can’t do that.

So I’m just telling you how complex this has been and how many different things we’ve had to think about not to break the law. And yet give the people as many benefits as they possibly can get. And make the Infinity token very, very lucrative around the world.

00:39:58

Reiner:

Emil, go ahead. You’ve been silent.

Emil:

Sometimes you should talk and sometimes you should just be quiet. And I think this is a time to be quiet, to be perfectly honest.

My role in this is to be Michael’s disciple in Sweden. I’m trying to, not trying, going to start One Small Town in Sweden. And I’m the ambassador for Sweden. That’s my role in this. I’m going to be on the ground, and, yeah, make sure that we get it all the way through. Make it happen.

OST Not Dependent on the System — Inside the System But Disconnected From It

Reiner:

So what I gather from this, Michael, is that the One Small Town idea can exist inside the system but disconnected from it. It has some connections, but it isn’t dependent on the system.

You’re totally self-sufficient if I understand you correctly. But you’re still complying with the rules and regulations of that, I believe, collapsing system so that through this transition period you can already build these One Small Towns.

And when the time comes and the system collapses, which it sure will, then you can do your own thing completely without being bound by any rules and regulations outside of the One Small Town ideas, right?

00:41:34

Changing the Way People Think:

Michael:

Yeah, that’s exactly it. And that’s how we call it One Small Town and not one small settlement. Because, you know, when people think that we’re, you know, we’re going out buying a piece of land and building houses. No, no, no, no, no. That’s a failed system. That doesn’t work.

There are very exclusive potential situations in which it can work, but it’s a huge nightmare.

Why should we start from scratch? We have hundreds of thousands of small towns and villages around the world. We don’t have to build anything from scratch.

Towns exist. They have everything. All the infrastructure. They have halls and factories and streets and sewage and electricity and farms and everything we need.

All we need to do is change the way the people think. And realize that if we just cooperate and collaborate, anything becomes possible. So I want to come back to the potential of the small towns.

If you look at any international corporation. The average annual turnover of a company that has 4,000 or more employees is $1 billion or more per annum.

Just let that sink in. I’d like your viewers to think about what I’m saying here.

So if you have an international company of 4,000 employees that work in a 9-to-5, with all the expenses that come with them and the offices, and all the crap and the corporate stuff, and et cetera. All the labor costs. Four thousand employees. Your average minimum turnover is $1 billion or more. Some of the companies I looked at it doing $16-$20 billion turnover per annum with four or five thousand employees.

Can you imagine what we can achieve with 10,000 members in a One Small Town situation where each one of our members contributes three hours a week? And some of them three hours a day.

Because now they’re not just employees at a company wasting time, wasting company resources. Taking this home. Taking that home, you know. Suddenly we have members of the community that are co-owners of that business, that are shareholders in that business, that depend on the profit of that business. That take that business and approach it very, very differently.

So when they go and contribute their three hours towards that business, they do it with a very different mindset.

One Small Town Businesses as Investment Opportunities

Suddenly, as an investor, if I invest into a business in a small town, I — the investor, by the way, can never own more than 30% of the business. That’s the maximum that we allow.

So the business plans are set up so that investors invest the funding capital and they retain 30% of the business. The 60% belongs to the community because the community does the work, the labor. And 10% is retained for the One Small Town management locally, nationally and internationally. Because, you know, that’s how we’re going to be able to have funds to keep running the different One Small Town offices.

There is no money coming into those offices other than the success of the businesses created by the small town businesses. So it’s the bottom up, not top down.

Well, it’s again an example how the people, the people power, create the success on every level.

So as an investor from outside, my investment, I go into partnership with an entire community. That means every member of that community is my partner. And wants my business to succeed as much as they want it to succeed, or as much as I want it to succeed, because they have a vested interest in the profits.

So this is a game changer on every possible level.

The other big thing that we’ve done, that we’re about to do, is to start issuing investor tokens, and this is a way to allow communities themselves to crowd fund their own businesses.

So every business plan — so this is how it works:

We get together. You launch One Small Town in your community. You become the ambassador. You start signing up members and every member that you sign up pushes the value of the Infinity token a little bit more. You start doing this.

You have a creative think tank with your members. What kind of businesses can we start? What kind of businesses can we start with very little money, if any? What kind of businesses can we do business plans for that we need, you know, maybe $10,000, $50,000, $100,000? And what kind of businesses cost us $5 million or $10 million? And what kind of businesses do we think we can start when it cost us $100 million or more? And start developing these business plans because we gotta think big.

How much food can we grow? How much land is available?

We have different models to go into partnerships with farmers and land owners and traditional leaders in the Americas and countries where you have traditional leaders that own vast amounts of land.

Where very lucrative and exciting partnerships for the land owners, for farmers, even municipalities and governments if they’re not using the land.

So we start coming up with ideas for the businesses. And then we start writing business plans for those businesses. Those business plans get loaded onto the One Small Town platform and they get connected to a project management system that gets connected to an accounting system. Just so that it’s online and all your accountants can use it. Plus it’s all free of charge. There’s no cost to any other One Small Town members.

And then the project management system is connected to the accounting system. And the accounting system then allocates the investment funds to that specific business on a monthly drawdown based on what the business plan requires.

So it is a completely transparent situation that everyone can see what’s going on. No one can steal the money and run away with it.

And to come back to the investment thing. (So, Emil, if you want to say anything, just raise your hand and I’ll let you chip in.)

But the key thing here is that every business plan will need the investment amount. So we want to allow our communities, or give the opportunity to the people in our communities, to become shareholders in their own businesses first. And not some outside rich people that always own the businesses in your town.

So every business that we start that lands up on the platform, we issue a token. If it’s, say, a dairy — we’re starting a dairy. So we issue 1,000,000 dairy tokens for the town of Nora.

Let’s use our example town in Sweden. We decide we’re gonna start a One Small Town dairy and we need to raise $2,000,000 to start that business. And run for two years until we become profitable.

We need to raise $2,000,000. So we issue 1,000,000 Nora dairy tokens at $2.00 each to raise $2,000,000.

So we’re never gonna release more or less than 1,000,000 tokens for any business, right? And the million tokens will then have a value based on how much we need to raise. So we’re going to issue 1,000,000 tokens at $2.00 each to fund the Nora dairy. And then we open that up to all our members in Nora to buy those tokens. So they become shareholders in that business. That funding is 30% of that business.

So I literally am buying a piece of 30% by the number of tokens that I’ve bought. And those tokens — now you’re benefiting in two ways. Now you earn a token and you’re getting annual dividends, profits, from that dairy. So you got two benefits here.

You’re not just a shareholder, you’re also a token holder. And that token might become a lot more valuable than the dividends from that dairy at some point in the future.

So you see what we’re doing here? We’re really, really using the tools of enslavement as tools of liberation on every possible level.

This is just explaining how we are about to fund some of the exciting new businesses. If we can’t raise the $2,000,000 for the dairy, then we open it up to the country. And hopefully we’ll raise it from the people in the rest of the country. If we can’t raise it there, then we open it up to the world. And this way we try and retain the investment from the people of the community first. Then the country. And then the rest of the world. To keep the money local.

So it’s not just ‘buy local’. Like a lot of towns and communities are going ‘buy local’, ‘buy local’. We’re doing a lot more than that.

We invest local, manufacture local, grow local, buy local, export local and bring in the profits into our community to benefit us locally.

00:50:49

How Will OST Protect Itself from Mr. Global?: “The system is rigged to always destroy humanity.”

Reiner:

You know, Dexter is not just a lawyer, he’s an economist too. So he’ll ask the questions that concern the economics or the money, the monetary system.

I have one question in particular.

It is almost certain that the other side — Mr. Global, that world which is about to collapse, but it’s still there — that they’re going to try and do everything in their power to stop this from evolving. Infiltrate. Invent all kinds of legal or whatever rules.

How are you going to protect yourselves against that?

Michael:

Yeah, it’s a very important question. And this is why I made it very clear right up front — is that we don’t fight the system. Because the moment we start fighting the system, we’re gonna lose.

People need to understand this. You cannot beat the system. The system is rigged to always destroy humanity, so we can’t fight them.

So we are playing by their rules. We’re using their tools. We’re using their money. We’re using the banks. We’re using the legal systems, using everything that they’ve created to enslave us. But we’re using that to now benefit us and help us.

That’s why I call it — We’re using the tools of enslavement as tools of liberation.

And in every small town —

I jumped — I actually digressed a little bit earlier when I spoke about what is the potential of the profits being made in a small town.

So right now our objective is that any town of 10,000 people or more should be turning over — through the businesses that they start — should be turning over $1 billion, a minimum $1 billion per annum.

If you’re not doing that, then you’re doing something wrong.

It’s not going to happen overnight, but that’s our goal. That’s our objective. That’s where we’re heading.

And you know, money talks, bullshit walks. Unfortunately, that’s the world we live in.

And the stronger our communities become financially, the more difficult it is to knock them over or to undermine them. So every One Small Town community needs to become as financially strong as quickly as possible. Because then it’s very difficult to infiltrate, to overturn, to undermine, because that financial strength in fiat currency becomes the strength of that community — to stand united and protect that wealth that they’ve created for themselves while they’ve got this whole other wealth behind them.

There’s infinite supply of food and technology. And I’m not even going to talk about the other technology, but just to let you know that we have all the technology you can imagine that will be implemented in these small towns.

I’ll let your imagination run wild. I’m not even going to mention the technology, because that gets dangerous.

Reiner:

Well, I would think, Michael, that as I am absolutely convinced that all the creative people with all the intuition, and all that what makes us human, are on our side of the fence, they will be attracted to this.

And therefore there will be competition between the One Small Town concept and the other side. But they can’t win.

I mean, they’re collapsing anyhow. But if this kind of a competition sets in, there’s no one there to support their ideas and their systems because they don’t have any ideas. All the people with the ideas are going to be on our side of the fence.

So it does look very, very promising.

I’ll have to look into this in much more detail, of course, and I will, but that’s exactly what we’ve been talking about for at least three years.

You’ve been dealing with this for much longer. But many people who have only woken up through this wake-up call — which corona is, as far as I’m concerned — they will, all of them, have understood that the system will not survive.

And we have to get out from under it, so to speak, and we have to create our own. And this sounds extremely promising.

What do you think, Dexter, as an economist?

00:55:07

On the Importance of Decentralization & Safeguards Against Future Centralization

Dexter:

I completely agree with you, Reiner. One of the words that basically comes to mind is decentralization.

Based on what you have said, Michael, I want to find out how are you going to ensure that your initiative is not gonna get to a point where everything is centralized.

Because that’s one of the biggest obstacles that humanity is actually faced with, especially when one has regard to huge, big corporate companies. Their main goal, and that’s basically for the elite, is to say we have to centralize because when we centralized we can then control.

So from what you’ve said, you confirmed that power, authority, sovereignty is basically given back to the people.

So then the big question is how are you going to ensure at all times that there is not going to be a point where one will actually have to deal with a centralization issue itself?

00:56:16

Michael:

A very important question, Dexter. And this is why it’s taken so long to develop the system and learn from our experiences and answer questions like this.

You know, I have — since 2005 I have done lectures in more than 35 countries, probably in more than 500 cities of the world.

I’ve done evening lectures, one-day workshops, weekend workshops and week-long workshops on the One Small Town. And so you can imagine how many questions I’ve faced over the years.

And I can tell you there has never, ever, ever been a time that, within the group of people participating in the One Small Town workshop, that we did not solve the problem that was brought up by the people in that meeting, in that workshop.

So this is the most exciting thing that I can share with you. So think about this.

Decentralization is really — this is the foundation of One Small Town, where every community is its own master. But we’ve created the platform and the blockchain through which all these communities are interconnected. That if that community in Cape Town suddenly needs — they realize that we haven’t grown enough apples for next season, then the system is used to put up there ‘we’re going to be short 200,000 apples’. And some other One Small Town up in Caribou or whatever is gonna say, ‘hey, we’ve created too many apples’. And they put it up there. So it becomes an exchange mechanism between the small towns.

And that exchange mechanism becomes free because this is part of the ethos of the One Small Town initiative.

Not only that, but one of the most exciting and attractive attributes of this, or benefits, is that if you’re a member of One Small Town in Germany, right, and you decide you want to come visit your cousin in Cape Town or outside of Cape Town somewhere for a few months, you arrive there and you go to the town and it happens to be a One Small Town. So you arrive at the One Small Town office. You give them your membership card. They scan it and they know exactly what you have contributed and what value you have presented to your small town in Germany, where your skills and abilities are. If you’re a master carpenter that you are training others, you know young students, to become carpenters, or you’re a master cake maker or an engineer or whatever.

They know exactly who you are and what you can contribute to their small town outside of Cape Town. And they say, ‘hi, welcome, Michael. Welcome to our town’. And they log you on to the system as a member of that specific town, and immediately, based on your experience, the blockchain then allocates you to where you are most needed with your special skills, abilities and talents.

And you start that week. You get a message on your phone, saying please, you know, report here for three hours. Or you can then tell them I’d love to teach art. Or I’d love to teach this. And then they’ll log you in as a teacher that’s going to be teaching this. And for that you get your tokens. And at the end of the month you go to the One Small Town superstore, get your food and everything else that you get in your basket and you get a portion of all the profits, dividends, from all the businesses — profits that we’ve created in our businesses.

So you can literally move to another town anywhere in the world slot into that community and be able to not just survive, but live very, very well, have everything you need and be respected and honored within that community from the moment you arrive because the people know what you’re contributing to their community.

So it is a completely decentralized system. No one can ever centralize this. It’s impossible.

01:00:11

On the Threat of Track & Trace Technology

Reiner:

What about the dangers of tracking and tracing with this system?

Michael:

Well, that’s a very important question. And those dangers will always be there.

And my answer to questions like this is, the same technology that is used to track and trace people is available to neutralize the tracking and tracing technology.

And we know those kind of people. We have the people that can cure disease. We have the people that know how to generate electricity.

They are many. They are all on our side.

They all participating in larger and larger numbers, but that’ll come out of the woodwork as this thing progresses.

And that includes telecommunication. It includes, you know, frequencies. It includes broadcasting. It includes everything.

The same people that work for these big telecommunication companies are just ordinary people that may have started out in a small town somewhere. And they are thousands and thousands and thousands of very smart people that do not like the system.

And the moment they have an opportunity to do something good for a small community that they want to be part of, guess what they’re going to choose.

Dexter:

Then I want to find out, Michael, when it comes to the value of the Infinity token, I’ve heard you actually say it can actually be pegged to the dollar. And we know — it’s common knowledge — the dollar, when we talk about the dollar, we talk about the fiat currency.

And I think that’s one of the major concerns for humanity as well.

Is it going to be possible at some point that your Infinity token can actually be pegged to any mineral commodity like gold, silver, diamonds, etc.?

Michael:

Yes, it is. The only reason we pegged it to the dollar is just to give people the perception of the value.

The token is infinitely powerful because somebody just worked for three hours. So, you know, how much value is somebody’s three hours worth? And imagine a million people around the world working three hours a week?

Imagine 20 million or 100 million people working three hours a week. By the time we get to that level, the value of the token becomes irrelevant really, quite frankly.

You see, so what we’re doing is transitioning from this system, the current system, into a new system. And with that transitioning, using the current banking systems and the ratios and rationale that people can relate to.

But as it grows and gets bigger and bigger, people pay less and less attention to the value of the token, because they’ll be exchanging the token between themselves.

Out of sight. Out of mind. No one can interfere with how many tokens I send you. It’s free. It’s instant.

I send it from my wallet to your wallet. You can give me your house. You can sell me your house. I’ll send you 1,000 tokens and you transfer the house to my name, you know. So people will be doing all kinds of trades.

But for me, the most important part is for the people at the lowest level, the people that have nothing. And you know, South Africa. This is a very important part for South Africa.

So my heart always looks at how do we handle third world situations or impoverished countries where people have nothing. They don’t have jobs. Most of our towns have 60-70-80% unemployment.

You know, the people in Europe can’t imagine that kind of situation. So it’s a very different situation.

So we start looking at community kitchens. Something as simple as a finding a hall where a church has already got a kitchen. The church becomes a member of the One Small Town community. Now when they cook food for the people, they’re actually getting an Infinity token. They’re a member of One Small Town.

When we start making dividends from our businesses, each one of those church members starts to receive dividends and Infinity tokens and everything else.

So it brings the community together. The food community kitchen becomes the heart of the community. Where those that have nothing — they wake up in the morning with nothing — they at least now have somewhere to go.

They can join and go and clean the streets. Or help in this business or that business. And at the end of a three hour shift they get their token and they go to the community kitchen and get a nice plate of food.

So that’s a life changer for people in those kind of situations. You know, first world countries don’t understand that.

We understand that very, very clearly here. And in Brazil and India and other countries like that, you know.

So I’m very, very passionate about those kind of things — that foundational, beautiful structure that really helps the people on the ground in the One Small Town initiative.

Dexter:

Can you mentioned just a few examples here in South Africa, whose got the Small Town initiatives, Michael?

Michael:

Yes. So we started out in Kuruman. And we got very excited in Kuruman, because we had the mayor there that really liked the idea. And we all believe that it was gonna work because the mayor and the council is going to help promote it to the people and so forth.

Well, you know, unfortunately — and I don’t want to speak ill of the mayor or anyone there, because there are some wonderful people there, and they truly — their heart was in it.

Unfortunately the political system prevented it from happening. You know, meeting after meeting, council meeting after council meeting, resolution after resolution. And six months later, nothing is happening. And that was our baptism by fire — to learn that we cannot work with councils. We cannot work with politicians. We cannot work with mayors.

And there was just a reminder of why I got out of politics, why the Ubuntu movement and the One Small Town initiative got out of politics.

This was just a quick reminder.

So now we have a number of small towns that are brewing, that are buzzing. But ambassadors are still learning. And they’re trying to figure out how to how to get this off the ground. And this is brand new.

Remember, we’re building this from the ground up. You know this isn’t — we’re creating something that’s never been done before. So some some ambassadors are really a lot more active. Or they see it clearly or they have more experience.

So in Barrydale, Western Cape, that’s our newest One Small Town. And I expect that’s going to be the town that’s really going to rock and roll, and show and lead by example.

We’re doing so many exciting things in Barrydale already. And our ambassador there, Graham Abbott, is just an incredible guy — an incredibly talented and very, very experienced entrepreneur, self-driven guy.

And these are the kind of ambassadors that we need — people that are self driven, that have got diverse experience and all kinds of businesses and activities. How do you start things up? How to find solutions for problems that seem insurmountable? These are the kind of people we need as ambassadors because they’re the guys are going to start — the guys and gals — they’re going to start this thing up right.

Reiner:

I think that’s what it really — it is not always the leaders, the so-called leaders of a community you need to talk to.

But if it’s a really, a real grassroots movement, you have to talk to the people themselves.

We just realized that in New Zealand. You have to talk to the Hapu, the people themselves. Some of the leaders have sold out to the government, to the corporate government, so that’s why you need to get the hearts and minds of the people themselves.

I think that’ll make all the difference.

01:07:46

Examples of Current One Small Town Initiatives

Michael:

Yeah, yeah, absolutely, right. We’ve learned the same. Exactly the same here.

So you know, every traditional leader in South Africa that we talked to just loves it. They they love it, they want it. They’re offering us land.

So in terms of land, especially in the areas that there’s loads of land available among the traditional leaders, we have a lot of land that we can go grow things.

So yeah, just to give you an example in Lebanon. By the way, Lebanon is by far the most the biggest success we have with One Small Town. Our ambassador there, Fayez Mu*** [spelling unknown], in the last nine months has performed miracles.

It’s truly spectacular what has happened. They have started the One Small Town Art Gallery. They’ve got lands that they’ve started to plant. All kinds of medicinal plants, including oregano, to extract oregano oil for medicinal purposes. It’s a very high profit yielding business.

They’ve they’ve got lots of land allocated to them, going into partnership with farmers to grow all kinds of other medicinal plants, medicinal honey. Beekeeping. All the products also made from from beekeeping. All health products and shampoos and soaps, et cetera.

They’ve got primary water in a very, very deep well that the water is absolutely beautiful and healthy. That’s been tested. That they are about to start bottling. As primary, healing water for bottling and export as a One Small Town product from Ras el-Metn, Lebanon. Like Fiji Water, you can buy everywhere in the world. Well, very soon you’ll be able to buy Ras el-Metn primary water.

They’ve started the art gallery, which is, and I’d love to talk to you about the art gallery, which — we’re changing the rules of selling art around the world completely. Which is one of my pet projects because I’m an artist at heart as well.

And the other big thing that we’re launching in Lebanon, in Ras el-Metn, is our first health and wellness center. A five-story building with some of the latest alternative healing modalities. Where 40 of the top doctors in Lebanon have have volunteered 30% of their time to come and help and work in this health and wellness center — and only take a small portion — only take a 30% cut of what they do for that health and wellness center.

This is unheard of, so we are opening the hearts and minds of medical professionals who — many of whom are just, you know, money driven and success driven.

We’re now finding those healers and health industry professionals that want to do good, that want to help people, that want to heal people. And this is going to be our first beautiful example of a health and wellness center.

We’re about to launch the health token. I think we’re gonna be launching 1,000,000 tokens for $5 because we need to raise $5,000,000. And again, we start locally and then go outwards and raise that $5 million for 30% of that of that investment.

And the business plan for that is mind blowing. It’s absolutely mind blowing. It’s incredibly detailed and the most exciting part of it is that it actually shows a profit of around $7 to $8 million just in the first year after launching. No, no, it’s crazy. It’s crazy.

So now that business plan has become a model for a health and wellness center for every other country, every other small town with with slight, obviously, adaptations for the new specific environment.

But now we have — this is how it’s going to happen. Every time we launch a new business plan for a certain situation, that business plan becomes the property of One Small Town members all over the world. They can take it and use it for their community to launch that business in their community, raise funds on an adapted version of that business plan for their community.

It could be a brewery, it could be a cement factory. It could be built making cornflakes. It could be whatever you can image.

Reiner:

So it’s the exchange of the best ideas then.

Michael:

Yeah, exactly. Exactly. Yeah.

Dexter:

Michael, excuse me. You’ve been talking about the Infinite token. And I’m thinking do you have an app?

Michael:

Yes, it’s not an app within the One Small Town website, One Small Town platform. It’s a secure blockchain platform environment, so it’s like an app within that.

In fact, I think, if I’m right we’re launching the digital wallet. It was either launched today or tomorrow, in the next day or two we’re launching the One Small Town digital wallet, which means that any member, anywhere in the world, if you’ve got Infinity tokens in there, you can send them free of charge, out of sight or mind of any bank or government, to anyone you want in the world, as long as they are a One Small Town member. It’s instant. And it’s for free (boom).

Let me tell you, I’ve seen this happen. The excitement that you experience and the joy when you see that happen, when somebody sits next to you, they say I’m going to send you Infinity token now. And they just click (boom) and it appears in your wallet. You go, ‘oh, my God’.

You just realized how powerful that is. You just realized that we have created an alternative trading system. An alternative exchange system.

Should the global banks collapse tomorrow, we already have a solution for it. We don’t have to build anything.

It exists, it’s ready. And anyone in the world can use it immediately. And it’s free.

01:13:58

On Using the Same Technology the Globalists Use to Control Us, to Liberate Us

Reiner:

So you’re using as you’re saying the tools of enslavement as tools of liberation. You’re using all of the tech, all of the available technology. But instead of what they’re doing — they’re using it to control us — you’re using it to liberate us.

That’s the ultimate goal of this. You’re simply making use —

Everything has two sides as we all know. You can use energy for good and for bad purposes.

So what you’re doing is you’re using all of the technology that they’re using for bad purposes for good purposes.

It’s a very simple approach, but it makes a lot of sense. And if you can protect —

Michael:

That’s exactly what it is.

What I need to add — it’s very important that you brought us back to that thought — is because I’ve noticed that some of our members, and even sometimes people that want to become ambassadors —

(And historically some of our ambassadors that weren’t quite ready to take on the role, maybe because we also don’t know how to interview ambassadors. How do you know whether it’s going to be a good ambassador or a bad ambassador? We don’t know. We take a chance with everyone we bring on board. We’re building this from the ground up.)

So I’ve also noticed that many of our members — well not many — some of our members that are still little hippie-minded, little freedom-bunny-minded, and, you know I love spirituality — I’m the most spiritual bunny in the world if I want to be — but at the same time, I realize that that’s not going to put bread on the table. I need to go and plant the food, to make create the food.

So we’ve had to implement this very strict control mechanism. The way that corporations control their systems ,so no one can steal from them.

We’ve had to set this in motion and set this up for our members to use, so that they can’t get ripped off. No one can run off with their ideas or their money or their businesses.

And sometimes some of our slightly, you know, airy-fairy members don’t yet, don’t quite get it. They think that we now want to become draconian corporations that want to control everything.

No, not at all. We’re not controlling anything. We’re just giving you the platform to use for your own control and protection.

But if you want to be part of One Small Town, you have to be on the platform. Otherwise you can’t be part of One Small Town.

Otherwise, how will the system know whether your members have done work for three hours somewhere in a Siberian village? You’re out there in the Amazon jungle or in the bloody Outback in Australia. How will we know if somebody’s going to contribute their three hours?

So, just like you said. We’ve built this very powerful system, this tool, this monster that is aiding and helping the people to be able to connect and share. And no one can rip them off and no one can steal anything that they’ve created.

So it’s there for the benefit of the community, not for my benefit. Believe me, I’ve sacrificed everything I have to get to this stage. And when I say everything I have, I’m not kidding.

Reiner:

It sounds and looks great.

I will, and Dexter too, we will take a very close look so that we will be able to connect you with all the right people. Because
I think that’s ultimately what it takes.

This idea, if it is going to fly worldwide, needs a lot of supporters from our side of the fence.

The other side, we don’t care about, but from our side of the fence. And they have to be absolutely — they have to be convinced that it works.

And they have to be — I’m sure it work — but they also have to be convinced that it’s safe from infiltration and control.

01:17:53

An Idea Whose Time Has Come

Michael:

Yeah, it’s very important. Thank you for saying that, Reiner.

And it’s people like you — and your influence is vast globally, obviously. Especially during this COVID era, you’ve become a a global celebrity on the social media.

So I’m very grateful that you took this interview or this conversation with us. With me and with Emil.

Thank you, Dexter, for participating. So you’re an absolute joy. I didn’t even realize that you were going to join us from South Africa. So it makes my makes my heart jump even more with joy. So it’s wonderful.

And this is working. It’s an idea whose time has come. It’s taken 17 years to get here.

But watch this space. It’s growing exponentially. And a year from now, who knows where we’re going to be.

We might have 100,000 towns signing up to the One Small Town initiative on the platform. Because the intention is that it becomes a completely automated process that we don’t have to intervene. And that’s why we’re working very, very hard to make sure that everything works — the platform, the blockchain, works.

Because once people want to sign up, it’s gotta be smooth. We can’t have gremlins in there.

Taking a Closer Look at the Technology & the Possibility of Surveillance

Reiner:

Yes, I can see that and the one thing that most people, when it comes to setting up your own self-sufficient systems, have been worried the most about is what do we do about the monetary system.

What about the —

We don’t want to be controlled by CBDC. We want to be absolutely free and not controlled by anyone.

Now, the tools you’re using can be used for two purposes. As I said before, for a good purpose and for a bad purpose.

And from what it sounds like — we’ll have to take a much closer look — but from what it sounds like you’re using it for a really good purpose. So that people will not have to be afraid that somebody is watching over their shoulder and trying to see what they’re doing 24/7.

That’s the one big worry that most people have. So we’ll have to convince them that there is no risk, no danger of this happening in this system.

Otherwise, I applaud you. This is great.

This is probably exactly what everyone’s been looking for from our side of the fence.

Emil:

If I can put in a word with that whole fear. When you make everything local, that fear disappears.

But what happens if someone wants to take control of you when your local environment is running and functioning?

They can’t do it so. So the solution is simple.

Michael:

Yeah, that’s a very important point to bring up.

Yeah, Reiner, thank you so much for your interest.

Thank you, Dexter.

If if you want to discuss anything at any stage, if you want to jump on a zoom call or quiz me on anything, please feel free to do so.

We’re building this up and we do need the influence of people like you, and all the others that you have in your pool of influence.

Let’s get this growing. Remember, this is free.

No one is forced to join One Small Town. And the beautiful thing is that you don’t have to jump off the cliff into uncharted waters to try something new.

No, nobody has to leave their job. Nobody has to stop doing what they’re doing. All they have to do is become a member and contribute three hours a week. That’s all it takes.

Getting More People on Board

Reiner:

It sounds so fantastic, but it also feels good.

So, we’ll have a follow up meeting on this, because we’re gonna have to get some more people on board. Some more people who really, really will be able to help set this up.

I know there are a lot of people out there who’ve been kind of waiting at the sidelines to see if there’s something coming up where they can chip in. A lot of very well-intentioned and very smart people.

But I think maybe this is it.

Michael:

Those are the kind of people that I know you have, obviously, a good reach to. But even more so, I hope that this message also reaches the conscious millionaires and billionaires out there, who know that the investment markets are rotten to the core, that are looking for new conscious, humanitarian investments with consequence and infinite potential for growth.

One Small Town is exactly that. You’re investing into communities, entire communities, that you’re going to help turn upside down and turn into to hubs of creative creation, creative new businesses, food production, health and Wellness, everything you imagine as a powerful individual, powerful financial support. You can take a small town and completely turn it upside down.

From the small towns around the world that are collapsing at an increasingly rapid pace, we can turn that around. And we just need the conscious millionaires and billionaires to realize that One Small Town is that new opportunity that they never imagined would present itself.

Reiner:

The stock market is crashing anyway.

Dexter:

Thank you so much, Michael. I really love what you have presented.

I think for me, one of the core message is that you are basically, through your initiative, you are putting power back into the hands of the individual, back into the hands of the communities.

And I think it is going to be a great success, especially when actually talking from a South African developing country’s point of view. When you look at communities, communities are basically the backbone of any society.

So you cannot even start talking about the society if you don’t look after the best interest of communities.

And as far as what I can see, and to what you have presented, I don’t have any doubt in my mind that this is something that is going to be successful.

This is something that is going to ensure that humanity can continue to thrive for generations to come.

So I wish you all the best, and I am definitely going to take up your offer. I will get your contact details. I’ll actually visit your website as well, get in touch with you. And I would love to actually have another zoom meeting with you.

Thank you so much, Michael. Great success.

Michael:

Thank you, Dexter.

Reiner:

I have nothing to add to that. Now that Dexter has said it, I can only confirm it.

Yeah, this sounds like the best idea. This is the way out of this collapsing system. That’s it.

Michael:

Well, I’d like to thank you, gentlemen.

Emil, thank you for setting it up.

Dexter, thank you for joining us from Cape Town, I believe.

And Reiner, it’s a great honor and pleasure to meet you. I’ve followed your work especially throughout this COVID period, this, this plandemic. And I’m deeply grateful for this meeting.

And I want to end on this note.

If it’s not good for everyone, it’s no good at all.

Reiner:

You’re right.

Thank you very much, Michael. It’s been an honor and a pleasure. Talk to you later.

Connect with One Small Town

Connect with Michael Tellinger

Connect with ICIC (International Crimes Investigative Committee

Info on Infinity Tokens

(If you have trouble finding a workable link to buy tokens, try here.
Use the menu on the left side to select ‘Buy Tokens’)

See Related:

One Small Town & the Restoration of Human Freedom: Michael Tellinger Interview With Jerm Warfare

Michael Tellinger: Money Was Created to Enslave Humanity

Reiner Fuellmich: On Standing With the Māori People of New Zealand Who Never Ceded Their Independence

Cover image credit: TheDigitalArtist

GM Golden Rice in the Philippines Stopped: The Deception of Development and the Politics of Progress

The Story of Golden Rice

Technology and Development

Catherine Austin Fitts With Greg Hunter: Insane vs Sane, Demonic vs Divine

GMO Bio-Imperialism

From Bird Flu to Climate Snakes

Climate-Smart Commodities – Planning the Economy through Subsidized Intervention

Culling The Herd – Regulatory Intervention in the Marketplace

Centralized Control of Processing/Production via Public-Private Partnership Agreements

The Rise of Authoritarianism and Economic Fascism – Control the Supply

What Happened to Bitcoin?

Bio-imperialism vs. Bio-diversity

Global Context: Seeds and GMOs

Imposition of GM corn in Mexico has global ramifications

Convergence: Interconnected strength, interconnected resistance

Significance: Food sovereignty as a driving force for political sovereignty

Biodiversity at all levels

The U.S. Is Running Parallel Governments. All U.S. Citizens Have Dual Citizenship & Are “Volunteered” as Property. How to Unvolunteer: “U.S. National / State Citizen Comprehensive Guide (Non Citizen National)”

Truth Comes to Light editor’s commentary:

Message from video creator as found below the original YouTube video.

Transcript prepared by Truth Comes to Light:

A Bridge in Baltimore: A Speculative Analysis

The Fury of Europe’s Farmers Shocks EU Technocrats

The Psychological Battle for Truth — and the Power of the Farmers’ Uprising

Decoding the “Legal” Word Spells That Trap Us Into a Lifetime of Slavery Within an Upside Down World: Brandon Joe Williams & Luke Storey on Escaping the Tax Slave Matrix

Texas Wild Fires and Directed Energy Weapons

United Nations designated Smart Cities and corresponding “wildfires”

Transcript:

The WHO and Phony International Law

German Truckers Team Up With Farmers to Raise Hell Over Disappearing Fuel Subsidies

There was disruption due to convoys of tractors in and around some cities, too. Production at a Volkswagen auto plant in Emden in northwestern Germany was stopped because access roads were blocked, preventing employees from getting to work, German news agency dpa reported.

Among demonstrations across the country, several hundred tractors and other vehicles gathered in front of the Brandenburg Gate in Berlin.

The protests are under scrutiny after a group of farmers on Thursday prevented Vice Chancellor Robert Habeck from disembarking a ferry in a small North Sea port as he returned from a personal trip to an offshore island. -AP

Catherine Austin Fitts on “The Great Taking” Financial Coup That Intends to Strip Us of All Assets

The Great Taking

A Financial Coup Is Underway

“My focus is hugely on remedies, not problems,” Austin Fitts says, “and when it comes to remedies, you want to make sure you sequence your remedies against the enemy’s various tactics. So, sequencing is very, very important when it comes to remedies.

The important thing to understand about the great taking is that the World Economic Forum has told you what they’re planning: It’s 2030 and you have no assets. So the question is, exactly how are they going to strip you of your assets?

You have to worry about your business and your local investments and then yes, you have to worry about your securities. David is focused on just securities, which is why we did this section called ‘The Great Taking’ that goes through everything.”

Top Three Priorities

“That’s where pushback is critical,” she says. “If they can get financial transaction control then they can take everything, and I mean, everything, including your children …

If you dive in and look at the terms and conditions that some of these payment gateways are asking for now … you’re giving them permission to go into your bank account and take everything. It’s frightening.

So, the No. 1 thing to remedy against is financial transaction control. If you go to Solari, we have something called a financial transaction freedom memo. Print it out and start looking at all the things you can do to protect yourself from somebody controlling your financial transactions.

If they get that, The Great Taking is on. They take everything — real estate, securities, everything. So first and foremost, don’t worry about your securities. Worry about your banking and your transactions.

The third Great Taking I’m concerned about is the real estate, because we see an extraordinary move being done to take control of the land, the real estate, including farmland, which is very much related to the food.

There are all sorts of games that can be played with the banking system to default people on their mortgages, and of course, interest rates and inflation are part and parcel of that.”

A System to Rob Us of Our Security Assets

But here’s what’s great about David’s research. No one goes through the bother of doing what they’ve done if there’s integrity in the system. I think David has proven, yet again, that the financial system is lacking integrity and is engineered to benefit a few at the expense of the many.

The other thing I thought was very good about his book was, he describes the game in terms of insiders and outsiders to the banking system through the Great Depression — how your bank could fold; you lose your deposits, but you’re still liable for your mortgage.

And of course, that’s how you get people’s real estate. You abrogate your income obligations to them, but then you hold them accountable for their debts.”

There’s No Safe Harbor for Anyone

Top Three Financial Drains

Three Basic Action Items

We need to tell people what’s going on and help them understand how serious this is, because it’s hard for many to fathom that somebody would want that kind of complete control. With AI and software, you can deliver that kind of complete control.

With a very short video, one minute or less, people get it. And that’s the point at which you can turn to your state legislators and your state banking association and say, ‘OK, what are you guys going to do to make sure I don’t end up like the Tennessee truckers?’

[Eventually], it’s going to be more important to be sovereign and free than to get another $2 billion in education — an education that requires you to teach your kids how to be sex slaves.

Why We Need Sovereign State Banks

A Building Wealth Reset

“During my litigation [against the government], I had many different attorneys, and they would surround me and say, ‘You have to do this, you have no choice,’” Austin Fitts says.

“And I would say ‘I refuse. I’m not going to do that.’ That’s a choice. And then, what would happen? Suddenly, an option would open up that wasn’t there before. In other words, my refusal to go down the pathway that I had no choice created a new choice.”

The Electronic Takeover of Every Asset on Earth, “The Great Taking,” and the Control of Humanity

“Banking was conceived in iniquity and born in sin… Bankers own the earth. Take it away from them, but leave them the power to create money and control credit, and with a flick of a pen they will create enough to buy it back.”

“Between the government which does evil and the people who accept it – there is a certain shameful solidarity.”

Reference links:

Intentional Destruction: First Covid, Now Comes “The Great Taking”

You Already Own Nothing

Centralization and Systemic Risk

To ‘Mutualise’ Losses

“Sudden and large IM hikes force deleveraging by derivative counterparties and can precipitate fire sales that lead to higher volatility and additional IM hikes in so-called margin spirals.”

We’ve already gotten a taste of what this can look like. Similar margin spirals “occurred in early 2020 (Covid-19) and 2022 (invasion of Ukraine), reflecting the risk-sensitive nature of IM models.”

Government Bonds as a source of trouble

Designed to fail

…to mutualise potential default losses in excess of IM, CCPs also require their members to contribute to a default fund (DF). As a result, CCPs are in command of large pools of liquid assets.

That “large pool of liquid assets” is the full universe of traded securities.

Whitney Webb: “They’ve Been Planning This Cyber Attack for Years”

Clayton Morris of Redacted interviews investigative journalist Whitney Webb

“Is the deep state mafia setting up a massive cyber attack false flag on the American people that will disrupt the 2024 election?

Well, it turns out that the United States intel agencies have been running tabletop exercises on this exact scenario. And now the Department of Homeland Security head, Mayorkas, says the greatest cyber threat to America is something called Killware.

So what’s really going on here? Are we being set up for a massive false flag?

And investigative journalist Whitney Webb has been writing about these cyber attack tabletop exercises for years. And she’s been exposing what they’ve been up to. And then this week, we had a crazy “cyber attack” that seemed to shut down half the internet this week. Banks. Rumble was down.

And investigative journalist Whitney Webb has been writing
about these cyber attack tabletop exercises for years. And she’s been exposing what they’ve been up to. And then this week, we had a crazy “cyber attack” that seemed to shut down half the internet this week. Banks. Rumble was down.